JP2020044441A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine having a receiving port capable of receiving a game ball can execute a first performance capable of changing a light emission mode of the receiving port on the basis of reception of the game ball in the receiving port and a second performance capable of preventing execution of the first performance and maintaining the light emission mode of the receiving port. The second performance allows execution of the first performance until the number of holding icons reaches a predetermined number. The second performance prevents execution of the first performance after the number of the holding icons reaches a predetermined number.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 191

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is awarded to a starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like can be performed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202930 JP-A-2006-198339 JP-A-2006-182376

  However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and has as its object to improve the interest of a game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section show the correspondence with the embodiment described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine having a receiving port capable of receiving a game ball,
A first effect of changing a light emission mode of the reception port based on that a game ball is received in the reception port;
A second effect capable of preventing the execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emission mode of the reception port.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example 2]
A gaming machine according to application example 1,
The second effect allows the execution of the first effect until the number of reserved icons reaches a predetermined number, while executing the first effect after the number of reserved icons reaches the predetermined number. Prevent
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example 3]
A gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
In the second effect, a specific holding icon set with a higher expected degree of winning as compared with the holding icon becomes the holding icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed to allow the first effect to be received. After changing the light emission mode of the entrance to a specific light emission mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the reception port is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 3,
The second effect allows the execution of the first effect when the on-hold icon is changed to the specific on-hold icon, and the first effect causes the light-emitting mode of the reception port to change to a specific light-emitting mode. After the change, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the reception port is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Application Example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 4,
The first effect can further output an allowable sound based on a game ball being received at the reception port,
The second effect further allows the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is allowed, and blocks the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an explanatory view showing the details of the second big winning device. It is an enlarged view of indicators. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. It is a 1st figure for demonstrating a hit type determination table. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating a hit type determination table. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern judgment table. It is a figure for explaining a normal symbol hit judgment table etc. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a figure for explaining a special winning opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. 9 is a flowchart of a main timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol hit determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a figure for explaining a setting table of a time saving counter. It is a 1st flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect ending process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect pattern determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table. It is a figure for explaining a time reduction production scenario decision table. It is a figure for explaining the concrete contents of a time reduction production scenario. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the expected production of V. It is an explanatory view exemplifying a winning game effect at the time of winning the special figure 2. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the fluctuation effect at the time of special figure 2 lottery. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the countdown effect. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated one production of crying. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the advance direction movement of the 1st movable part 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable part 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the combination effect of the 1st movable role object 14 and an image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotation operation | movement of the 1st movable role. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view illustrating a first light emitting mode of a first movable role object. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating a second light emitting mode of a first movable role object. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable part 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotation operation | movement of the 2nd movable role 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination effect of the 1st, 2nd movable role. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination effect of the 1st, 2nd movable role. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated fluctuation | variation timing change production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated symbol direction change production C. It is an explanatory view illustrating an example of the accessory design coordination effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the accessory design cooperation effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating an example of the accessory design coordination effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated specific image symbol cooperation production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated decorative pattern aspect change production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decoration design fluctuation area effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation promotion effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission notification effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission announcement production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated this omission announcement production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation part image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated appearance disappearance effect A of an effect button. It is the explanatory view which illustrated appearance disappearance production B of the production button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated appearance disappearance effect C of an effect button. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated winning information production A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a winning notification effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a winning notification effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outer appearance inside and outside effect A of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outline inside and outside effect B of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the outline inside and outside effect C of a three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect A of an effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect B of an effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the game ball image effect A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a game ball image effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a game ball image effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect A of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect B of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the specific end surface effect C of the three-dimensional image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated union effect A of a movable character. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the union effect B of a movable character. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated union effect C of a movable character. It is the figure which illustrated the 1st mode of the 1st movable object of other embodiments. It is a figure which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 1st movable role of other embodiments. It is the figure which illustrated the 3rd mode of the 1st movable role of other embodiments. It is the figure which illustrated the 4th mode of the 1st movable role of other embodiments. It is the figure which illustrated the suspended number interlocking image display effect A. It is the figure which illustrated the suspended number interlocking image display effect B. It is the figure which illustrated the suspended number interlocking image display effect C. It is the figure which illustrated the holding number interlocking image display effect D. It is the figure which illustrated retention number change interlocking production A. It is the figure which illustrated retention number change interlocking production B. It is the figure which illustrated the suspended number change interlocking production C. It is the figure which illustrated the suspension number change interlocking production D. It is the figure which illustrated holding icon movement change production A. It is the figure which illustrated reservation icon movement change production B. It is the figure which illustrated reservation icon movement change production C. It is the figure which illustrated holding icon movement change production D. It is the figure which illustrated the change middle next mode start display effect A. It is the figure which illustrated the change middle next mode start display effect B. It is the figure which illustrated the change middle next mode start display effect C. It is the figure which illustrated the change middle next mode start display effect D. It is the figure which illustrated predetermined image continuation display production A. It is the figure which illustrated predetermined image continuation display production B. It is the figure which illustrated predetermined image continuation display production C. It is the figure which illustrated predetermined image continuation display production D. It is the figure which illustrated background image change production A. It is the figure which illustrated background image change production B. It is the figure which illustrated background image change production C. It is the figure which illustrated background image change production D. It is the figure which illustrated image blurring effect A. It is the figure which illustrated image blurring effect B. It is the figure which illustrated image blurring effect C. It is the figure which illustrated image blur effect D. It is the figure which illustrated this omission information production A. It is the figure which illustrated this omission information production B. It is the figure which illustrated this omission information production C. It is the figure which illustrated this omission information production D. It is the figure which illustrated the decoration design display area effect A. It is the figure which illustrated the decoration design display area effect B. It is the figure which illustrated the decorative design display area effect C. It is the figure which illustrated the decoration design display area effect D. It is the figure which illustrated reservation corresponding image production A. It is the figure which illustrated reservation corresponding image production B. It is the figure which illustrated reservation corresponding image production C. It is the figure which illustrated reservation corresponding image production D. It is the figure which illustrated reservation image production A. It is the figure which illustrated reservation image production B. It is the figure which illustrated reservation image production C. It is the figure which illustrated reservation image production D. It is the figure which illustrated disappearance production A of the suspension icon concerned. It is the figure which illustrated disappearance production B of the suspension icon concerned. It is the figure which illustrated disappearance production C of the suspension icon concerned. It is the figure which illustrated disappearance production D of the suspension icon concerned. It is the figure which illustrated holding icon image display production A. It is the figure which illustrated reservation icon image display production B. It is the figure which illustrated holding icon image display production C. It is the figure which illustrated reservation icon image display production D. It is the figure which illustrated operation state suggestion effect A. It is the figure which illustrated operation state suggestion production B. It is the figure which illustrated operation state suggestion effect C. It is the figure which illustrated operation state suggestion effect D. It is the figure which illustrated operation image stock effect A. It is the figure which illustrated operation image stock production B. It is the figure which illustrated operation image stock effect C. It is the figure which illustrated operation image stock effect D. It is the figure which illustrated this omission notification possible production A. It is the figure which illustrated presentable announcement noticeable production B. It is the figure which illustrated this omission notification possible production C. It is the figure which illustrated presenting notice possible production D. It is the figure which illustrated specific target display production A. It is the figure which illustrated specific target display production B. It is the figure which illustrated specific object display production C. It is the figure which illustrated the specific target display effect D. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple-combined production effect A. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple-combined-effects production effect B. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple-combination effect C. It is the figure which illustrated the multiple-combination effect D. It is the figure which illustrated this omission announcement Aori production A. It is the figure which illustrated this omission announcement swing production B. It is the figure which illustrated this omission announcement swing production C. It is the figure which illustrated this omission announcement swing production D. It is the figure which illustrated character selection production A. It is the figure which illustrated character selection production B. It is the figure which illustrated character selection production C. It is the figure which illustrated character selection production D. It is the figure which illustrated starting opening light emission production A. It is the figure which illustrated starting opening light emission production B. It is the figure which illustrated starting opening light emission production C. It is the figure which illustrated starting opening light emission production D.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second big winning device 36. Hereinafter, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from a player facing the gaming machine 1. In addition, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a shooting operation of a player and, when the game ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is mounted inside the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at a lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to a rotation angle. The hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hit ball feeding tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball feeding tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by a player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit imitating a sword shape, and can be pushed downward by a player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. You. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform a sound effect during a game or the like.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and the like. , A fixed winning device (navel) 19, an ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, and a first big winning device (first attacker) ) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and an indicator 40.

  The game area 3 is an area in which game balls fired by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball fired by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is also provided inside each of the first panel movable body 14 and the second panel movable body 15, and the first panel movable body 14 and the second panel movable body 15 are provided. Is configured to be able to produce light emission in a specific mode.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The reservation images 9A and 9B are images representing reservation and are also referred to as reservation icons. The reservation digest image 9C is an image representing the reservation, and is also referred to as the reservation icon or the change icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol 8C is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol 8R is displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The fluctuation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the fluctuation display of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, according to a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (small jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  For example, when a jackpot is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a slot number such as “777”. In the case of a loss, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a break such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot / small lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. Note that the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling up and down or other modes. In addition, when a small hit is won, the effect design may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as “135”, or the effect design may be stopped and displayed at a random eye. What combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “effect effect of effect symbols” or simply “variable effect” and “variation display”. In addition, in the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the final stop (also referred to as a special symbol change period) is counted as one change effect (one cycle change effect). . Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the final stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol change effect. In the effect design fluctuation effect, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed in addition to the effect design. Further, the image display device 7 is capable of suggesting that the special symbol is changing, in addition to the effect symbol, and indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (a fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later, and displays a reserved image 9B according to the stored number of the second special figure reservations described later. And a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a described later and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b Can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) that are currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the reserved digestion image 9C, the first special figure reservation or the second special figure reservation is performed. Is digested (to be described later, “digestion of reserved special figure”) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, there are provided first panel movable members 14 (also referred to as first movable members 14) which are movable so-called gimmicks. The first movable role object 14 is configured such that two half-ring shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left and right direction. The first movable auditorium 14 is normally stationary at the retreat positions (FIG. 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and moves from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advancing) and can be stopped at the advancing position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members are united at the advanced position, the first movable member 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative portion, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

  On the upper side of the image display device 7, there is provided a second panel movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable role 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick. The second movable role object 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as “OARO” can move in the vertical direction. The second movable role 15 is normally stationary at the retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (enters) downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stop at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  A stage 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an entrance into which the game balls flow, and an exit from which the game balls flow, and causes the game balls flowing from the entrance to flow out of the exit to the stage unit 11.

  The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is disposed in front of the image display device 7, and an image displayed on the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on a main surface thereof by irradiating LED light from an end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in a plurality of types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

  The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (first starting winning port, first ball entry port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (small jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for obtaining a random number per special symbol, determining a big hit, and the like.

  The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball input port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger of the lottery of the second special symbol (small jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric chuck solenoid 24. The game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advanced state). The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state (retreat state). 2 It may be possible to enter the ball into the starting port 21.

  The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the left side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, Each is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. Passing of the game ball to the gates (the first gate 28 and the second gate 29) is a trigger of the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 usually triggers acquisition of a random number per symbol and determination of a hit.

  Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. It refers to a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit and whether or not it is a small hit by comparing with a value corresponding to “big hit” or “small hit”. The lottery results of the “big hits” and “small hits” are not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbols are fluctuated and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later. When a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (fixed display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbols is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is more effectively notified to the player by the symbol matching game.

  In addition, “lottery of ordinary symbols” means that when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined by a predetermined “hit” Is determined by comparing with a value corresponding to "". Regarding the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and the ordinary symbol display unit 42 described later displays the variation of the ordinary symbol. Is performed, and when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or turned off), and the lottery result is notified to the player.

  The first special winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is disposed below the first gate 28 in the game area 3 and includes a first special winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. I have. The first special winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening / closing member) 32 that allows or impedes the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33. When the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter.

  The second special winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed below the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3 and the second special winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 is set. Have. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (a second special winning opening opening / closing member, a movable member) 37 that inhibits or permits the reception of the game ball by a shutter-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second special winning opening solenoid 38. When the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter.

  The second big winning device 36 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a second large winning opening sensor. 35 a, a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game balls that have passed through the second special winning opening 35 can pass inside the second special winning device 36. . The second special winning opening sensor 35a is disposed upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects a winning of a game ball to the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is disposed in the V region 39, and detects the passage of a game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V region 70, and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball having passed through the second special winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates clockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball by V. The first state (rotating state) of distributing to the area 39 is obtained, and the second state (stop state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing a game ball passing through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) where game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, an advance state where game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state).

  FIG. 2A shows a state when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V-opening / closing member 71 enters a state (first state) in which the game ball is allowed to pass to the V region 39. When the V opening and closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then passes through the V region 39 (see FIG. 2A). A route). This route of the game ball is referred to as a “first route”. FIG. 2B shows a state where the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V-opening / closing member 71 is in a state (second state) in which the game ball is prevented from passing through to the V region 39. When the V opening / closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 35 passes through the second big winning opening sensor 35a and then rolls on the upper surface of the V opening / closing member 71 to turn the non-V It passes through the area 70 (route B in FIG. 2B). This route of the game ball is referred to as a “second route”. In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is an execution trigger of a jackpot game (second special game) described later. In other words, a jackpot winning / non-winning lottery is also performed depending on whether or not the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is successful. The jackpot won by the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol described above is also referred to as a “one-type jackpot”, and the jackpot selected by passing a game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as a “two-type jackpot”.

  Returning to FIG. 1, two normal winning ports 27 are provided below the game area 3. The number of the normal winning ports 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided below the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. The details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called “left hit”. On the other hand, the method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim at passing through the second gate 29 and winning at the first starting port 20 by left-handing. On the other hand, it is configured so that the player can aim at the right gate to pass to the first gate 28, and to win the second starting opening 21, the first winning opening 30, and the second winning opening 35.

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol reservation indicator 43a, and a second special symbol indicator 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbols. The first special figure reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operations (first special figure reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special figure display 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general symbol holding display 44 displays the number of operation symbols (normal symbol holding) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as “special symbols”. In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays the special symbol (variation display), thereby performing a lottery based on a winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (a lottery per special symbol). , Jackpot small hit lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable symbol and the stopped symbol) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 is formed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (winner jackpot type). Jackpot game (the second special game) to open the game. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (small hit symbol) in a predetermined small hit stop mode, an open pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol stopped and displayed (the type of the winning small hit) is displayed. A small hit game (first special game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, the left and right, such as “XXXXXXXXXXX” (X: lit, X: extinguished) , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit and the big hit symbol is displayed. In addition, when a small hit is won (one of a plurality of types of small hits described later), the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left are turned on, such as "●●●● ○ ●●●". Display the small hit symbol. In the case of a loss, a loss pattern in which only the rightmost LED is turned on, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as the losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is fluctuated (variable display) for a predetermined fluctuating time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball is won (entered) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random numbers such as a random number per special symbol acquired for the winning (numerical information ) Are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). More specifically, if the winning is in the first opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85 a (FIG. 6) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is in the second starting opening 21. Are stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in the present embodiment is four first special figure reservation storage areas 85a and second special figure reservation storage areas. 85b is one. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure reservation can be variably displayed. The “extinguishment of special figure reservation” means that a special symbol per random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined and the special symbol is variably displayed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately performed after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the execution of a middle game or a special game (big hit game or small hit game), it is possible to reserve the right of the big hit small lottery for the prize, up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by variably displaying (variable display) the normal symbols and then displaying the stopped symbols. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an assist for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. A game is played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays an ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a winning, a normal winning symbol in which the first and second LEDs from the left are lit, such as “○ ●” (○: lit, ：: unlit), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern in which only the right LED is lit, such as "●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the mode of the variable display, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

  In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per ordinary symbol acquired for the passage is stored in the general figure holding storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It is temporarily stored as a normal drawing hold. There is an upper limit to the number of general drawing reservations that can be stored in the general drawing holding storage area 86, and the upper limit in the present embodiment is one. The general figure hold stored in the general figure hold storage area 86 is exhausted when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general figure hold becomes possible. The term “extension of ordinary symbol reservation” means that a random number per ordinary symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation is determined, and variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even if there is, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of general-use reservations is displayed on the general-use reservation display 44. The general-purpose reservation indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of general-purpose reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the main control board side. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the sub-control board side. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and a voice control board 106 ( 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to game profits such as jackpot and small hit lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and forms a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives a signal output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first gate sensor 28a, a second gate sensor 29a, a first winning port sensor 30a, a second The special winning opening sensor 35a, the V region sensor 39a, the non-V region sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chuck solenoid 24, the first winning port solenoid 33, the second winning port solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28, and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29, and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball passing through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball passing through the non-V region 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The electric tube solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tube 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the second special winning opening 35.

  The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure reservation display 43a, a second special figure reservation display 43b, and a general figure reservation. The display of the display 44 is controlled.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a firing device 112 is connected via a firing control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out a prize ball. The paid-out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental device 130 pays out a ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending-payout apparatus 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 and pays out a ball rental. The paid-out lending balls are detected by the lending ball sensors 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information relating to ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. The firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115 when the player operates the handle 60. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired at an intensity corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls a game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes the program stored in the sub ROM 93. And a CPU 92. Details of data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like. ) And background image data. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 performs voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. And so on. The sound data such as the sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 via the lamp control substrate 107, based on the command received from the main control substrate 80. Lighting control). In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and determines the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15, and generates these movable auditors according to the operation pattern data. Control behavior. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable accessory based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to execute a light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol change pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. And a normal symbol hit type determination table T6, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reserved storage area 85, and a general figure reserved storage. An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit is set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a change start command, a change stop command, and an opening. Command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, pending ball count command, ordinary symbol variation start command, ordinary symbol variation stop command, ordinary symbol opening command, ordinary A symbol ending command and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main processing (described later), and the big hit flag, the big hit end flag, the small hit flag, the small hit end flag, and V A flag, a time reduction flag, a V opening / closing member operation flag, and the like are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in a special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first second special figure reservation. The general figure holding storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (holding information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first general figure holding. The main RAM 84 is provided with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like, in addition to the above area. Have been.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 7A) includes a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. Is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. . The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit is stored in the sub-control main processing (described later), and includes a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , Ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, pre-judgment command, customer waiting standby command, ball count command, normal symbol variation start command, ordinary symbol variation stop command, ordinary symbol opening command, ordinary symbol ending command, etc. Is stored. The effect command setting area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set. Yes, Variable production start command, Variable production end command, Opening production start command, Round production start command, Ending production start command, Normal design fluctuation production start command, Normal design fluctuation production end command, Normal design opening production start command, Normal design An ending production start command and the like are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and includes a random number counter, a first special figure holding effect counter, a second special figure holding effect counter, and a general figure holding effect counter. , A first time reduction effect counter, a second time reduction effect counter, and the like. In the mode status set area 94e, a mode status (to be described later) indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (whether to be a time saving state or a non-time saving state to be described later) is set.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8A shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8B shows the random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. I have. The game control microcomputer 81 includes “random number per special symbol”, “random number per special symbol”, “reach random number”, “random pattern random number”, “random number per ordinary symbol”, and “random number per ordinary symbol”. And a “random number” at each timing described later. The “special random number per symbol” is a random number used in a lottery (small jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and has a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol-per-type random number" is a random number used in a lottery (winning type determination) of a winning big or small winning type, and has a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect design fluctuation effect indicating the result when the jackpot / small hit determination is a loss, and is in a range of 0 to 127. Take the value of Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depends on which symbol the variable symbol is stopped and displayed. Means a state in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a big hit and a small hit is won (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”). The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if swinging in the display screen 7a. The “fluctuation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “normal random number per symbol” is a random number used in a random determination (regular symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 255. The “normal random number per symbol type” is a random number used for lottery of a winning type (winning type determination) won in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The “random number per special symbol”, “random number per special symbol”, “reach random number”, and “variable pattern random number” are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). Is done. The random number group acquired based on the ball entering the first opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group acquired based on the ball entering the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “random number per ordinary symbol” and the “random number per ordinary symbol” are acquired based on passing through a gate (the first gate 28 or the second gate 29). The acquired random number value per symbol and type random number value per symbol are stored in the general symbol holding storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “fluctuation effect pattern random number”, the “time saving effect scenario random number”, and the “prefetch effect random number” at a timing described later. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation effect pattern, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “time saving effect scenario random number” is a random number used to determine a change scenario of the number of remaining time savings (the number of remaining times to be displayed) displayed on the image display device 7 in the time saving state, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The "prefetch effect random number" is a random number used to determine a prefetch effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “fluctuation effect pattern random number” is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “time saving effect scenario random number” is obtained based on the output of the ending command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The “prefetch effect random number” is obtained based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9A shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

  The special symbol hit determination table T1 indicates that the special symbol random number (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Is a table that is referred to to determine which of the following conditions applies. In FIG. 9A, in the random determination of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), when the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 210”, it is determined to be “big hit”, and the random number value per special symbol is “ In the case of "10000 to 10500", it is determined that "small hit" is determined, and when the random number value per special symbol is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, it is determined that "losing" is determined. . In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), when the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 210”, it is determined as “big hit”, and the random number value per special symbol is “10000 to 16500”. In this case, it is determined that "small hit" is determined, and when the random number value per special symbol is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, "loss" is determined.

  The reach determination table T2 indicates that the reach random number (any of 0 to 127) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to “reach present” or “reach no”. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not the information is stored. In FIG. 9B, in the “non-time saving state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 13”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and the reach random number is “a value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 13). 127)), it is indicated that it is determined that there is no reach. Further, in the “time reduction state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and when the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”, Indicates that “reach is not performed” is determined. The contents of the "time reduction state" and the "non-time reduction state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is more difficult to reach in the loss time in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. This is because the speed of digesting the suspension of the special figure is increased by selecting more losing without reach having a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

  The special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the lottery of the special figure 2. The special symbol hit type determination table T3 indicates the “big hit type” or “big hit type” according to the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine “small hit type” and “special symbol type”. In FIG. 10, when the special drawing 1 random number value is “0 to 15” in the special drawing 1 lottery in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol type is “0 to 15”, the big hit type is “15R "A", and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined as the "time saving symbol 1". When the special symbol type random number value is “16 to 63”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time saving 99 times big hit B”, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hour saving symbol 2”. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time-saving five times big hit A”, and the special symbol 1 stopped symbol is determined to be “hour-saving symbol 3”. On the other hand, in the case of “small hit” in the special drawing 1 lottery in the “non-time saving state”, the small hit type is set regardless of the special symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 127). It is determined to be "16R normal small hit A (substantially 5R.V passing substantially impossible)" and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving no small hit symbol 1".

  When the special jackpot is won in the lottery of the special map 1 in the “time saving state”, if the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 63”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time reduction 99 times jackpot C”. , The special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 4”. If the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R, 5 time savings, 5 big hits B”, and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be “hours saving symbol 5”. On the other hand, when "small hit" is selected in the lottery of the special figure 1 in the "time reduction state", the small hit type is "irrespective of the special symbol type random number value (any of 0 to 127). 16R normal small hit B (substantially 5R · V substantially impossible to pass) ”is determined, and the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined as“ time saving small hit symbol 2 ”.

  In FIG. 11, when the special jackpot type is “0 to 63” in the special drawing 2 lottery in the “non-time saving state” and the special symbol hit type random value is “0 to 63”, the jackpot type is “15R C ", and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined as the" time saving symbol 6 ". When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 95”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time reduction 15 times big hit A”, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 7”. When the special symbol type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time reduction 99 times big hit D", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "hour reduction symbol 8". On the other hand, when "small hit" is selected in the lottery of the special figure 2 in the "non-time saving state", if the random number value per type of special symbol is "0 to 63", the small hit type is "16R, 5 times shorter And the second special symbol display 41b determines that the special symbol 2 stop symbol of the special symbol 2 is "the small symbol with time reduction 1" on the second special symbol indicator 41b. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 127”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 99 times small hit A (substantially 15R · V passable)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction”. It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 2 ".

  If the random number value per special symbol is “0 to 79” in the special drawing 2 lottery in the “time reduction state” and the special symbol type is “0 to 79”, the big hit type is determined to be “15R, 5 times per hour, 5 times big hit D”. , The special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “time saving symbol 9”. When the special symbol type random number value is “80 to 95”, the jackpot type is determined to be “15R time reduction 15 times big hit B”, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be “hour reduction symbol 10”. When the special symbol type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times big hit E", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "hour saving symbol 11". On the other hand, if the special symbol hit type random number value is "0 to 63" in the special drawing 2 lottery in the "time reduction state", the small hit type is "16R B (substantially 15 R · V passing possible) ”, and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined as“ small hit symbol 3 with time reduction ”. When the special symbol type random number value is “64 to 95”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 10 times small hit (substantial 15R · V passing possible)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction It is determined as "small hit symbol 4". If the special symbol type random number value is “96 to 111”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 15 times small hit (substantial 15R · V passing possible)” and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction It is determined that the small hit symbol 5 ". When the special symbol type random number value is “112 to 127”, the small hit type is determined to be “16R time reduction 99 times small hit B (substantially 15R · V can pass)”, and the special figure 2 stop symbol is “hour reduction” It is determined that there is a small hit symbol 6 ". By referring to the special symbol hit type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol (the special symbol 1 stop symbol and the special symbol 2 stop symbol), the special game "opening" (OP) command, "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. The specific contents of each big hit and each small hit will be described later.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number (0 to 127). It is. In FIG. 12, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in the non-time saving state, it is determined as "big hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and when the random number of the variable pattern is "111 to 127", the variable pattern Is determined to be “P2”. In addition, for example, in the non-working time state, the first starting opening 20 is won, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines "losing", the reach determination table T2 determines "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". In the case of “２2”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P6” regardless of the variation pattern random number value (any of 0 to 127). Further, for example, when the player wins the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and is determined as “small hit” in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the variation pattern random number value (any of 0 to 127) ) Indicates that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P17”. As shown in FIG. 12, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, it is determined whether or not there is a pseudo-ream in the case of super reach.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. FIG. 13 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7. The normal symbol hit determination table T5 indicates whether the acquired random number per normal symbol (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “hit” or “loss” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is applicable. In FIG. 13 (A), in any of the “non-time saving state” and the “time saving state”, when the random number value per ordinary symbol is “0 to 254” in the lottery of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), It is shown that when it is determined as “hit” and the random number per symbol is “a numerical value (255) other than 0 to 254”, it is determined as “losing”.

  The normal symbol hit type determination table T6 includes “hit type” and “hit type” according to the normal symbol hit type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). This is a table that is referred to to determine the “type of ordinary symbol”. In FIG. 13 (B), when the random number value per symbol type is “0 to 30” when the lottery of the ordinary figure in the “non-time saving state” is won, the hit type is determined to be “long open 1”. Then, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42 is determined to be "hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the normal symbol per type is “100 to 170”, the hit type is determined to be “short open 1”, and the normal symbol stopped symbol is determined to be “hit symbol 2”. In the case where the random number value of the normal symbol per type is a numerical value other than the above from 0 to 65535, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal symbol stopped symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3". Have been. On the other hand, when the lottery is won in the lottery drawing in the “time reduction state”, the hit type is determined to be “long open 2” regardless of the random number value of the type per normal symbol (any of 0 to 65535). This shows that the normal symbol stop symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 4". By referring to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6, it is possible to specify “normal symbol stop symbol data” (not shown) corresponding to the symbol stop symbol.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) in order to determine the variation time of the general figure according to the lottery result and the hit type of the general figure. It is. In FIG. 13 (C), for example, when the lottery result of the general figure in the non-working time state is “hit”, and when the hit type is “long open 1”, the variation time of the general figure is determined to be “30 seconds”. Is shown. Further, for example, when the lottery result of the general figure in the time reduction state is “losing”, the variation time of the general figure is determined to be “1 second”.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric tue opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 in the main control main process (described later) according to a general stop symbol (normal stop symbol data). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, for example, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol 1”, the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and for example, the normal symbol stop symbol is “hit symbol”. 4 indicates that the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 14”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 11 to 14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second. In the opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 second, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified winning number, maximum two).

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9. The special winning opening opening pattern determination table T9 indicates that the game control microcomputer 81 determines the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 30 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol (special figure stop symbol data). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of the winning opening 35. In FIG. 15A, the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “13H”, “15H”, “16H”, “21H”, “22H”, “23H”, “31H”, “31H”. In the case of “32H” or “33H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be “opening pattern 21”, and the special figure stop symbol data is “14H” or “ 17H ", the open pattern is determined to be" open pattern 22 ", and when the special figure stop symbol data is" 24H "," 25H "," 34H "," 35H "," 36H ", or" 37H ". , The open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 23”. FIG. 15B shows the contents of each of the open patterns 21 to 23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 with the opening time of 19.5R and the opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed at the 1st to 15th R (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, the first winning opening 35 is opened once in the first R and the opening time is 1.6 seconds in the 1R, and the opening number is opened in the second to sixth Rs. Once, the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). At the 7th to 16th R, the first big winning opening 30 with one opening time and an opening time of 0.1 second is opened. Open (short open). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 second, the first large winning opening 35 is opened once in the 1R and the opening time 1.6 seconds in the 1R, and in the 2nd to 16th R, The opening of the first special winning opening 30 (long opening) is performed once with an opening time of 29.5 seconds. However, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is performed when a predetermined number of game balls are won (specified winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains. Will be closed.

4. Description of Jackpots and the like In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "losing" as a result of a special symbol lottery (small jackpot lottery). In the case of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “small hit”, “small hit” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "losing", "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the big hit is won, a "big hit game (second special game)" for opening the first big winning opening 30 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (big hit type). When the small hit is won, the second large winning opening 35 is opened once in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed (the type of the small hit) "Small hit game (first special game)" Is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the V region 39 inside the second big winning opening 35 during the execution of the small winning game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the winning small winning. The "big hit game (second special game)" to be released is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot win is also referred to as a “one-type jackpot game”. The big hit game executed based on the passing of the game ball to the V region 39 is also referred to as “two kinds of big hit games”. The big hit game and the small hit game are also called "special games". This special game may include a round in which a special winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round.

  The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening game) for opening the first winning port 30, an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and after the last round game is completed. Ending (ED). Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and is ended by the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first special winning opening 30 during the round game is included in the open round game before the closing. The small hit game is a small hit opening game that opens the second big winning opening 35, an opening (interval before opening) before the small hit opening game starts, and an ending (closing) after the small hit opening game ends. After interval).

  There are several types of jackpots. Here, "15R time-saving short hits A-E", "15R time-saving short hits 15 times big hits A and B", and "15R time-saving short times five times big hits A-D" are set as the big hit types. Each of these jackpots is a jackpot for controlling a gaming state to a "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing a jackpot game (a type of jackpot game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 for 15R. . On the other hand, these hits differ in the number of times that the “time saving state and high base state” after the jackpot game ends. Here, the “time saving number” is the number of times the special symbol can be changed (variable display) that can be executed in the “time saving state and high base state” after the big hit game, and is set in advance for each big hit type. For example, in the case of "15R time savings 99 times big hits A to E", the number of time savings is 99 times, and in the case of "15R time savings 15 times big hits A and B", the number of time savings is 15 times. Note that the "time saving state and high base state" ends even if the number of time savings is not achieved, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

  There are several types of small hits. Here, as the small hit types, "16R normal small hit A, B", "16R short time 5 small hits A, B", "16R short time 10 small hits", "16R short time 15 small hits", "16R short time" 99, small hits A, B "are set. In these small hits, a small hitting game is executed first, and when a game ball passes through the V region 39 (V passing), a big hitting game (two kinds of big hitting games) is executed. Therefore, in the small hit, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 as the small winning game corresponds to the 1R, and the big hit game that opens the first big winning opening 30 for 15R after that when the V passes is executed. This corresponds to the 2nd to 16th eyes. If there is no V passing in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. Here, “16R (substantially 5R) normal small hit” is a small hit in which V passage is substantially impossible. On the other hand, "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are small hits that can pass through V. . Whether or not V passing is possible during the small hit game can be set based on the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Specifically, it is as follows.

  In each of the above-mentioned small hits, in the small hit game after the winning, the opening of the second big winning opening 35 for 1.6 seconds is performed once (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small hit game differs depending on the small hit type. Specifically, “16R normal small hit” (opening pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, “16R short 5 times small hit”, “16R short 10 times small hit”, and “16R short 15 times small” The "hit" and the "small hit of 16R time reduction 99 times" (open pattern 23) have an opening time of 0.01 second. The reason why the opening time of the small hitting game is different depending on the small hitting type is that the opening timing of the second big winning opening 35 with respect to the V opening / closing member 71 which is moving by a certain operation from the start of the opening is changed. That's why. Here, when the small hitting game is started, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after opening for 0.01 seconds. The opening pattern 22 is that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened since the second winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small hitting game is started. become. Therefore, in the “16R normal small hit”, V passing during the small hit game is substantially impossible. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the small hitting game is started, and both the opening are continued for 1.6 seconds. 2.4 seconds after the closing of the port 35, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, in "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", V passing during the small hit game becomes possible. ing.

  "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit" and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" are the big hits when the big hit game is executed after the small hit game The game state after the game is controlled to a “time saving state and high base state” described later. "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", "16R time reduction 15 times small hit" and "16R time reduction 99 times small hit" indicate the number of times of reduction in the "time reduction state and high base state" respectively. different. For example, in the case of "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", the number of times of reduction is 10 times, and in the case of "16R time reduction 15 times of small hits", the number of times of reduction is 15 times. On the other hand, the “16R normal small hit” is a hit in which, when the big hit game is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a “non-time saving state and low base state” described later after the big hit game. However, since the "16R normal small hit" is a small hit in which V passage is substantially impossible, the big hit game is hardly executed.

  In addition, the small hits in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state are all "16R normal small hits" in which V passing is substantially impossible. On the other hand, the distribution rate of the small hits in the special drawing 2 lottery in the time reduction state is 50% for "16R time reduction 5 times small hit", 25% for "16R time reduction 10 times small hit", and "16R time reduction 15 times small hit". "Is 12.5%, and" 16R short hit 99 times small hit "is 12.5%, and" 16R normal small hit "is not included. Since the winning probability of the jackpot does not change between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning either “big hit” or “small hit where the big hit game (two kinds of big hit games) is executed” is: The special figure 2 lottery in the time reduction state is higher than the special figure 1 lottery in the non-hour reduction state. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the game machine 1 hits right in the time reduction state and plays the game ball in the second startup port 21, compared to the state in which the game ball is left-turned in the non-time saving state and the game ball is awarded in the first starting port 20. Is set so as to be more advantageous for the player in the state of winning.

  In the gaming machine 1, there are "hit" and "losing" as a result of the normal symbol lottery (hit lottery). In the case of "hit", the "hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42. When a winning is won, a "winning game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the normally displayed stopped symbol (type of winning). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be opened a plurality of times during one round. The winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the round game is finished. . There are multiple types of hits. Here, “long open 1”, “long open 2”, “short open 1”, and “short open 2” are set as the hit types. These hits are different from each other in fluctuating time, opening time, opening time, and ending time.

5. Description of the gaming state The microcomputer 81 for gaming control of the gaming machine 1 can execute “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 to reduce the variation time is referred to as “time reduction state”, and the state in which the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply referred to as “non-time reduction state”. " In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) that is set such that a variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more frequently selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Is used to determine a fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is more variable than when the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. A short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) at the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot with a smooth progress of the game.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol in the time reduction state, and does not execute the control in the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) so that the variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more frequently selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Is used to determine a fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control on the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the variable of the ordinary symbol is more variable than when the variation time reduction control is not executed. A short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the display.

  Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 13). Even in the non-time saving state, when the "Long Open 1" is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, the open pattern of the electric chew becomes "Open Pattern 11", which is a long open time of 5 seconds. The probability of being assigned to "open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, the open time is 0.02 seconds even if the winner is won. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds in case of winning, so in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is substantially longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to become. That is, in the time saving state, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, there are cases where these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball frequently wins the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launch balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not being executed is called a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls on hand. Note that the high base state does not need to execute all the above-described controls. That is, by executing one or more of the control of the fluctuation time for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the control of the extension of the opening time for the electric chew 22, the control of the electric chew 22 is performed more than when the control is not executed. Should be easily opened. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

  In the gaming machine 1, "15R time reduction 99 times big hit A to E", "15R time reduction 15 times big hit A, B", "15R time reduction 5 times big hit A to D", "16R time reduction 99 times small hit", "16R time shortening" The game state after the jackpot game that has been won by winning the “15 small hits”, “16R short hits 10 times” or “16R short hits 5 times” is a “time-saving state and high base state”. . In the “time saving state and high base state”, a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times) of the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is executed, or the special symbol is won. The game ends when the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after the jackpot game executed by winning the “16R normal small hit” is the “non-time saving state and low base state”. This gaming state is also referred to as a “normal gaming state”. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal gaming state. Here, the “time reduction state and high base state” is also simply referred to as “time reduction state”, and the “non-time reduction state and low base state” is simply referred to as “non-time reduction state”.

  In the high base state (reduced time), it is advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing so that the game can proceed advantageously. The electric chew 22 is more easily opened than in the low base state (non-time saving state), and winning in the second starting port 21 is easier than winning in the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, while the game ball is passed to the first gate 28, which is usually a trigger of the symbol lottery, a right strike is performed so as to win the game ball to the second starting port 21. As a result, a larger number of start winnings (winning to the starting opening) can be obtained than when the player hits left. Note that the gaming machine 1 performs a right-handed game even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. This is because the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and winning in the first starting port 20 is easier than winning in the second starting port 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is left-handed so that the game ball is passed to the first starting port 20 while the game ball is passed to the second gate 29, which is usually a trigger of symbol lottery. As a result, a larger number of start winnings can be obtained than when the player hits right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), if the "long open 1" is won by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 is opened for 5 seconds. (2) Right-handing is performed so that a game ball can be awarded to the starting port 21. After closing the electric chew 22, the left-handed driving is performed again.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As will be described below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 83, so that it can be used as a hit / fail determination unit, a symbol control unit, a hit game execution unit, a game state control unit, and a hit type selection unit. It functions (for example, see FIGS. 22, 27 to 29, 31, and 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing a main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Note that the initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the various random number counter values shown in FIG. The variation pattern random number value, the random number value per normal symbol, and the random number value per type per normal symbol) are added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the main timer interruption process (step S005) is enabled. The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the next start of the main-side timer interrupt processing, the update processing of the various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number updating process is the same as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during the other period (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process). And both.

  After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the types of winning ports to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V opening / closing member control process (step S106), a V region The sensor detection process (step S107) is sequentially performed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V-region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the pending ball number command in a command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the pending ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

  After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in the above-described processes. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described below, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold display 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection processing (FIG. 17: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball has passed through one of the first gate 28 and the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)". Is determined (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol holding balls is the number of ordinary symbol holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of ordinary symbol holdings. If the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (step S203), and then an ordinary symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the ordinary symbol per random number counter (FIG. 8: the value of label-TRND-H) and the value of the ordinary symbol per type counter (FIG. 8: the value of label-TRND-HS). ) Is obtained, and the obtained random number group is stored in the first storage area of the general-purpose reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

  In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not been won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball has won (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reserved balls is the number of second special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball count (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter per type of special symbol (FIG. 8: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. FIG. 8: The value of the label-TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 8: the value of the label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for a special figure 2 preliminary determination process described below (prior determination buffer). Hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). In the special figure 2 pre-judgment process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big hit pre-judgment with reference to the big hit judgment table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number obtaining process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not a big hit has occurred using the big hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the big random number value. When the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “big hit”, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-judgment. In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the determination values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number obtaining process. I do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result, a jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-judgment command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing.

  In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has been won at the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), the present process is terminated. When a game ball has won the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S210). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of first special figure reservations, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of first special figure reservations. If the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), and then a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208), the value of the special pattern random number counter, the value of the special symbol type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are changed. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the obtained random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing. Let it. After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). The special figure 1 preliminary determination processing is similar to the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is performed (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). If the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. When the normal symbol is not being stopped and displayed (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S503). If the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S504). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S504: YES), the present process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is not “0” (step S504: NO), the number of normally reserved balls is decremented by one (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is “0”, the ordinary symbol is once determined in step S203 of the start-up sensor detection processing (FIG. 18). The number of reserved balls of “1” becomes “1”, and then the reservation is exhausted in this step S505, and the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols immediately becomes “0”. The same applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start-up opening sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, in steps S1404 and S1404 in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. In addition, the decrement of the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (digestion of regular figure reserved) is executed together with a clearing process for clearing the reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the regular figure reserved storage area 86. You.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13A) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly sets a random number value per symbol as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure holding) of the general figure holding storage area 86. Is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved by using the random number value per normal symbol, the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state) and the normal symbol hitting determination table T5. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random number value per normal symbol is “0” to “254”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the random number value per normal symbol is other than “255”, “losing” is performed. (FIG. 13A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) with reference to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6 (FIG. 13B) (step S507). Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 81 has won in the hit determination in the above (step S506), first, the normal symbol hitting stored in the first storage area of the ordinary figure holding storage area 86 is performed. Reads the type random value. Then, the hit type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined by using the normal symbol hit type random number value, the game state (whether or not of the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the random number value of the type per normal symbol is “0” to “30”, the hit type is determined as “long open 1”, and the normal symbol is determined as “hit symbol 1”. . When the random number value of the normal symbol type is “100” to “170”, the hit type is determined to be “short open 1”, and the normal symbol is determined to be “hit symbol 2”. If the random number value for the normal symbol type is any other value, the hit type is determined to be "short open 2", and the normal symbol is determined to be "hit symbol 3" (FIG. 13B). On the other hand, in the case of “losing” in the above-mentioned hit determination, “losing symbol” is set as a normal symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13C) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using the gaming state (whether or not a time saving state), a hit determination result, a hit type, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. I do. For example, when the hit type is “long open 1” in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “30 seconds”. Further, for example, in the time saving state, when the hit determination is "losing", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13C). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol change start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the change start and the change time of the normal symbol (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information on the normally stopped symbol data and information on the ordinary symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the variable display of the ordinary symbols and ends the processing (step S510).

  In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13C). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 displays the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the normal symbol stop symbol or the lost general symbol) specified in step S507. (The stop symbol) (step S522). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol change stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub control board 90 of the normal symbol change stop (step S523). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the ordinary symbol and ends the present process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 second.

  In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the normal symbol stop display is continued. On the other hand, when the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes this processing when the hit determination in the above (step S506) is “losing” (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, if the hit determination is "hit" (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sends the normal symbol opening to notify the sub control board 90 of the start of the hit game (normal game) opening. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chute opening pattern (step S534). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the electric chew 22 using the type of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is “hit symbol 1”, “open pattern 11” is selected, and when the normal symbol is “hit symbol 4”, “open pattern 14” is selected (see FIG. 14). . After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric tuner in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends the processing.

  If the electric chew 22 is operating in the above-described step S501 (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the winning number of the electric chew 22 has reached a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, two) or that the electric chew 22 is closed after the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed. Either of the things that have come is fulfilled. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 hits the sub-control board 90 to notify the start of the ending of the game (normal game), so that the normal symbol ending is performed. The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Also, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this processing.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4", "5". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol hit determination, a special symbol variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol change processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, a change stop command is output after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit. When the “special operation status” is “4” (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric auditors processing 1 (big hit game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (a second-class special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small hit game (a first-class special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (special figure 2 reserved) is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the special symbol hitting process (step S1402) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Execute Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved digest image display area side and displayed as the reserved digest image 9C. Is done. Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 change start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 change start process, a change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the change display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". The change start command (special figure 2 change start command) set in the special figure 2 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination processing (step S1402) and the special design change. Information on the variation pattern set in the pattern selection processing (step S1403) is included.

  If the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is “0” in step S1401 (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (reserved in special figure 1) is “0”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1407). When the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning at the first starting port 20 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1413. When the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the special symbol hitting process (step S1408) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Execute Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the hold information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special drawing reservation is digested in the order of reservation. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. The image is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. When the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure storage area 85a include the hold information, the hold image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (of the four hold images 9A, , The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) shift by one to the right. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 change start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 change start process, the change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the change display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). The change start command (special figure 1 change start command) set in the special figure 1 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop design data set in the special design hit determination processing (step S1408) and the special design change. Information on the fluctuation pattern set in the pattern selection processing (step S1409) is included.

  When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, based on ON / OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this processing ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol change display based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is “0”. That is, the second special map reservation is consumed prior to the first special map reservation.

[Special symbol hit judgment process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). The hit determination process of Toku-zu 2 (step S1402) and the hit-judgment process of Toku-zu 1 (step S1408) have the same processing flow, and will be described together. In the special symbol hit determination processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random number value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for the special figure 2, the special symbol random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the hit determination process for the special figure 1, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the special symbol hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the read special symbol hit random value to determine whether or not a big hit and a small hit. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as “winning / failing determining means”.

  When the result of the special symbol hit determination is "big hit" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1505) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the winning determination process of the special figure 2, the special symbol type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the hit determination processing of the special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the big hit type based on the read special symbol type random number and the special symbol type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as “hit type selection means”. After the determination of the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (the jackpot symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is not “big hit” (step S1503: NO), but is “small hit” (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit flag to ON and (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol-per-type random number value as a determination value, similarly to the determination of the jackpot type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small hit type based on the read special symbol hit type random value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After the determination of the small hit type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small hit symbol) corresponding to the specified small hit type is set in the hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and the process ends.

  When the result of the special symbol hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit" but "losing" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the missing symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. It is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and this processing ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
FIGS. 23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the employee is in the time reduction state is made based on whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602).

  If the big hit flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state big hit table in the special symbol change pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to select a change pattern. This is performed (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of Toku-zu, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu of special toku-zu) is stored in the first toku-zu pending storage area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random number. Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state large hit, a portion corresponding to the non-time-saving state large jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. (In FIG. 2, the variation pattern is “P14” in FIG. 2) is referenced (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, either “P1” or “P2” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu, and “P14” is selected in Toku-zu 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table in the special symbol change pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). A selection is made (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value, as in step S1603. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state and the variation pattern random number value in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the portion where the variation pattern is “P3” in Toku-zu 1 and the portion where the variation pattern is “P15” in Toku-zu 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the random value of the variation pattern.

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S1604 (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection processing of Toku-zu, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu figure holding) of the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9B) and the reach random number. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is "0" to "13"). Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1606: YES), that is, if a reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reach in the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The change pattern is selected with reference to the table for the loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for reach loss in the non-time saving state, a portion corresponding to the reach loss in the non-time saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P4 And "P5", and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern is "P14". In the special figure 1, one of “P4” and “P5” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value. In the special figure 2, “P14” is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number.

  If the reach random number is not a reach-achieved random number (step S1606: NO), that is, if there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to the non-time-saving reach. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for the non-reduction time non-reachable loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reduction time non-reachable loss in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 (the fluctuation pattern is “P6 And "P7", and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern is "P15". In Toku-zu 1, one of “P6” and “P7” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current Toku-zu 1 retention ball count (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, “P15” is selected as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the read fluctuation pattern random number. In the special figure 1, since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, the function of the shortened variation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in the special map 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more variation patterns having a shorter variation time are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is supposed to be. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big hit flag is ON (FIG. 24: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 described above except for the following points, and a description thereof will not be repeated. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 is that the part of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referred to in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618 is described in steps S1603, S1605, and S1607. , S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, The table for the time saving state is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the portion corresponding to the small hit in the time saving state (the portion whose variation pattern is “P9” in Tokujin 1 and the variation pattern “P17” in Tokujin 2). Part) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1617, in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a portion corresponding to the loss with the reach in the time saving state (the portion where the variation pattern is “P10” in the special figure 1, the variation pattern is "P18") is referred to.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this processing. The information of the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output processing (FIG. 17: step S109). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol change processing (FIG. 20: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol change time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-described special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). . Also, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the special symbol display on the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (special symbol stop display). Thus, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as "symbol control means". The special symbol stop display time can be set arbitrarily according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 or the lottery result of the special figure 2. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management processing is processing for switching the game state according to the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1802).

  If the big hit flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a winning pattern opening pattern according to the type of the big hit that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. Here, regardless of which jackpot type (special figure stop symbol data is any of 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, and 31H to 33H), "open pattern 21" Is set. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the setting of the opening pattern of the special winning opening. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "15" is set in the round counter for any of the jackpot types (FIG. 15B).

  After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804). If the time saving flag is ON (step S1804: YES), it is turned OFF (step S1805). As a result, during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game, the non-time saving state is set. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, an opening command of the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this processing ends. When the special operation status is set to "4", the processing shifts to special electric auditors processing 1 (big hit game).

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1802 (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). If the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a winning pattern opening pattern according to the type of the small hit that has been won (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the special winning opening pattern determining table T9, similarly to step S1803 described above. Set the release pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is “16R normal small hit A” (the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”), “open pattern 22” is set as the open pattern of the winning opening. Further, for example, when the small hit type is "16R, 5 times short hit A for short time" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning small win, together with the setting of the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Here, “16” is set in the round counter for any of the small hit types (FIG. 15B).

  After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening / closing member operation flag is a flag indicating a period during which the V opening / closing member 71 is operated. In the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening / closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small hitting game, the V opening / closing member 71 operates so as to be closed as an opening for 0.01 second after the small hitting game, opened for 4 seconds thereafter, and then closed. Note that when the small hit flag is ON, unlike the case where the big hit flag is ON, the time saving flag is not switched to OFF even if it is ON. Thereafter, in order to start the small hitting game, a small hit opening command is set (step S1813), and the small hitting game opening is started (step S1814). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and the process ends. When the special operation status is set to "5", the processing shifts to special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S1810 (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1820), and ends this processing. As a result, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) to execute a special symbol hit determination for the next hold.

[Gaming state management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, if the time saving flag is in the non-time saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, when the time saving state is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation is a variation of the second special symbol (step S2010). If the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements each value of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2010). S2015). The "first time reduction counter C1" counts the number of times the second special symbol has been changed during the time reduction state. The "second time reduction counter C2" counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time reduction state (total of the number of times the first special symbol has changed and the number of times the second special symbol has changed). The initial value set in each of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is determined based on the setting table in FIG. 30 in a later-described game state setting process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the change is the change of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time reduction counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

  The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the respective values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become “0” as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step S2015). S2030). If the values of both the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 are not “0” (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is “0” (step S2030: YES), the time-saving flag is turned off (step S2035). Thereby, the gaming state is switched from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state. That is, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed in the time saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

  In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the current game state that has just been set (whether or not the state is a time reduction state, the respective values of the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction counter, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The “big hit end flag” is a flag indicating that the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has been completed in the currently running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first big winning opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the first special winning opening 30 is not being opened (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) for opening the first special winning opening 30 is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed and the time of opening start in the first round game has been reached, or it has been temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first big winning opening 30 is reopened elapses and the timing of starting the opening again is reached. If it is not the time (timing) for opening the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first special winning opening 30 in accordance with an opening pattern (FIG. 15B) according to the hit type (big hit type or small hit type). When the one-type jackpot game is being executed, the first large winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 for any jackpot type. When the two types of big hit games are being executed, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the small hit type. After the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game (small hit game and big hit game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. I do. Thus, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. In the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first big winning opening 30 is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening of the first big winning opening 30 to one. It may be determined whether or not the release is the first release in one round, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  When the first special winning opening 30 is open in the above step S2202 (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is satisfied. (Step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the first large winning opening 30 in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the first large winning opening 30 is Either one of the times when the closing time is reached (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the first special winning opening 30) is satisfied. When the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first special winning opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the first special winning opening 30 (step S2211). Finish the process.

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the first special winning opening 30 in step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) since the first special winning opening 30 was closed. As described above, the closing time (interval time) of the first special winning opening 30 during the round game is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the first special winning opening 30. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter has become “0”. Is determined (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, the process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is “0” (step S2226: YES), the jackpot game ending command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a jackpot termination process for terminating the jackpot game (step S2227). , Start the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process ends.

  In the above step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time of the big hit ending has elapsed. (Step S2230). When the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231), turns off the big hit flag (step S2322), and sets the special operation status. Is set to “1” (step S2233). Thus, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state setting process (step S2234) described later, and ends the process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets a game state (hour reduction state or non-hour reduction state) after the jackpot game. This is a process of setting an initial value (the number of time savings) to the counter C2.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as “game state control means” by executing the above-described game state management processing (FIG. 27) and the game state setting processing. First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the jackpot game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, “15R time saving 5 times big hit”, “15R time saving 15 times big hit”, “15R time shortening 99 times big hit”, “16R time saving 5 times big hit”. It is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot game that has been executed on the occasion of “winning”, “10 hits of 16R time reductions, 10 hits of 16R time reductions”, and “99 hits of 16R time reductions, 99 hits” (step S2301). . If the time saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current big hit game is being executed with the normal hit (ie, “16R normal small hit”), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the current big hit game is being executed with the opportunity to reduce the time (step S2301: YES), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction. The setting values shown in a setting table (FIG. 30) described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). Thereby, the game state after the current big hit game is set to the “time saving state and high base state”. This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, or that the next big hit (one kind big hit or two kinds big hit) is won. The process ends when the condition is satisfied. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the game state that has just been set (whether it is the time reduction state or not, and the respective values of the first time reduction counter C1 and the second time reduction counter C2, etc.).

  FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the above-mentioned game state setting process (FIG. 29). In FIG. 30, for example, the case where the jackpot game executed this time is executed with “15R time short 99 times big hit” or “16R time short 99 times small hit” as an opportunity (the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H” , “15H”, “25H”, or “37H”), “99” is set in each of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. Further, for example, when the jackpot game executed this time is executed with “16R time reduction 10 times small hit” as an opportunity (when the special figure stop symbol data is “35H”), “10” is displayed in the first time reduction counter C1. Is set, and “15” is set in the second time reduction counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
FIGS. 31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The microcomputer 81 for game control functions as a "winning game executing means" by executing the above-described special electric auditors processing 1 (big hit game: FIG. 28) and the special electric auditors processing 2 (small hitting game). I do. First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small hit game being executed. If the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. If the small hit end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second special winning opening 35 is being opened (step S2402). If it is being opened (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

  If the second special winning opening 35 is not being opened (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404). . The time (timing) for opening the second special winning opening 35 is a time when the opening time of the small hit has elapsed and the opening start time has come. The opening time per small hit is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 second for the open pattern 23. If it is not time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: NO), the present process is ended. If it is time (timing) to open the second special winning opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second special winning opening 35 according to an opening pattern (FIG. 15B) corresponding to the small hit type. After the winning opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. Thus, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub control board 90. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2402, when the second special winning opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied. This is performed (step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the second special winning opening 35 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 10) or that the time for closing the second special winning opening 35 has been reached. (I.e., a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second special winning opening 35). When the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the second special winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening closing process to close (close) the second special winning opening 35. This is performed (step S2412). Here, at the same time, the ending command of the small hit game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as the small hit end processing for ending the small hit game. After the winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by one (step S2414). This is because the small hitting game corresponds to the 1R. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416), and ends this processing.

  If the small hit end flag is ON in step S2400 (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not an interval time (ending time) after closing has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2430). The “V flag” is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed to the V region 39 during execution of the small hitting game, and is a flag that is turned on in a V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432) and does not set the special operation status to "1" because the two-type jackpot game is not executed. (Step S2434), and the process ends. Thus, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again.

  If the V flag is ON in the above step S2430 (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag OFF (step S2436) and executes the big hit game in order to execute the two kinds of big hit games. Is turned on (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). When the special operation status is set to “4”, the processing shifts to the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game) in the next special operation processing (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it off (step S2442). As a result, a non-time saving state is set during execution of the two types of jackpot games. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the two types of jackpot games (step S2444) and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). As a result, the game shifts from the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened for a short time to the two big hit games.

[V opening / closing member control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 17: Step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this processing ends. When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), a “V opening / closing member operation process” for operating the V opening / closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern is performed (step S2502), and a predetermined period (timing) is set. A "V validity period setting process" is performed to determine that the V passing of the game ball is valid (step S2504). When the V opening / closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hitting game is started (FIG. 26: steps S1812, S1814), and the V opening / closing member operation process and the V valid period setting process are performed in accordance with the small hitting game. Will be done.

  In the V opening / closing member operation processing, a timer for measuring the operation time of the V opening / closing member 71 is set, and based on the timer, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned ON when the opening timing of the V opening / closing member 71 comes. When the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is turned off. As a result, the V opening / closing member 71 moves by a constant operation from the start of the small hit game opening. Specifically, the V opening / closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 second from the start of the small hitting game opening, and then controlled to a passage permitted state (open state) for 4 seconds. Thereafter, the state is controlled to the passage blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

  In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71 as described above. The “V valid period” is a period in which, when a game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V validity period is from when the opening of the V region 39 is started (when the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled to be in the passage permitting state) until a predetermined time elapses. The predetermined time is set to a longer time (here, the opening time of the V region 39 + 1 second) than the opening time of the V region 39 (the time during which the V opening / closing member 71 is controlled to allow passage). This is because a time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening / closing member 71 reaches the V region 39 is considered. In the V validity period setting process, a timer for measuring the V validity period is set, and based on the timer, the V validity flag is turned on when the timing for validating the V region 39 is set, and the V region 39 is set to ON. The V-valid flag is turned off when it is time to invalidate it. In a V region sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the V valid period based on whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

  After the V opening / closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening / closing member operation process (step S2502), the total operation time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the V opening / closing member 71. ) Is determined. If the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has not been completed (step S2506: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the operation of the V opening / closing member 71 has been completed (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening / closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this processing.

  Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening / closing member 32) in the small hit game will be described. As described above, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 second from the start of the small hit game opening, thereafter opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the “16R normal small hit” (opening pattern 22), the second big winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41. Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of “16R normal small hit”, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed 0.01 second after the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the V passing of the game ball during the small hitting game is performed. Has become virtually impossible. On the other hand, in the case of “16R time reduction 5 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 10 times small hit”, “16R time reduction 15 times small hit”, and “16R time reduction 99 times small hit” (opening pattern 23), the second big winning opening 35 Is closed for 0.01 second from the start of the small hit game opening, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big winning opening 35 and the V opening / closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the small hitting game is started, and both the openings are continued for 1.6 seconds, and the second big winning is achieved. 2.4 seconds after the closing of the port 35, the V opening / closing member 71 is closed. Therefore, no matter what winning timing the gaming ball wins in the second big winning opening 35, the gaming ball can pass through the V region 39. Here, if the game ball is continuously shot with the right-handed hit, the second large winning opening 35 is set so that the gaming ball always wins during the opening period of the second large winning opening 35. Each device such as the special winning device 36 is arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 35 to reach the position where the V opening / closing member 71 is arranged is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R short time 5 small hits", "16R short time 10 small hits", "16R short time 15 small hits", and "16R short time 99 small hits" If the game ball is continuously fired, the game ball always passes through V.

[V region sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of a game ball by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening / closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V validity period is set to a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed (ball brush period). Here, one second is set as the ball-stroke period. If it is not during the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), and sets the V passage command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2603). Step S2604), this process ends. The “V passing command” is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of V passing.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94. As described below, the effect control microcomputer 91 functions as an effect executing means by reading out a program stored in the sub-ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds and updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8B by one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, two or more random numbers may be added in addition to one by one. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interruption is permitted, the sub-side timer interruption processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub timer interrupt process.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: Step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs setting of display contents of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) and the like on the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, It is transmitted to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes a voice effect of outputting voice from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 receiving the various commands executes a lamp effect for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission processing, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320), and ends this processing. In other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 36: Step 4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a prefetch effect determination process is performed (step S4420). "Pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining a pre-reading effect pattern to be executed. In the look-ahead effect determination process, a look-ahead effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, and a look-ahead effect pattern selection are performed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93 to execute the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, and a pre-reading effect pattern for performing a pre-reading effect are determined. If it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

  On the other hand, when the pre-determination command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating that it is highly likely that the jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the variable effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the number is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 on the basis of information on the special figure 1 number of reserved balls, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls, and the normal symbol number of reserved balls included in the reserved number of balls command. The updated values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. Accordingly, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, 9B is updated. On the other hand, if the pending ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The “variable effect start process” is a process of selecting a variable effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special symbol change. Details of the variable effect start processing will be described later.
On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect ending process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect ending process” is a process for stopping the variable effect, and will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described variable effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the time of starting a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and substitutes the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command set at the time of the winning determination for the big hit or the small hit. Set in the RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is stored in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. And display it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during opening of a special winning opening or during an interval between opening in a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. I do. Then, an effect pattern of a round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is directed to the effect of the sub-RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. The details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small hit game from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process different from the above ending effect pattern determination process. If the ending command of the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), normal symbol fluctuation effect start processing is performed (step S4510). The “normal symbol fluctuation effect start process” is a process of selecting a normal symbol fluctuation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the normal symbol fluctuation. In the ordinary symbol variation effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets information on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol variation start command and information on the ordinary symbol variation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub RAM 94. I do. The set information includes game state information indicating a current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of a hit determination process for a common symbol, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects an ordinary symbol variation effect pattern set in advance corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation pattern, and sends a normal symbol variation effect start command for starting the selected ordinary symbol variation effect to the sub-RAM 94. It is set in the effect command set area 94b. When the normal symbol fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, when the winning type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the “expected effect of V” (FIG. 44) described later. . If the normal symbol variation start command has not been received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol variation effect start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), normal symbol variation effect ending processing is performed (step S4520). The “normal symbol variation effect ending process” is a process for stopping the ordinary symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol fluctuation effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol fluctuation stop command and sets a normal symbol fluctuation effect end command for ending the normal symbol fluctuation effect in the effect command set area 94b. . In addition, in step S4515, when the normal symbol variation stop command is not received (step S4515: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol variation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ordinary symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it has been received (step S4525: YES), a normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The “normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting a normal game effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the time of a hit game (normal game) accompanying the normal symbol winning. The normal game effects selected here include an opening effect performed during the opening and an open game effect performed during the opening of the electric chew 22. In the ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ordinary symbol opening command, and relates to the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol opening command and set at the time of determining the winning of the ordinary symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined opening effect image. Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the ordinary symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ordinary symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it has been received (step S4535: YES), a normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The “normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a hit game (normal game) accompanying a normal symbol win. In the ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ordinary symbol ending command, and sets information on the ordinary symbol stop symbol data included in the ordinary symbol ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an ending effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is transmitted to the effect command of the sub RAM 94. It is set in the set area 94b. When the ordinary symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined ending effect image Is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the ordinary symbol ending command has not been received in step S4535 (step S4535: NO), the above-described ordinary symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is the time reduction state, the first time reduction counter and the second time reduction). The respective values of the counters) are stored in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the effect-control microcomputer 91 causes the RAM 94 to store information of the V-pass. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (such as a customer waiting standby command, a pre-judgment command, a RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends the process. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as “effect effecting means” by executing the variable effect ending process (step S4470) and the opening effect pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variation effect start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information on the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating a current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). “Mode status M” indicates an effect mode to be executed. The effect mode here is a mode of the effect on the image display device 7, and when the effect mode is different, the image (characters, items, background images, and the like appearing) displayed on the image display device 7 is different, and the effect is fluctuating. Is also executed in a mode according to the effect mode. Here, “1” and “2” are set as the mode status M, “1” corresponds to the non-time saving state, and “2” corresponds to the time saving state. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is “1” or “2”.

  When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, when the time saving state is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving effect scenario (step S5025). The “time saving effect scenario” is a remaining number of time saving times displayed on the image display device 7 (hereinafter, “display time remaining number of times”) in a “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) described later, which is executed in a time saving state after the jackpot game. 3 illustrates a change scenario. The time reduction effect scenario is determined in an ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. Here, the “number of remaining time savings” is the number of remaining times of the variation display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the number of times of the variation display of the second special symbol already executed in the time saving state is This is the remaining number of times until the number of time savings set according to the hit type is reached. The number of remaining time savings corresponds to the value of the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the number of remaining time savings becomes “0”, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (FIG. 27: steps S2030 and S2035). The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs an effect of making the number of remaining display time savings displayed on the image display device 7 different from or matching the actual number of remaining time savings based on the time saving effect scenario. Specific modes will be described later. Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time reduction effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of remaining display time reductions to be displayed this time from the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 described later and the time reduction effect scenario. When the mode status M is “1” (step S5010: NO), that is, in the non-time saving state, the effect control microcomputer 91 skips the reference to the time saving effect scenario.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first obtains a random value of the variable effect pattern for effect determination. Then, from the fluctuation effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command, the fluctuation effect pattern random number value, the number of remaining display time reductions specified during the time reduction, the special effect flag Is set as a variation effect pattern corresponding to ON / OFF of the. The “special effect flag” is a flag indicating whether or not to execute a “one time effect of crying” (FIG. 48) described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches the special effect flag to OFF and executes “one time crying effect” as a variable effect. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the change pattern indicated by the change start command is “P12” to “P15”, that is, when the change is the change of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state, the “V card” described later Shuffle production "(FIG. 44 (G)). When the mode status M is “2”, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a “countdown effect” (FIG. 47) described later. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as “number-of-times display effect execution means” because it performs this countdown effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the contents of the notice effect such as a so-called step-up notice effect or a chance-up notice effect based on the random value of the fluctuation effect pattern, and further refers to the stop symbol pattern determination table T52 to stop. The combination of effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. From these, what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect is determined.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), End this processing. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sets a predetermined variable effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Variation effect end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variable effect ending process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If the mode status M is “1” (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is “2” (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S5115). The effect control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is a variation of the first special symbol or a variation of the second special symbol from the information on the variation pattern set in the sub RAM 94. When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements each value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 by one. (Step S5120). The "first time reduction effect counter JC1" is for counting the number of times of the change of the second special symbol executed during the time reduction state on the sub control unit side, and the "first time reduction counter C1" on the main control unit side. Yes, it is. The "second time reduction effect counter JC2" is the number of times the special symbol has been changed (the total number of times the first special symbol has changed and the number of times the second special symbol has changed) executed during the time saving state on the sub control unit side. It counts and corresponds to the "second time reduction counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 are determined by an ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, if the change is a change in the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time reduction effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

  The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not at least one of the values of the first and second time reduction effect counters JC1 and JC2 has become “0” as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If the values of both the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 are not “0” (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When at least one of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2 is “0” (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to “1” (step S5135). When the mode status M is switched to “1”, the effect control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not the special figure 2 is on hold. If the special figure 2 is on hold, the special effect flag is set. Switch to ON. Thereby, when the special figure 2 is reserved when the time saving state is shifted to the non-time saving state, the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48) described later is executed as the first variable effect in the non-time saving state. . In step S5130, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the game is in the time saving state or the non-time saving state based on the information on the game state held in the sub RAM 94. 1 ". The information on the game state held in the sub RAM 94 is updated when a game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for terminating the variable effect. As a result, the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, the process ends.

[Ending effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). The “mode status setting process” is a process of determining an effect mode after the big hit game. In the mode status setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using a mode status M setting table described below.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table referred to in order to determine the mode status M according to the hit type (special figure stop symbol data). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending effect pattern of a two-type jackpot game after winning the “16R normal small hit A”, the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is “1”. Is selected. In addition, for example, when determining the ending effect pattern of the type 1 jackpot game after winning the “15R time saving 99 times jackpot E”, the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command is 33H. “2” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 40, when the mode status M set in step S5505 is “1” (step S5510: NO), the processing of the effect control microcomputer 91 skips to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 hits the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2, and the type (special figure stop symbol data). Are set respectively (step S5515). The set value set in the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time-saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. The set value set in the second time-saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time-saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub-ROM 93, and the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table to obtain the first time reduction. The set value to be set in the effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 can be specified. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “99” is set in each of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and the second time reduction effect counter JC2. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “35H”, “10” is set to the first time reduction effect counter JC1 and “15” is set to the second time reduction effect counter JC2. After setting the set values in the time reduction effect counters JC1 and JC2, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a time reduction effect scenario determination process (step S5520). The “time saving effect scenario determination processing” is performed in a “countdown effect” (FIG. 47), which will be described later in the time saving state after the jackpot game, in the remaining number of time savings to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (the number of remaining display time savings) ) Is a process for determining the change scenario. In the time-saving effect scenario determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a time-saving effect scenario using a time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 described below.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time-saving effect scenario determination table T54 is a table that is referred to for determining a time-saving effect scenario according to a hit type (special figure stop symbol data) and a random number of the time-saving effect scenario. The effect control microcomputer 91 first obtains a random number value of a time-saving effect scenario. Then, the time reduction effect scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the obtained random number value, and the time reduction effect scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of two kinds of big hit games after winning in “16R time saving 99 times small hit A” (special figure stop symbol data 25H), if the obtained time saving effect scenario random number is “0 to 63”, If "scenario B" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and if the random value of the time-saving effect scenario is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time-saving effect scenario, and the random number value of the time-saving effect scenario is "96 to 127". If so, “scenario D” is selected as the time reduction effect scenario. In addition, for example, in the case of the ending of a single-type jackpot game after winning the “15R time-saving five-time jackpot D” (special figure stop symbol data 31H), regardless of the acquired time-saving effect scenario random value, the time-saving effect scenario is used. “Scenario H” is selected.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time reduction effect scenario. In FIG. 43, in each of the time reduction effect scenarios (scenarios A to H), the time reduction displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) executed in the time reduction state after the jackpot game. The correspondence between the remaining number of times (remaining number of display time reductions) and the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in “scenario A”, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the display screen 7a to display the same value as the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 as the number of remaining display time reductions. In "scenario B", when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time reductions, and thereafter, the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "96". , The remaining number of display time reductions is reduced along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from “99” to “96”, the number of remaining display time reductions changes from “5” to “2”. Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "95", the display time reduction number is set to "1", and a display indicating that the display time reduction number increases by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the first time-saving effect counter JC1 changes from “94” to “1”, the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times to be displayed. In “Scenario E”, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is “15”, “5” is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time reductions, and thereafter, the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is “12”. , The remaining number of display time reductions is reduced along with the decrease in the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1. That is, when the value of the first time reduction effect counter JC1 changes from “15” to “12”, the number of remaining display time reductions changes from “5” to “2”. Then, when the first time reduction effect counter JC1 is "11", the display time reduction number is set to "1", and a display indicating that the display time reduction number increases by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, until the first time-saving effect counter JC1 changes from “10” to “1”, the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times to be displayed. In this way, by making the display time reduction remaining count different from the actual time reduction remaining count, that is, the value of the first time reduction staging counter JC1, the player is expected that the display time reduction remaining count may increase on the way. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines an ending effect pattern (step S5530). A plurality of types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that an ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this processing.

8. Example effect of this embodiment [Expectation effect of V (when a normal symbol is won in a non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying an expected effect of V. This expected production of V is a non-time saving state, when the special figure 1 is fluctuating or stopped, a normal symbol is won, and the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” (see FIG. 13). Is executed. The expected effect of V is an effect that indicates whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened long, and furthermore, when a game ball enters the electric chew 22, an effect that indicates the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 2. is there.

  The expected production of V is performed during the fluctuating production of the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. 44A by using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at the time of left-handing in the non-time saving state (in this case, a decorative pattern is used). This is executed when the game ball is passed to the second gate 29 during the reach state and a normal symbol is won and the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1”. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4505: YES), and includes this command in the ordinary symbol variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4510). It is determined that the hit type is “long open 1” or “short open 1” from the information on the normally stopped symbol data, and the variation pattern corresponding to the expected effect of V is selected. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of the special figure 1 is not changed until then. The expected cut-in effect of V that displays the image GA1 indicating that the expected effect of V is started is executed using the region that has been performed. The display area HR1 is provided at one corner of the display screen 7a. In the effect of the display area HR1, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the change start process (FIG. 37: step S4460), the change effect start command. This is executed by setting (FIG. 38: Step S5020).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a V-level challenge effect is displayed in which an image GA2 for urging the player to press the effect button 63 and an image GA3 indicating an indicator capable of expressing an increase in points are displayed. . In this V level challenge effect, the player can raise the V level by pressing the effect button 63 to raise the point of the indicator of the image GA3. In this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display region HR1.

  When the hit type of the ordinary symbol is “short opening 1”, the short-time opening of the electric chew 22 for 0.02 seconds (FIG. 14), and then, as shown in FIG. By lowering the point, V indicates an image GA4 indicating that the V level has decreased and the V level has not reached a certain level or more, and an image GA5 indicating that the V level has decreased and indicates that a big hit cannot be expected this time. Perform a level down effect. In the V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown subsequent to the display area HR1.

  On the other hand, if the hit type of the ordinary symbol is “long open 1”, then, as shown in FIG. Point GA is raised to indicate that the V level has risen and the V level has reached a certain level or more, and that the V level has risen and the next stage has proceeded to suggest that the jackpot can be expected. A V level up effect for displaying the image GA7 is executed. In the V-level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown following the display area HR1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), in order to shift to the next stage, an image GA8 for prompting the player to make a right strike to enter the game ball into the electric chew 22 is displayed on the right. Performs a suggestion effect. In the right-handling suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the variable effect of the special figure 1 is shown following the display region HR1. This right-stroke suggestion effect is executed until the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 displayed in the display area HR1 ends. The right pointing suggestion effect is executed based on the ordinary symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80.

  If no ball has entered the electric chute 22, the above-described right-hit suggestion effect is performed, and then the above-described V level down effect shown in FIG. 44D is executed. This V level down effect is executed based on the ordinary symbol ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80. On the other hand, when one or more balls are thrown into the electric chute 22, after the above-mentioned right-handling suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. A V-card shuffle effect of displaying an image GA9 for shuffling the oriented card is executed. In this case, in the display area HR2 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, a variation state of the decorative symbol is shown. The V card shuffle effect and the effect of the display area HR2 are executed based on the change start command received from the main control board 80 by the effect control microcomputer 91 triggered by the winning in the second starting port 21.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment in Toku-zu 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V card shuffle effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (H), the three shuffled in the V card shuffle effect One of the cards is selected and turned over, and a V card selection effect of displaying an image GA10 indicating that the turned up card is a V card is executed. In the display area HR2, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol arrangement indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), an expected success effect of V displaying an image GA11 indicating that the big hit game is executed and a right-turning suggestion image GA12 prompting right-handing is executed. This expected success production of V indicates that the expected production of V is successful and that the expectation of the jackpot (one or two kinds of jackpots) is high. In other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests that. This expected success effect of V is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed after the symbol arrangement of the zigzag pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is finally displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the expected success effect of V is started, and when the big hit symbol is finally displayed, the expected successful effect of V is started. The timing (time) until the time is equal. Here, “equal” does not mean that they completely match, and there may be an error in the timing as long as the player feels equal. The error can be, for example, about ± 2 seconds. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after the expected success performance of the V, and when the player passes the V by right-handing, two kinds of big hits are made, and the game shifts to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect indicating that a big hit (two types of big hits) game is to be executed despite not passing through V (FIG. 44). (I)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, an effect indicating the small hit game or an effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In the present embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the one-type jackpot and the two-type jackpot. In addition, even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the hit / fail determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, after the V-card shuffle effect, as shown in FIG. A card is selected and turned over, and a lost card selection effect of displaying an image GA13 indicating that the flipped card is a lost card is executed. In the display area HR2, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (K), an expected failure effect of V displaying an image GA14 indicating that the expected effect of V is a failure and the game is lost without being a big hit or a small hit and a big hit game is not executed. Execute In this case, in the display area HR2, a symbol array indicating loss is shown using a decorative symbol. If the special figure 2 is suspended, the process shifts to the V card shuffle effect (see FIG. 44 (G)) again after the expected failure effect of V. If there is no suspension of Toku-zu 2, the process shifts to the effect corresponding to ordinary Toku-zu 1.

  Note that the variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (H), and (I) is an example of the effect performed when the variation pattern “P13” (FIG. 12) is selected. The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44 (G), (J), and (K) is an example of the effect performed when the variation pattern “P14” (FIG. 12) is selected.

  Also, a V-level challenge effect (FIG. 44 (C)), a V-level down effect (FIG. 44 (D)), a V-level increase effect (FIG. 44 (E)), and a right-handed suggestion effect (FIG. 44 (F)) In FIG. 44A, the variable effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44A is shown in the display area HR1, but the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 is suspended. In this case, the variable effect corresponding to the next special figure 1 is continuously displayed.

  Further, in the expected effect of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted. Also, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and FIG. 50 described later, similarly, the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C is omitted.

[Roll game production]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a winning game effect when the special figure 2 lottery is won. This winning game effect is executed when a large hit or a small hit is made in the lottery of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the opening command of the big hit game or the small hit game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4480). When it is determined from the information on the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that the special figure 2 has a big hit or a small hit, the corresponding opening effect start command is set and executed. This winning game effect: FIG. 45 (A) is, for example, an effect (expected successful effect of V: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette successful effect: FIG. 46 (C), Successful application: executed after FIG. 48 (C)).

  First, at the start of the big hit game with one type of big hit or at the start of the small hit game with a small hit, as shown in FIG. A suggestion image GB1 and a right-handed suggestion image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), an image GB3 indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed using a predetermined character or the like, and a right strike suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

  The effects of FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are continued in a single-type jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter, also referred to as a “first game period”) elapses from the start of the jackpot game. In the small hitting game, the game is continued from the start of the small hitting game until the first game period elapses. That is, in both the large hit game and the small hit game, an effect of the same content (similarity) is performed during the first game period. In the first game period, at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small hit game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (here, 1.6). Seconds) or more than the total time (1.61 seconds). Here, the first game period is a period from the start of the small hitting game to the end of the small hitting game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big winning opening 35 (1.6 seconds)) 4.61 seconds of (+ ending time (3 seconds)) is set. When the first game period has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game associated with one type of jackpot, or when the first game period has elapsed since the start of the small hit game and two types of jackpots due to V passing are determined, As shown in FIG. 45 (C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that a big hit game is being played, and a right strike suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when two kinds of big hits are made after the small hit game, the effects of FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C) are executed as in the case of one kind of big hit.

  On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game due to the small hit and the non-execution of the big hit game is determined by the V non-passage, instead of the image GB4, FIG. As shown, an image GB5 indicating that the jackpot game is not executed is displayed.

  In the hit game effect according to the present embodiment, the effect during the one-type jackpot game is the same as the effect during the small-hit game accompanying the small hit and the effect during the two-type jackpot game (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (B)). C)). In other words, the effect from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game and the effect from the start of the small hit game to the end of the two big hit games are the same effect. Even if the two kinds of big hits are not executed after the small hitting game accompanying the small hitting, at least during the small hitting game, the same effect as in the case of the one kind big hit (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) ) Is performed, and after the first game period elapses, an effect (FIG. 45 (D)) different from the case of the one-type jackpot is performed. The "similar (same) effect" here means that the content is close enough to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the jackpot and small hit effects, and the effects need not be completely the same. . For example, when some characters are different, when some aspects of the predetermined character (for example, clothes, clothes color, equipment) are different, or when the appearance timing of the predetermined character is slightly different, etc. Naturally, it is included in similar productions. In the hit game effect according to the present embodiment, when two kinds of big hits occur after the small hit game, the big hit game effects (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) are started based on the V passing by the small hit game. Rather, the big hit game effect is configured to start at the time of starting the small hit game (that is, based on the fixed display of the small hit symbol). In other words, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is made, an effect indicating a small hit game (for example, an effect instructing a player to aim at V) is not performed at the time of the small hit game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is definitely displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the small hit game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) starts. ) And the timing (time) from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the jackpot game effect (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), (C)) starts. . As is clear from the above, a series of effects (expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I) → FIG. 45 (A) → FIG. 45 (B)) suggesting that the jackpot game is executed is small. The same content (similar effect) is obtained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects in the case of a hit and the case of one type of large hit. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period from the start of the expected success production of V to the end of the small hit game at the time of the small hit winning. For example, when the expected success production time of V is 5 seconds and the small hitting game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. In addition, instead of the expected success effect of V: FIG. 44 (I), a success effect of V roulette: FIG. 46 (C), and a target success effect: FIG. (C)). Here, both the V roulette success production time and the target success production time are 5 seconds.

[Various production at the time of special drawing 2 lottery (at the time reduction state)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a fluctuation effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery. The fluctuation effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the time reduction state, at the time of the small hit of the special drawing 2, at the time of the big hit of the special figure 2, or at the time of the loss of the special figure 2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the change effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), When the variation pattern is determined to be “P16” to “P19” (FIG. 12) from the information on the variation pattern included, the process is executed by setting the corresponding variation effect start command (FIG. 38: Step) S5020).

  In the variation effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46A, a V roulette effect displaying an image GC1 showing a roulette having a loss zone and a V zone rotating is executed. In this case, the display area HR3 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the state of variation of the decorative symbol.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, as shown in FIG. A V zone selection effect for displaying an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone is executed. In the display area HR3, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol arrangement indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (C), a V-roulette success effect of displaying an image GC3 indicating that the big hit game is executed and a right-turning suggestion image GC4 is executed. This V-roulette success production indicates that the V-roulette production is successful and the expectation of the jackpot (one or two kinds of jackpots) is high. In other words, the expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. It is a production that suggests. Similar to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), the V roulette success effect is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) elapses after the Zo-solo pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. Be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is finally displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the successful V-roulette effect is started, and from when the big hit symbol is finally displayed until the successful V-roulette effect is started. And the timing (time) is equal. In the case of a small hit, a small hit game is executed after the successful V roulette effect, and when the player passes the V by right-handing, two kinds of big hits are made and the game shifts to a big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect suggesting that a big hit (two types of big hits) game is executed regardless of whether or not the vehicle has passed V (FIG. 46). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, an effect indicating the small hit game or an effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In this embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 46 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the one-type jackpot and the two-type jackpot. In addition, even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), after the V roulette effect, the roulette running in the V roulette effect stops, and the stop zone is a loss zone. A loss zone selection effect of displaying the image GC5 indicating that In the display region HR3, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), a V roulette failure effect is displayed in which an image GC6 indicating that the V roulette effect has failed, the game has been lost, and the jackpot game is not executed is displayed. In the display area HR3, a symbol array indicating loss is shown using a decorative symbol. When the special figure 2 is suspended, after the failed V-roulette effect, the process shifts to the V-roulette effect again (see FIG. 46A).

  In the time-saving state, a hit / fail judgment is performed on the special figure 1 and a large hit (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P8” is selected) or a small hit (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P9” is selected) In FIG. 46, the effects of FIGS. In addition, the hit / fail judgment is performed in the special figure 1, and in the case of a loss (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P10” is selected), as in the case of the loss in the special figure 2, FIGS. , (E). In addition, in the time saving state, a loss occurs in the hit determination of the special figure 2 (FIG. 12: when the variation pattern “P19” is selected), or a loss occurs in the hit determination of the special figure 1 (FIG. 12: the variation pattern). When “P11” is selected), a variable effect of quickly notifying a loss using a decorative symbol is executed.

[Countdown production (when changing working hours)
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. This countdown effect is an effect in which the image of the number of remaining time savings is displayed on the display screen 7a during each of the varying effects in the time saving state. The countdown effect is started from the first fluctuation of the special symbol in a time-saving state after the jackpot game. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M Is "2", the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020). The “number of remaining hours saved in the countdown effect” shown in the image is determined by referring to the time-saving effect scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time-saving effect scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the “remaining number of times saved” shown in the image is the same as the actual number of times left remaining until the time saving state ends (actual number of remaining fluctuations), or the number of times less than the actual remaining number of times saved. Is shown as a pseudo time-saving remaining number. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of an effect corresponding to “scenario C”.

  In the countdown effect based on “scenario C”, first, as shown in FIG. 47A, a countdown effect A is displayed. In the countdown effect A, in the first variation after the time saving state is reached, the remaining time saving image GDA with the “display remaining number of times” set to 5 is displayed, and from the second variation to the fifth variation, the previous variation is used. The remaining time saving image GDA representing the number obtained by subtracting one from the displayed remaining time saving number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect A, in the second variation, the image GDA indicating the remaining number of display time reductions in which “the number of remaining display time reductions” is four is displayed, and in the fifth variation, the “number of remaining display time reductions” is set to one. The image GDA of the number of remaining time savings is displayed.

  When the display of the number-of-time-savings-remaining-times image GDA of the fifth change in the countdown effect A is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47B, the charge effect A is executed during the change effect of the fifth change. In the charge effect A, the charge image CHA indicating that the “remaining number of display time savings” is charged (increased) about ten times is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 47C, a countdown effect B is executed. In the countdown effect B, in the sixth change, which is the next change of the charge effect A, the charge (10 times) is subtracted by one (0) from the remaining number (1) in the previous change (fifth change). The number of times (10 times) increased by the number of times (the number of times) is displayed as the “remaining number of times to be displayed” image GDB is displayed. A time saving remaining number image GDB representing the subtracted remaining number is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect B, in the sixth variation, the image GDB indicating the remaining number of display time reductions with “display remaining number of times” set to 10 is displayed. The remaining number-of-times image GDB is displayed, and at the fifteenth variation, the remaining number-of-times-savings image GDB with the “remaining number of times for display” set to one is displayed.

  When the display of the number-of-time-remaining-shortest images GDB at the fifteenth change in the countdown effect B ends, next, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the charge effect B is executed during the fifteenth change fluctuation effect. In the charge effect B, a charge image CHB indicating that the “remaining display time number” is charged (increased) about 84 times is displayed.

  Next, a countdown effect C is executed as shown in FIG. In the countdown effect C, at the 16th change, which is the next change of the charge effect B, the charge (84 times) is obtained by subtracting one (0) from the remaining number (1) of the previous change (15th change). The number of times (84 times) increased by “number of times” is displayed as the “remaining number of times to be displayed” image GDC is displayed, and from the 17th variation to the 99th variation, one from the remaining number of times indicated by the previous variation is displayed. An image GDC showing the remaining number of times reduced is displayed. For example, in the countdown effect C, the 16th variation displays the image GDC with the remaining number of display time savings set to “84”, and the 17th variation displays the time reduction when the “number of remaining display time reductions” is 83 times. The remaining number of times image GDC is displayed.

  Note that the countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each of the time-varying fluctuation effects. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each fluctuation effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each fluctuation effect. Further, during each of the fluctuation effects, the image of the number of remaining working hours may be continuously displayed.

[One-time production of crying (production of the first change (Special Figure 2) after the end of working hours)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time production of crying. This one-time production of crying is a variation production performed in the next variation of the special change 2 when the hold of the special figure 2 is held in the last variation of the time reduction state, that is, the first production after the reduction of time This is the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation effect start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), the special effect flag Is ON, the corresponding fluctuation effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020).

  In the one-time production of crying, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), an image GE1 showing a state in which a “target” consisting of a hit zone and a losing zone is rotating, and a state advantageous to the player last. And a target start effect of displaying an image GE2 indicating that In this case, in the display area HR4 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a, the variation state of the decorative symbol is shown.

  In the case where the result of the hit / fail judgment of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the hitting start effect, as shown in FIG. 48B, the arrow hits the hit hit zone. A hit effect for displaying the image GE3 indicating that the target hit is executed. In the display area HR4, after the reach state using the decorative symbol is shown, the symbol array indicating the small hit or one type of big hit is stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), an image GE4 suggesting that a jackpot game is executed and a right-hit suggestion image GE5 prompting right-handing are displayed. A hit success effect that indicates that the degree of expectation of one type of jackpot or two types of jackpot is high, in other words, that the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed is high. Similarly to the expected success effect of V (FIG. 44 (I)), the target success effect is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 second) elapses after the symbol arrangement in the display area HR2 is stopped and displayed. Be started. That is, the timing (time) from when the small hit symbol is definitely displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the successful hitting effect is started, and between the time when the big hit symbol is finally displayed and the hitting successful effect is started. And the timing (time) is equal. In the case of a small hit, the small hit game is executed after the successful hitting effect, and the player hits the right, and when passing V, there are two kinds of big hits, and the game shifts to the big hit game. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, the variable effect is stopped, and an effect indicating that a big hit (two kinds of big hits) game is executed regardless of whether or not the vehicle has passed V (FIG. 48). (C)) is started. Then, at the time of the small hit game, an effect indicating the small hit game or an effect indicating the V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small hit, the player does not notice the small hit game and can be made to think that he / she has won one kind of big hit. In this embodiment, the same effect (FIG. 48 (C)) is started in the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, together with the stop of the variable effect. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the one-type jackpot and the two-type jackpot. In addition, even if the numbers of the zigzag lines stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different between the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. Further, in the case of the big hit and the small hit, the expected success effect of V may be started before the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol is definitely displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination in Toku-zu 2 is a loss, after the target application start effect, as shown in FIG. 48D, an image GE6 indicating that the arrow hits the target loss zone A target loss effect is displayed. In the display area HR4, a reach state using a decorative symbol is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), a hit-appearance failure effect of displaying an image GE7 indicating that the hit is a failure and the big hit or small hit is lost and the big hit game is not executed as shown in FIG. . In the display area HR4, a symbol array indicating loss is shown using a decorative symbol.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (A) to (C) in the single effect of crying are obtained when the fluctuation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first change from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. The effects shown in FIGS. 48 (A), (D), and (E) show the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12) in the first variation that has shifted from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. ) Is an example of an effect performed when “” is selected.

9. Operation of Board Movable Body The operation of the board movable body (the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control for operating the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 during a game effect (display effect) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation at the time of power-on, or the like, or causes the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors to display a specific image. A display / light emission control for emitting light in a specific manner is performed.

  The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory view illustrating the movement of the first movable auditorium 14 in the advance direction (movement in the advance direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory view illustrating a second mode of the first movable role object 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a combined effect of the first movable auditors 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory view exemplifying the rotation operation of the first movable role object 14. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams exemplifying a light emitting mode of the first movable role object 14.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable role 14 includes a left movable role 14L and a right movable role 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portions (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) are attached to the distal end side. That is, each of the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion has a half arc shape of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable role 14 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable role 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable role 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are partially visible. In the first movable role 14, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in directions approaching each other) from the state of FIG. 1 as shown in FIG. By moving, at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50, the left-side decorative portion and the right-side decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (united unit) (second mode). Here, the united role forms the outline of the face. In the second aspect, the united product in which the left-side decorative portion and the right-side decorative portion are united covers a portion near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7 and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the united body forms only the outline of the face, has no central portion of the face, and is configured so that the display screen 7a can be visually recognized instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined character, thereby completing the human face as a whole. That is, by displaying a missing portion (for example, the center portion of the face) in the combined role as an image on the display screen 7a, a combined effect of the role and image that completes one object (for example, a human face) is achieved. Can be performed. The target completed by the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be an entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed with the combined role, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable auditorium 14 can move to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retreating) from the advanced position in FIGS. 50 and 51 via the state in FIG. 49, and stops there. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the combined object can be rotated vertically in front of the display screen 7a. In other words, the united role can be rotated about an axis parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a as a rotation axis, and can be stopped at an arbitrary inclined angle. At this time, the central opening of the united role has an elliptical shape whose vertical direction is gradually narrower when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the person's face to be displayed is deformed according to the deformation of the opening into an elliptical shape. Thereby, for example, it is possible to perform an effect as if a human face is bowed by the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable role object 14 is configured to emit light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the united role (decorative member), and each of them is configured to be switchable between ON and OFF. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable movable object 14 </ b> R can emit light in association with (corresponding to) light emission of the frame lamp 66. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the right movable role 14R and the left movable role 14L can emit light in conjunction with each other.

  The operation of the second movable role 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable role object 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotation operation of the second movable role object 15. The second movable role 15 includes a rectangular decorative portion described as “OARO”, and is configured to be able to move vertically and horizontally. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable role 15 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role object 15 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the second movable role object 15. The second movable auditorium 15 moves downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a, and can stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 55 (second mode). . In the second aspect, the decoration unit stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover a portion slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, this decorative portion can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (rotate clockwise in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at an arbitrary inclined angle. The second movable role 15 can move to the retreat position shown in FIG. 1 by moving upward (retreat) from the advanced position in FIGS. 55 and 56, and can stop there.

  With reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, a description will be given of a combination effect of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect by the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a second combination effect using the first movable auditors's hand 14 and the second movable auditors's hand 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 can execute the first combination effect by being both in the second mode. That is, when both the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 move to the advanced position, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable role 14. In other words, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 can be stopped in a state where they are partially overlapped and combined. Further, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 are, as shown in FIG. 58, in a state where the second movable role 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable role 14, and A second combination effect in which the movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 are each inclined at a predetermined angle can be performed. In the second combination effect, the first movable effect is formed by rotating (tilting) the two movable characters together, or by moving to the advanced position in an inclined state and overlapping each other. In some cases, the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the one combination effect.

10. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspects of the Present Embodiment Each effect example (display effect example, movable object effect example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 as described above, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

  The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This change timing change effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect, the first movable role 14 or the second movable role is analyzed. 15 is driven.

[Variation timing change effect A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation timing change effect A. In the fluctuation timing change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 59A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, three hold icons 9A are displayed. A black spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first holding display position. A star-shaped holding icon 9A is displayed at the second second holding display position from the right. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third (the leftmost in this case) third holding display position from the right. Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in a variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, the holding icon of the white sphere reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, and at the same time, two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are simultaneously stopped and displayed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low degree of expectation of winning, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) simultaneously start changing and are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the black sphere holding icon 9A at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. At this time, the stop display of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is maintained. As shown in FIG. 59 (D), the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start to fluctuate at the same time as the black ball holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continuing to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the suspension icon 9C is a suspension icon of a black sphere, the stop display of the two decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the timing of the stop display is shifted. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively medium expectation of hit, two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) are simultaneously started to change. However, the timing of the stop display is not simultaneous but the timing is shifted. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, an effect in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A located at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbol starts variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the first decorative symbol starts changing display. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing before the first decorative symbols 21, 8c, and 8r. In addition, which one starts the change first may be changed every time the change is made (it may be random).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continuing to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped holding icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of hitting, the start timing of the change of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display Timing shifts. After FIG. 59 (J), the hold icon 9A of a white sphere at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In the variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, as shown in FIG. 59A, the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position and at the same time, the two decorative symbols ( The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start the variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are simultaneously stopped and displayed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Variation timing change effect B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the fluctuation timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), three decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8ml, a middle decorative symbol 8mc, and a right decorative symbol 8mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, three hold icons 9A are displayed. A black spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the rightmost first holding display position. A star-shaped holding icon 9A is displayed at the second second holding display position from the right. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third (the leftmost in this case) third holding display position from the right. Here, the hold icon of the same color and shape is displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (A), in a variation in which the white sphere holding icon is the holding display position, the white sphere holding icon reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, and at the same time, three decoration symbols ( The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. You. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively low expectation of winning, the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) start to change simultaneously. Is displayed at the same time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the black holding icon 9A at the first holding display position moves toward the holding display position. At this time, the stop display of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) is maintained. As shown in FIG. 60 (D), the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are displayed at the same time as the black ball holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position. To start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), with the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr continuing to fluctuate, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r. Is stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. That is, when the holding icon 9C is a black sphere holding icon, the stop display of the three decorative symbols is not simultaneous, and the stop timing of the first decorative symbol is the stop timing of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol. It is configured to be out of timing. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stop-displayed before the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). Furthermore, the timings at which the three decorative symbols stop may differ from each other. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical holding icon 9C having a relatively medium expectation degree, three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed. On the other hand, the timing of the stop display is not simultaneous but shifts at least in part at the same time. As shown in FIG. 60 (F), at the same time as the stop display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, an effect in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears) is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A located at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), at the same time when the star-shaped holding icon 9A reaches the holding display position, the first decorative symbol starts changing display. In the present embodiment, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing before the first decorative symbol, but may be reversed. In addition, which one starts the change first may be changed every time the change is made (it may be random). Further, the timings at which the three decorative symbols start to change may be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the first decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r are stopped and displayed while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. You. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), two decorative symbols (a second decorative symbol and a third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), but may be reversed. Further, which one is stopped and displayed first may be changed every time it changes (it may be random). Furthermore, the timings at which the three decorative symbols stop may differ from each other. As described above, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped holding icon 9C having a relatively high expectation of winning, at least a part of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol). , The fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are shifted from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), at the same time when the holding icon of the white ball reaches the holding display position from the first holding display position, three decoration symbols (first decoration symbol, second decoration symbol, and third decoration symbol) are displayed. Start variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. You. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change effect C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) of the fluctuation timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60 (F) and 60 (G) of the fluctuation timing change effect B. That is, before FIG. 61 (A) of the fluctuation timing change effect C, FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (E) are executed. In FIG. 61 (A), after the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed with a delay. . The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8ml, a middle decorative symbol 8mc, and a right decorative symbol 8mr, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) in the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). In the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position, two hold icons 9A are displayed. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first rightmost hold display position. A white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second (from left to right) second holding display position from the right. The difference in the shape and color of the hold icon indicates the difference in the degree of expectation at the time of the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. Here, among the three holding icons 9A of a star-shaped holding icon, a black spherical holding icon, and a white spherical holding icon, the star-shaped holding icon has the highest expectation of winning, and the black spherical holding icon is 2 The expectation of the hit is the second highest, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation of the hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the star-shaped reservation icon 9A located at the first reservation display position moves toward the reservation display position. At this time, of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol), two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start the variable display. The stop display of the first decorative symbol is maintained. That is, the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) start changing display before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the second movable role 15 advances downward and stops in the second mode, and then moves to the retreat position (first mode). The first decorative symbol disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo continuous production starts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Further, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are variably displayed. You. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit point “555”. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to fluctuate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at the same hit points as the second decorative symbol.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the fluctuation timing change effect will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), FIGS. 60 (D) to (H), and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), the first decorative symbol is After the stop display, the first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first effect, in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display, the second decorative symbol is changed to the next one. And a second effect of starting the variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), in the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by the shift movement, the hold icon is displayed in the second decorative symbol. The corresponding fluctuation is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D) to (H) and FIGS. 61 (D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the first effect is displayed. The third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second effect, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display while the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. 61 (H) to (J), (A), after the first effect, the second , And the third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D) to (H), FIGS. 60 (D) to (H), and FIGS. After the first effect, a second effect is performed. When the hold icon has a white spherical shape, a third effect is performed after the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the fluctuation timing change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The first fluctuation in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the second fluctuation in FIGS. 59C to 59F, and the third fluctuation in FIGS. 59G to 60J are executed in an arbitrary order. May be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Further, the same type of change may be repeatedly executed. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of the hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be set arbitrarily. As long as the first decorative symbol 21, the second decorative symbol 8 L, and the third decorative symbol 8 ml are symbols displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the symbol are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
In the first decorative symbol 21, the second decorative symbol 8 </ b> L, and the third decorative symbol 8 ml, the mode of the variable display indicating the change is not limited to the above. For example, the variable display may be a mode that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the number may be displayed at a high speed so that the number cannot be distinguished, or may be moved at a distinguishable speed. Further, the fluctuation speed may change on the way.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative symbol starts to change when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be immediately before or immediately after that. Here, “immediately before and immediately after” means, for example, a range of a few seconds before and after.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative patterns capable of notifying whether or not a hit is achieved,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of reporting whether or not a hit is made,
A first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts the next variable display in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by shift movement, a change corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1 or Aspect A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols capable of notifying whether or not a hit has occurred,
In the first effect, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed,
In the second effect, in a state where the first decorative symbol has not started the next variable display, the third decorative symbol starts the next variable display,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4 according to Aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in the first mode, after the first effect, the second effect is performed,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, after the first effect, the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The design direction change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. The design direction change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol direction change effect, the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors are included. 15 is driven.

[Symbol direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left and downward. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the numeral is inclined rightward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and move to the third position. Stopped and displayed. . The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in a direction different from the fluctuation direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a portion above a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA are changed while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed with the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are fluctuated and displayed in a fluctuating direction different from the fluctuating direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the numeral is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed with the traveling direction (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C), but is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 63A, the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and move to the third position. Is stopped and displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, the display is changed and displayed in the same change direction as the change direction of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number at the time of change. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a portion above a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA are changed while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done. With the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally right and downward. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the same fluctuation direction as the fluctuation direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the numeral is inclined leftward. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move in a state of being tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number at the time of change. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific numeral (intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative symbol 8L or the right decorative symbol 8R, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part above a specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C), and it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the specific number. The direction (posture) of the specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (I), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (J), the specific number (the middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction, and stop display at that position. Is done. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. At this time, each numeral constituting the left decorative symbol 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. That is, each numeral is inclined in the direction along the fluctuation direction, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and a specific number (here, “2”) temporarily stops at a first position near the lower center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also referred to as a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol, and a third decorative symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L), and a part of the specific number is difficult to visually recognize. The direction (posture) of this specific image CHA is also inclined, like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The direction of the specific image CHA and the specific numbers (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move in the vertical direction (straight) while moving to the second upper left position on the display screen 7a. The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation in the direction along the vertical direction, and move to the third position. Stopped and displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

  In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. At this time, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a changing state, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves obliquely downward to the right. That is, the display is changed and displayed in the same change direction as the change direction of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, each numeral constituting the right decorative symbol 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the numeral inclined leftward. In other words, the left decorative symbol 8L moves in a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted to the same degree as the tilt of the number at the time of change. Each numeral is tilted in the direction along the direction of change, and the bottom of each numeral is displayed with the traveling direction (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a specific image CHA is displayed below the specific numeral (the right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative design 8L, but may be an image having different contents. The specific image CHA covers a part below a specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R), and it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the specific number. The direction of the specific image CHA is also inclined like the specific number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), an effect is performed in which the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and the orientation of the specific numeral (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA are changed while maintaining the mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and have a direction (straight) along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the specific numeral (the right decorative symbol 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining the orientation along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64H, the display is stopped at that position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the change of the middle decoration symbol 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are fluctuated and displayed in a fluctuating direction different from the fluctuating direction. At this time, each numeral constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C moves in a state where the direction (posture) of the numeral is along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of change, and the bottom of each number is displayed with the traveling direction (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually decreases, and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, “2”) is located near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above the specific numeral (intermediate decorative pattern 8C) but is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the symbol direction change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and (B), the left decorative pattern is oriented along the first direction and oriented along the first direction (for example, diagonally right). (C) After the first effect variably displayed in the (direction) and after the first effect, as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to (E), the left decorative symbol differs from the first direction in the second direction ( (For example, a vertical direction), and the second effect stopped and displayed in the direction along the vertical direction). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol reaches the first position in a direction along a first direction (eg, a diagonal right direction). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the direction moves along the second direction (for example, the vertical direction) while moving toward the second position located vertically above the first position. After reaching the second position, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), while maintaining the orientation along the second direction, the third position located vertically below the second position. Move toward the position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 (B) and (C), in the second effect, the left decorative symbol moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a part of the image by the specific image CHA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), after the second effect, the right decorative symbol is newly changed from the non-display state to the first direction (for example, the right oblique direction). 63G, after the third effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the right decorative symbol moves along the second direction. And the fourth effect stopped and displayed in the wrong direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), after the fourth effect, the orientation of the middle decorative pattern along a third direction (for example, a vertical direction) different from the first direction. Thus, a fifth effect that is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. Is the direction along. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the symbol direction change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
Although the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are specific numbers, they need not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L bounces after the change display and becomes a direction along the vertical direction. Good. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by leaning to the left or sideways after bouncing. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed by changing its direction without bouncing after the variable display.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C, the right decorative symbol may be visually recognizable (variable display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol stops, or after the left decorative symbol stops, The change may be visible (the change display is displayed). The same applies to the middle decorative pattern.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be appropriately combined. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set as the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the change direction and the stop mode of the middle decoration symbol may be set as the symbol direction change effect C.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the second effect, after the first decorative symbol reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction, the second decorative symbol is located on one side in the vertical direction from the first position. While moving toward the position, the direction becomes the direction along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the direction is more vertical than the second position while maintaining the direction along the second direction. Move toward a third position located on the other side of the direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or Aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, when the first decorative pattern moves toward the second position after arriving at the first position, a part of the first decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative design that constitutes a set of decorative designs that can notify whether or not a hit has been made, together with the first decorative design,
After the second effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which the second decorative symbol is newly displayed in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction from a state where the second decorative pattern is not displayed. Production and
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the direction along the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern that, together with the first decorative pattern, constitutes a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether or not a hit has occurred,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction and in a direction along the third direction. Executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display unit,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the following, the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory design cooperation effect can be executed, for example, during the fluctuation effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the accessory design coordination effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory design coordination effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory The object 15 is driven.

[Director's design coordination effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for describing the accessory design coordination effect A. The accessory design coordination effect A is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo coordination effect, and FIGS. 65 (A) to (J) are executed with one fluctuation. In the accessory design coordination effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped (including a temporary stop display), a pseudo continuous start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect, the second movable role 15 moves downward from the retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, and a part of the display screen 7a. To rest at the forward position covering the. The shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes (deforms) with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the advanced position. Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role object 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols and changes the symbols again. That is, the pseudo run is executed. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific target (characters, graphics, symbols, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable auditory piece 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which indicates that the player has a special effect for the player. It can impress and enhance the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the fluctuation display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (including the temporary stop display), the pseudo continuous continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65 (G) is executed. The pseudo-sequence continuation suggestion effect is an effect similar to the pseudo-serial start suggestion effect described above. That is, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position. With the movement to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15. It should be noted that the mode of the deformation may be different from the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific target (characters, graphics, symbols, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, it is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Combined character design B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing the accessory design coordination effect B. The official character design coordination effect B is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo coordination effect, and FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (B) show the previous one fluctuation, and FIGS. This is the next one change including pseudo continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 66A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped (including a fixed stop display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r start changing display. The stop display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position.

  Next, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, first, in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r continue to fluctuate, the first decoration that has been stopped at the last fixed stop display item “123” is displayed. The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo continuous start suggestion display of “Go !!!!” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed. It stops at the forward position where it covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo-sequence start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change in shape (deformation) as the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position. I do. Here, the shape of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R gradually collapses in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are deformed so as to be crushed by the second movable role 15 and distorted. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15, the player does not determine the stopped and displayed symbols, and the fluctuation is executed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, “OARO”) same as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific target (characters, graphics, symbols, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are continuously displayed. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. It is possible to impress that, and to improve the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r are continuously displaying the variable symbols, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8 L, 8 C, and 8 R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variably displayed state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped (including the temporary stop display) in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, 8r continue to fluctuate. ), And then, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again start the variable display. That is, a pseudo continuous production is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, it is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Director's design coordination effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory design cooperation effect C. The official figure design coordination effect C is one of the fluctuation pattern effects including the pseudo continuous effect. FIGS. This is the next one change including pseudo continuous production. First, as shown in FIG. 67A, two sets of decorative symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which the first decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbol includes a left decorative symbol 8l, a middle decorative symbol 8c, and a right decorative symbol 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including a fixed stop display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the hold icon 9A located at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r start changing display. The stop display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained. That is, in the second decorative symbol, the change display is started before the hold icon 9A at the first hold display position starts moving and reaches the hold display position.

  Next, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, first, in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8 c, and 8 r continue to fluctuate, the first decoration that has been stopped at the last fixed stop display item “123” is displayed. The display of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily disappears, and instead, a pseudo continuous start suggestion display of “Go !!!!” is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable role 15 is moved (advanced) downward from the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and displayed. A part of the screen 7a is covered and a rotation operation is executed at that position. As a result, after the pseudo-sequence start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change in shape with the downward movement and the rotation of the second movable role 15. (Deform. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are cracked and the shape is gradually collapsed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are crushed by the second movable role 15 and are distorted and deformed so as to crack. Since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed are crushed and cracked by the second movable role 15, the stopped displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuations are not repeated. It can be noticed that it is executed, that is, that the pseudo run is executed. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an image corresponding to the character “OARO” of the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable auditorium 15 has returned to the retracted position, the same character (that is, “OARO”) as the decorative portion of the second movable auditorium 15 is largely displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. . Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to a specific target (characters, graphics, symbols, etc.) displayed on the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15, and is completely the same. It need not be color or shape. At this time, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image having the same content as the decorative portion of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to impress the player with a special effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), re-variable display of both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop display (including the temporary stop display) in a state where the second decorative symbols 21, 8c, 8r continue to fluctuate. ), And then, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again start the variable display. That is, a pseudo continuous production is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, it is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the accessory design coordination effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (G), After the first effect, the second effect in which the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display screen 7a. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), in the second effect, the shapes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are distorted as the second movable role 15 moves. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the second movable role 15 has a decorative portion represented as “OARO”. As shown, after the second effect, a third effect in which “OARO” is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (C) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (C) to (J), the first effect and the second effect change during one change. In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which it is stopped and displayed after the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (G) to (J), after the third effect, a pseudo continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (C) and FIG. 67 (C), one of the plurality of types of images has a second pattern different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It is a decorative symbol, and in the first effect, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the accessory design cooperation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the role design A, the process from FIG. 65 (A) to FIG. 65 (J) is executed with one change. However, FIGS. 65 (A) and 65 (B) and FIGS. 65 (C) and 65 (J) may be different from each other. In addition, in the character design coordination effects B and C, FIG. 66 (A) to FIG. 66 (B) and FIG. 67 (A) to FIG. 67 (B) fluctuate by one, and FIG. 66 (C) to FIG. (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 67 (A) to (J) may be executed with one change.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of the decorative pattern illustrated in the role-design cooperative effects A to C are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable role 15 advances is not limited to a distorted mode. For example, the decorative pattern may be broken and fall apart, or may have the same shape and a smaller size.

[Modification 3]
Although the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers in the official character symbol cooperation effect A, the decorative symbols need not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. While the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, the change display may temporarily disappear or may not be continuously changed. Here, the fluctuating display means a state in which the fluctuating mode is displayed so as to be visible.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the accessory design coordination effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, in FIG. 66 (E) of the accessory design cooperation effect B, the effect of FIG. 67 (E) of the accessory design cooperation effect C may be performed. In addition, for example, in the pseudo-sequence effect of FIGS. 66 (G) to (J) of the character-design cooperative effect B, a pseudo-sequence effect of the character-design cooperative effect A may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A movable machine movable in front of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
After the first effect, a second effect in which the shape of the decorative symbol changes as the movable character moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
In the second effect, the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable role moves.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or Aspect A3-2,
The movable accessory has a decorative portion in which a specific object is represented,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific target is displayed on the display means can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-3,
After the third performance, a pseudo continuous performance is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect A3-1 to Aspect A3-4,
The first effect and the second effect are executed during one change,
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode in which the first effect is stopped and displayed after a change immediately before the change performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This specific image symbol cooperative effect can be executed during a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperative effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image symbol cooperative effect, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role are provided. The object 15 is driven.

[Specific image design coordination effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect A. In the specific image symbol coordination effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped (including a temporary stop display) at the outlying "123". The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Thereafter, a pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only a movement in a strictly horizontal direction but also a movement in a substantially horizontal direction. In other words, anything that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, “the image is displayed on the front side” with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which an image is displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof. As shown in (E), an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally in the back side. By the reciprocating movement on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (G), an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, a fade-out effect is performed as shown in FIG. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start the variable display again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, it is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Specific image design coordination effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect B. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after the variable display are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the outlying “789”. Stop display (including temporary stop display) is performed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed.

  Thereafter, the pseudo consecutive suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and (C) are executed. In the pseudo continuous start suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (C) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. I do. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then reciprocates along the horizontal direction. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only a movement in a strictly horizontal direction but also a movement in a substantially horizontal direction. In other words, anything that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, “the image is displayed on the front side” with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which an image is displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (B), the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof and the specific image. As shown in FIG. 68 (E) of the symbol coordination effect A, an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the front side thereof is repeated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally on the back side. The reciprocating movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side overlaps both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68 (F) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, an effect is performed in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, so that the stop-displayed symbols are not fixed, and the fluctuation is executed again. It can be noticed that the pseudo run is executed. As a result, the interest can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again start the variable display. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, it is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot determination suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that the jackpot has been determined, and in this case, the characters “Done!” Are displayed. Here, two jackpot determination suggestion images CHB are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed at the big hit. The specific image CHA and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB are both displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the big hit determination suggestion image CHB is displayed in front of the specific image CHA. In this way, a plurality of images overlap with each other to produce a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the jackpot determination suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is horizontally overlapped with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in which the specific image CHA is stopped and displayed. To reciprocate. Since the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display are arranged in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the arrangement direction of the decorative symbols. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L as shown in FIG. 69 (G) due to the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, and is displayed on the front side thereof, and FIG. As shown in (B), an effect of overlapping with the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R and repeating the aspect displayed on the front side is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and reciprocates horizontally on the back side. By the reciprocating movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R overlap and are displayed on the back side thereof. As shown in FIG. 69 (C), an effect is provided in which both the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L are overlapped, and the mode displayed on the back side thereof is repeated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (I) of the specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually thinned in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Recognition becomes difficult (fade out). This allows the player to notice that the stop-displayed jackpot decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become difficult to see, so that the jackpot game is started thereafter. As a result, the interest can be improved. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), a right-hit image MGU is displayed, and thereafter a big hit game is executed.

[Specific image design coordination effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing the specific image symbol cooperation effect C. In the specific image symbol cooperation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70A, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. More specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the first hold display area on the left of the hold display position, four hold icons 9A are displayed. The specific image CHA is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a and moves to a position overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed. The specific image CHA represents a specific target. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smile face. The specific target is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction in a state where the specific image CHA overlaps the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed. The term "reciprocate in the horizontal direction" as used herein includes not only a movement in a strictly horizontal direction but also a movement in a substantially horizontal direction. In other words, anything that can be recognized by those skilled in the art as moving in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, “the image is displayed on the front side” with respect to another image is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when the two images are displayed overlapping. That is, specifically, a state in which an image is displayed without missing in an overlapping portion of two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, they are displayed as if they are located on the back side (rear side), and a state in which the images are missing and displayed in the overlapping portion of the two images. , An image is "displayed on the back side" with respect to another image.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the up and down direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the left decorative symbol 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeral image forming the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative symbol 8R among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the up and down direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the left decorative symbol 8L has its fluctuation speed further reduced, and is stopped and displayed at a specific number (here, “1”). Since the specific image CHA continues to reciprocate in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. Also, it overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeral image constituting the right decorative pattern 8R. Also, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L during the stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), the fluctuation speed of the middle decoration pattern 8C among the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is reduced, and starts to fluctuate (move) in the up and down direction in a state where the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the right decorative symbol 8R has its fluctuation speed further reduced, and is stopped and displayed at a specific number (here, “7”). Since the specific image CHA continues the reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps with a plurality of moving numeric images constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C. Also, it overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the numeral image forming the middle decorative pattern 8C. Also, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R during the stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the outlier "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA changes is executed. Here, an effect of increasing the specific image CHA is performed as one of the change effects, but the mode of the change is not limited to this. For example, the specific image CHA may change to a different image content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. By this change effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the outlier will change again, thereby improving the interest.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a multiple effect in which a plurality of specific images CHA are displayed is executed. Here, as one of the multiple effects, an effect in which one specific image CHA is additionally displayed is performed, but the mode of the multiple operation is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific images CHA may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added reciprocates on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are continuously stopped and displayed. The newly added specific image CHA is reciprocating on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed. This pluralization effect can further increase the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at the outliers will change again, thereby improving the interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA are framed out. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward, the other moves downward, and simultaneously goes out of the frame. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (I), a pseudo-link suggestion image NKM indicating that the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started (start of the pseudo-link) is displayed. Here, in the pseudo-run suggestion image NKM, characters of “second time !!” indicating the number of pseudo-runs are shown. At this time, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), when the pseudo consecutive suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are again displayed in a variable manner.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the specific image symbol cooperation effect will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to (E), the first effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, As shown in FIGS. 68 (F) to 68 (G), after the first effect, the second effect in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be executed. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (D) to (G), in the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the left decorative symbols 8L, the middle decorative symbols 8C, and the right decorative symbols 8R that can notify whether or not a hit has occurred. In the first effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), it is displayed so as to overlap with at least one other of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to (G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the specific image CHA reciprocates along the horizontal direction. This makes it possible to visually entertain the player, thereby improving the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), in the first effect, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed without the specific image CHA being displayed. As shown in FIGS. 68 (C) to (D), the specific image CHA includes an effect of being newly displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to visually recognize due to fade-out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the specific image symbol cooperation effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to be simultaneously overlapped with the two symbol images. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap only one symbol image, or may overlap three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the specific image CHA moves in the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may draw an arc or meander. Further, it may move left and right while swinging in the vertical direction. Further, it may be stopped halfway.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but may not be numbers. It may be a character graphic symbol. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. While the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, the change display may temporarily disappear or may not be continuously changed. Here, the fluctuating display means a state in which the fluctuating mode is displayed so as to be visible.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, after FIGS. 68 (A) to (I), FIGS. 70 (A) to (J) may be executed. For example, after FIGS. 70 (A) to (J), FIGS. 69 (D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
A first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol;
A second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern after the first effect, and
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
In the first effect and the second effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-2,
The decorative pattern includes a plurality of pattern images that can notify whether or not a hit,
In the first effect, after the specific image is displayed so as to overlap with one or more of the plurality of symbol images, it is displayed so as to overlap with at least one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-3,
In the first effect, the symbol images are stopped and displayed side by side in a first direction, and the specific image reciprocates along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first effect includes an effect in which, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the specific image is not displayed, the specific image is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol by frame-in. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to visually recognize due to fade-out,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative design mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative symbol mode change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative design mode change effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main image. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decoration design mode change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect A. In the decorative design mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design change effect is provided by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R ( (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc such that the left decorative symbol 8L bends rightward from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slow. It is displayed while changing. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L further decreases, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the previous numeral “9” changes. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the number “9”, the image of the number “9” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “9”. It changes to an aspect. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved orbit in an arc so as to turn leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the moving speed is slowing down. It is displayed while changing. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in the present embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the numeral “5” is changed. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the number “5”, the image of the number “5” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “5”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being changed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or gradually smaller as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the moving speed of the middle decoration pattern 8C further decreases, and one of the middle decoration patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) becomes the middle decoration pattern. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), the mode of the image of the above-mentioned number “3” changes after the middle decorative pattern 8C is rotated horizontally at the stop display position. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number “3” is slightly smaller than the image of the number “3”, and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “3”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the stop display position middle decorative pattern 8C disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (losing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decoration pattern mode change effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect B. In the decorative design mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, a decorative design change effect is performed by the left decorative pattern 8 L, the middle decorative pattern 8 C, and the right decorative pattern 8 R ( (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears is performed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory in a diagonally upper left direction from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slow. . At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L further decreases, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) becomes the left decorative symbol. 8L rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative symbol 8L may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the numeral “9” changes. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the number “9”, the image of the number “9” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “9”. It changes to an aspect. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears. More specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variably manner while moving along a linear trajectory from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side diagonally downward while the moving speed decreases. . That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in the present embodiment) becomes the right decorative symbol. 8R rotates sideways at the stop display position where stop display is performed. The rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the right decorative symbol 8R may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), after the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the above-mentioned number “5” changes. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the number “5”, the image of the number “5” is slightly smaller and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “5”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being changed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or gradually smaller as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further reduced, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) becomes the middle decorative pattern. 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position where the stop display is performed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is rotated horizontally at the stop display position, the mode of the image of the number “3” is changed. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number “3” is slightly smaller than the image of the number “3”, and the image of the character is attached to the lower right of the image of the number “3”. It changes to an aspect. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the stop display position middle decorative pattern 8C disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost mode (losing symbol). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decoration design mode change effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol mode change effect C. In the decorative design mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, a decorative design change effect (left decorative design 8 L, middle decorative design 8 C, and right decorative design 8 R). (Variation display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After the variable display is performed at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may or may not temporarily disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc such that the left decorative symbol 8L bends rightward from the near side to the far side of the display screen 7a while the moving speed is slow. It is displayed while changing. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed smaller gradually as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is further reduced, and one of the left decorative symbols 8L (the image of the numeral “9” in the present embodiment) is the left decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number “9” of the left decorative symbol 8L changes from blue to red. The color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any color, and the color may be changed from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the mode of the image of the red number “9” is changed. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the red numeral “9” is slightly smaller and the lower right of the image of the red numeral “9” is slightly smaller than the image of the red numeral “9”. Changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached to the image. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative symbols 8L other than the left decorative symbol 8L at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), an effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R appears is performed. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R moves along a curved orbit in an arc so as to turn leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the moving speed is slowing down. It is displayed while changing. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger as it moves toward the near side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving speed of the right decorative symbol 8R further decreases, and one of the right decorative symbols 8R (the image of the numeral “5” in the present embodiment) is the right decorative symbol. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number “5” of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from blue to red. The color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any color, and the color may be changed from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), in the right decorative pattern 8R, the mode of the image of the red number “5” is changed. Specifically, from the aspect of the image of the red number “5”, the image of the red number “5” is slightly smaller than the image of the red number “5”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is lower right of the image of the red number “5”. Changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), an effect in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears is performed. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed while being variably displayed while moving along a linear trajectory from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a while moving at a slower speed. That is, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed while being changed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change with the movement. It should be noted that the middle decorative symbol 8C may be displayed gradually larger or gradually smaller as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further reduced, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (the image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is a medium decorative pattern. The mode changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number “3” of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. The color of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may be changed from any color to any color.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the mode of the image of the red number “3” is changed. Specifically, from the mode of the image of the red number “3”, the middle decoration pattern 8C is slightly smaller in the image of the red number “3” and at the lower right of the image of the red number “3”. Changes to a mode in which the image of the character is attached to the image. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the stop display position middle decorative pattern 8C disappears. In this way, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed as a loss mode (loss pattern). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed may have the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design mode change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the first mode (for example, numbers and the like), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. The display is changed from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers + characters) and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in the horizontal direction at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8 </ b> L is variably displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative symbol 8 </ b> R is different from the left decorative symbol 8 </ b> L. It is displayed as fluctuating while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. It fluctuates and displays while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed gradually smaller with movement, and the right decorative symbol 8R is gradually displayed larger with movement. You. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative design mode change effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 71 to FIG. 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed while being moved in different directions, but two of the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be variably displayed while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative symbol 8C may be variably displayed while moving in a different direction from the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. .
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R at the stop display position disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative design 8L other than the left decorative design 8L at the stop display position is displayed so as to remain without disappearing. Is also good.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the first mode (for example, numbers and the like) and change from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers and characters). The image is displayed and stopped in the second mode, and the mode here includes, for example, various modes such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the decorative pattern. Any mode may be changed to any mode. Further, the number of changes may be one or more.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variably displayed in this order, changed from the first mode to the second mode, and stopped and displayed. The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first mode;
A second effect in which the decorative design is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect and displayed,
A third effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first mode to the second mode at a stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1 or Aspect A5-2,
In the second effect, the decorative symbol changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative pattern is variably displayed while moving along the first direction,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display is variably displayed while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
In the first effect of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed while being fluctuated while moving along a curved orbit that draws an arc,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the display is variably displayed while moving along a curved trajectory that draws an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4 or Aspect A5-5,
In the first effect of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol is gradually displayed smaller with movement,
In the first effect of the second decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is gradually enlarged with movement.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative symbol variation area effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative design change area effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the decorative design variable area effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main image. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorated design fluctuation area effect A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol change area effect A. In the decorative design variable area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8 L, the middle decorative design 8 C, and the right decorative design 8 R are lost. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display region R1 is included in a second display region R2 that is larger than the first display region R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the first display area R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and moves vertically in the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not the reach state is formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol “3” symbol) moves downward without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. . That is, the reach state is not formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed such that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative pattern 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and the reach state is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). If so, another reach production may be performed from there.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and The display is stopped at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative pattern 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decoration symbol 8C which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number “2” pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display area R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 74A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the middle decoration pattern 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually reducing (reducing).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R further gradually decrease from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 (return). In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Decorated design fluctuation area effect B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol change area effect B. In the decorative design change area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8 L, the middle decorative design 8 C, and the right decorative design 8 R are lost. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display region R1 is included in a second display region R2 that is larger than the first display region R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), in the first display area R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and moves vertically in the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is transparently displayed through the transparent left decorative pattern 8L.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not the reach state is formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) moves downward without stopping at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. . That is, the reach state is not formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed such that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative pattern 8R. The right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and the reach state is formed together with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). If so, another reach production may be performed from there.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “4” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and The display is stopped at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display region R2. At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is transparently displayed through the right decorative pattern 8R having transparency.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative symbol 8C which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number “2” pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display area R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 75A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the middle decorative pattern 8C having transparency.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), in the second display region R2, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been stopped and displayed, disappear from the second display region R2, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that have disappeared again appear again. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a reduced state in the first display region R1. In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Decoration pattern change area effect C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol change area effect C. In the decorative design variable region effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are lost on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Symbol). The positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display region R1 is provided in a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display region R1 is included in a second display region R2 that is larger than the first display region R1. In the present embodiment, the second display area R2 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), in the first display region R1, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to be changed at a high speed so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that have been variably displayed disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern is left. The variable display of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative symbol 8L which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L (the number “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a), and moves vertically in the second display region R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the left decorative pattern 8L.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative symbol 8R that has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display region R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). Then, while slowly moving downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, it is determined whether or not the reach state is formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol). Produces reach reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol) is stopped and displayed at a vertically intermediate position in the second display region R2. Thereby, the reach state is formed by the left decorative symbol 8L (the numeral “3” symbol) and the right decorative symbol 8R (the numeral “3” symbol). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. The right decorative symbol 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that another reach effect may be performed after the reach state is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), an effect is executed in which the middle decoration symbol 8C which has disappeared once appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (the number “2” pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and is vertically shifted from the second display area R2. The display is stopped at the intermediate position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R1 (see FIG. 76A). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display region R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper central portion of the first display region R1. Then, a part of the first display region R1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the middle decoration pattern 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 while gradually reducing (reducing).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R further gradually decrease from the second display region R2 toward the first display region R1 ( Move (while shrinking). Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in the first display region R1 (return). In this manner, in the first display area R1, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design change region effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the first display region R1 (first region) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, After the first effect in which 8R is variably displayed, and in the second display region R2 (second region) including the first display region R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 after the first effect, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed. , 8C, and 8R can be executed in a larger manner than in the first effect, and the second effect is variably displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the second effect, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are displayed in an enlarged and fluctuating manner are in the first display region R1. Is displayed overlapping with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second effect, in the second display region R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state. It is possible to further execute a third effect to be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach in the second display region R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is possible to further execute the fourth effect in which the state is not formed and the stop effect is displayed in a lost symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, after the fourth effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move from the second display region R2 to the first display region R1 while being reduced. It is possible to further execute a fifth effect that is displayed to be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol variation area effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the decorative symbol change region effects A to C, the first display region R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape, but is not limited thereto. The shape may be an elliptical shape, a square shape, or the like. Further, the shape of the second display region R2 can also adopt various shapes. Further, the second display region R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, in the decorative symbol change region effects A to C, at least a part of the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed so as to overlap the first display region R1. , May be displayed so as not to overlap the first display region R1. For example, the display may be performed so as to fit within the second display region R2.
[Modification 3]
74 to 76, in the decorative symbol change region effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a change-inducing manner to determine whether or not the reach state is formed. In various effects, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed in an enlarged manner.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. However, the order of the stop display is not limited to this, and any order is possible. Is also good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed in a first area of the display means;
A second effect in which, after the first effect, in the second area including the first area in the display means, the decorative design is displayed in a larger and fluctuating manner than in the first effect; Is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1,
In the second effect, at least a part of the decorative pattern that is displayed in an enlarged and fluctuating manner is displayed so as to overlap the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-1 or A6-2,
In the first effect, after the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first region of the display means, the decorative symbol disappears from the first region,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative symbol forms a reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the decorative symbol forms a reach state in the second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-4,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which the decorative symbol does not form a reach state and is stopped and displayed in a lost symbol in the second region of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-6,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further execute a fifth effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed so as to move while reducing from the second area to the first area,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The operation promoting effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation promoting effect can be executed during the changing effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the operation promoting effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation promotion effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing the operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), a size change effect is executed. The size change effect is an effect in which the size of the button image BG is increased and displayed. This indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG as an axis.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), a press-promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG of “Victory” is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG as an axis.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (H). In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7". In addition, a message image MG of “Victory” is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion effect C]
FIG. 79 is a view for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game. In addition, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in a lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the color of the upper surface of the button image BG. For example, the upper surface of white is changed to blue, green, and red. This indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Here, the friend character CRA has appeared.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG is continued.

  When the player presses the effect button 63, a press promoting effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (G). In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing the front gradually turns upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG “press” is also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8". Note that a message image MG indicating “defeat” is also displayed, which also indicates that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Note that the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the final stop effect (loss) in FIG. 79 (H).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation promotion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 viewed from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated about the direction perpendicular to the upper surface as an arrow YG (FIG. 77 ( E), FIG. 78 (E), and FIG. 79 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that the whole does not fit on the display screen 7a, and there are portions that are not displayed at the ends (FIGS. 77 (F), 78 (F), 79 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect of moving the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a press promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and the upper surface facing forward becomes gradually upward by rotating around the left-right direction. Then, a button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG of "press" is also displayed (FIGS. 77 (G), 78 (G), 79 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to the promotion of the operation of the effect button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the button image BG is displayed is first performed (FIGS. 77 (C) (D), 78 (C), 79 (A) to 79 (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the effect button 63 prior to the operation of the effect button 63, which contributes to the enhancement of interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79 (D) may shift to the fixed stop effect (losing) shown in FIG. 79 (H). That is, after the effect for displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the press promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of effects can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation promotion effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but any of the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of the effect in the fluctuation during the time-saving game, but may be applied to the fluctuation in the normal game in which the left-handed game is performed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, a size change effect (FIG. 77 (D)) and a color change effect (FIG. 79 (D)) were performed. Such a size change effect and a color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball is entered. For example, it is conceivable that the timing is when the second special map reservation has increased. Further, for example, it is conceivable to set the timing of over-winning.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
In the operation promoting effect of promoting the operation of the operation unit, an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is displayed on a display screen as an image of the operation unit viewed from a predetermined direction, and rotated about the predetermined direction. Rotation effects included,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promotion effect includes an enlarged effect in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and an end thereof is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-1 or Aspect B1-2,
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral portion to the other peripheral portion so as to cross the display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation promotion effect includes displaying a display of the operation unit image, and includes a promotion effect of prompting the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
Through a display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed in a display screen, the operation unit shifts to the operation promoting effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even in the case where the display effect is executed, there is a case where the process does not shift to the operation promoting effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-5 or Aspect B1-6,
In the display effect, suggesting a jackpot expectation degree, triggered by the ball entering the predetermined entrance of the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display effect is executed from the start of the change of the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the omission notification effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. This omission notification effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the corresponding image data from the main display device when the instruction to execute the omission notification effect is included. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Achievement announcement A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the omission notification effect A.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button-get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button image BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), a press promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG of "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Also, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), a press promotion effect (end) is executed. In the press-promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG “press” is displayed above the large button image BG. Also, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top. The press promotion effect (end stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background of the jackpot determination.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Our announcement B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for describing the omission notification effect B.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button image BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), a press promotion effect (initial) is executed. In the press promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG of "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Also, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), a press-promotion effect (final period) is executed. In the press-promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG “press” is displayed above the large button image BG. Also, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top. The press promotion effect (end stage) indicates a state in which the button image BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, a state in which the stocked button images BG are used up is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[This Omission Announcement Direction C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the omission notification effect C.
First, after the fluctuation start effect is executed and the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started, a battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the effect that the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is performed.

  Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (F). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is a reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of eight button images BG are stocked. In addition, the stock number of the button image BG indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background of the jackpot determination.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of this omission notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect in which the button images BG are stocked is performed (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). )) Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, a press promoting effect of digesting the stored button image BG is performed (FIGS. 80 (E) (F), 81 (E) (F)). In the middle of the press promotion effect, a jackpot confirmation effect is performed (FIG. 80 (G)). According to this configuration, the hit of the jackpot is notified by pressing the effect button 63, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect in which the button images BG are stocked is performed a plurality of times. Also, one or more button images BG are stocked by one button get effect (FIGS. 80 (B) (D), 81 (B) (D), 82 (B) (D) (F). ). According to this configuration, the stock of the button image BG that enables the operation of the effect button 63 is gradually increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the stock number of the button images BG in the button get effect indicates the degree of expectation to the big hit. According to this configuration, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect is an important factor, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a jackpot determination effect for notifying the jackpot determination can be executed (FIGS. 80 (G) and 82 (G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot determination effect is executed, it is possible to immerse in the sense of superiority, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after executing the button get effect, the jackpot determination effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIGS. 82 (B), (D), (F), (G). )). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the omission notification effect is described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, an effect has been performed in which a friend character CRA appears as a jackpot determination effect and the background thereof is a rainbow background RB. On the other hand, the effect of notifying the jackpot determination may be any. For example, a full-rotation effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rotate in a so-called slotted state may be performed. In addition, for example, a premiere effect that displays a premium image in which a jackpot is determined may be used. For example, the effect may be such that the effect button 63 is vibrated, air is sent to the player, or a specific lamp is turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the press promotion effect, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are sequentially digested from the top (FIG. 81 (F)). Here, if the jackpot determination effect is not executed and the stocked button images BG are exhausted, the winning is lost (FIG. 81 (G)). On the other hand, an effect may be performed in the middle of the press-promoting effect that clearly indicates that the player has been lost.

[Modification 3]
Although the above is an example of reporting the hit of the jackpot lottery, it is also possible to notify the hit of the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the furnace drop in the shift lottery to the high accuracy state after the jackpot game. Good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
A first effect in which an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on a display screen; a second effect in which the operation unit image stocked in the first effect is consumed by operating the operation unit; A third effect capable of notifying a hit in a specific lottery during the two effects, and a hit notification effect including the third effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first effect is an effect in which one or more operation unit images are stocked a plurality of times.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B2-1 or Aspect B2-2,
The expected number of wins in the specific lottery is indicated by the number of stocks of the operation unit image in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B2-1 to Aspect B2-3,
The specific lottery in the third effect is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third effect is a definitive effect that informs the user of the jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
The third effect can be executed after the first effect without executing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The confirmed effect includes a full rotation effect that fluctuates in a state where the effect symbols are aligned,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The operation unit image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation unit image display effect can be executed during various effects such as during a change effect of a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the operation unit image display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main image data. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation part image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, an effect to determine whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect is aimed at promoting the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit of 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “One shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG shows the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.
In addition, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), at the center of the display screen 7a, the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (C) gradually disappear. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 83 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 83 (G) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the validity period of the operation reception of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed on the front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, a character image MG4 of “push in !!” is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player presses down the sword member 64 and MAX acquisition is determined, a character image MG5 of “MAX acquired!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation part image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, an effect of determining whether or not an upper limit number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for the jackpot ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect is aimed at promoting the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit of 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “One shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG shows the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG except for the size. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. In addition, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 83B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (C) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 84 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the button image BG and the sword image KG of FIG. 84 (G) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the validity period of the operation reception of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed on the front of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here, a character image MG4 of “push in !!” is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the sword image KG so as to overlap the upper part of the sword image KG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (J), when the player presses down the sword member 64 and MAX acquisition is determined, a character image MG5 of “MAX acquired!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation section image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), during the round game after the jackpot determination, an effect for determining whether or not the total number of rounds for the jackpot can be obtained as the upper limit number of rounds ( MAX acquisition challenge). Here, in a state in which 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for the jackpot, an effect is aimed at promoting the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit of 16R (round promotion effect). On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of “MAX acquisition challenge!” Is displayed. Note that MAX indicates an upper limit (for example, 16R) of the total number of rounds in the current jackpot. The MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game, or may be performed before the round game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The type of the MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, the character image MG2 of “One shot!” Is displayed. This suggests performing an effect to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed. The sword image KG shows the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is in a state in which it is difficult to view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" Is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than those displayed in FIG. 85 (B). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (C) and (D). The character image CG and the character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button images BG overlap is in a state where the button images BG can be seen through the button images BG. That is, the button image BG is an image having transparency. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than those displayed in FIGS. 85 (E) and (F). The character image CG and the character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button images BG of FIGS. 85 (B) to 85 (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the button image BG and is displayed on the front of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and here, a character image MG6 of “press!” Is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed on the front of the button image BG so as to overlap the upper part of the button image BG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (J), when the player presses down the effect button 63 and cannot obtain MAX, a character image MG7 of “MAX acquisition failed!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. You.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect will be described below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, a first image in which a button image BG (first operation unit image) and a sword image KG (second operation unit image) are displayed so as to overlap with each other. And a second effect in which one of the button image BG and the sword image KG is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, a portion of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visually recognized through the button image BG. Displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, the third effect in which the sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, in the third effect, a portion of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to visually recognize due to the sword image KG. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation unit image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during the round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a jackpot game, or the like.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect (MAX acquisition challenge effect) for determining whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in an effect that determines whether a specific effect is successful, an effect that determines whether or not a big hit is made, an effect that determines whether a normal big hit or a probable big hit is made, or the like.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the size is gradually increased each time the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed. Or may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the button image BG is the same as the image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 or the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although the image is used, as the operation unit image, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, and other images representing the appearance of various operation units can be used.
[Modification 5]
83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Further, a portion of the background image where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
A first operation unit and a second operation unit that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit,
A first effect in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed so as to overlap with each other;
A second effect in which one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front of the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B3-2 or Aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the front surface of the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third effect, a portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to visually recognize due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B3-4 or Aspect B3-5,
A size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first effect is different from a size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third effect;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The appearance disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. 86 to 88, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the image display is performed. Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings. is there.

  The appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button is executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change), during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. The intention of the operation of the effect button 63 (press operation) by the player can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for jackpot games, and an ending command for jackpot games). When the analysis and the instruction to execute the appearance disappearance effect of the effect button are included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Here, the effect disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described first, and the effect disappearance effect B of the effect button and the effect disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described in order.

[Direction button appearance disappearance effect A]
First, the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a diagram for describing the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance button disappearance effect A of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol. In the effect A of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and has a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “7”), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

  When the reach is formed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. And is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the production button is the beginning of the performance disappearance performance execution period, the timing is started, and the production button is operated until the appearance and disappearance of the performance button ends. The appearance and disappearance production of can be performed. In other words, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period defines a valid period during which the effect button appearance and disappearance effect can be performed, and the intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is determined. This is a period in which the appearance of the effect button can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance button disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

  When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the image display device 7 is performed as shown in FIG. On the upper left of the screen 7a, the same image as the first effect button image BTN (an image having all the same characteristic information such as the button shape, size, and light emission mode) or a similar image (part or all of the characteristic information) A second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emission mode may be the same or different) in a mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. In order to prompt the user to perform the operation, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. .

  When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears, as shown in FIG. 86 (C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

  Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86 (D). A first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to be displayed and to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. Then, the display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

  Thereafter, when the end of the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance and disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "9", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "7", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the appearance disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the display is stopped and displayed as “7” and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the numeral “ 7)), when the stop display is completed, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given to the player is performed.

  In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 86 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (presses) the effect button 63. If no operation is performed, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in FIGS. 86B to 86E performed during the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period are not performed, and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution is performed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 86 (F) are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN. I have.

[Effect disappearance effect B of effect button]
Next, the appearance disappearance effect B of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram for describing the appearance disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance button disappearance effect B of the effect button is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol. In the effect B of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variable display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and has a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the number "7"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed and reach is formed. ing.

  When the reach is formed, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. And is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  When the reach is formed, the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be performed. The appearance and disappearance of the production button is the beginning of the performance disappearance performance execution period, the timing is started, and the production button is operated until the appearance and disappearance of the performance button ends. The appearance and disappearance production of can be performed. In other words, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period defines a valid period during which the effect button appearance and disappearance effect can be performed, and the intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is determined. This is a period in which the appearance of the effect button can be reflected in the progress of the effect. In the present embodiment, the appearance button disappearance effect execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds). Good.

  When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display of the image display device 7 is performed as shown in FIG. A hole image MH imitating a mole hole is displayed near the upper side of the screen 7a and on the left and right sides, and a hole image MH imitating a mole hole is formed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, A hole image MH imitating a mole hole is displayed on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 near the lower side thereof, and five holes imitating a mole hole are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

  From the hole image MH on the left side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an image simulating a mole having a smiley face (hereinafter, referred to as a "smiley image") MCH1 is displayed in a manner to appear. , The same image as the first effect button image BTN (an image in which all the characteristic information such as the button shape, the size, and the light emission mode are the same) or an image similar to the first effect button image BTN (one with the characteristic information) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a part or all similar images (the light emission mode may be the same or different). At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the left side of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and from the smiling mole image MCH1, an image simulating a mole having a face with turning eyes (cracking). , "Kurakura Mogura image".) Displayed in a manner changed to MCH2. Note that the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the color image (for example, black glasses) is obtained from the hole image MH on the right side near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Image (hereinafter, referred to as “glasses mole image”) MCH3 is displayed in such a manner that the face appears. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. In some cases, the second effect button image BTN2 may be arranged and displayed above the glasses mole image MCH3 together with the glasses mole image MCH3.

  When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times), as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the display is changed from the spectacles mole image MCH3 to the jiggle mole image MCH2. You. The spectacle mole image MCH3 is strongly struck unlike the smiling mole image MCH1, and when the spectacle mole image MCH3 appears, the striking button 63 must be operated (pressed) a plurality of times (here, three times) to be strongly hit. It does not change from the spectacle mole image MCH3 to the crawl mole image MCH2. Note that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued. Further, when the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the spectacle mole image MCH3 together with the spectacle mole image MCH3, the player may press the effect button 63 a plurality of times (here, three times). When only the operation is performed (press operation), the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (is eliminated) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a manner changed from the spectacle mole image MCH3 to the jiggle mole image MCH2. Is done.

  When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the smiling face MCH1 changes the face from the hole image MH on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the head of the smiling mole image MCH1. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right side near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a manner changed from the smiling image MCH1 to the image MCH2. Note that the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

  When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the smiling face MCH1 appears from the hole image MH at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. At this time, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The display is performed in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), the display is changed from the smiley image MCH1 to the image MCH2. Note that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where the predetermined light emission mode is continued.

  Then, when the end of the effect button appearance disappearance effect execution period, that is, when the effective period in which the effect button appearance disappearance effect can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. "7", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "9", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "7", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “7”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “9”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the display is stopped and displayed as “7” and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, the numeral “ 7)), when the stop display is completed, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given to the player is performed.

  In a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87A is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player completely operates (presses) the effect button 63. If no operation is performed, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in FIGS. 87 (B) to 87 (I) performed within the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period are not performed, and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution is performed. At the end of the period, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 87 (J) are stopped and displayed.

  In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacle mole image MCH3 appear.

[Appearance disappearance effect C of production button]
Next, the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button is performed during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to a player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the jackpot effect is performed). It will not be performed if there is a so-called "reserved ream" before the game is over if there is a big hit in the reserved ball). The presence / absence of the hold sequence is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of the jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command. In addition, when the production of the reserved streak is not performed, in other words, before the big hit production ends, there is no one that becomes the big hit in the reserved ball.

  In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 specifies a specific one of the periods from the beginning to the end of the big hit effect (big hit game). During the period, an effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select an effect mode after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is displayed. In a specific period, a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting an effect mode and a mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. (A production mode confirmation notification period). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the big hit effect (big hit game)) The start of the predetermined period and the end of the specific period coincide with each other in order to perform a catch-copy effect in which the catch phrase of the gaming machine maker is displayed, and a immersion prevention effect in which an alert for dependence on the game (dipping) is displayed. ing.

  When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, a first effect button image BTN imitating effect button 63 is displayed as an image in order to prompt the gaming machine player to select an effect mode by operation (press operation) of effect button 63. It is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, blinking white.

  The effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated so that the specific area is rotated. Is displayed on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the effect mode that has reached is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in the specific area as a default. However, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, (A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time, the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area.

  On the right side of the selection unit SEL, a demonstration area DS for explaining the contents of the currently selected effect mode with various images and various characters is provided on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and a character “DEMO” indicating a demonstration screen in the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of "sun" proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating "sun" is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. (An image in which the characteristic information such as the button shape, size, and light emission mode are all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or entirely similar to the characteristic information (the light emission mode may be the same or different) The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demonstration area DS. A description MME about the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demonstration area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds. A theme image PM imitating the “cloud” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the B mode moves downward, the A mode arranged below the B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates upward from below, and the C mode arranged above the B mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the C mode, an effect on the theme of “rain” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the C mode moves downward, the B mode arranged below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode arranged above the C mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  In the D mode, an effect on the theme of “snow” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the D mode moves downward, the C mode arranged below the D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the A mode arranged above the D mode is specified from above. The display is performed in such a manner that the reels rotate toward the area, and the A mode becomes a display mode in which the reel is positioned in the specific area again. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Thereafter, in a state in which the A mode is in the display mode positioned in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the first period (the effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode elapses, and the selected effect mode is switched to the selected effect mode. At the beginning of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition, the four corners of the demonstration region DS, which is a rectangular region, are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in a manner of expanding toward the four corners (enlarged mode). On the left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, a theme imitating “sun” progressing under the theme of “sun” in A mode is displayed. The image PM is displayed large, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the A mode is directed from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right side of the theme image PM. Is displayed larger, second performance button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game), the beginning of the predetermined period comes (that is, When a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) arrives, a catch copy effect in which a catch copy of a gaming machine maker is displayed, and a reminder for dependence on a game (drinking) Is displayed, and at the end of a predetermined period, that is, at the end of the big hit effect (big hit game), as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the effect is made with the theme of “sun” in the A mode. The theme image PM imitating the moving "sun" is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second effect button image A state of TN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, the entry of a game ball into the second starting port (the second starting winning port, the second starting port, the variable starting port) 21), the front of the theme image PM is The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed. The variable display is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the theme image PM which is the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the effect C of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button, the reel rotates in the effect mode composed of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode every time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. The effect mode that reaches the specific area by the rotation of the reel is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, in the demonstration area DS, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 is moved from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7. Or disappears (disappears).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the appearance button disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the effect button 63 (operation means) which can be operated by the player, An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is provided on the image display device 7. Based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means) in the state displayed on the (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (the second effect button image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) The second effect button image BTN2 (the second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the first effect is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). (Display means 7) Disappears from the unit) (disappears)) can be performed with the second effect, at least one of. According to this configuration, based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) simulating the effect button 63 (operation means) ) Can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappear) from the image display device 7 (display means)). It can be entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the effect button appearance and disappearance effect B in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect C in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Is the first effect button image BTN (first operation) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). (Device image). For example, while the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second effect button image BTN2 (second Are displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display) changes the arrangement of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image). Means), the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
In the appearance button disappearance effect B of FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is located at the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While displayed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation unit image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display unit) and the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display unit). This is the same because it is displayed.
In the appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect buttons in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is located at the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). While displayed, a second effect button is provided in the demonstration area DS (lower right side of the demonstration area DS) arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). The same applies because the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when the reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (during the predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when the reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (during the predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). ), The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed as an image. When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the display mode becomes a display mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be improved. The same applies to the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).
In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect buttons of FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E), the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game) in a specific period in the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (big hit game). When an effect mode selection screen that allows a player to select a later effect mode is displayed (during a predetermined effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. After the image is displayed on the display unit 7 (display unit), when the A mode is selected, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation unit image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display unit). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the user can actually select the A mode. Second production button When the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the player has a display mode in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears. Can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) includes the left decorative symbol 8L, The reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined effect is a reach effect. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be the period during which the reach effect is being performed. After the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), in addition to the image of the reach effect, the appearance of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest. The same applies to the appearance and disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) displays the big hit effect (hit game). The first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the predetermined effect is a big hit effect (hit game effect). It is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the time period during which the big hit effect (hit game effect) is performed. The specific period can be set, and in addition to the image of the big hit effect (hit game effect), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button is further displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operation means image) can appear, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86A to 86E of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image). And the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) Depending on the color of ()), the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the effect button appearance and disappearance effect B in FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (I) and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect C in FIGS. 88 (A) to 88 (E).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the appearance disappearance effect of the effect button will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the effect disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86, the effect disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, and the effect disappearance effect C of the effect button of FIG. The first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and based on the operation button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressed), A first effect in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means); The effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). Can do either one It came. However, a sword member 64 or a sword button 65 may be used instead of the effect button 63 (operation means). In this case, the image display device 7 (display means) includes the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) with the sword member 64. And an image imitating the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
In the effect A of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button in FIG. 86, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). When the effect button 63 is operated (depressed) again (depressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). . However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) has disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (for example, twice, three times, ..., a predetermined fixed number of times out of 9 times, or a random number set in real time by a lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) out of 2 to 10 times An operation (press operation) may be performed. In this case, every time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). (Appearance) can be eliminated. Also, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (or disappears) on the image display device 7 (display means) depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. , Can be discovered by the player himself, so that the act of operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is less likely to be monotonous, thereby suppressing a decrease in the willingness to play. It can also contribute to things.

[Modification 3]
In an effect disappearance effect A of the effect button in FIG. 86 and an effect disappearance effect B of the effect button in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Each time (disappearing) or displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is increased stepwise toward the maximum size. Is also good. In this case, every time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is always increased stepwise toward the maximum size. Alternatively, it may be possible to stop at a certain size from the position before the maximum size (a number of stages before the maximum size (on the way)). By doing so, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that a jackpot game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player by the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 will occur. This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to become passive.

[Modification 4]
In the effect disappearance effect A of the effect button of FIG. 86 and the effect disappearance effect B of the effect button of FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). Every time (disappearing) and displayed (appears), a big hit game (big hit effect) that gives a profit to the player with the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is expected to occur. You may make it change in steps to the color which raises a feeling. For example, the color changes stepwise from white → blue → green → red → golden → seven colors (rainbow). This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to be reluctant to operate (press operation) the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the appearance disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a moving image is a moving image that describes the flow of the effect of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, and the like, and may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a movie. It may be one scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the effect A of appearance button disappearance effect of FIG. 86, the appearance disappearance effect B of effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance disappearance effect C of effect button of FIG. 88, the first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) When the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation Means), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect button image BTN2 ( The second effect in which the (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. . However, with the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed. Every time is operated (pressed), a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is performed, for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only ten times (when it is pressed, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) May be executed on the image display device 7 (display means), which is not displayed (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). 63 (operation means) Each time the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) while the effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 A second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating (operation means) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears from the image display device 7 (display means) )) The second effect is executed, and, for example, the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated only ten times (when it is pressed down), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) May be able to execute a first effect displayed (appearing) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance and disappearance effect C of the effect button in FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the big hit effect (effect of a winning game). After that, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as an effect of the winning game, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect. The second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed during the effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect. After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 ( (Display means).

[Modification 8]
In the effect A of appearance button disappearance effect of FIG. 86, the appearance disappearance effect B of effect button of FIG. 87, and the appearance disappearance effect C of effect button of FIG. 88, it is not necessary to provide a part of the effect described. Production may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B4-1]
Operating means operable by the player;
Display means capable of displaying various images,
In a state where the first operation unit image imitating the operation unit is displayed on the display unit, based on the operation of the operation unit,
A first effect in which a second operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means,
Capable of performing at least one of
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The second operation means image is displayed at a position different from the first operation means image in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B4-1 or Aspect B4-2,
The first operation means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined effect,
The second operation means image can be displayed after the first operation means image is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means can display a reach effect in the variable effect display of the decorative pattern,
The predetermined effect is the reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means can display a winning game effect,
The predetermined effect is an effect of the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
The color of the first operation means image and the color of the second operation means image are the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning information presentation effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the effect design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the winning notification effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

  In each of the winning information presentation effects A to C, the effect button 63 is enabled during the battle effect, and when the number of operations of the effect button 63 reaches any one of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times, the jackpot finalized effect. It is a production to execute. If the jackpot determination effect is not executed even when the number of times has reached 14, the loss is determined.

[Winning Information A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. In other words, the display screen 7a does not display a message urging the user to press the effect button 63, but the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Operation is detected. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB is dominant and the ally character CRA is driven to the right. In the battle effect (initial), the input of the effect button 63 is enabled. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left. In the battle effect (middle term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background of the jackpot determination. In addition, a message image MG saying "Big hit" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. That is, in the battle effect (middle term), the operation of the effect button 63 reaches twelve times, so that the jackpot determination effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), a battle effect (end) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and a message image MG of "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning information presentation B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for describing the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. In other words, the display screen 7a does not display a message urging the user to press the effect button 63, but the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the effect button 63 based on the signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Operation is detected. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect is an effect in which a friend character CRA appears and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background of the jackpot determination. In addition, a message image MG saying "Big hit" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. In other words, in the battle effect (middle term), the operation of the effect button 63 reaches five times, so that the jackpot determination effect is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB is dominant and the ally character CRA is driven to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and a message image MG of "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Winning information production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for describing the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle effect (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs. In the battle effect (start), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 detects an operation of the effect button 63 based on a signal from the effect button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB is dominant and the ally character CRA is driven to the right. In the battle effect (initial), the input of the effect button 63 is enabled. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle effect (middle term), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left. In the battle effect (middle term), the input of the effect button 63 is valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the character “press” is displayed. On the right side of the display screen 7a, the actual number of operation of the effect button 63 is shown. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), a battle effect (end) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winning or losing of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the message image MG “Defeat” is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (losing), both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R stop at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the effect button 63 during the battle effect, it becomes possible to execute the jackpot-determined effect when the predetermined number of operations is reached. (FIGS. 89 (E) (F), 90 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the effect button 63 and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of operation times of 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times are set as predetermined operation times. According to this configuration, since there is a plurality of timings at which the jackpot determination effect may be executed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot determination effect is not executed by 14 operations which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91 (E)), the loss in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, useless expectations can be avoided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is activated, no effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E), FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a back command-like effect of only the player who knows the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is enabled, there are cases where an effect for prompting operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 91 (C) to (E)) and cases where it is not performed. (FIGS. 89 (C) to (E) and FIG. 90 (C)). According to this configuration, the range of effects can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes a modification of the winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
Although the operation of the effect button 63 has been described above as an example, the operation can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever or a sword accessory.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the winning of the jackpot lottery was reported.However, it can also be applied to the winning of the maximum number of rounds in the lottery of the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the transition to the high-precision state after the jackpot. is there.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine including an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and capable of executing an effect based on an operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined effect, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of operation times are set as the predetermined operation times,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B5-1 or Aspect B5-2,
If there is no notification of the winning even when the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, a loss in the specific lottery is determined.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B5-1 to Aspect B5-3,
During the predetermined effect, does not perform a promotion effect to promote the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect B5-1 to Aspect B5-3,
During the predetermined effect, there may be a case where a promotion effect for prompting the operation of the operation unit is performed, and a case where it is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific lottery is a jackpot lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The outer and inner effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. Decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  The outer and inner effects of the three-dimensional image are executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), during a jackpot game (a big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. Can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command, various jackpot game opening commands, a jackpot game round designation command, and a jackpot game ending command) received from the sub-control board 90, and When the instruction for executing the effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Here, the outline inside and outside effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described first, and the outline inside and outside effect B of the stereoscopic image and the outline inside and outside effect C of the stereo image will be described in order.

[Outside / inside / outside production A of stereoscopic image]
First, the outline inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing the outline inside / outside effect A of the stereoscopic image. In the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a three-dimensional image of a colored image as a predetermined image, for example, a color opaque three-dimensional image. When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swaying and swinging (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). And a region FRMb outside the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FRa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. In addition, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is a background image.

  When the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRM of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size, and the proportion of the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. As a result, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is increased, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”), the outer region FRMb of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”) increases or decreases as the ratio of the inner region FRa occupying the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the frame of the stereoscopic image from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) as the predetermined image. When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is switched as the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes large, or one or both become small. Displayed. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes an inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and a frame-shaped three-dimensional image with the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. And an outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a background image.

  Thereafter, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer shape (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. , An inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes a background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )) From the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are arranged in the form of a matrix arranged vertically and horizontally and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour). The three-dimensional image FRM is switched and displayed on the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM as a second geometric pattern in which bricks are stacked. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Further, the character body CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

  Inside the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are increased. When the area FRa is displayed large, the ratio of the area FRMb on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM decreases, and the image display device 7 displays the image. The ratio occupied by the screen 7a is reduced. In contrast, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the outer shape of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced. When the inside area (FMa) of the (contour) is displayed small, the proportion occupied on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases, and the outside area FRMb of the outside (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes large. The ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

  Thereafter, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an aspect, or is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a mode in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are reduced. Then, similarly, the ratio of the inside area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is performed. The second geometric pattern (pattern of bricks) displayed on the outside area FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is displayed as it is and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) as a predetermined image to the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. Then, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both of them become large or one or both become small. You.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ), The third geometrical pattern (pattern of bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) is changed to the third geometrical pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The octagons are switched and displayed in a matrix pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, a character CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is performed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) is a third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are arranged at predetermined intervals and are aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix). ) Is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is switched, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed in such a manner that one or both of them becomes large or one or both of them become small. .

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the form of an octagon and are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the image is switched and displayed as a fourth geometrical pattern in which the alphabetical letter V is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the moving image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB becomes closer to each other in the inner area FRMa. Will be played.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect is displayed by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the image display device 7 also displays the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB. It will be displayed large on the screen 7a.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together on the display screen 7a of the device 7, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stopped and displayed, the loss is definitely displayed.

  Also, when a series of effects from FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character RCA is replaced with the character RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Alternatively, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  Note that, by increasing one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger, or the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger. When one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM are reduced, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is reduced. However, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is also increased due to the increase in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed large (enlarged display), an area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized in addition to the character is expanded. In addition, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced due to the decrease in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area in which the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character size is displayed large on the other hand, while the character size is displayed small when it is far (moves away from the player side).

[Outside / Outside production B of 3D image]
Next, the outline inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the outline inside / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / inner / outer-side production B of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes, for example, a three-dimensional image in which the number “4” of the three-dimensional image is a colored and opaque three-dimensional image. When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging manner. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). And a region FRMb outside the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FRa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. In addition, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is a background image.

  When the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRM of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size, and the proportion of the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. As a result, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is increased, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is displayed. When the ratio of the inside area FRa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outside area FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the device 7 is reduced or increased.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”) as the predetermined image, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes the three-dimensional image plate to the colored opaque plate. The three-dimensional image FRM is switched to a three-dimensional image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary and the inner region FRMa of the outer surface (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image. And an outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the FRM. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is the background image.

  After that, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is set with the outline of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , An inner region FRa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional plate image FRM. In addition, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes a background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the first geometrical pattern (a pattern in which squares are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions and spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the display is switched to the one in which bricks are stacked as the second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced. In addition, the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, and the character body CRA displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape has also been modified.

  When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large, and the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. As the ratio occupied by 7a increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM decreases, and the ratio occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in a small size, and the image is displayed. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the device 7 decreases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM increases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

  After this, if the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, Similarly, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is similarly displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. By increasing or decreasing the ratio occupying the display region 7a, the ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Or get higher.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM as the predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (the number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is performed. The second geometric pattern (pattern of bricks) displayed on the outside area FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is displayed as it is and is a still image. Does not switch to the geometric pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (numerical "4") as a predetermined image to the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM again. Then, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. )), The third geometric pattern (pattern of bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) is changed to a third geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The octagons are switched and displayed in a matrix pattern arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other as a scientific pattern. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, a character CRB newly appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also deformed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM again (number “4”). , And when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. Here, even if switching from the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) again as the predetermined image, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is performed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number “4”) is a third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix). ) Is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb, and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the image is switched and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or rotating.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (numeral "4") at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image. ) From the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which the octagons are arranged in the matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions and separated from each other by a predetermined interval) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM, the image is switched and displayed as a fourth geometric pattern in which an alphabetical letter V is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Further, in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, two characters CRA and CRB appear and approach the inside of the inner region FRMa so that moving images of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed. Will be played. As described above, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also deformed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect is displayed by the two character bodies CRA and CRB. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the image display device 7 also displays background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB. It will be displayed large on the screen 7a.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed in the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, the action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 together, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stopped and displayed, the loss is definitely displayed.

  Also, when a series of effects from FIG. 93 (A) to FIG. 93 (G) are performed during a big hit game (big hit effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character body RCA is replaced with the character body RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Alternatively, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases, or the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes farther ( (Moving away from the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes smaller. However, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is increased due to the increase in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Instead of being displayed large (enlarged display), an area around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character can be visually recognized in addition to the character is expanded. In addition, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is reduced due to the decrease in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Rather than being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area where the character itself can be viewed becomes smaller. Of course, when the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character size is displayed large on the other hand, while the character size is displayed small when it is far (moves away from the player side).

[Outside / Outside production of stereoscopic image C]
Next, the outline inside / outside effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing the outer / inner / outer appearance C of the stereoscopic image. In the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes, for example, the number “4” of the three-dimensional image as a predetermined image as a colored and opaque three-dimensional image. When appearing as FRM, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, and swinging. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes the outer region (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) as a boundary and the inner region FRa of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). And a region FRMb outside the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is the background image.

  Thereafter, when the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”). With the (outline) as a boundary, an inner region FRa of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) and an outer region FRMb of the outer (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) are formed. Be partitioned. In addition, the outer region FRMb outside the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) is a background image.

  When the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region FRa of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed large. As the proportion of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) decreases, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the inner region FRM of the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”). Are displayed in a small size, and the proportion of the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is reduced. As a result, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is increased, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased. In the market.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) appears again on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 approaches the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is displayed. Of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”), the outer region FRMb of the three-dimensional image FRM (numeral “4”) increases or decreases as the ratio of the inner region FRa occupying the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The ratio occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  A pattern (not shown) is provided in the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”). In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”), a first geometric pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other. Is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numeral “4”) to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (numerical “4”) as a predetermined image. ) Is switched to a stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (numerical "4")), and when the stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (numerical "4") appears, the user approaches or moves farther. It is displayed in such a manner as to stop, stop, or move up, down, left and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front with the boundary (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. ), And an outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer side (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the background image.

  After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front. With the outer contour (“contour”) of “4”) as a boundary, the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the outer contour of the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical “4”) viewed from the front. (Outline) and an outer region FRMb. Further, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is the background image.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A first geometric pattern (a pattern in which quadrangles are arranged in a matrix in a manner arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions while being spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance), which is displayed in an outer region FRMb of an outer shape (outline) of FRM (number “4”) ) Is switched and displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, in which bricks are stacked as the second geometric pattern. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRB appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, and the character CRB moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. .

  When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner region of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. Since the FRM is displayed large and occupied on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced, and the image display device 7 is reduced. In the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the outline (the number “4”) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. The outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is larger because the inner region FRa of the outer contour is displayed small and occupied on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, the ratio occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

  After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front again appears on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches the image. Similarly, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a distant manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is also displayed. As the ratio of the inside area FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the FRM (the number “4”) occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the stereoscopic image FRM ( The ratio of the outer region FRMb of the outer side (outline) of the numeral “4”) occupying the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") is switched to (numerical value "4"), it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging manner. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “ 4 ”) is displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (the number“ 4 ”) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (contour). It is taken over and displayed as it is, and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is again displayed as a predetermined image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is viewed from the front and is switched to (number “4”), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”) as a predetermined image. From the second geometric pattern (pattern of bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of FRM (number “4”), the outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. The octagons are displayed as a third geometrical pattern in the outer region FRMb of the (outline) in such a manner that the octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

  Further, here, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches and partly protrudes from the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 (projects), the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. Are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the discontinuous region where the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) is discontinuous, and straddles the two independent inner regions FRMa and FRMa. In this mode, the character body CRA with the sword newly appears and moves in the two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRA is reproduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the stereoscopic image FRM (numeral “4”) is switched to (numerical “4”), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “ 4 "), the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the form of an octagon and are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions at a predetermined interval from each other) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (contour) of FIG. It is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the image FRM (number “4”), and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image as a color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (see FIG. 94F). When the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is viewed from the front when the display is switched to the number “4”), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”) as a predetermined image. The third geometric pattern (octagons) which is displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline) of FRM (number "4") is arranged in a matrix by being spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical and horizontal directions. Pattern) to a pattern in which the letter V is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions as the fourth geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRB reappears in the inner area FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and moves in the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced. You.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. When the stereoscopic image FRM (numerical value "4") is switched to (numerical value "4"), it is displayed in an approaching, distant, stopping, or swinging manner. Here, even if the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) is switched from the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the color-opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) again as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “ 4 ”), the fourth geometrical pattern (a pattern in which the English letter V is continuously arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer shape (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number“ 4 ”). It is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outer contour (outline), and is not switched to another geometric pattern as a still image.

  Thereafter, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (a numeral “4”) as a predetermined image from a color opaque stereoscopic image FRM (see FIG. 94H). When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is switched to the number "4"), it is displayed in a manner of approaching, moving away, stopping, moving up, down, left and right, and stopping.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image at the timing of switching from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front (number “4”) as a predetermined image. A three-dimensional image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which the alphabetic letter V is continuously arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of the FRM (number “4”) In the outer region FRMb of the outer periphery (contour) of FRM (number "4"), the tile is displayed as a fifth geometrical pattern by switching to tiles arranged in the up, down, left, and right directions. The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character CRA appears again in the inner region FRMa of the outer side (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (the number “4”) viewed from the front, and moves in the inner region FRMa, and the moving image of the character CRB is reproduced. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are displayed on the image display device 7. Is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of FIG. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed. The image is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  When a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed in a reach effect (as a part of the reach effect) after the reach is formed, an action effect is developed and image display is performed. If the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 together, a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) is performed in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative pattern is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stopped and displayed, the loss is definitely displayed.

  Further, when a series of effects from FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (I) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character RCA is replaced with the character RCB. When the player wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continued). On the other hand, when the character RCA loses the game with the character RCB, the left-handed game is started ( Alternatively, the game is returned from the right-handed game to the left-handed game).

  It should be noted that when the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player side), the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front increases. The inside region FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes far (moves away from the player side). Becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced. However, the outer region (contour) of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front increases, and accordingly, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. The size of the character displayed in the inside area FRMa of the character is not displayed large (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visually recognized. The area around the character that can do it expands. In addition, since the inner region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced, the contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is accordingly reduced. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and the area in which the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the inside region FRMa of the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") seen from the front is displayed by the character displayed in the outer region (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") seen from the front. In, the size of the character is displayed large when approaching (moving toward the player side), whereas the size of the character is displayed small when distant (moving away from the player side) .

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the outer and inner effects of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer-side effect A of a three-dimensional image, an image display capable of displaying various images is provided. When the image display device 7 (display means) includes the device 7 (display means) and displays the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) on the image display device 7 (display means), it is formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). Character body CRA or character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner area FRMa (first area) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to be displayed, and a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of a frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the image (i. Can be performed, and framed Body image FRM (predetermined image) is adapted to be displayed on the movable image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). And a character body CRB (first effect image) and an outer region FRMb (second region) of an outer shape (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). ) Can be performed with the background image (second effect image) having various geometrical patterns displayed in (), so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer / inner / outer-side effect B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer shape (outline), and the outside of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). And a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) outside a contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
94B, 94D, 94F, and 94H are formed inside a three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) when viewed from the front. The character CRA and the character CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the stereoscopic image viewed from the front A background image (second image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of a contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front formed outside the image FRM. Effect image), which is the same as above.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer stage effect A of the three-dimensional image, the outer edge of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM ( The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Is different from a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area (the area indicated by). According to this configuration, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) is displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) inside the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Since the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed. The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer contour (contour) as a boundary, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
In the outer / inner / outer-side production B of the three-dimensional image in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the character is set in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer perimeter (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. While the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, various geometric patterns are provided in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Since the background image (the second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary, and are the same.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), the outer and inner effects C of the three-dimensional image are the outer edges (contours) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area), whereas the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. ), The background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region), so that the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is displayed. The first effect image and the second effect image are different, and are the same.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outside effect A of the three-dimensional image, a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined The image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed small on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the character is set with the outer periphery (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, a background image having various geometric patterns is obtained. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the (second effect image) is displayed, the player can visually entertain, Enhancement of interest can be achieved.
93 (B), FIG. 93 (D), and FIG. 93 (F), in the outer / inner / outside effect B of the stereoscopic image, a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in which the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, with the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a boundary. When the inner area FMa (first area) becomes larger, the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer shape (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. This is the same because the area of
94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed with the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front as a boundary by being moved and displayed on the display means). When the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is increased, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The same applies because the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front is reduced.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outside effect A of the three-dimensional image, a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined Image) is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, the outer region (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, is used as a boundary, so that the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer line (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM is formed. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is easily recognized as a partitioned region, and the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed. Can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometrical patterns, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. it can.
In the outer / inner / outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the three-dimensional image is used as a boundary. A region in which an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM are partitioned. The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM It is possible to contribute to improvement in visibility of a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
94 (B), 94 (D), 94 (F), and 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. By setting the outer contour (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front are displayed. )), The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) is easily recognized as a partitioned area, and the inner region of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. A character body CRA or a character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in FRMa (first area), and an outer area FRMb (first area) of a contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. Background image with various geometric patterns displayed in the area 2) Since the (second effect image), it can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the same.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer / inner / outer stage effect A of the three-dimensional image, the outer edge of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outline) is an inner region of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM that is bounded by the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM that is the three-dimensional image. The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM bounded by the outer periphery (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM that is a three-dimensional image. Is an area outside the outer contour (outline). According to this configuration, since the outer edge (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer edge (outline) of the edge-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is used. ) And the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are more easily recognized as partitioned regions. Thereby, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM Can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of the game. It is possible to visually entertain and improve the interest.
In the outer / inner / outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIGS. 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, can be used as a boundary. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are partitioned. It becomes easier to visually recognize the area. Thus, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM And the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the above can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the background image. It is.
94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer appearance effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. Since the outer contour (contour) can be used as a boundary, the inner area FRa (first area) of the outer contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front and the three-dimensional image FRM (number) viewed from the front The outer region FRMb (second region) outside the outline (“outline”) of “4”) is more easily recognized as a partitioned region. Thereby, the character body CRA or the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, Recognition of a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front. This is the same because it can contribute to the improvement of the performance.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the inside / outside appearance of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Modification 1]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 92, and a plate-shaped three-dimensional image which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, it is a title (or a characteristic word included in the title) of any music among a plurality of musics used as a predetermined image to show the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the music title may be a structure (a two-dimensional or three-dimensional structure) to which the music title can be associated (imaged).

[Modification 2]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 92, and a plate-shaped three-dimensional image which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, an image described on the front surface of the second movable role 15 as a predetermined image (for example, “OARO”) may be used.

[Modification 3]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 92, and a plate-shaped three-dimensional image which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C may be used as the predetermined images. In this case, an outer region (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digest image 9C is used as a boundary, and an inner region (first region) of the contour (contour) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digest image 9C and a reserved image. 9A and 9B and an area outside the outer contour (outline) of the reserved digestion image 9C (second area). Still images and moving images (moving images by 3D CG, moving images by animation, and one scene of movie) are displayed in the inner region (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C. A background image (still image, moving image (moving image by 3D CG, moving image by animation, moving image of movie, one scene of movie) )) Is displayed.

[Modification 4]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 92, and a plate-shaped three-dimensional image which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image in the inside-outside effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the FRM, the outside / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94, the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front, which is a three-dimensional image, is a predetermined image. However, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be used as the predetermined images. In this case, the outer area (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is defined as the boundary (outline) of the outer pattern (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. 1 region) and an outer region (a second region) outside the outline (outline) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. A still image, a moving image (a moving image by a three-dimensional CG, a moving image by an animation, a movie scene) ) Are displayed, and a background image (still image, moving image (moving image by three-dimensional CG, moving image, Animations and movie scenes)) are displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, the inside region FRMa (first region) of the outer side (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM which is a three-dimensional image as a predetermined image, and the in-outside-outside effect of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In B, the inside area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, is used as the predetermined image. The inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front was a background image having various geometric patterns as still images. However, the background image may be a moving image instead of a still image, or a combination of a still image and a moving image. The moving image may be, for example, a moving image based on three-dimensional CG, a moving image based on an animation, or a scene of a movie, in addition to a moving object having various geometric patterns.

[Modification 6]
A frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a single stereoscopic image, is used as a predetermined image in the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94 is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is one stereoscopic image, as the predetermined image in the three-dimensional image FRM in the shape and the outer / inner / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94. Was one stereoscopic image. However, a plurality of stereoscopic images may be used as the predetermined image. In this case, the same image (background image) or a different image may be used in the outer region (second region) of the outer periphery (outline) of each stereoscopic image. May be displayed so that the entire image of one image can be grasped through an inner region (first region) of an outer contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image. Area), the same image may be displayed, or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the outer-inside-outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, is increased or one or both are reduced. Was displayed in such a way that However, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with such a configuration, a character to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image). Body CRA or character body CRB (first effect image) and outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer shape (outline) of frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) ), A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in the area can be executed, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. be able to.

[Modification 8]
94 (B), FIG. 94 (D), FIG. 94 (F), and FIG. 94 (H), in the outer / inner / outer-side effect C of the stereoscopic image, the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7 ( Although the moving image is displayed on the display means), the image is not limited to the image viewed from the front, and the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) may have a display mode of rotating in a three-dimensional space or a display mode of rotating and moving. Good. In this case, when the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a manner approaching and a part of the stereoscopic image FRM protrudes (projects) from the image display device 7 (display means), a discontinuous stereoscopic image is displayed. .. Are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a plurality of stereoscopic images that have become images FRM (predetermined images), and an inner region FRMa of the outer periphery (outline) of the stereoscopic images FRM (predetermined images). A plurality of independent inner regions where the FRMa is discontinuous are formed in the image display device 7 (display unit). The character body CRA or the character body CRB appears and moves in the plurality of independent inner areas FRMa,... In this mode, a moving image of the character body CRA or the character body CRB is reproduced.

[Modification 9]
The outer / inner / outside effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 92, the outer / inner / outer effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 93, and the outer / inside / outside effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 94 may not include a part of the described effects, Production may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a predetermined image on the display means, a first effect image displayed in a first area formed inside the predetermined image, and a second effect image formed outside the predetermined image. And a second effect image to be displayed in the area can be executed,
The predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C1-1,
The first effect image and the second effect image are different,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C1-1 or Aspect C1-2,
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is displayed larger on the display means, the second area is displayed smaller on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
The first region is a region inside the contour of the stereoscopic image with the contour of the stereoscopic image as a boundary,
The second region is a region outside the outline of the stereoscopic image with the outline of the stereoscopic image as a boundary,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the selection display inhibition effects A to C in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the image display is performed. Some decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  The selection display blocking effect in the effect mode can be executed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, a specific period during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, and the like. The intention of the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for jackpot games, and an ending command for jackpot games). When the instruction to analyze and execute the button effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Here, first, the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode will be described, then the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode, and the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode will be described in order.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect A]
First, the selection display prevention effect A in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a view for explaining the effect A for preventing the selection display of the effect mode. The selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. In the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and has a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the “cloud”) arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently fluctuating as special figure reservation is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To the left of the reserved digestion image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figure reservations are displayed on the image display device 7 linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged and displayed below the screen 7a. The reserved image 9A and the reserved digest image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digest image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

  On the right side of the reserved digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, imitating “clouds”) is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. You.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “clouds” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “clouds” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) starts to change, there are cases where reach is not formed and cases where reach is formed. When the reach is formed, a reach effect based on the jackpot expectation degree is performed. There are multiple reach productions. When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), after the decorative symbol starts to change, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number) as shown in FIG. 95 (B). In this case, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode goes upward from below. While the reel is displayed in a manner of rotating, the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner of rotating the reel from above to a specific area. In the C mode, the theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95 (C). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is medium. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of first special figure reservations does not increase because four first special figure reservations, which are the upper limit, have already been reached, and five reserved images 9A are displayed. The image is not linearly arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode goes upward from below. While the reel is displayed in a manner of rotating, the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner of rotating the reel from above to a specific area. In the D mode, the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95 (D). In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, temporarily stopped at the numeral "5"). The left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  When the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", the change is started until the next decorative pattern starts to change. During the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the interval, the effect mode already selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the start of the change of the next decorative symbol is performed, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Becomes Even if a demo screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) ends, the already selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Then, by the start of the change of the next decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. When the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A arranged is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are accordingly moved toward the right one by one. It is displayed shifted. Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that conveys that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is given for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

  In the series of effects from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95 (A) to the stage in FIG. 95 (D), no reach was formed. On the other hand, when the reach was formed, Following FIG. 95 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C fluctuates. When the reach is displayed and the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), at this point, the selection unit SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. When the operation (press operation) is performed, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL can be moved downward, and the effect mode can be selected. In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reserved. The image is displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  When the reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), car images GYK imitating a car form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. As described above, when the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called “group notice” is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL is activated from the lower right side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Even if the player disappears (disappears) and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the effect mode cannot be selected. Has become. Even if the group notice is given, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, the reach effect proceeds, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number “1”, the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number “0”, and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number “1”, and the display is stopped and the outlier is confirmed and displayed. . Even in this state, the selection unit SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, The selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the effect mode cannot be selected.

  The player operates (presses) the effect button 63 during the period until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed after the group notice has been made and the loss is confirmed. Also, the effect mode cannot be selected, and further, from the time when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, until the next decorative symbol starts to change. Even during the period (hereinafter, referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the two periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group notice is performed, the effect mode already selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7 unless the next decoration pattern starts to change. 7a is displayed in large size. Even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is to be performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is finished, the already selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  After that, when the next decoration pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. When the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are moved one by one toward the right. It is displayed shifted. Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that conveys that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is given for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect B]
Next, the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the effect display selection effect B in the effect mode. The selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. In the effect display blocking effect B in the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and has a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. As a result, the background image (here, the image of the “cloud”) arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed.

  Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is provided for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently fluctuating as special figure reservation is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To the left of the reserved digestion image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figure reservations are displayed on the image display device 7 linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is arranged and displayed below the screen 7a. The reserved image 9A and the reserved digest image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digest image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

  On the right side of the reserved digestion image 9C, a selection unit SEL for selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is selected as the effect mode, and the theme image PM of the selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. Here, since the effect mode selected last time was the B mode described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, imitating “clouds”) is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. You.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “clouds” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “clouds” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  When the decoration symbol in FIG. 96 (A) starts to change, there is no case where an effect (so-called “look-ahead effect”) indicating that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A may include a jackpot is not performed. There is a case where a look-ahead effect is performed on the reserved image 9A. When the pre-reading effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (number), as shown in FIG. 96 (B). (In this case, a temporary stop at the number “1”), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Thereafter, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the A mode arranged below the B mode goes upward from below. While the reel is displayed in a manner of rotating, the C mode arranged above the B mode is displayed in a manner of rotating the reel from above to a specific area. In the C mode, the theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96 (C). After the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the symbol "3" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes. It is medium. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of first special figure reservations does not increase because four first special figure reservations, which are the upper limit, have already been reached, and five reserved images 9A are displayed. The image is not linearly arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, so that the B mode arranged below the C mode goes upward from below. While the reel is displayed in a manner of rotating, the D mode arranged above the C mode is displayed in a manner of rotating the reel from above to a specific area. In the D mode, the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96 (D). In addition, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, temporarily stopped at the numeral "5"). The left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "5", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3", which is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed and displayed.

  When the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", the change is started until the next decorative pattern starts to change. During the period (hereinafter referred to as “interval”), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect is produced. The mode cannot be selected. Thus, in the interval, the effect mode already selected is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the start of the change of the next decorative symbol is performed, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Becomes Even if a demo screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for a customer (standby screen) ends, the already selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “snow” is largely displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Then, when the next decoration pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), it is linearly arranged below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A arranged is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are accordingly moved toward the right one by one. It is displayed shifted. Along with the start of the change of the decorative pattern, a message MG “mode change with effect button” that conveys that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is given for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode can be selected.

  In the series of effects from the start of the change of the decoration pattern in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (D), an effect indicating the possibility that the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A includes a big hit (so-called, The “pre-reading effect” is not performed, but in the case where the pre-reading effect is performed on the reserved image 9A, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), following FIG. 96 (A). After the decorative symbol starts to change, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the symbol (numeral) (here, the numeral "1" is temporarily stopped), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. It has become. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are linearly imaged along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special figure reservations. It is arranged and displayed below the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Assuming that the reserved image 9A arranged closest to the reserved digestion image 9C is the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A is placed on the left of the first reserved image 9A, and the second reserved image 9A is placed. A third reserved image 9A is arranged to the left of the reserved image 9A, and a reserved image 9A added by adding a game ball to the first starting port 20 this time to the left of the third reserved image 9A. Are arranged as the fourth reserved image 9A.

  When an effect (pre-reading effect) indicating that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the fourth hold image 9A is performed, the display mode of the fourth hold image 9A is changed as a special image. Are displayed in a manner different from the display mode of the reserved image 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the pre-reading effect that is a special image, based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit, as a display mode of the reserved image 9A, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit thick)) The jackpot expectation is set higher. Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is to emit red light, and other reserved images 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A) ) Is a display mode in which white light is emitted (in the case where a pre-reading effect is not performed, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot is the lowest).

  In the pre-reading effect which is a special image, based on the degree of expectation to be a big hit, as a display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich) ), The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set to be high. However, the reserved image 9A having a circular shape may be replaced with a character body. In this case, in the aspect in which the reserved image 9A is a character as the display mode, the expected degree of the big hit is at least equal to or larger than the expected degree of the big hit set in the mode of emitting red light as the displayed mode of the reserved image 9A. Is set to

  When the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is performed, the display of the special image is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Is operated (press operation), the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected. Even if the pre-reading effect is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol (numeral) following the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the numeral “3”). (Temporary stop), the middle decoration symbol 8C is in the process of changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol (number) following the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, FIG. 96 (I)). After that, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "3". Is displayed.

  After that, when the next decorative pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 96 (J), the decorative pattern is linearly arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A arranged is moved to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, the remaining three reserved images 9A are accordingly moved toward the right one by one. It is displayed shifted. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the pre-reading effect has already been performed, even in this state, the selection unit SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection unit SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

  As described above, if the prefetch effect is performed during the change in the specific period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change, if the prefetch effect is not performed, the effect mode is selected during the change. On the other hand, if the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed, the reserved image 9A in which the pre-reading effect has been performed moves to the right side as the reserved digestion image 9C, and the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. In the period from when the 8R is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the player can set the production button 63 even during the specific period from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern in which the production mode can be selected. Even if is operated (press operation), the effect mode cannot be selected. Further, a period from the stop display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the suspended image 9A in which the pre-reading effect has been performed until the next decorative symbol starts to change (hereinafter referred to as “interval”). ).), The effect mode cannot be selected even if the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation). Thus, in such a series of periods, the already selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the pre-reading effect is performed, the reserved image 9A on which the pre-reading effect has been performed is digested as the reserved digestion image 9C. The selected effect mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  In addition, when the reserved image 9A in which the pre-reading effect has been performed is digested as the reserved digestion image 9C and the jackpot has been won, after the jackpot effect is completed, the effect button 63 is operated as shown in FIG. A message MG indicating “mode change with effect button” indicating that the effect mode can be changed by pressing operation is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is displayed, and the effect mode can be selected.

  Further, even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for a customer is finished, the already-selected effect mode is selected. Is continued, and the theme image PM imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

[Production mode selection display prevention effect C]
Next, the selection display prevention effect C in the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the effect C for preventing the selection and display of the effect mode. The selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to a player, and is an effect that is not performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, this is not performed when there is a so-called “reserved ream” before the end of the jackpot effect, where there is a jackpot in the reserved ball. The presence / absence of the hold sequence is determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of the jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command.

  Here, a case will be described in which a player performs a right-handed game to be a big hit, a big hit game (big hit effect) occurs, and the right-hit game is continued after the big hit game (big hit effect) ends. In addition, when the production of the pending ream is not performed, in other words, before the big hit production ends, there is no one that becomes the big hit in the reserved ball.

  During the period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), a game effect period from the beginning of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) to the end of performing all round game effects and the game effect period Subsequently, a notification period for notifying a gaming state (for example, a state of returning to left-handing and a state of continuing right-handing) after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game), and a big hit effect (big hit game) following the notification period A special period in which a production mode selection screen that allows the player to select a production mode after the end of the game is displayed, and a catch phrase production or game in which a catch phrase of a gaming machine maker is displayed following the specific period There is a predetermined period during which a immersion prevention effect is displayed in which an alert for dependence on (intrusion) is displayed.

  In a specific period, a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting an effect mode and a mode transition to the selected effect mode after the first period (effect mode selection period) have elapsed. (A production mode confirmation notification period).

  The end of a predetermined period in which a catch-copy effect in which a game machine maker's catch phrase is displayed and an alert for dependence on the game (intrusion) are displayed, and the beginning and end of a jackpot effect (big hit game) And the end of the period up to.

  In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the effect of each round game in the big hit effect (big hit game) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and all the processes are ended. By doing so, the end of the game effect period, and at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG “continue right-handed” MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue right-handed. . In addition, the holding image 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Instead of the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the first special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is performed. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed. Here, for example, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, and the number “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The four special figure reservations are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state in which the numeral "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

  A message MG “continue right-hand” in FIG. 97 (A) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in large size, and thereafter, the end of the notification period (for example, 3 seconds). At the beginning, there are a case where an effect mode selection screen that allows the player to select an effect mode after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) is displayed, and a case where the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. .

  When the effect mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the effect button 63 is pressed to prompt the gaming machine operator to select the effect mode by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation). The imitated first effect button image BTN is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the portion of the first effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The “predetermined light emission mode” is, for example, blinking white. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  The effect mode composed of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated to specify the specific area. Is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in which the effect mode that has reached is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. When the effect mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, the A mode is arranged in the specific area as a default. However, when the effect mode selection screen is displayed next time, the default ( That is, (A mode) may be always arranged in the specific area, or when the effect mode selection screen is displayed last time, the selected effect mode may be arranged in the specific area.

  On the right side of the selection unit SEL, a demonstration area DS for explaining the contents of the currently selected effect mode with various images and various characters is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is done. The demonstration area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and a character “DEMO” indicating a demonstration screen in the effect mode is displayed on the upper left side.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image PM imitating “sun” is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS, and is the same image as the first effect button image BTN. The second effect button image BTN2 as an image (an image in which the characteristic information such as the button shape, the size, and the light emission mode are all the same) or a similar image (an image partially or entirely similar to the characteristic information) is displayed in the demonstration area DS. It is arranged and displayed on the lower right side. A description MME about the progress of the effect in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demonstration area DS.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in the state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the player is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL. As the A mode moves downward, the D mode arranged below the A mode is displayed in a manner in which the reel rotates upward from below, and the B mode arranged above the A mode is specified from above. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates toward the area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds. A theme image PM imitating the “cloud” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the B mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the C mode, an effect on the theme of “rain” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “rain” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the C mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  In the D mode, an effect on the theme of “snow” proceeds, a theme image PM imitating “snow” is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and a description MME about the progress of the effect in the D mode. Is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

  In the state where the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation) and the B mode is positioned in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode has elapsed, At the beginning of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for transmitting the mode transition to the selected production mode, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), four corners of the demonstration region DS which is a rectangular region are displayed as images. The image is displayed in a manner of expanding toward four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 (enlarged mode), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect proceeds with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. A theme image PM imitating "cloud" is displayed large, and a message MG indicating that the selected effect mode is the B mode is displayed on the right side of the theme image PM from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the right side. During ~ To headed is displayed in a larger size. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the number HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  After that, the second period (the effect mode confirmation notification period) elapses, and a catch-copy effect in which a catch copy of the gaming machine maker is displayed, and a immersion prevention effect in which an alert for dependence on the game (entrancing) is displayed. At the beginning of the period, when this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) ends, the theme image imitating the “cloud” that proceeds with the “cloud” theme of the B mode An effect in which the PM is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 proceeds.

  At the end of the notification period in which the message MG “continue right-handed” in FIG. 97A is displayed, and at the beginning of the specific period, a series of operations from FIG. 97B to FIG. In the effect of (1), an effect mode selection screen is displayed, and the effect after the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) proceeds in the selected effect mode. On the other hand, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is zero and the number is “0”. Since the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 is four and the number is “4”, the four second special maps based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 are When the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the special figure hold, the special image display is given priority to perform the effect of the hold sequence which is the special image, and the effect mode selection screen is not displayed. For this reason, when the selection screen of the effect mode is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), light is applied from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions following FIG. 97 (A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the number HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  After that, a reserved ream image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape indicating the existence of the reserved ream is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 97 (H). While a first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the holding ream image HRC having a V-shape, a holding ream having a V-shape is arranged. A second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged above a second surface (a surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC. The reserved continuous image HRC rotates around a vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the reserved continuous image HRC as a rotation axis, and the first surface of the reserved continuous image HRC and the second surface of the reserved continuous image HRC repeatedly appear. It becomes a display mode.

  When an effect (pre-reading effect) indicating the possibility that the jackpot is included in the hold information corresponding to the hold image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIGS. 96 (G) to 96 (J)) is performed, for example, a special The display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A as an image is different from that of the other reserved images 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). The first hold image 9A, the second hold image 9A, and the third hold image 9A have a circular display shape, while the fourth hold image 9A is displayed. The display mode of the image 9A may be a first character body HRC1 or a second character body HRC2 instead of having a circular shape. That is, the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the pre-reading effect is performed. Has become.

  In addition, the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC. Also, the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved continuous image HRC, but the orientation and posture of the character are different. May be different.

  When the first surface of the held continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is displayed stopped toward the front (on the player side), the second start, although it cannot be transmitted to the hit type, is performed. While it is possible to convey that the jackpot is included in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of a game ball into the mouth 21, the holding having the second character body HRC2 is possible. When the second surface of the series of images HRC is stopped and displayed facing forward (on the player side), it corresponds to four second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. It can be notified that the hold information includes a predetermined number or more (for example, two) of jackpots of 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), the first surface of the hold continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player), and The fact that the jackpot is included in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entering of the game ball is transmitted. It should be noted that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the number HMG as the image display device 7. Is continuously displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, a catch-copy effect in which a game machine maker's catch phrase is displayed, and a warning for dependence on the game (intrusion) are displayed. This is the beginning of a period in which a immersion prevention effect is performed, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. By doing so, the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game). At the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the theme image PM that imitates the effect mode before the jackpot effect (jackpot game) occurs, for example, the “sun” that advances the effect with the theme “sun” of the A mode is an image. An effect that is largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 proceeds.

  In addition, when the production of the hold series is performed, and after that, the big hit effect (big hit game) ends and the right-handed game is started, in the previous big hit effect (big hit game), when the effect mode selection screen is displayed Is maintained again, and the jackpot game (big jackpot effect) occurs again, and as shown in FIG. 97 (B), when the effect mode selection screen is displayed, the maintained effect mode is Although it is arranged in a specific area, the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific period, the selection mode display effect C for the effect mode is performed, but the effect of the suspended series is also performed in the same period as the specific period. In other words, in the first period (the effect mode selection period), in the effect display selection inhibiting effect C, an effect in which the player can select the effect mode is performed. FH, and the effect by the reservation continuous image HRC are performed. In the second period (the production mode confirmation notification period), in the production mode selection and display inhibition production C, an effect of notifying the transition of the selected production mode is performed, whereas in the production of the held series, there is a jackpot or the like. Performing a production that conveys The specific period during which the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode is performed is the same as the specific period during which the effect of the suspended series is performed. Thereby, the time required for a series of effects from FIG. 97 (A) to FIG. 97 (B) to FIG. 97 (D) and the time required for FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. ) Is the same as the time required for a series of effects, so that the game machine manufacturer's catch phrase is displayed, and a warning for dependence on the game (dipping) is displayed. Is also the same, and no difference occurs at the end of the big hit effect (big hit game) due to the lapse of this predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the selection display inhibition effect in the effect mode will be described.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images as shown in FIG. A first effect of displaying a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of effect modes among the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means); At least one of a second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed, and when reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, The next stage (predetermination) in which an effect (group notice) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating a car run together so as to form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. Is satisfied) The display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 in the first effect is prevented, and the display of the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 in the second effect is prevented. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is provided on the image display device 7 (display means). Even if it is displayed, the effect (group notice) that the vehicle image GYK (special image) imitating the car runs together so as to form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next term (establishment of predetermined conditions), the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented. As a result, the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
96 (H) to 96 (J) In the selection display inhibition effect B, one of the A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even when the section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the pre-reading effect as a special image is performed (predetermined conditions are satisfied). The display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display unit). Therefore, the same is true.
97 (G) to 97 (I) in the display inhibition effect C, selection in which one of the effect modes A, B, C and D (a plurality of effect modes) can be selected. Even when the section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (predetermined condition is satisfied) in which the production of the reserved series, which is a special image, is performed, this reserved series is displayed. When the effect is performed, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is prevented, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased from the image display device 7 (display unit) ( This is the same as the above.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes in the effect mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The second effect in which the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during a specific period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the stop of the change Can be implemented in According to this configuration, in the specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the selection unit that can select one of the effect modes from the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes). A first effect in which SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect in which a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Can be executed, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
96 (A) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display prevention effect B, during the specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of modes). The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the effect modes is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is displayed on the image display device 7. The second effect displayed on the (display means) is the same as the second effect.
97 (A) to 97 (I), in the selection display prevention effect C, in the special period during the big hit game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player, the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode And a first effect in which a selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one effect mode among the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a holding image which is a special image. And the second effect of displaying the effect on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display prevention effect A in the effect mode, the effect button 63 operable by the player, the sword member 64, A sword button 65 and a select button 68 (a plurality of operation means) are provided, and the effect button 63 (a specific operation means) of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means) is operated. One of the effect modes can be selected from the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) only when it is performed. According to this configuration, of the effect button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means), the ball is provided on the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and around the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61. Of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 arranged at the first position, the effect button 63 is arranged at the position closest to the player side and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the change of the decorative symbol starts. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the effect modes from among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) within a limited period of from the time until the fluctuation stop. The same applies to the selection display inhibition effect B in the effect mode in FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J) and the selection display inhibition effect C in the effect mode in FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the effect display selection display inhibition effect A, when the reach is formed and the reach effect proceeds, the car is modeled. Of the next period in which an effect (group notice) in which the car images GYK (special images) run together in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. When the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the (establishment), the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display). Means (SEL) (selection image) capable of selecting one of the A-mode, B-mode, C-mode, and D-mode (a plurality of effect modes) before the second effect displayed in (Means) is executed. Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). That previously selected effect mode (here, B-mode) in the first effect is adapted to be maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating the car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and ended, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode Since the effect mode (here, the B mode) selected before the second effect among the modes (a plurality of effect modes) is executed, the player is visually entertained. It is possible to improve the interest.
In the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect modes of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second effect of displaying the prefetch effect as a special image on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and the process ends. , A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of effect modes) because the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed is maintained. .
In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (I), the second effect of displaying the effect of the reserved series which is the special image on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed. When the process ends, the effect mode already selected before the second effect is executed among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is maintained. It is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) to 95 (E) of the selection display prevention effect A for the effect mode, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of The first effect in which the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes in the effect mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The first effect is an A mode, a B mode, a C mode, and a D mode ( The names of the plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel and are rotated and displayed, so that one effect mode to be selected is in a display mode arranged at the front side. According to this configuration, the names of the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) are arranged in a reel shape. It is easy to comprehend the effect mode and the effect mode to be arranged subsequently, and one effect mode to be selected is a display mode arranged on the most front side. Therefore, it is easy to select the effect mode and visually It can be entertained and enhance the interest. The same applies to the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode of FIGS. 96 (A) to 96 (E) and the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode of FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (G) to FIG. 97 (I) of the selection display prevention effect C in the effect mode, the effect of the hold sequence which is a special image is performed (predetermined image). The condition) includes a condition indicating a degree of expectation of occurrence of a game state that gives a profit to the player. According to this configuration, before the jackpot effect is completed by performing the hold streak, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a game state that gives a profit to the player that there is a jackpot in the holding ball. it can.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the selection display prevention effect in the effect mode will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode selection display of FIG. 95 (H), the car images GYK (special images) imitating the car form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 at once. When this effect (group notice) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (the satisfaction of a predetermined condition) in which the traveling effect (group notice) is developed, the image display device 7 (of the selection unit SEL (selected image)) The selection unit SEL (selected image) has been erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display unit) because the display on the display unit) is blocked. However, even if the next period in which the effect (group notice) is developed (even if a predetermined condition is satisfied), the effect (group notice) is not developed and the image display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) is performed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to develop an effect (group notice), and if it is won, the effect (group notice) is developed. Do not deploy group notice). In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not to develop the effect (group notice) may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
96 (G) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display inhibition effect B, the prefetch effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the prefetch effect as a special image is performed (establishment of a predetermined condition). Then, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display unit). I was However, even when the next period in which the prefetching effect is performed (even if the predetermined condition is satisfied), the prefetching effect is not performed, and the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is not performed. It may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, and performs a pre-reading effect when the winning is achieved, but does not perform a pre-reading effect when the selection is lost. Note that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the effect display selection effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97 (G) to 97 (I), based on the arrival of the next period in which the effect of the hold sequence as a special image is performed (predetermined condition is satisfied), the hold sequence is performed. Is performed, the display of the selection unit SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display unit) is blocked, so that the selection unit SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display unit). (Disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the production of the held series is performed (even if the predetermined condition is satisfied), the production of the held series is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection unit SEL (selected image) May be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the effect of the hold sequence. If the winning is performed, the effect of the hold sequence is performed. . It should be noted that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the effect of the pending series may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 (H), the car images GYK imitating a car as a special image form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). When an effect of running all together is developed (when a so-called “group notice” is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as the special image, a cut-in notice (additional image) such as a full-body image of the character, a partially enlarged image of the character, a composite image of the character and the item, or a group image of a plurality of characters is provided. The image may be inserted as an effect. When the eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach effect, the display of the eye-catching image as a special image is prioritized by setting the eye-catching image as a special image. Then, the selection unit SEL may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the character of the maker producing the gaming machine 1 is caused to appear on the image display device 7 (display means), the character of the maker is set as a special image, and the display of the character of the maker is prioritized, and the selection unit SEL sets the image display device. 7 may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
96 (G) to FIG. 96 (J), in the selection display inhibition effect B, if a prefetch effect is performed during the change in the decorative pattern during a specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change, the prefetch effect is performed. If it is before it is performed, the effect mode can be selected during the change, whereas if the look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the change, and Even during the period (interval) from the time when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the suspended image 9A in which the effect is performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative symbol is started to change, the player is not affected. However, even if the user operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect mode cannot be selected. However, the reserved image 9A on which the pre-reading effect has been performed moves to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C, and the decorative design starts to fluctuate, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the loss occurs. The effect mode selection may not be performed only during the period until the final display is performed, and even if the pre-reading effect is performed during the change in the specific period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, the effect mode may be selected during a period in which the reserved image 9A on which the reading effect has been performed moves to the right as the reserved digestion image 9C and the decorative symbol starts to change.

[Modification 4]
In the effect display inhibition effect A of the effect mode of FIG. 95 and the effect display inhibition effect B of the effect mode of FIG. 96, since the effect mode already selected is continued in the interval, the change of the next decorative pattern is started. Unless there was a choice of staging mode, it was not possible. However, in a predetermined effect of a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect mode may be selected only during an interval in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. As the predetermined effects, there can be mentioned those which have a high degree of expectation that a jackpot game (small jackpot effect) advantageous to the player will occur. The effect mode cannot be selected during the given interval.

[Modification 5]
97 (G) to 97 (I), in the selection display prevention effect C, the first surface of the held continuous image HRC having the first character body HRC1 faces forward (toward the player) and stops. When displayed, although the information cannot be transmitted to the type of winning, the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 includes the big hit. However, it was not possible to convey up to the number of jackpots in the suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be transmitted to the suspension information corresponding to the four second special figure suspensions. For example, when there are three jackpots in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds, the first of the held consecutive images HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (on the player side). “+3” may be displayed on the right side of the surface, or three consecutive, three vertically and three or obliquely three reserved HRC images having the first character body HRC1 are displayed. Is also good.

[Modification 6]
In the selection display inhibition effect C of the effect mode in FIG. 97, the theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such a moving image is a moving image that describes the flow of the effect of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, and the like, and may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a movie. It may be one scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 7]
In the effect display inhibition effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97, the selection unit SEL (selected image) capable of selecting one of the effect modes among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (a plurality of effect modes) is displayed as an image. The first effect displayed on the device 7 (display means) has been executed during the big hit effect (hit game effect). However, during the effect in the small hit game in addition to the big hit effect (or during the effect in the small hit game instead of the big hit effect), the selection unit SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). It may be. In this case, the second effect for displaying the effect of the hold sequence as a special image on the image display device 7 (display means) is also performed during the effect in the small hit game (or in place of the big hit effect) in addition to the big hit effect. (During an effect in a winning game).

[Modification 8]
The selection display inhibition effect A of the effect mode in FIG. 95, the selection display inhibition effect B of the effect mode in FIG. 96, and the selection display inhibition effect C in the effect mode in FIG. 97 may not include a part of the effects described above. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
A first effect of displaying on the display means a selection image from which one of the effect modes can be selected,
And at least one of a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means,
Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the display of the selected image on the display unit in the first effect is prevented, and the display of the special image on the display unit in the second effect is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C2-1,
The first effect and the second effect are executable in a specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C2-1 or Aspect C2-2,
A plurality of operation means that can be operated by a player,
One of the plurality of effect modes can be selected only when a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of a plurality of effect modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated and displayed, and one effect mode to be selected is arranged on the front side.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined condition includes a condition indicating a degree of expectation of occurrence of a gaming state that gives a profit to the player,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The game ball image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This game ball image effect can be executed during a change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the game ball image effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and performs main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Game ball image effect A]
FIG. 98 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface is green.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the green upper surface is red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), a press-promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, a button image BG in which the color of the upper surface has changed in the color change effect is displayed. Further, a message image MG “press” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Gaming ball image effect B]
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuation is during a time reduction game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at “7”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable role 14 (the left movable role 14L) is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the light emission mode of the first movable role object 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable role (the left movable role 14L) is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the light emission mode of the first movable role object 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Gaming ball image effect C]
FIG. 100 is a view for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a reserved stock effect is executed. The reserved stock effect is an effect in which the number of stored second special figure reservations is set to the maximum “4” in the fluctuation. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG indicating "Right-click and store on hold" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations. Here, three reserved images 9B are displayed. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increasing. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. The panel image PG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the character of the panel image PG. Here, the character “CHANCE” is changed to “BIG CHANCE”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, it is over winning. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which a game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the panel image PG is a collision target.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is an effect of changing the character of the panel image PG. Here, the character of "BIG CHANCE" is changed to "Super Atsu".

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character CRA has won the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of a rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background of the jackpot determination.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (big hit), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double-eye. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the game ball image effect will be described below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)), and the jackpot. This indicates the degree of expectation of the transition to the game (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the entertainment using the game ball image UG can enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is caused to collide with the collision target (FIGS. 98 (C) (E), 99 (C) (E), 100 (B) (D)) and the collision target By changing the color of the game, the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98 (D) (F), 99 (D) (F), 100 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect of the color change due to the collision of the game ball image UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) imitating the effect button 63 and a panel image PG displaying characters are adopted as collision targets of the game ball image UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to produce a uniform feeling on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (the left movable accessory 14L) is employed as a collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, a dynamic effect can be achieved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98 (C) and (E)). 99 (C) (E) and 100 (B) (D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if a game ball collision effect was executed by the entered game ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the game ball image effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, one game ball is displayed in the game ball image UG, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the game ball entering the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of the over prize after the second special figure reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
Although the above is an example suggesting the expected degree of transition to the jackpot, it may be applied as an effect indicating the expected degree of transition to the highly accurate or low-accuracy time-saving game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image that is an image imitating a game ball, and to indicate a degree of expectation of a shift to an advantageous game advantageous to a player,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the game ball effect, by hitting the game ball image to the collision target, by changing the display color or color development mode of the collision target, suggesting the expected degree of transition to the advantageous game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect C3-1 or Aspect C3-2,
The collision target is an image displayed on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is an accessory arranged in the game area,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball effect is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time reduction game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined entrance is a starting port, which is executed upon entry of the ball into the starting port after the hold storage by entering the game ball into the starting port reaches the upper limit,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the specific end surface effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are also viewed in the drawings. Some of them are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  The specific end face effect of the three-dimensional image can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the variation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end surface effect of the stereoscopic image, the image control microcomputer 101 responds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read out, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image, the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable role 15 are included. Change aspects.

  Here, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described first, and then the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image and the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described in order.

[Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram for describing the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image. The specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effect. is there. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image, first, as shown in FIG. 101A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and a three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image temporarily stops at the number “8”, and the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image rotates (for example, the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image). If the display mode is set such that the display mode gradually decreases toward the rear while rotating backward from the upper side to the lower side, then another rotation (for example, from the right side to the left side of the three-dimensional image middle decoration pattern 8C) 101L, and gradually increases as it approaches the front while rotating, and as shown in FIG. 101 (C), is finally temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. And the right decorative pattern 8R is larger than the size of the decorative pattern 8R, and the display is stopped. As will be described later, this is performed in order to largely display the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative design 8CR obtained by dividing the middle decorative design 8C of the three-dimensional image into right and left.

  Thereafter, the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into right and left by a vertical line (center line) passing through the upper middle point and the lower middle point of the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and the left middle decoration pattern of the three-dimensional image is formed. As shown in FIG. 101 (D), the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are displayed in a double-opening manner. Here, the right end surface of the left middle decorative design 8CL is a specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL, which is a stereoscopic image having an open end surface, and the left end surface of the right middle decorative design 8CR is an open end surface. Is the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

  The middle decorative pattern 8C is formed as colored and opaque. However, in a display mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-opening manner, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right side The specific end face 8CRa of the middle decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative design 8CR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-split manner, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is displayed on the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the specific area 8CRa of the middle decorative pattern 8CR and the transparent area.

  Here, the “predetermined image” is two character bodies CRA and CRB, and is a still image in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with a sword, and shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Yes, even when the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-opened manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size of each other do not change. Has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR.

  When the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are opened shortly in a double-leafed manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL and the transparent end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative design 8CR. Area is small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are transparent. As the 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-opening manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR increase. A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, and the specific end face of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR can be seen. It is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from CRa.

  When the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are widely opened in a double-split manner, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL is a character body CRB. And the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR increases until the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

  Following FIG. 101 (E), as shown in FIG. 101 (F), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent region of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent form of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are displayed. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed with the number “9”, If the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific edge effect B of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram for describing the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image. The specific end-face effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effect. is there. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, a stereoscopic image In the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). From the stationary state, the camera advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable role 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle from the horizontal state to the clockwise direction is obtained. (E.g., 30 degrees), then stop and tilt.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), a character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable role 15 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the form of a colored and opaque “OARO”. The display mode appears as the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable role object 15, or the appearance may be the same and the color may be different.

  Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position).

  The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character image LG of the stereoscopic image) and moves backward. If the display mode is set to gradually decrease as the distance increases, this time, the rotation is switched to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the rotation gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102 (E), the rotation is stopped because the size becomes larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image finally appearing at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a display mode. As will be described later, this is performed in order to largely display the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into right and left.

  Thereafter, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into left and right, and is divided into two stereoscopic character string images in which “OA” is a left character string image LGL and “RO” is a right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left-side character string image LGL and the left side of the right-side character string image LGR are in a display mode in which they are opened in a double-split mode. Here, the right end face of the character "A" which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image which becomes the open end face, and the left end of the right character string image LGR. The left end face of the character “R” serving as the end face becomes the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image serving as the open end face.

  The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque. However, in a display mode in which the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-split manner, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side The specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR is represented in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-sided manner, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is displayed on the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and on the right. The character string image LGR can be visually recognized through the specific end face LGRa and the transparent area.

  Here, two character bodies CRA and CRB are used as the "predetermined image", and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images in which they face each other with a sword, and show the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double-opened manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size between them do not change. Has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are just opened in the double-sided opening mode, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR. Area is small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent. As the LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are opened in a double-opened manner, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR become larger. A part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the specific end face of the right character string image LGR can be recognized. It is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from GRa.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are widely opened in the double-sided opening mode, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes the character body CRB. And the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR increases to a state where the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

  102 (H), as shown in FIG. 102 (H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (I), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the transparent body of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed with the number “9”, If the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end surface effect C of stereoscopic image]
Next, the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image. The specific end-face effect C of the stereoscopic image is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as a part of the reach effect. is there. That is, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific end surface effect C of the stereoscopic image.

  In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, a stereoscopic image In the display mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and is stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “9”). The design 8C is variably displayed and a reach is formed.

  When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is retracted above the image display device 7 (home position). From the stationary state, the camera advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable role 15 has advanced (moved) to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a predetermined angle from the horizontal state to the clockwise direction is obtained. (E.g., 30 degrees), then stop and tilt.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable role 15 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a colored opaque “OARO”. The display mode appears as a character string image LG of the stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as “OARO” described on the front surface of the second movable role object 15, or the appearance may be the same and the color may be different.

  Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops and returns to the original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position).

  The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates backward (for example, rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the character image LG of the stereoscopic image) and moves backward. If the display mode is set to gradually decrease as the distance increases, this time, the rotation is switched to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image), and the rotation gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103 (E), the rotation is stopped because the size becomes larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image finally appearing at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a display mode. This is because, as will be described later, a display mode in which the front side of the left side character string image LGL obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into right and left and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other is greatly displayed. Done in

  Thereafter, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided into right and left, and is divided into two stereoscopic character string images in which “OA” is a left character string image LGL and “RO” is a right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left-side character string image LGL has a display mode in which the left side of the left-side character string image LGL is rotated forward with the right vertical direction as an axis, and the right side of the right-side character string image LGR is the right side. The display mode is such that the character string image LGR rotates forward with the left vertical direction as an axis. Here, the surface described as “OA” of the left character string image LGL immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103E) is divided into “left character string image”. The front surface of the right-side character string image LGR immediately before being divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103E) is referred to as “front side of the image LGL”. , "The front side of the right character string image LGR".

  As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image LGL and the right character are overlapped so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other. A display mode in which the column image LGR rotates (hereinafter, referred to as a “display mode in which the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other)”.

  Thereby, the right end face of the character “A”, which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL, is the closed end face, and the left end face of the character “O”, the left end face of the left character string image LGL, is the open end face. Further, the left end face of the character “R”, which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR, is the closed end face, and the right end face of the character “O”, which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR, is the open end face.

  The left end surface of the character "O" which is the left end surface of the left character string image LGL is an open end surface, and here is a specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image, and the right end of the right character string image LGR. The right end face of the character “O” serving as the right end face is an open end face, and here is a specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image.

  The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque. However, in a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other, the left character string image LGL is specified. The end face LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR are expressed in a mode having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent areas.

  In a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other, a predetermined image that should not be present in the background image is transparent to the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL. And the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

  Here, the “predetermined image” is two character bodies CRA and CRB, and is a still image in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB face each other with a sword, and shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Yes, even if the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, The positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimension and size between them do not change. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are shortly closed so that the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL is closed. When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become large, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large. Can visually recognize the portion of Luo character body CRB, it is possible to visually recognize a portion of the character body CRA from a particular end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

  When the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed until the display mode is closed so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other, FIG. As shown in the figure, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large until the presence of the character body CRB can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. Becomes large until the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (I), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent body of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed. The character body CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action effect by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR. The background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  The action effect is developed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”). And a jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which the player becomes a jackpot and a profit is given is performed. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed with the number “9”, If the middle decorative pattern 8C is a numeral “8” and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral “9” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “9”) is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the loss is confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images. When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR into which the three-dimensional image middle decorative pattern 8C is divided are shown in a mode having transparency, and the left middle Through the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR, a first effect in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be executed. According to this configuration, the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are passed through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR represented in a transparent manner. Since an unprecedented novel effect of being visually recognizable can be provided, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. In the specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the specific end faces LGLa of the left character string image LGL The two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the right character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, the first effect is expressed in a mode having transparency. The middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided such that the area between the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR shown in a transparent manner is increased. The left middle decorative symbol 8CL and the right middle decorative symbol 8CR open (rotate) in a double-split manner. According to this configuration, the left middle decorative design 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR open (rotate) in a double-sided manner, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative design 8CL represented in a transparent manner. And the area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR represented in a mode having transparency is increased, and the area in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized is increased. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.
In the specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-sided opening mode, thereby having transparency. The area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL shown in the aspect and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR shown in the transparent aspect becomes large, and the two character bodies CRA, The region where the CRB (predetermined image) can be visually recognized can be enlarged, and the same is true.
In the specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (G), the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR. Are rotated so as to face each other so as to be opposed to each other, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decoration pattern 8CL shown in a transparent mode and the right middle decoration shown in a transparent mode. The area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR is enlarged, and the area where the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be enlarged.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image, before the first effect, the numeral “8” which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image. The second effect of increasing the size of the image on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed. According to this configuration, before the first effect, the size of the number “8”, which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a large size, so that the decorative pattern 8CL is displayed. The specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right decorative pattern 8CR before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the right decorative pattern 8CR and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are expressed in a mode having transparency. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102 (E), before the first effect, the aspect of the double-sided opening by the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR is largely increased by the image display device 7 ( Display means), the specific end face of the left character string image LGL before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are expressed in a transmissive manner. This can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to LGLa and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and similarly.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103 (E), the display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap each other before the first effect is greatly increased. Since the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the left and right character strings before and after are represented in a transmissive manner. This can contribute to directing the player's gaze to the specific end face LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, and similarly.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101 (C) of the specific end-face effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number “8” that is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is: By moving away in the depth direction, the size of the number "8", which is the medium decoration pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, is displayed in a small size. The size of “8” is displayed large. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a large double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest is improved. Can be achieved.
In the specific end face effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102 (E), the double-sided opening mode by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large manner.
In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103 (E), a display mode in which the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR are closed so as to face each other can be displayed in a large size, and the same is true. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to 101 (E) of the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image, in the first effect, the middle decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is on the left side. A specific end face 8CLa of the divided middle decorative pattern 8CL and a specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are divided into a plurality of middle decorative patterns 8CL and right middle decorative patterns 8CR. An effect can be executed in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end face). According to this configuration, as a result of the middle decoration pattern 8C being divided into a plurality of stereoscopic images, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases. The player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end face in the image, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and enjoyed. Improvement can be achieved.
In the specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. 102 (E) to 102 (G) and the specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic images of FIGS. As a result of dividing the left character string image LGL and “RO” into two character string images having the right character string image LGR, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided stereoscopic images also increases. The same is true because the player can be provided with many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end face in each of the three-dimensional images thus increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (D) of the specific end surface effect B of the three-dimensional image, advance in the front (front) of the image display device 7 (display means). A movable member 15 (movable member) that is movable to a position (predetermined position), and when the second movable member 15 (movable member) reaches a reach during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end-face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among a plurality of types of reach effects, a third effect that operates (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advanced position (a predetermined position) can be executed. In the second effect, a character string image of a colored and opaque stereoscopic image is displayed in which the character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the second movable role 15 (movable member) is displayed as “OARO”. Has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable role 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), this triggers the second movable role 15 (movable member). Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a character string image LG of a colored opaque stereoscopic image of "OARO" written on the front of the second movable object 15 (movable). A state in which the character string “OARO” written on the front surface of the (member) is shaken off from the second movable role 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means). Since a novel effect can be performed, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the specific end face effect of the stereoscopic image will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are transparent areas, and the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. In the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions. However, specific end faces 8CLa and 8CRa in specific end face effects A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, specific end faces LGLa and LGRa in specific end face effects B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, and specific end faces LGLa in specific end face effects C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. , LGRa only need to have translucency, and may have translucency such as frosted glass. In this case, for example, the specific end surface is represented by a mode having a light-transmitting property such as frosted glass, and from a blurred mode in which the predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the specific end surface, the specific end surface gradually becomes a transparent region. As the transparency increases, the predetermined image may be easily viewed through the specific end face. Even with such a configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. , CRB, and was a still image in which two character bodies CRA, CRB faced each other with a sword. However, a moving image may be used instead of a still image. The moving image may be, for example, a flow explaining two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with a sword, a moving image by three-dimensional CG, a moving image by animation, or a movie. It may be one scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 103, the three-dimensional image is divided into two three-dimensional images. However, the image may be divided into three or more three-dimensional images. This increases the number of stereoscopic images due to the division, thereby increasing the number of specific end faces in each stereoscopic image. As a result, there are many opportunities to visually recognize a predetermined image through the transparent specific end face. It can be given to a player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific end-face effect A of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative design 8CR are gradually opened in the double-sided opening mode. In the specific end-face effect B of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right side are displayed. A display mode in which the character string image LGR is gradually opened in the double-sided opening mode and the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR close to each other in the specific end face effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. Thus, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are gradually closed. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or in mutually different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, right-rotating, left-rotating) (A forward rotation mode, a backward rotation mode, etc.), or a rotation in a mutually different direction, for example, a left middle decoration pattern 8CL is rotated forward while a right middle decoration pattern 8CR is rotated backward. Or the mode in which the left middle decorative pattern 8CL is rotated backward, while the mode in which the right middle decorative pattern 8CR is rotated clockwise. In the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 102, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a right-rotating mode, a left-rotating mode, Forward rotation, backward rotation, etc.) or rotation in mutually different directions, for example, the left character string image LGL is rotated forward, whereas the right character string image LGR is rotated backward. Or the right character string image LGR is rotated right while the left character string image LGL is rotated backward. In the specific end effect C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without setting the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR to be closed. (For example, a clockwise rotation mode, a left rotation mode, a forward rotation mode, a rearward rotation mode, etc.), or a rotation in different directions, for example, a front rotation of the left character string image LGL. In contrast, the right character string image LGR is rotated backward, or the left character string image LGR is rotated backward, while the right character string image LGR is rotated right.

[Modification 5]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 103, an effect by the gaming machine 1 as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the three-dimensional image. It showed a world view of the world. However, it may indicate a development destination of the reach production. Since there are multiple types of reach production development destinations, the development destinations that can be visually recognized through the specific end face can indicate to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur, and the jackpot at the predetermined image and the development destination It is also possible to contribute to finding the relevance with the degree of expectation that the game will occur by the player himself.

[Modification 6]
The specific end-face effect A of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 101, the specific end-face effect B of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 102, and the specific end-face effect C of the three-dimensional image in FIG. 103 show the world view of the effect by the gaming machine 1 as a predetermined image. there were. As an indication of the world view of the production, for example, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB having swords, items such as swords and shields, vehicles, and two character bodies may be used. A character that can be represented by two Chinese characters such as a character “crash” indicating an action by CRA and CRB, a character “ranbu”, and a character “musou” may be used.

[Modification 7]
In the specific end face effect A of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 101, the specific end face effect B of the three-dimensional image of FIG. 102, and the specific end face effect C of the three-dimensional image of FIG. Production may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a stereoscopic image on the display means, the specific end face in the stereoscopic image is represented in a mode having transparency, and a first effect that allows a predetermined image to be visually recognized through the specific end face can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, the three-dimensional image is rotated so that the area of the specific end face becomes larger.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-1 or Aspect D1-2,
Before the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of increasing the size of the stereoscopic image on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, after the stereoscopic image is displayed in a small size by moving away in the depth direction, the size of the stereoscopic image is increased by approaching in the front direction. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the three-dimensional image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the predetermined image can be visually recognized through the specific end surface in each of the divided three-dimensional images.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect D1-3 or Aspect D1-4,
A movable member movable to a predetermined position on the front surface of the display means,
A third effect in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position can be executed,
In the second effect, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally displayed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the combined effects A to C of the movable characters will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. 104 to 106, decorative symbols and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable roles 15 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  The combined effect of the movable characters can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a combined effect of movable movable objects, the image control microcomputer 101 responds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read out, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation production start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a combined production of movable characters, the game board 2 The position, inclination, and light emission mode of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 provided are changed, and the position, inclination, and light emission mode of the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2 are changed. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter, “light emission of the frame lamp 66”) Or “aspect”).

  The left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 has a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (a plurality of full color LEDs are provided), and the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L may be a multicolor emission mode. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light are mounted (provided in plurality) on the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14, and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R may be a multi-color emission mode. it can. Further, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the second movable role 15 (a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided), and the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 can be a multicolor emission mode. Each of the frame lamps 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors (a plurality of LEDs). The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor emission mode.

  Here, the combined effect A of the movable role will be described first, and the combined effect B of the movable role and the combined effect C of the movable role will be described in order.

[Combined production of movable characters A]
First, the combined effect A of the movable characters will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram for describing the combined effect A of the movable characters. As shown in FIG. 104 (A), first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the combined effect A of the movable auditorium is such that the left movable auditorium 14L is in the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium, and the left retreat position (home) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Position) to the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R is illuminated for the right movable role (light emission for the left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the mode), the vehicle advances (moves) from the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right movable auditory, which is exactly the same as the light emission aspect of the right movable accessory 14R. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other), and FIG. As shown in (B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left-side decorative portion, which is half, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the right-side movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left-side decorative portion and right-side movable portion of the left-side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined role) in which the right side decorative portion of the role role 14R and the right side decorative portion have an annular shape is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and then the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (C) and FIG. 104 (D), the united character leans from the upper side toward the lower side toward the near side (the player side), and returns to the “nod (person) 'S face is bowed) "action. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is stopped at the retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it is stopped. At this time, the second movable role 15 has a configuration in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R that are united are advanced forward, so that the upper side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are formed. The upper part is covered. The second movable role 15 may be configured to cover one of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (particular movable member).

  When the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable role to a light emitting mode for extinguishing, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the frame lamp 66 are controlled. Is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium) to the light emitting mode for turning off the light. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is controlled to the second movable role light emitting mode when the second movable role 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled again from the light emitting mode for turning off the light to the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium, and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp. The light emission mode of 66 is controlled again from the light emission mode that is turned off to the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable role, the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are a light emitting mode for the right movable role, and the second movable role is provided. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 is the light emitting mode for the second movable role, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R). The light emission mode of the second movable role 15 and the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 are different from each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable role emission mode, and stops to return to the original horizontal position. When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable role. In addition, the light emitting mode is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to a light emitting mode for turning off the light.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is in the left movable role emission mode, and the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the center advance position toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable movable object 14R is illuminated for the right movable auditorium (left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the object light emission mode), the retreat is performed from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home position). Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emission mode. When retreating (moving) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable role to a light emitting mode for extinguishing, and the right movable mode is controlled. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), the accessory 14 </ b> R starts from the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 and moves from the advanced position to the display screen of the image display device 7. When retreating (moving) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to a light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). ) It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off the. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and is turned off from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled.

  As described above, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable auditorium 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable auditorium 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Note that the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable role 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern of the left movable accessory 14L proceeds according to the light emission pattern data, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series. Progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 specified in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable movable object 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), this occurs. Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R are activated when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually holding the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters B]
Next, the combined effect A of movable movable objects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect B of the movable auditoriums. As shown in FIG. 105 (A), first, the combined effect B of the movable auditoriums is such that the left movable auditorium 14L is in the left movable auditory emission mode and the left retreat position (home) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. From the position) toward the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (moving), and the right movable movable object 14R is turned off. It advances (moves) from the retreat position (home position) on the right side to the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is a light emitting mode that is turned off, which is the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position (in the direction approaching each other) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left-side decorative portion, which is half, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip end of the right-side movable accessory 14R, are united to form a left-side decorative portion and a right-side movable portion of the left-side movable accessory 14L. One decorative member (combined role) in which the right side decorative portion of the role role 14R and the right side decorative portion have an annular shape is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are combined to form a combined role having a ring shape, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is changed to the left movable role. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the area formed in the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter, referred to as “circular area”) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and then the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second movable role 15 having a rectangular shape with “OARO” on the front surface is stopped at the retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). And it is stopped. At this time, the second movable role 15 has a configuration in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R that are united are advanced forward, so that the upper side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are formed. The upper part is covered. The second movable role 15 may be configured to cover one of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (particular movable member).

  When the second movable role 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L maintains the light emitting mode of turning off the light, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are turned off. Is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is controlled to the second movable role light emitting mode when the second movable role 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable role is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable role, and the light emitting mode for the right movable role (to be described later is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable role and the light emitting mode for the second movable role). The light emission mode is different from that of the embodiment mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (D) and FIG. 105 (E), the light-emitting mode of the left movable auditory piece 14L is controlled from the light-emitting mode for turning off the light to the light-emitting mode for the left movable auditorium again, as shown in FIGS. The light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R is controlled from a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off to a right movable role light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable role and the second movable role). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is exactly the same as the light emission mode for the right movable accessory of the right movable accessory 14R. The light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. That is, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is a light emitting mode for the left movable role, the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 are a light emitting mode for the right movable role, and the second movable role is provided. Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 is the light emitting mode for the second movable role, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R). The light emission mode of the second movable role 15 and the light emission mode of the second movable role 15 are different from each other.

  Then, the united character performs a “nodding (like a person's face bowing)” action in which it leans from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original side. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable role emission mode, and stops to return to the original horizontal position. When the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable role. The light emitting mode is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or is controlled to a light emitting mode for turning off the light.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is in the left movable role emission mode, and the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. ) While retreating (moving) from the center advance position toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable movable object 14R is illuminated for the right movable auditorium (left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the object light emission mode), the retreat is performed from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (home position). Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the left movable accessory. When retreating (moving) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable role to a light emitting mode for extinguishing, and the right movable mode is controlled. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory), the accessory 14R advances at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) from the position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to the light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (the left movable auditorium). It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off a light emitting mode and the second movable won game for lighting mode different lighting mode). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode for the left movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory). It is controlled from a different light emission mode to a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.

  As described above, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable auditorium 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable auditorium 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Note that the light emitting mode of the second movable role 15 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable role 15 defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is defined in time series. The light emission pattern of the left movable accessory 14L proceeds according to the light emission pattern data, and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the right movable accessory 14R defined in time series. Progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 specified in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable movable object 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), this occurs. Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R are activated when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually holding the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters C]
Next, the combined effect C of movable movable objects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combined effect C of the movable characters. As shown in FIG. 106 (A), first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the combined effect C of the movable auditoriums is such that the left movable auditorium 14L is in the left movable auditory emission mode and the left retreat position (home) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Position) to the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R is illuminated for the right movable role (light emission for the left movable role). In the light emission mode different from the mode), the vehicle advances (moves) from the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right movable auditory, which is exactly the same as the light emission aspect of the right movable accessory 14R. Is different.

  The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position (in a direction approaching each other) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and FIG. As shown in (B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left-side decorative portion, which is half, and the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the right-side movable accessory 14R, are united, and the left-side decorative portion and right-side movable portion of the left-side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined role) in which the right side decorative portion of the role role 14R has an annular shape is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, the image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and then the image is switched to the image in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (C) and FIG. 106 (D), the united character leans from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (player side), and returns to the original “nod (person) 'S face is bowed) "action. At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image expressing the emotion in accordance with the operation in which the combined role is inclined toward the near side (the player side) and returns to the original state is also displayed. This is a display mode in which the expression of the united character is changed three-dimensionally.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the left movable auditory 14L and the left movable auditorium 14R move in a direction in which the left movable auditorium 14R and the right movable auditorium 14R are separated from each other, and the image display device is in the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium. 7 moves backward from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable movable object 14R moves right. A retreat position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the accessory (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the left movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emission mode. When retreating (moving) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable role to a light emitting mode for extinguishing, and the right movable mode is controlled. In the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory), the accessory 14 </ b> R starts from the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 and moves from the advanced position to the display screen of the image display device 7. When retreating (moving) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of 7a is completed, the light emitting mode of the right movable auditorium 14R is changed to a light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium). ) It is controlled to a light emission mode to turn off the. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is also the same as the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R, and is turned off from the light emission mode for the right movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable accessory). Is controlled.

  As described above, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable auditorium 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable auditorium 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right movable movable object 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position and retreats to return to the home position). The light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R in conjunction with the light emitting mode of the right movable movable object 14R.

  The light emitting mode of the left movable role 14L proceeds in accordance with the light emission pattern data for the left movable role 14L defined in time series, and the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R changes in the right movable mode defined in time series. The light progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in a time series. The light emitting pattern data for the right movable movable object 14R and the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emitting pattern data.

  The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right movable accessory 14R is actuated (during the period from when the right movable accessory 14R advances toward the advanced position, retreats, and returns to the home position), this occurs. Since the light emitting mode is controlled to be the same as the light emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, the light emitting pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting pattern for the right movable role 14R are activated when the right movable role 14R is operated. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed in accordance with the respective light emission pattern data by individually holding the data, or the right side may be replaced with the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

  Further, in the combined effect A of the movable characters in FIG. 104 and the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIG. From the stationary state at the upper evacuation position (home position), it advances (moves) downward to a position (advance position (effect position)) closer to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the clock The second movable role 15 is stopped after rotating by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the direction. ) To stop and return to the original horizontal state, and have retreated upward (moved) from the advance position (production position) to the retreat position (home position). In the union effect C, the second movable No effect of appearing to the front (anterior) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the object 15. This is the degree of expectation that a big hit game (big hit effect) will occur when executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation), and This is because the combined effect A is set highest, followed by the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106 is set to the lowest.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined effect of the movable characters.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of movable movable objects, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (multiple LEDs) A front frame 53 provided with an LED capable of emitting light of a color) and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 which is visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame 53 to display various images. A displayable image display device 7 (display means); and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 which can be moved to a traveling position (predetermined position) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and united. And a right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are provided on the game board 2, and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and a right side of the first movable role 14. The movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) includes a plurality of LEDs (the second Light means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are provided, and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and a right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined. Then, of the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 (a specific movement). The light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on a movable member) and a frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs) provided on the front frame 53 (LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is the same as the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 move to the advanced position and can be combined. Thereby, the player can be visually enjoyed, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emission) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable member 14 are provided. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is the same as the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multi-color light). It can be visually entertained and can enhance the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable characters in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable auditors, the left movable auditorium 14L and the first movable auditorium 14L of the first movable auditory 14 When the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable role 14 is combined, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (the plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are combined. ), A plurality of LEDs (left movable members 14 </ b> L (other movable members except for the right movable member 14 </ b> R (specific movable member) of the first movable members 14) provided on the left movable member 14 </ b> L of the first movable member 14 Second light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamp 66 provided on front frame 53 (first light emitting means: plural LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) Is different from the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved to the advanced position and merged. This allows the player to visually enjoy, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: emits multicolor light) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) on the right side of the first movable member 14. Of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14. By adopting the light emission mode, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. A part of the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and the left side of the first movable role 14 without being combined with the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable role 14. A second movable role 15 (non-coalesced movable member) that is movable to cover one or both of a part of the movable role 14L (another movable member) is provided. According to this configuration, the second movable role is newly provided separately from the left movable role 14L of the combined first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14. Since the object 15 (non-coalescing movable member) appears and does not unite with the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14, a game is performed. It is possible to visually entertain and improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of movable movable objects in FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (E) to 104 (F) of the combined effect A of movable movable objects, a plurality of movable movable objects 15 (non-integrated movable members) An LED (third light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is provided, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: multicolor light emission) provided on the second movable part 15 (non-coalesced movable member) are provided. When the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are united, the first movable role is turned on. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multi-colored) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the object 14 and the left movable member 14L (other movable member) of the first movable member 14, respectively. LED that can emit light) and provided on the front frame 53 A frame lamp 66: have become so different lighting mode to the lighting mode (first light emitting means multiple LED (LED) capable of multi-color light emission). According to this configuration, the second movable role is newly provided separately from the left movable role 14L of the combined first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14. The object 15 (non-coalescing movable member) appears, and furthermore, a plurality of LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the second movable role object 15 (non-coalescing movable member). The aspect is a plurality of LEDs (second movable members) provided on the right movable member 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable member 14 and the left movable member 14L (other movable member) of the first movable member 14, respectively. (2) Light emitting mode of light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) and frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided in front frame 53 Since the light emission mode is different from the light emission mode, the player It is possible to visually entertaining, it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of movable movable objects in FIGS. 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104A to 104H of the combined effect A of the movable characters, the frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (the first light emission) Means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) and a second movable role 15 provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14. The provided plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multicolor light. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14, and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are provided. The plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable role 15 can emit multicolor light, so that the player can visually recognize the player. It can be entertained and enhance the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of movable movable objects, the jackpot game state (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player is provided. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol)), the left side of the first movable auditorium 14. The movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during a decorative design change effect (for example, during a period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the stop of the change)). The left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved to the advanced position to form a united state, thereby impacting the player. It is possible to provide a dramatic effect and to visually entertain the player, thereby improving the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combined effect A of the movable auditorium, the jackpot game state (big hit effect) for giving a profit to the player is shown in FIG. During the period from the occurrence to the end (that is, during the jackpot effect), the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 are moved. It can be combined. According to this configuration, during the period from the occurrence of the big hit gaming state (big hit production) to the end (during the big hit production), the left movable role 14L and the first movable role 14 of the first movable role 14 are formed. The right movable movable member 14R (a plurality of movable members) moves to the advanced position to form a united form, so that it is possible to provide a high-impact effect to the player and to visually entertain the player. It is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to the combined effect B of the movable role in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the combined effect of the movable characters will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the combined effect A of the movable character in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106, the left movable member 14L and the first movable member of the first movable character 14 are moved. In this embodiment, the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the role 14 is moved to the advanced position and united. However, any or all of the movable members of the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 move to the advanced position. The player may return to the evacuation position (home position) on the way to move to the advance position again, or may reciprocate between the evacuation position (home position) and the advance position, thereby performing a combined effect of the movable characters that are not combined as a result. . Also in this case, the light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 is described. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor)) is the same light emission mode, and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 (specific The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the movable member) and the plurality of LEDs (the second movable member 14L provided on the left movable member 14L of the first movable member 14) The second light-emitting means: an LED that can emit multicolor light) has a different light-emitting mode. Further, the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable role 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and as a result, When the second movable role 15 (non-coalescing movable member) newly appears while performing the union effect of the movable role that does not merge with the second movable role 15 (non-coalescing movable member), The light-emitting mode of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) includes a right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and a first movable role. The light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the left movable role 14L (other movable member) of the object 14 and the frame provided on the front frame 53 Lamp 66 (first light emitting means: multiple LEDs ( The different lighting mode to the lighting mode of the LED)) which can be color emission.

[Modification 2]
In the combined effect A of the movable characters in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable characters in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable characters in FIG. 106, the left movable member 14L and the first movable member of the first movable member 14 are shown. In this embodiment, two movable characters 14R, which are the right movable members 14R of the character 14, are moved to the advanced position and united. However, a mode may be adopted in which three or more movable members move to the advance positions and unite. In this case, the first movable auditors 14 as the specific movable auditors having the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)). The right movable object 14R may be used, a different movable role different from the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 may be used, or some movable role selected from all movable roles. It may be a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left movable part 14L and the first movable part 14 of the first movable part 14 that operate in the combined effect A of the movable part in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable part in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable part in FIG. When the right movable role 14R of the movable role 14 is located (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the left decorative member concealing the presence of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are determined. Even if the right decorative member and the hidden decorative member are provided on the game board 2, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the left decorative member, and a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the right decorative member. Good. In this case, when the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are respectively located (standby) at the retracted position (home position), the first movable role is set. A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable role 14L of the object 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 are turned off. Even so, the left decorative member and the right decorative member can emit light by the light emission of the full-color LED mounted on each of the left decorative member and the right decorative member. For example, the light emission mode of one of the decoration members of the left decoration member and the right decoration member or both of the decoration members, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emission mode of the second movable member 15 are the same. It can be an embodiment.

[Modification 4]
In the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable role in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIG. The light emission mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor) provided on the member and the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (can emit multicolor light) LED)) and the same light emission mode. However, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) and the front frame 53 are provided on the right movable movable object 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable auditorium 14. And the frame lamp 66 arranged on the left side of the opening has the same light emission mode, whereas a plurality of lamps provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14. The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. Alternatively, the light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14 and the front side Frame lamp 6 arranged around the left side of the opening of frame 53 Are different from each other in the light emitting mode, a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right movable role 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable role 14. (A possible LED) and the light emission of the frame lamp 66 arranged on the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 may be the same light emission.

[Modification 5]
In the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable role in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable role in FIG. 106, a ring-shaped decoration attached to the distal end side of the left movable role 14L. The left decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the distal end of the right movable accessory 14R, are united to form a left decorative part of the left movable auditorium 14L. When one decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape with the right decorative part of the right movable movable part 14R is formed, the combined part moves from the upper side to the lower side toward the near side (player side). He was performing a “nod (like a person bowing)” motion, tilting and returning. However, the united character may perform a “turning the human face left and right” operation of rotating and moving the left side and the right side toward the near side (the player side) and returning to the original side. . In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as an image expressing emotion, an image in which the eyes are crossed (battens) (for example, see FIG. 54) is sad. It may be an image expressing emotion.

[Modification 6]
As a degree of expectation that a jackpot game (small jackpot effect) will occur when executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the change to the stop of the change of the decorative symbol), the combined effect A of the movable role in FIG. 105, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105 is set high, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106 is set lowest. However, the combined effect A of the movable character in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. 106 are used in a jackpot game (big hit effect) in which a profit is given to the player. It may be performed as an effect. It may be executed based on an operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 by the player, or may be executed based on an operation (operation of pushing down) of the sword member 64 by the player, The execution may be performed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 64 by the player.

[Modification 7]
The light emitting mode for the left movable role of the left movable role 14L is completely different from the light emitting mode for the right movable role of the right movable role 14R, and the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable role. This is a light emitting mode for the right movable auditorium, which is exactly the same as the object 14R, and is different from the light emitting mode for the left movable auditorium of the left movable auditorium 14L. However, during a period from when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R operate to advance toward the advanced position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R. If the same light emission mode is used in conjunction with 14R, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L are set to be different. The left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are linked to each other to emit the same light, for example, illuminate in red, blink, or light in gradation, while the frame lamp 66 is turned off. Alternatively, the light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the left movable auditory body 14L, such as lighting in white or lighting in gradation.

[Modification 8]
In the combined effect A of the movable character in FIG. 104, the combined effect B of the movable character in FIG. 105, and the combined effect C of the movable character in FIG. Production may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A front frame on which the first light emitting means is provided;
Display means visually recognized through an opening formed in the front frame,
A plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and united,
The plurality of movable members are each provided with a second light emitting unit,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit provided on a specific movable member of the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit provided on the front frame are provided. Have the same light emission mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are united, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members of the plurality of movable members except the specific movable member and the second light emitting unit provided on the front frame. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
A non-coalesced movable member movable so as to cover one or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member without being combined with the plurality of movable members,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
A third light emitting means is provided on the non-coalesced movable member;
The light-emitting mode of the third light-emitting means provided on the non-coalesced movable member may be such that, when the plurality of movable members are united, the second light-emission provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member, respectively. A light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode of the device and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting device provided in the front frame.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect D2-1 to Aspect D2-4,
The first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit, and the third light emitting unit are light emitting units capable of emitting multicolor light.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect D2-1 to Aspect D2-5,
Before displaying the occurrence of the winning game effect on the display means, the plurality of movable members can be combined,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspect D2-1 to Aspect D2-5,
During the period from the production of the winning game to the end of the production, the plurality of movable members can be combined,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

11. Operation of First Movable Actor 14 in Other Embodiments When performing the effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 182 described below, the configuration of the first movable obj ect 14 is different from that of FIGS. 1 and 49 to 58. The configuration of the first movable role object 14 when performing the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described. The configuration of the first movable auditors's 14 in another embodiment that executes the effects of FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110.

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a first mode of the first movable role object 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 108 is an explanatory view illustrating a second mode of the movable role object 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 109 is an explanatory view illustrating a third mode of the movable role object 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 110 is an explanatory view exemplifying a fourth mode of the first movable role object 14 in another embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, the first movable role 14 in another embodiment includes a left fixed role 14L and a right movable role 14R. The left fixed role object 14L is not configured to be movable, and is stationary so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a. The right movable role 14R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. Each of the left fixed auditorium 14L and the right movable auditorium 14R is provided with a half of a ring-shaped decorative portion (a left decorative portion and a right decorative portion) on the tip side. That is, each of the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion has a half arc shape of the ring shape. The right movable role 14R can be stopped at the retreat position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first mode). When the right movable movable object 14R is in the retracted position, the entirety is located on the back side of the other members, and the whole is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the left fixed accessory 14L has a pair of movable members 14LP housed at the tip of the arc-shaped left decorative portion. FIG. 107 shows a state (retreat state) in which the pair of movable members 14LP are housed in the left decorative portion. In another embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 107 is also referred to as a first aspect of the movable accessory 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member, and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The movable member 14LP is located on the back side of the left decorative portion when stored, and is difficult to visually recognize, and protrudes rightward as shown in FIG. FIG. 108 illustrates an advanced position (deployed position) in which the pair of movable members 14LP protrude rightward in parallel with each other. In another embodiment, the state in FIG. 108 is also referred to as a second aspect of the movable accessory 14.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in a state where the pair of movable members 14 </ b> LP protrude from the distal end of the left fixed role 14 </ b> L, the right movable role 14 </ b> R advances to the left so that the pair of movable members 14 </ b> LP move to the right movable role. By contacting the object 14R, a single decorative member (combined part) is formed as a whole (third embodiment). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined character, thereby completing the human face as a whole. When both the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 move to the advanced position, the second movable role 15 covers a part of the upper portion of the first movable role 14. In other words, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 can be stopped in a state where they are partially overlapped and combined. The state in FIG. 110 is also referred to as a fourth mode of the movable role object 14.

12. Other Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspects of the Present Embodiment Each effect example (display effect example, movable object effect example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect described below is based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81 as described above, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted, but it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

  Hereinafter, the holding number-linked image display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. This holding number-linked image display effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the number-of-retention-linked image display effect, and when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number, The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Annual display of linked number of images A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing the hold number-linked image display effect A. The hold number-linked image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific change. In the number-of-retention-linked image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 111A and FIG. 111B, the reservation is stopped and the decoration is stopped, and the next change is started. In FIG. 111 (A), the gaming state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the random number “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (change icon) 9C disappears (holds down). Further, two (the number of holdings 2) of the holding icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbols are displayed.

  In FIG. 111 (B), the older (right) hold icon 9A displayed earlier is shifted to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon by the shift movement of the two hold icons 9A. Here, the position of the reserved icon display area can be specified by the lower rectangular image. At the same time as one (right side) of the two holding icons 9A is set to the holding, the fancy effect of the decorative symbol is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 111 (B) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to “specific fluctuation” is determined at random by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). May be performed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a state is shown in which one pending icon 9A has been added to a total of two due to the winning of the first special symbol. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state is shown in which a total of three reserve icons 9A have been obtained due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a hold number suggestion image HSG stating “Now hold 3 !!” is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies the user when the hold number becomes three, and is not displayed when the hold number is two or less. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears during a specific change when a predetermined time elapses after the display. FIG. 111 (F) shows a state in which one prize icon 9A is added by the winning of the first special symbol, and the total is four. At this time, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed for a certain period only when the hold number is 3, and is not displayed when the hold number is any other number. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. That is, the specific change ends. Thereafter, the later-described FIG. 112 (H) to FIG. 112 (J) are executed.

  FIG. 111 (H) shows a state where there is no winning of the first special symbol after the start of the specific change shown in FIG. 111 (B). That is, the decoration symbol is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after the specific change. In this way, even if the change is a specific change, when the number of holdings does not reach the predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped without displaying the holding number suggestion image HSG.

  FIG. 111 (I) shows a state in which, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), one hold icon 9A is added after a specific change to make a total of 2, and thereafter, there is no winning of the first special symbol. I have. That is, after a predetermined time (fluctuating time) elapses after the specific fluctuation, the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if the change is a specific change, when the number of holdings does not reach the predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped without displaying the holding number suggestion image HSG.

  FIG. 111 (J) shows a state in which the first special symbol has not been won after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (E). That is, after the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed and the decorative symbol has been fixed and stopped. As described above, in the case of a specific change, the ornamental design symbol HSG is displayed once, and then the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped without being displayed again.

[Display effect linked to the number of holds B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for describing the hold number-linked image display effect B. The hold number-linked image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific change. 112 (A) to 112 (D) of the hold number-linked image display effect B are the same as FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (D) of the hold number-linked image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (A) and FIG. 112 (B), the suspension is exhausted together with the stop of the decoration design, and the next new fluctuation is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the gaming state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (change icon) 9C disappears (holds down). Further, two (the number of holdings 2) of the holding icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbols are displayed.

  In FIG. 112 (B), the older (right-hand) reserved icon 9A displayed earlier is shifted to the reserved icon display area and becomes the reserved icon by the shift movement of the two reserved icons 9A. Here, the position of the reserved icon display area can be specified by the lower rectangular image. At the same time as one (right side) of the two holding icons 9A is set to the holding, the fancy effect of the decorative symbol is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 112 (B) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to “specific fluctuation” is determined at random by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). May be performed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), a state is shown in which one pending icon 9A has been added and a total of two icons have been added due to the winning of the first special symbol. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a state is shown in which a total of three reserve icons 9A have been obtained due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a hold number suggestion image HSG stating “Now hold 3 !!” is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies the user when the hold number becomes three, and is not displayed when the hold number is two or less. The display of the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in a specific change, and the next change is started. FIG. 112 (E) illustrates an example of a state during a change following a specific change. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (the number of hold icons 2) are displayed. FIG. 112 (F) shows a state in which one prize icon 9A is added and a total of three prize icons are added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this change. At this time, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed although the reserved number has become three. That is, in the next change after the specific change, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if a predetermined condition is satisfied for the hold number (the hold number becomes 3). In other words, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific change. Thereby, the player can obtain a thrilling feeling as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the decoration symbol is fixed and stopped in the next variation after the specific variation. After that, the next fluctuation is started. FIG. 112 (H) shows an example of the state during the next change following the specific change. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (the number of hold icons 2) are displayed. FIG. 112 (I) shows a state in which one prize icon 9A has been added and a total of three prize icons have been added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this change. At this time, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed although the reserved number has become three. In other words, in the next change following the specific change, even if a predetermined condition (the number of holds becomes 3) is satisfied for the number of holds, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific change. Thereby, the player can obtain a thrilling feeling as to whether or not the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decoration symbol is fixed and stopped at the next change after the specific change.

[Display effect linked to the number of holds C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for describing the hold number-linked image display effect C. The hold number-linked image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific change. FIG. 113 (A) of the number-of-retention-linked image display effect C is the same as FIG. 111 (A) of the number-of-retention-linked image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the suspension is exhausted when the decoration symbol is fixed and the next new change is started. In FIG. 112 (A), the gaming state is the normal state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at “567”. In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the hold icon (change icon) 9C disappears (holds down). Further, two (the number of holdings 2) of the holding icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbols are displayed.

  In FIG. 113B, by shifting the two holding icons 9A, the older (right) holding icon 9A displayed earlier moves to the holding icon display area and becomes the holding icon. Here, the position of the reserved icon display area can be specified by the lower rectangular image. At the same time as one (right side) of the two holding icons 9A is set to the holding, the fancy effect of the decorative symbol is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 113 (B) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. Here, whether or not the fluctuation corresponds to “specific fluctuation” is determined at random by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the big hit game), or the game state changes (for example, the time saving state changes to the normal state). May be performed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this specific change. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds remaining", and the countdown is started after the display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), a state is shown in which one hold icon 9A has been added and a total of two icons have been added due to the winning of the first special symbol. The timer image TM1 continues to count down, and is indicated here as "8 more seconds". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a state is shown in which a total of three reserve icons 9A have been formed due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a hold number suggestion image HSG stating “Now hold 3 !!” is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies the user when the hold number becomes three, and is not displayed when the hold number is two or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (E) and FIG. 113 (F), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at a specific change, and the next change is started. FIG. 113 (G) shows the state during the change following the specific change, which is the same as FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of the number-of-reservations-linked image display effect B, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 (H) to FIG. 113 (J) show, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), that one hold icon 9 </ b> A is added after a specific change, for a total of 2, and thereafter, the first special symbol prize is won. This shows a state in which there was no data. In other words, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses after the specific fluctuation, the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", and thereafter, the timer image TM1 disappears and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if the change is a specific change, when the number of holdings does not reach the predetermined value (here, 3), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped without displaying the holding number suggestion image HSG.

[Display effect for linked number of images D]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for describing the suspended number-linked image display effect D. The hold number-linked image display effect is an effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific change. In FIG. 114 (A) of the hold number linked image display effect D, it is notified that the time reduction game is started after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Time saving mode start !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times saved is one, and the state returns to the normal state after one lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the hold number-linked image display effect D, since the hold icon is not displayed, the current hold number is shown at the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114 (A), by right-handing, the reservation of the second special symbol changes from 0 to 1 and becomes 0 at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol in FIG. 114 (B).

  In FIG. 114 (B), one hold of the second special symbol is consumed, and the remaining becomes zero, and a variable effect of the decorative symbol is executed. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 114 (B) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. Here, “specific fluctuation” refers to the fluctuation of the first second special symbol executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the number of times reduced is one in the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbols lottery is not included in the number of times reduced. Note that the number of times saved can be set to an arbitrary number. Further, not only the second special symbol lottery but also the first special symbol lottery may be included in the count of the number of times saved. Note that an image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 is displayed during this specific change. Here, the timer image TM1 is described as "10 seconds remaining", and the countdown is started after the display. In FIG. 114 (B), the suspension of the second special symbol is changed from 0 to 2 due to the continuation of right-handing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the right of the second special symbol is changed from 2 to 3 by the right-handed continuation. In conjunction with this, a hold number suggestion image HSG stating “Now hold 3 !!” is displayed. That is, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies the user when the hold number becomes three, and is not displayed when the hold number is two or less. While the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Here, "5 seconds remaining" is indicated. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 114 (D) and FIG. 114 (E), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the display of the hold number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the decorative symbol is stopped at “789” in a specific change, and the number of reserved second special symbols is changed from three to two. Then, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is executed. At this time, "normal mode start!" Is displayed before the fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 114 (G). Thereafter, a variable display is performed.

  In FIG. 114 (H), the timer image TM2 is displayed together with the fluctuation display during the fluctuation next to the specific fluctuation. This timer image TM2 merely shows the content of the timer "10 seconds left", and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed "10 seconds" without counting down. In the present case, such an image is also called a timer image. After the confirmation stop, the number of reservations is changed from 2 to 1, and the next change is started. At this time, the timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image only indicates the content of the timer "5 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time elapses without performing a countdown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. The number of reservations of the second special symbol changes from 1 to 0. In FIGS. 114 (H) to 114 (J), similarly to FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (J) of the number-of-retention-linked image display effect B, the number of reservations is a predetermined value (for example, 3) in each variation. Is not displayed, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the number-of-reservations-linked image display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific change, a hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. And a second effect in which the hold number suggestion image HSG disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first effect is executed after the first effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 to FIG. 114, in the first effect, the number-of-reservation suggestion image HSG is displayed when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more (for example, 3) It is not displayed before the reserved number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 113, if the number of holdings does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific change, the holding number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. According to this configuration, since the hold number suggestion image HSG may not be displayed, the impression when displayed may be increased. In this way, a novel effect that has never been seen before allows the player to visually enjoy the game and enhances interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, when the timer image is displayed at the start of the specific change, and when the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific change, the hold number suggestion is performed. The image HSG disappears with the timer image. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 to FIG. 114, the hold number suggestion image HSG is an image indicating the content indicating that the hold number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3). is there. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player by a novel effect that has not been seen in the past, in which the predetermined image representing the number of holds on the image itself is displayed immediately, and it is possible to improve the interest. .
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, during the change executed after the specific change, the hold number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player by an unprecedented novel effect that the predetermined image does not appear even if the number of holds is predetermined in the next fluctuation, surprisingly surprising the player. , Can improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the specific change is executed in the time saving state, and the change executed after the specific change is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the holding number-linked image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The number of holds on which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed is not limited to three, and may be any number. In addition, it is preferable that there are a plurality of hold numbers in which the hold number suggestion image HSG is displayed. Further, the number of suspensions on which the suspension number suggestion image HSG is displayed may be plural. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of reservations is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content indicated by the hold number suggestion image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, "even now", "not yet", "already full", etc. may be used.

[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned timer image only needs to represent the contents of the timer such as “10 seconds remaining” or “3:00”. The countdown does not necessarily have to be performed. For example, a mode in which "100 seconds" is displayed and then disappears in the first variation, and "10 seconds" is displayed and then disappears in the next variation is also referred to as a timer image.

[Modification 4]
The configurations of the number-of-retention-linked image display effects A to D can be appropriately combined. Also, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all the fluctuations may correspond to the “specific fluctuation”.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
A first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the number of holds reaches a predetermined number due to winning during a specific change;
And a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first effect was performed after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the predetermined image is displayed when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the number of reservations reaches the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
If the reserved number does not reach the predetermined number during the specific change, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
The timer image is displayed at the start of the specific change, the display disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value,
If the predetermined image is displayed during the specific change, the predetermined image disappears together with the timer image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The predetermined image is an image in which the content indicating that the number of reservations has reached the predetermined number is represented.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The predetermined image is not displayed during a change performed after the specific change,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The specific change is performed during a time reduction state, and the change performed after the specific change is performed during a normal state.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The holding number change interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This holding number change interlocking effect can be executed after a jackpot game, during a decorative effect fluctuating effect, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the number-of-holds change interlocking effect. When the change is made, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending A change-linked production A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for describing the number-of-retention changes interlocking effect A. The pending number change interlocking effect is that, when the “specific effect” is being executed, if the number of holds makes a “predetermined change”, the “predetermined image” is displayed in the fluctuation that starts after the end of the specific effect. It is a directing. Here, the “specific effect” is a decorative display effect of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and the “predetermined change” of the number of holdings means that the number of holdings increases by 3 or more during the specific effect. The “image” will be described as an expected degree suggestion image KSG. In the present embodiment, the “predetermined image” may be the timer image TM1.

  In the number-of-retention changes interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a changing effect of a decorative symbol is executed. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to “specific effect” in the claims. Here, whether or not this variation corresponds to a “specific effect” is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific effect may be a variable effect that is executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). (A change to a state) may be performed. An image indicating whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the holding is the holding of the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the number of holds changes (increases) from 1 to 4 due to three winnings during the variable production (specific production), the “specific production” is being executed. Then, the number of reservations has changed "predetermined change". Then, after the confirmation stop shown in FIG. 115 (C), the expected degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation as shown in FIG. 115 (D). Here, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is described as “chance”, and indicates the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 115 (D) corresponds to “first variation” in the claims. In the case of the immediately preceding change shown in FIGS. 115 (A) and 115 (B), if the number of holds does not change by a predetermined amount, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next change.

  In the next change shown in FIG. 115 (D), the expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed together with the start of the change. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (E), the expected degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing (for example, two seconds after the display) after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the display of both the reduced expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed with the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 115 (I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (the next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 115 (J). The next variation shown in FIG. 115 (J) corresponds to the “second variation” in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or may simply indicate the content of the timer “3 seconds”, and may disappear after a predetermined time without performing the countdown and “3 seconds”. Is also good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Standing number change linked production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing the pending number change interlocking effect B. The pending number change interlocking effect is that, when the “specific effect” is being executed, if the number of holds makes a “predetermined change”, the “predetermined image” is displayed in the fluctuation that starts after the end of the specific effect. It is a directing. Here, the "specific effect" is a variable display effect of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holdings is defined as the second special symbol being won during the specific effect by winning the second special symbol. This means that the number of reserved symbols increases from 0 to 1, and the "predetermined image" will be described as an expected degree suggestion image KSG. In the present embodiment, the “predetermined image” may be the timer image TM1.

  In the number-of-retention changes interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIGS. 116 (A) and 116 (B), after the first special symbol has been fixed and stopped, the reservation icon corresponding to the next first special symbol is displayed together with the completion of the reservation. Shifts to the holding icon 9C, and the next change is started. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to “specific effect” in the claims. Here, whether or not this variation corresponds to a “specific effect” is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific effect may be a variable effect that is executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). (A change to a state) may be performed. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether or not the variable effect corresponds to a specific effect may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the holding is the holding of the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 116 (B), when the number of holdings changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol during the fluctuation effect (specific effect), the “specific effect” is executed. Means that the hold number has changed "predetermined change". Then, after the final stop shown in FIG. 116 (C), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next change in which the second special symbol lottery is performed as shown in FIG. 116 (D). Here, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is described as “chance”, and indicates the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 116 (D) corresponds to “first variation” in the claims. In addition, in the previous change shown in FIGS. 116 (B) to 116 (C), if there is no winning of the second special symbol, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next change.

  In the next change shown in FIG. 116 (D), the expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed together with the start of the change. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (E), the expected degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of both the reduced expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed with the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116 (H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 116 (I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next change (the next change after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 116 (J). The next variation shown in FIG. 116 (J) corresponds to the “second variation” in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or may simply indicate the content of the timer “3 seconds”, and may disappear after a predetermined time without performing the countdown and “3 seconds”. Is also good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Changing number of pending changes C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for describing the pending number change interlocking effect C. The pending number change interlocking effect is that, when the “specific effect” is being executed, if the number of holds makes a “predetermined change”, the “predetermined image” is displayed in the fluctuation that starts after the end of the specific effect. It is a directing. Here, the "specific effect" is a variable display effect of the first special symbol in the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" of the number of holdings is the second special symbol during the specific effect by winning the second special symbol. This means that the number of reserved symbols increases from 0 to 1, and the "predetermined image" will be described as an expected degree suggestion image KSG. In the present embodiment, the “predetermined image” may be the timer image TM1.

  In the hold number change interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), it is notified that the time-saving game starts after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Time saving mode start !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times saved is one, and the state returns to the normal state after one lottery of the second special symbol. In FIG. 117 (A) and FIG. 117 (B), a variable effect corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol obtained by winning before the big hit game is performed. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern corresponds to “specific effect” in the claims. That is, here, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state corresponds to “specific effect”. If a second special symbol is won by right-handing during this specific effect, a hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (B). As shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of reserves changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol during the fluctuation effect (specific effect), the “specific effect” is executed. Means that the hold number has changed "predetermined change". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), after the final stop, a fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed.

  In the next fluctuation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the gaming state is the time saving state, and the fluctuation effect is executed by holding the second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation. Here, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is described as “chance”, and indicates the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 117 (D) corresponds to “first variation” in the claims. In addition, if there is no winning of the second special symbol in the previous change shown in FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (C), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next change.

  In the next change shown in FIG. 117 (D), the expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed together with the start of the change. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 117 (E), the expected degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of both the reduced expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears as shown in FIG. 117 (F). In FIG. 117 (F), a right-handed player has won the second special symbol, and the hold icon 9 </ b> B is newly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed with the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 117 (H). Thereafter, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and "start normal mode!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (I), and the change of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. Thereafter, in the next variation (the next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 117 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative design. The next variation shown in FIG. 117 (J) corresponds to the “second variation” in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or may simply indicate the content of the timer “3 seconds”, and may disappear after a predetermined time without performing the countdown and “3 seconds”. Is also good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Standing number change linked effect D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for describing the pending number change interlocking effect D. The pending number change interlocking effect is that, when the “specific effect” is being executed, if the number of holds makes a “predetermined change”, the “predetermined image” is displayed in the fluctuation that starts after the end of the specific effect. It is a directing. Here, the “specific effect” is an effect when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state, and the “predetermined change” of the number of holdings is the “special change” of the second special symbol during the specific effect. The winning number increases the reserved number of the second special symbol from 0 to 1, and the “predetermined image” is described as the expected degree suggestion image KSG. In the present embodiment, the “predetermined image” may be the timer image TM1.

  In the hold number change interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A) to FIG. 118 (C), it is notified that the time reduction game starts after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Time saving mode start !!" is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the number of times saved is one, and the state returns to the normal state after one lottery of the second special symbol. FIG. 118 (A) shows a state in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not held after the jackpot game. Here, the effect when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game corresponds to the “specific effect” in the claims. In other words, in this case, a state in which no change is made in the time reduction state or the display of “start time reduction mode!” Corresponds to “specific effect”. If a second special symbol is won by right-handing during this specific effect, a hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (B). While the “time saving mode start!” Is displayed (specific effect), as shown in FIG. 117 (B), when the number of reserves changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol. When the “specific effect” is being executed, the number of reservations has changed “predetermined change”. After the confirmation stop, a fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed.

  In the next fluctuation of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the gaming state is the time saving state, and the fluctuation effect is performed by holding the second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation of the specific effect. Here, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is described as “chance”, and indicates the expected degree of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 118D corresponds to “first variation” in the claims. If there is no winning of the second special symbol in the previous change shown in FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (C), the expectation degree suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next change.

  In the next fluctuation shown in FIG. 118 (D), the expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 are always displayed together with the start of the fluctuation. The timer image TM1 is described as "5 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 118 (E), the expected degree suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the display of both the reduced expected degree suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappears as shown in FIG. 118 (F). In FIG. 118 (F), there is a winning of the second special symbol by right-handing, and the hold icon 9 </ b> B is newly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed with the same fluctuation. The timer image TM2 is described as "3 more seconds", and after the display, the countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes “0”, the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and "normal mode start!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 118 (I), and the change of the second special symbol is started in the normal state. Thereafter, in the next variation (the next variation following the specific effect) shown in FIG. 118 (J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation effect of the decorative symbol. The next variation shown in FIG. 118 (J) corresponds to the “second variation” in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or may simply indicate the content of the timer “3 seconds”, and may disappear after a predetermined time without performing the countdown and “3 seconds”. Is also good. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it is fixed and stopped.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the production effect linked to the change in the number of holds.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115 to FIG. 118, if the number of holdings changes by a predetermined amount while a specific effect is being executed, the first operation started after the end of the specific effect. The first effect in which the predetermined image (the expected degree suggestion image KSG or the timer image TM1) is displayed in the fluctuation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1, as shown in FIGS. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player by an unprecedented novel effect in which a timer image is always displayed when the number of holdings changes by a predetermined amount while a specific effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation, and after the first timer image TM1 disappears in the first fluctuation. A second effect in which the second timer image TM2 is displayed during the same fluctuation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has not been known before, in which it is predetermined that the timer image is always displayed twice with the same fluctuation, thereby improving the interest. Can be planned.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115 to FIG. 118, a third effect in which the third timer image TM3 is displayed is executed in the second change executed after the first change. can do. According to this configuration, the timer image is always displayed in advance even in the next fluctuation, and the player can visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has not existed in the past. be able to.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image (the expected degree suggestion image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first change, and the size changes during the same change. According to this configuration, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG always displayed by the first fluctuation can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been changed, and the player can visually enjoy the image. Enhancement of interest can be achieved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific effect is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first variation is the first special symbol. Alternatively, the predetermined image is a change of the other of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is a change of the predetermined number of the other special symbols of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the change of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If (0 → 1 in this case), it is displayed in the fluctuation of the other symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the specific effect and the first change are executed in the time reduction state, and the second change is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the pending number change interlocking effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expected degree suggestion image KSG is displayed as the predetermined image, but the predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, or may be a character image or an image indicating a place where a game ball is aimed.

[Modification 2]
The specific effect of FIG. 117 is a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the first fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is a second special symbol during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Is changed by a predetermined change (here, 0 → 1), the change is displayed in the change of the second special symbol. However, in the specific effect of FIG. 117, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite. That is, the specific effect is a change effect of the second special symbol, the first change is a change of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is a change of the first special symbol during the change of the second special symbol. When the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value (here, 0 → 1), it may be displayed in a change of the first special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image in the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to the digital display, and may indicate the remaining period up to the end point by a needle or an area. The timer image does not necessarily have to be moving as long as it is an image representing the timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed a plurality of times and whose remaining period up to the end point is reduced each time it is displayed is also included in the timer image. In addition, any image that clearly indicates a timer is included in the timer image even if it is not moving.

[Modification 4]
The expected degree suggestion image KSG is moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced at a predetermined timing after the display. However, the expected degree suggestion image KSG may be large or may not move.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the holding number change interlocking effects A to D may be appropriately combined.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
When the number of holdings changes by a predetermined amount while a specific effect is being executed, a first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in a first variation started after the end of the specific effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined image is a first timer image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The first timer image is displayed at the start of the first variation;
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second effect in which a second timer image is displayed during the same variation can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
In a second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which a third timer image is displayed can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined image is displayed at the start of the first change, and changes in size during the same change.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The specific effect is a variable effect of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol,
The first variation is the other variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The predetermined image is displayed when the other special symbol or the second special symbol changes a predetermined number while the other one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes, while the other special symbol or the second special symbol changes. Done,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The specific effect and the first variation are performed during a time reduction state;
The second variation is performed during a normal state;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the holding icon movement change effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122. This pending icon movement change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Pending icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the holding icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), four holding icons 9A and the holding icons 9C are displayed while the decorative design is changing. The four reserve icons 9A are displayed in a row in a row and correspond to each change after the next change, and can indicate the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by a color.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the suspension icon 9C disappears when the decoration symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the next change is started. The variation shown in FIG. 119 (C) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the four hold icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. In other words, the four holding icons 9A are in the same state as at the time of the previous change. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, the four holding icons 9A shift rightward as shown in FIG. 119 (D). At this time, the hold icon (mesh pattern) on the rightmost side moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and has three hold icons 9A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the decoration icon is fixed and stopped, and the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the next change is started. When the next change is started, the three hold icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, the three hold icons 9A shift rightward as shown in FIG. 119 (G). At this time, the hold icon (white) on the rightmost side moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and has two hold icons 9A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the decoration icon is fixed and stopped, and the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the next change is started. When the next change is started, the two hold icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the change, the two holding icons 9A shift rightward as shown in FIG. 119 (J). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (black) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed, becomes the hold icon 9C, and the number of hold icons 9A becomes one.

[Hold icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect B. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the holding icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), four holding icons 9A are displayed while the decorative symbol is changing. The four reserve icons 9A are displayed in a row in a row and correspond to each change after the next change, and can indicate the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by a color.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The four holding icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the next fluctuation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 120 (C) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) is started, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), four hold icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the four holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the display of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon (mesh pattern) on the rightmost side moves rightward as shown in FIG. Frame out from 7a. The other three holding icons 9A do not move. As a result, the number of hold icons 9A becomes three.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The three holding icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next change is started, the three hold icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 120 (G), three holding icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (H), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The three holding icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next change is started, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, two holding icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, the two holding icons 9A have been reduced by one from the time when they were displayed at the time of the previous change. On the other hand, during the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) of the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The two hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. Then, the next change corresponding to the hold icon 9A (white) on the leftmost side is started.

[Pending icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement change effect C. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the holding icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), four holding icons 9A are displayed while the decorative design is changing. The four reserve icons 9A are displayed in a row in a row and correspond to each change after the next change, and can indicate the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by a color.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and one of the hold icons 9A (here, the third from the right) changes to a hold state. Specifically, the color of the hold icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the degree of expectation of the change in the change corresponding to the changed reservation has been increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The four holding icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the next change is started. The variation shown in FIG. 121 (D) corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) is started, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (E). At this time, the four holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the display of the four holding icons 9A, as shown in FIG. 121 (F), the rightmost holding icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left. I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (G), the hold icon displayed in an enlarged manner stops at a position overlapping another hold icon 9C. Thereafter, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (H), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next change is started, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 121 (I), three hold icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (J), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. FIG. 121 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the pending icon movement change effect B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the pending icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Pending icon movement change effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement change effect D. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which a plurality of hold icons are displayed during a specific change, and the hold icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the hold icon movement change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), four hold icons 9A are displayed while the decorative design is changing. The four reserve icons 9A are displayed in a row in a row and correspond to each change after the next change, and can indicate the degree of expectation of a hit in each change after the next change. Here, the hold icon 9A can indicate the degree of expectation by a color. In FIG. 122A, the hold icon 9A has not yet indicated the degree of expectation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the character image CHA is displayed, and two of the holding icons 9A (here, the rightmost and the third from the right) change in holding. Specifically, one of the colors of the hold icon 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the degree of expectation of the change in the change corresponding to the changed reservation has been increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The four holding icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), the following fluctuation is started. The fluctuation shown in FIG. 122 (D) corresponds to “specific fluctuation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) is started, the four hold icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the change, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, the four holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left as shown in FIG. 122 (F). I do. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), the enlarged display of the suspension icon stops at a position overlapping the other suspension icons 9C. Thereafter, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the next fluctuation is started. When the next change is started, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 122 (I), three holding icons 9A are displayed. At this time, the three holding icons 9A are in the same state as the state displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped. FIG. 122 (J) corresponds to FIG. 120 (H) of the pending icon movement change effect B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120 (I) and (J) of the pending icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pending icon movement change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119 (C) to 119 (E), a first effect in which a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during a specific change is executed. It is possible, and the plurality of predetermined images each correspond to each change after the specific change, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation in each change, and among the plurality of predetermined images, The predetermined image corresponding to the fluctuation can execute a second effect of starting the predetermined movement after the specific fluctuation starts. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player by an unprecedented novel effect of performing a shift movement after the start of the change, thereby improving the interest. 120 to 122 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), in the first effect, a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed in a line. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect of a hold icon that shifts after the start of the change, which has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 120 to 122 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the predetermined image (reservation icon 9C) indicates the degree of expectation by a color. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect of a hold icon that shifts after the start of the change, which has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 120 to 122 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a plurality of predetermined images (four hold icons 9C) are displayed during a change before a specific change. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 120 to 122 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 (F) to (G) and FIGS. 122 (F) to (G), in the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific change Is moved to a position overlapping with the predetermined image. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), FIG. 120 (G), FIG. 121 (I), and FIG. It is possible to execute a third effect in which, of the images, a predetermined image excluding a predetermined image corresponding to a specific change is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the pending icon movement change effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, at the time of a specific change, four hold icons 9A as predetermined images are displayed side by side. However, as long as a plurality (two or more) of the hold icons 9A as the predetermined images can be displayed at the time of a specific change, it is not always necessary to be able to display four.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol is illustrated as a predetermined image that corresponds to each change after the next change and that indicates a degree of expectation in each change after the next change. The predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol, or may be another image. That is, each image corresponds to each change after the next change, and an arbitrary image indicating the expected degree of winning in each change after the next change can be set as the predetermined image.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the pending icon movement change effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Also, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all the fluctuations may correspond to the “specific fluctuation”.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Embodiment E3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
During a specific change, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed,
The plurality of predetermined images, each corresponding to each variation after the specific variation, it is possible to suggest the expected degree of hit in each variation,
Of the plurality of predetermined images, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is capable of executing a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed in a line.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The predetermined image indicates a degree of expectation by a color,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
During the fluctuation before the specific fluctuation, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
In the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific change moves to a position overlapping another predetermined image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
During the next variation of the specific variation, it is possible to execute a third effect in which, among the plurality of predetermined images, a predetermined image excluding a predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the fluctuation middle mode start display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. This mid-variation next mode start display effect can be executed during a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the fluctuation middle mode start display effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Variation middle mode start display effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for describing the mid-variation next mode start display effect A. During the specific fluctuation, the special mode lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation (the relevant fluctuation) is lost if the special figure lottery result is lost during the specific fluctuation, even before the end of the relevant fluctuation (fixed stop). This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to be advanced when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the “specific change” refers to a change in which a progress mode selection effect in which a mode to be advanced after the change is determined (selected) according to a lottery result (hit or loss) of the change is performed. Say. Here, the “mode” refers to a state in which an image of a background, a decorative pattern, a character, or the like is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a state in which a predetermined effect is executed.

  In the variation middle mode start display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), during the variation display of the decorative symbol, four holding icons 9A and the holding icons 9C are displayed. The fluctuation shown in FIG. 123A corresponds to “specific fluctuation” in the claims. The gaming state when the fluctuation in FIG. 123 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a big hit, the big hit game is executed after the end of the change, and thereafter, the game enters the “success mode” of the time-saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state enters the “failure mode” while the normal state is maintained. In both the success mode and the failure mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

  After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) after the fluctuation display in FIG. 123 (A), the fluctuation display disappears as shown in FIG. The displayed mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

  If the change is a loss, a failure mode entry image LMG in which “failure mode entry” is described in characters is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. Thereby, it is notified that the failure mode has been entered. That is, the start of the mode in which the lottery result corresponding to the specific change proceeds when the result of the lottery is lost is notified even before the end of the specific change (determination stop). The background image is switched to a predetermined background image along with the display of the failure mode entry image LMG. Here, it is switched to a hatched background image. Here, the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochrome image or a pattern.

  Thereafter, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the variable display, the four holding icons 9A, and the holding icons 9C are displayed again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the suspension icon 9C disappears with the confirmation stop (end of the specific fluctuation). In this case, the determination is stopped at “567”. At this time, since the user has already entered the failure mode, the background image and the like are already in the failure mode, and the failure mode continues. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next change (the next change after the specific change) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (F). The game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state) in the next fluctuation, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in the failure mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the suspension icon 9C disappears upon completion of the determination. In this case, the determination is stopped at “721”. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next change (the next change after the specific change) is started as shown in FIG. 123 (H). The game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state) in the next fluctuation, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in the failure mode.

  Returning to FIG. 123 (B), if the lottery result corresponding to the change (specific change) in FIG. 123 (A) is a big hit, decoration is performed according to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 123 (I). The symbol stops in a jackpot manner. In this case, the determination is stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is over, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 123 (J), a success mode entry image WMG in which “success mode entry” is described in characters is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the user has entered the success mode. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image along with the display of the success mode entry image WMG. Here, the background image is switched to a background image in which many fine cross patterns are shown. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Variation middle mode start display effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation middle next mode start display effect B. During the specific fluctuation, the special mode lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation (the relevant fluctuation) is lost if the special figure lottery result is lost during the specific fluctuation, even before the end of the relevant fluctuation (fixed stop). This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to be advanced when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the “specific change” refers to a change in which a progress mode selection effect in which a mode to be advanced after the change is determined (selected) according to a lottery result (hit or loss) of the change is performed. Say. Here, the “mode” refers to a state in which an image of a background, a decorative pattern, a character, or the like is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a state in which a predetermined effect is executed.

  In the variation middle mode start display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), during the variation display of the decorative symbol, four holding icons 9A and the holding icons 9C are displayed. The variation shown in FIG. 124A corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 124 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a big hit, a big hit game is executed after the end of the change, and thereafter, the game enters the "time saving mode" of the time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game state enters the “battle mode” while the normal state is maintained. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

  After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 lines) after the fluctuation display in FIG. 124A, the fluctuation display disappears as shown in FIG. 124B, and the words "hour saving mode" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

  If the change is a loss, a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is described in characters is displayed as shown in FIG. 124 (C) in response to the operation of the effect button 63. Thereby, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, the start of the mode in which the lottery result corresponding to the specific change proceeds when the result of the lottery is lost is notified even before the end of the specific change (determination stop). The background image is switched to a predetermined background image in accordance with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, it is switched to a hatched background image. Here, the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochrome image or a pattern.

  Thereafter, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and a movie image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle as shown in FIG. 124 (D) is displayed. In addition, four hold icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the ally character CRA is defeated, the game is stopped with a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be displayed. At this time, since the game has already entered the battle mode, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and the battle mode is continued. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next change (the next change after the specific change) is started as shown in FIG. 124 (F). The game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state) in the next fluctuation, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in the battle mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (G), the ally character CRA is defeated, the game is stopped with a loss, and the hold icon 9C disappears. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next change (the next change after the specific change) is started as shown in FIG. 124 (H). The game state is also the normal state (non-time saving state) in the next fluctuation, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image is continuously in the battle mode.

  Returning to FIG. 124 (B), if the lottery result corresponding to the change (specific change) in FIG. 124 (A) is a jackpot, decoration is performed according to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 124 (I). The symbol stops in a jackpot manner. In this case, the determination is stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game is started. After the end of the jackpot game, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124 (J), a time saving mode entry image WMG in which “hour entry mode entry” is described in characters is displayed. Thus, it is notified that the time saving mode has been entered. The background image is switched to a predetermined background image in accordance with the display of the time saving mode entry image WMG. Here, the background image is switched to a background image in which many fine cross patterns are shown. After that, the variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating next mode start display effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for describing the mid-variation next mode start display effect C. During the specific fluctuation, the special mode lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation (the relevant fluctuation) is lost if the special figure lottery result is lost during the specific fluctuation, even before the end of the relevant fluctuation (fixed stop). This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to be advanced when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the “specific change” refers to a change in which a progress mode selection effect in which a mode to be advanced after the change is determined (selected) according to a lottery result (hit or loss) of the change is performed. Say. Here, the “mode” refers to a state in which an image of a background, a decorative pattern, a character, or the like is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a state in which a predetermined effect is executed.

  In the fluctuation middle mode start display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, four reservation icons 9B and the reservation icons 9C are displayed. The fluctuation shown in FIG. 125A corresponds to “specific fluctuation” in the claims. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 125 (A) is being executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a big hit, a big hit game is executed after the end of the change, and thereafter, the game enters the "time saving mode" of the time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game enters the “battle mode” in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

  After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, five lines) after the fluctuation display in FIG. 125A, the fluctuation display disappears and a “time reduction mode” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 125B. The displayed mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the change (specific change) is a hit or a loss.

  If the fluctuation is a loss, a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is described in characters is displayed as shown in FIG. 125 (C) in response to the operation of the effect button 63. Thereby, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, the start of the mode in which the lottery result corresponding to the specific change proceeds when the result of the lottery is lost is notified even before the end of the specific change (determination stop). The background image is switched to a predetermined background image in accordance with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, it is switched to a hatched background image. Here, the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochrome image or a pattern.

  After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the expectation image KG indicating the expectation of the jackpot after the next change is displayed. Here, at the time of the change (specific change), there are four holdings (holding icons 9B) of the second special symbol lottery, and thus four expectations are shown. The one corresponding to the first hold executed next is “first round... 10%”, which indicates that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold executed next is “second round... 15%”, which indicates that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reservation is "third round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reservation is "fourth round ... 21%". When the expectation degree image KG is displayed, the specific change ends and the symbol is fixed and stopped. After the confirmation stop, the gaming state switches from the time saving state to the normal state. Since the player has already entered the battle mode, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and this is being continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), the character of “Start the first match!” Is displayed with the start of the next change (the next change after the specific change), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. Is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost and the pattern stops. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (G), when the next change (the next change following the specific change) starts, the character “Start the second round!” Is displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. A movie image in which the CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost and the pattern is stopped. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), the next variation (the next variation next to the specific variation) starts, and the character “Third Round Start!” Is displayed, and the ally character CRA is displayed. A movie image in which the enemy character CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125 (J), the ally character CRA wins, and the symbol is determined and stopped with a big hit. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be displayed. The background image is continuously in the battle mode.

  Returning to FIG. 125 (B), if the lottery result corresponding to the change (specific change) in FIG. 125 (A) is a big hit, the above-described change middle mode start display effect B shown in FIG. 124 (I) and FIG. An effect similar to 124 (J) is executed.

[Fluctuating middle mode start display effect D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation middle mode start display effect D. During the specific fluctuation, the special mode lottery result corresponding to the specific fluctuation (the relevant fluctuation) is lost if the special figure lottery result is lost during the specific fluctuation, even before the end of the relevant fluctuation (fixed stop). This is an effect of notifying the start of the mode to be advanced when the special figure lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is lost. Here, the “specific change” refers to a change in which a progress mode selection effect in which a mode to be advanced after the change is determined (selected) according to a lottery result (hit or loss) of the change is performed. Say. Here, the “mode” refers to a state in which an image of a background, a decorative pattern, a character, or the like is displayed in a predetermined mode, or a state in which a predetermined effect is executed.

  In the variation middle mode start display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), during the variation display of the decorative symbol, four holding icons 9B and the holding icons 9C are displayed. The variation shown in FIG. 126A corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 126 (A) is being executed is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a big hit, a big hit game is executed after the end of the change, and thereafter, the game enters the "time saving mode" of the time saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the game enters the “battle mode” in the normal state. In both the time saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

  After a predetermined period (for example, five lines) has elapsed after the variable display in FIG. 126 (A), the variable display disappears as shown in FIG. 126 (B). The displayed mode image MDG is displayed. A button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, different effects are executed depending on whether the change (specific change) is a hit or a loss.

  If the change is a loss, a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is described in characters as shown in FIG. 126 (C) is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63. Thereby, it is notified that the battle mode has been entered. That is, the start of the mode in which the lottery result corresponding to the specific change proceeds when the result of the lottery is lost is notified even before the end of the specific change (determination stop). The background image is switched to a predetermined background image in accordance with the display of the battle mode entry image LMG. Here, it is switched to a hatched background image. Here, the background image includes not only an image composed of a moving image such as a specific character image but also a monochrome image or a pattern.

  After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the expectation image KG indicating the expectation of the jackpot after the next change and the timer image TM1 are displayed. Here, at the time of the change (specific change), there are four holdings (holding icons 9B) of the second special symbol lottery, so the four degrees of expectation are shown in the expectation degree image KG. The one corresponding to the first hold executed next is “first round... 10%”, which indicates that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold executed next is “second round... 15%”, which indicates that the jackpot probability in the next next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reservation is "third round ... 18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reservation is "fourth round ... 21%". When the timer value becomes “0” due to the countdown of the timer image TM1, both the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1 disappear from the screen, and then the symbols are fixed and stopped (the specific fluctuation ends). After the confirmation stop, the gaming state switches from the time saving state to the normal state. Since the player has already entered the battle mode, the background image and the like are already in the battle mode, and this is being continued.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), the character "Start the first battle!" Is displayed at the same time as the next change (the next change after the specific change) starts, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. Is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), the expectation degree image KG is displayed again. Here, four expectations are shown as in the case of the previous fluctuation (specific fluctuation). Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), the portion of “first round... 10%” corresponding to the current fluctuation moves rightward and goes out of the frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), the ally character CRA is defeated, and the symbol is lost and the pattern stops. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126 (I), when the next change (the next change after the specific change) starts, the characters “Start the second round!” Are displayed, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character are displayed. A movie image in which the CRB battles is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the expected degree image KG is displayed again. Here, three degrees of expectation in which “1st round... 10%” has disappeared unlike the previous fluctuation time are shown. After that, the portion of “the second round... 15%” corresponding to the current fluctuation may move rightward to go out of the frame or may not move.

  Returning to FIG. 126 (B), if the lottery result corresponding to the change (specific change) in FIG. 126 (A) is a big hit, the above-described change middle mode start display effect B shown in FIG. 124 (I) and FIG. An effect similar to 124 (J) is executed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the fluctuation middle mode start display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), when a lottery result corresponding to the change is lost during a specific change, the change is not performed even before the end of the change. A first effect (display of failure mode entry image LMG) for notifying the start of the mode (failure mode) to be advanced when the corresponding lottery result is lost can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the effect across a plurality of fluctuations. 124 to 126 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), an operation means image (button image BTN) is displayed before notification in a specific change. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 124 to 126 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), in a specific change, before notification, an image representing a mode (success mode) to be advanced when a lottery result corresponding to the change is hit. (Mode image MDG) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 124 to 126 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), in the specific change, after the notification, the specific image (expected) indicating the degree of expectation of each change executed after the specific change Degree image KG) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. FIG. 126 is similar.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, a gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific change and a gaming state (normal state) in a mode in which a losing operation is performed are different from each other. The game state at the time of the specific change is more advantageous for the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. FIG. 126 is similar.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time reduction state) at the time of a specific change and the gaming state (time reduction state) in the mode of proceeding at the time of winning are the same gaming state. Both are more advantageous for the player than the gaming state (normal state) in the mode in which the game proceeds when the player loses. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. FIG. 126 is similar.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a variation of the fluctuation middle mode start display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, as an effect to notify the start of the mode to advance when the lottery result corresponding to the change is lost, “failure mode entry” (variation middle mode start display effect A) and “battle mode entry” (change The image LMG represented as the middle mode start display effects B to D) is displayed. However, the contents of the image LMG are not limited to these, and may be arbitrary contents. Also, the characters "rush" and "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of the mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol may not be displayed or may be displayed in a different size (for example, smaller) in a portion where the decorative symbol is displayed. In a mode in which the decorative design is small or not displayed, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the fluctuation is continuing at the start of the mode, and it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the effect across a plurality of fluctuations.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the fluctuation middle mode start display effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Also, the specific fluctuation is not a specially limited fluctuation, and all the fluctuations may correspond to the “specific fluctuation”.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
During a specific change, if the lottery result corresponding to the change is a loss, the first to notify the start of a mode to advance when the lottery result corresponding to the change is a loss even before the end of the change. Directing can be performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:
It has operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation unit image representing the operation unit,
In the specific variation, before the notification, the operation means image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E4-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the specific change, before the notification, displaying an image representing a mode to be advanced when a lottery result corresponding to the change hits,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
In the specific variation, after the notification, a specific image indicating the expected degree of each variation performed after the specific variation is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The game state at the time of the specific change and the game state in the mode of proceeding at the time of the loss are different from each other, and the game state at the time of the specific change is more advantageous for the player,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The gaming state at the time of the specific change and the gaming state in the mode of proceeding at the time of the hit are the same gaming state, and both are more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in the mode of proceeding at the time of the loss. Is in a state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. This predetermined image continuation display effect can be executed after a jackpot game, during a decorative effect fluctuating effect, or the like. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. Is read and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for describing the predetermined image continuous display effect A. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when the specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

  In the predetermined image continuation display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the holding icon 9C is displayed while the decorative symbol is being changed and displayed. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 127 (A) is executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 127 (B), during this change, there is a winning of the first special symbol, and one new holding icon 9A is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), during this fluctuation, there is a further winning of the first special symbol, and one pending icon 9A is newly displayed, for a total of two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the decorative symbol is determined to stop at “567”, and the hold icon 9C disappears.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located at the rightmost position is It moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed at the start of this change. The predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a graphic, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, 100 times after the big hit game), or the gaming state has changed (for example, the time saving state has changed to the normal state). It may be displayed sometimes. The condition as to whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA can be an arbitrary condition.

  This change naturally corresponds to a hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the change is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at “789”, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the start of the change, and is continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to a hold (a hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the change corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127 (H), during this change, a prize of the first special symbol causes a new hold icon 9A to be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (I), the change is finished, the decorative symbol is fixed at “123”, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the start of the change, and is continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (J), the following change is further started. This variation corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this change. This change (specific change) corresponds to holding (holding icon 9A) due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for describing the predetermined image continuous display effect B. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when the specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

  In the predetermined image continuation display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the holding icon 9C is displayed while the decorative symbol is being changed and displayed. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 128A is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 128 (B), the first special symbol is awarded during this change, and one new hold icon 9A is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), during this change, there is a further winning of the first special symbol, and one pending icon 9A is newly displayed, for a total of two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the decorative symbol is determined to stop at “567”, and the hold icon 9C disappears.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), the hold icon 9A shifts to the right one by one, and the oldest hold icon 9A located at the rightmost position is It moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), at the start of this change, a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed. The predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a graphic, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Whether or not the predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, 100 times after the big hit game), or the gaming state has changed (for example, the time saving state has changed to the normal state). It may be displayed sometimes. The condition as to whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA can be an arbitrary condition.

  This change naturally corresponds to a hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), the change is completed, the decorative symbol stops at “789”, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the start of the change, and is continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to a hold (a hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the change corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128 (H), during this change, a second special symbol wins, and a new hold icon 9B is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), the change is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at "123", and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the same time as the start of the change, and is continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (J), the following fluctuation is started. This variation corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this change. This change (specific change) corresponds to holding (holding icon 9B) due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for describing the predetermined image continuous display effect C. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when the specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

  In the predetermined image continuation display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), two display icons 9A and 9C are displayed during the change display of the decorative symbol. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 129 (A) is being executed is the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 129 (B), the decoration symbol stops at the hit (mode) of the big hit of “333”, and the hold icon 9C disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), a jackpot opening effect is started. Here, a character image of "big hit game start" is displayed. Then, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 129 (D). Here, a character image of "big hit game end" and a predetermined image CHA representing the character are displayed. The predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a graphic, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. When the big hit game ends, here, the game state is switched to the time saving state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 129 (E) is being executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold which has been won before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the change corresponding to the hold that has been made before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (F), the change is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at “789”, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the change, and is continuously displayed even when the change is stopped.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 129 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to the hold that was made before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B). As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the big hit in FIG. 129 (B). As shown in FIG. 129 (H), during this change, the second special symbol wins, and a new hold icon 9B is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), the change is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at “123” and stopped, and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of the change of the change, and is continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (J), the next change is further started. This variation corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. In the gaming state, the time reduction state continues. When the next change (specific change) starts, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this change. This change (specific change) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 129 (B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for describing the predetermined image continuous display effect D. The predetermined image continuous display effect is an effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when the specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

  In the predetermined image continuation display effect D, in the normal state (non-time saving state), the decorative symbol is fluctuated and displayed according to the first special symbol lottery, and thereafter, the decorative symbol is “333” as shown in FIG. , And the suspension icon 9C disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), a jackpot opening effect is started. Here, a character image of "big hit game start" is displayed. Then, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 130 (C). Here, a character image of "big hit game end" and a predetermined image CHA representing the character are displayed. The predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific target, and here is configured as a character image representing a smile face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a graphic, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  When a predetermined period elapses after the predetermined image CHA is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to cover a part of the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB is an image representing a specific target, like the predetermined image CHA, and is configured here as a character image representing a smile wearing sunglasses. Thereafter, the jackpot game ends, and here, the gaming state is switched to the time saving state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the fluctuation of FIG. 130 (E) is being executed is the time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold which has been won before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the change corresponding to the hold that has been made before the big hit in FIG. 130 (A).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (F), the change is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at "789" and stopped, and the hold icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the change, and are continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 130 (G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. This change also corresponds to the hold that was made before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to the winning before the jackpot in FIG. As shown in FIG. 130 (H), during this change, the second special symbol wins, and a new hold icon 9B is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), the fluctuation is completed, the decorative symbol is fixed at “123”, and the suspension icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the change of the change, and are continuously displayed even at the time of the fixed stop.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (J), the next change is further started. This variation corresponds to “specific variation” in the claims. In the gaming state, the time reduction state continues. When the next change (specific change) starts, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB disappear simultaneously with the start of the change. This change (specific change) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 130 (A).

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127 (E) to (I), the first effect in which the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and FIG. As shown in (2), a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific change after a plurality of changes is started can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 128 to 130 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, a plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holdings made before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. This is a change corresponding to a hold that has been won during a plurality of changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 128 to 130 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations are executed after the winning game, and the predetermined image predetermined image CHA is displayed during the winning game and after the winning game. Are displayed continuously in a plurality of fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. FIG. 130 is similar.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, after the predetermined image CHA is displayed during the hit game, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined image CHA, and a plurality of times after the hit game, Displayed continuously in fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the plurality of fluctuations is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the specific fluctuation is the first special symbol or the first special symbol. This is the other variation of the second special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. FIG. 130 is similar.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, a character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. However, the predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a character image representing a specific content, an image for giving a warning without a ball, or a game ball entering a specific position. May be an image prompting the user. Alternatively, the image may be a right-handed image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, the plurality of variations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to (I) are variations of the first special symbol lottery, and the specific variation shown in FIG. 129 (J) is the second variation. It was assumed that it was a fluctuation of the symbol lottery. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite. That is, even if the plurality of fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129 (E) to (I) are fluctuations in the second special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuation shown in FIG. 129 (J) is a fluctuation in the first special symbol lottery. Good.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuation display effects A to D can be appropriately combined.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
A first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes;
A second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific change after the plurality of changes starts, and
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The plurality of fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of holdings that are won before the predetermined image is displayed,
The specific change is a change corresponding to a hold that has been won during the plurality of changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The plurality of fluctuations are performed after a winning game,
The predetermined image is displayed during the hit game, and is continuously displayed in the plurality of fluctuations after the hit game,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image,
During the hit game, after the predetermined image is displayed, the specific image is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined image, and after the hit game, is continuously displayed in the plurality of changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The plurality of variations is one variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The specific variation is the other variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The predetermined image is an image that prompts a ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The background image switching effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This background image switching effect can be executed after a jackpot game, during a decorative effect fluctuating effect, or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the background image switching effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. The image is read and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Background image switching effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for describing the background image switching effect A. The background image switching effect is an effect in which the background image (background display) is switched at the same time as the symbol is stopped, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). On the lower side of the display screen 7a, four holding icons 9A and the holding icons 9C are displayed. The game state is a normal state (non-time saving state).

  The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific target. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face, for example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, and includes an abstract thing such as a character, a figure, a symbol, a monochromatic color, a pattern, or a conceptual thing whose content is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative design or the like, and includes a monochrome image or a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may change due to the movement. Also, it may disappear or appear. Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, "3 more seconds" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the fluctuation of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) is reduced, Temporary stop at "789". The term “temporary stop” here refers to a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed side by side in a state where they are slightly moved up and down.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is indicated by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, the decorative symbol that has been fixed and stopped disappears, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 131 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of characters of “coming soon”. As shown in FIGS. 131 (G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbol is being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbols are fixed and stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 simultaneously with the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific target. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented by a single color, but may have oblique lines or patterns. With the start of the next change, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), the character image MLG of “Spring is” is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of the character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is “soon,” and the character image MLG is “spring.” The decorative display (8L, 8C, 8R) maintains the variable display.

[Background image switching effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for describing the background image switching effect B. The background image switching effect is an effect in which the background image (background display) is switched at the same time as the symbol is stopped, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R). Here, symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. Further, four hold icons 9A and 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The gaming state is a time saving state.

  The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific target. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face, for example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, and includes an abstract thing such as a character, a figure, a symbol, a monochromatic color, a pattern, or a conceptual thing whose content is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative design or the like, and includes a monochrome image or a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may change due to the movement. Also, it may disappear or appear. Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

  When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the change, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, "3 more seconds" is described. At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 132 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then, as shown in FIG. Temporary stop at "789". The term “temporary stop” here refers to a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed side by side in a state where they are slightly moved up and down. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) keep the variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is changed from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Switch to Here, the second background image HG2 is indicated by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) that have been fixed and stopped disappear, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 132 (F). The telop image TRP is composed of characters of “coming soon”. At this time, the display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained in a fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 132 (G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are being fixed and stopped. The symbol is being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 132 (E) to 132 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbols are fixed and stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 simultaneously with the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific target. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented by a single color, but may have oblique lines or patterns. By the start of the next change, decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) and symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (J), the character image MLG of “Spring is” is displayed during the change. The character content of the character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is “soon,” and the character image MLG is “spring.” The decorative design (8L, 8C, 8R) and the design (8l, 8c, 8r) maintain the variable display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for describing the background image switching effect C. The background image switching effect is an effect in which the background image (background display) is switched at the same time as the symbol is stopped, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, the gaming state is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R), the holding icon 9B, and the holding icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

  The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific target. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face, for example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, and includes an abstract thing such as a character, a figure, a symbol, a monochromatic color, a pattern, or a conceptual thing whose content is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative design or the like, and includes a monochrome image or a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may change due to the movement. Also, it may disappear or appear. Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 133 (B). Here, "3 more seconds" is described. At this time, the first background image HG1 is continuously displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, then, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) keep the variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is indicated by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of characters of “coming soon”. At this time, the display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained in a fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 133 (G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are being fixed and stopped. The symbol is being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 133 (E) to 133 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbols are fixed and stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 simultaneously with the start of the next change. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific target. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented by a single color, but may have oblique lines or patterns. By the start of the next change, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are variably displayed. The game state is switched to the normal state from this change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133 (J), the character image MLG of “Spring is” is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of the character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is “soon,” and the character image MLG is “spring.” The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) maintain the variable display.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for describing the background image switching effect D. The background image switching effect is an effect in which the background image (background display) is switched at the same time as the symbol is stopped, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, at the lower left of the display screen 7a, a hold promotion image of “Hold hold!” And a hold number image indicating the current hold number of the second special symbol of “hold 0” are displayed. The gaming state is the time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R), the holding icon 9A, and the holding icon 9C are not displayed.

  The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific target. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smile face, for example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, and includes an abstract thing such as a character, a figure, a symbol, a monochromatic color, a pattern, or a conceptual thing whose content is unknown. The background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative design or the like, and includes a monochrome image or a pattern in addition to a moving image such as a specific character image. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may change due to the movement. Also, it may disappear or appear. Here, in the first background image HG1, other portions of the predetermined image CHA are represented by a single color, but may have diagonal lines or patterns.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. Here, "3 more seconds" is described. Due to the winning of the second special symbol, the number-of-reserved images are changed to “reserved number 2”. As shown in FIG. 134 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes “0”, the end image of “up to that !!” and “first hold... 10%” “second hold.・ 20% ”is displayed. The expected degree suggestion image indicates the expected degree of jackpot of each of the two reservations. Specifically, it indicates that the expectation of the next change is 10% and the expectation of the next change is 20%.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, a character image of "Let's begin" is displayed. This implies that the fluctuations corresponding to the two reservations are about to begin. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) keep the variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is indicated by oblique lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of characters of “coming soon”. At this time, the display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) is maintained in a fixed stop state. As shown in FIGS. 134 (G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are being fixed and stopped. The symbol is being fixed. As shown in FIGS. 134 (E) to 134 (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbols are fixed and stopped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (I), the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 simultaneously with the start of the next fluctuation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific target. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. In the third background image HG3, other portions of the specific image CHB are represented by a single color, but may have oblique lines or patterns. By the start of the next change, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are variably displayed. The game state is switched to the normal state from this change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (J), the character image MLG of “hit or miss” is displayed during the change. The character content of the character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is “soon” and the character image MLG is “hit”, and when combined, it becomes one sentence “soon”. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) maintain the variable display.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the background image switching effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to (D), the first effect in which the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) changes while the first background image HG1 is displayed. After the first effect, as shown in FIG. 131 (E), the decorative effect is fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. After the effect, as shown in FIGS. 131 (E) to 131 (H), a third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image HG2 can be executed while the decoration symbol is stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (I), after the third effect, the background image is changed from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 together with the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern. A fourth effect of switching can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131B, in the first effect, the timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is displayed, and the timer value of the timer image TM1 is set to the predetermined value. When it becomes (here, 0), the second effect is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP is framed in while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. A fifth effect of frame-out can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131 (F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP flows while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), in the fourth effect, the character image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is displayed, and in the third effect, the telop image TRP is displayed. And the character represented by the character image MLG in the fourth effect have continuous contents such that they together form one sentence. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest. 132 to 134 are the same.

[Modification]
The following describes a modification of the background image switching effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the background image may be switched all at once or may be partially switched gradually. Further, both background images may be displayed in a superimposed manner for a predetermined period.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of the background image switching effects A to D can be appropriately combined.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
Some of the plurality of types of images are a plurality of types of background images,
A first effect of changing the decorative pattern while displaying a first background image;
After the first effect, a second effect of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern and switching a background image from the first background image to a second background image;
A third effect of maintaining the display of the second background image during the fixed stop of the decorative symbol after the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect of switching a background image from the second background image to a third background image with the start of the next change of the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E6-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while displaying the first background image,
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
In the third effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the predetermined image enters and exits while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The predetermined image is a telop image,
In the third effect, the telop image flows while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect E6-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 5, which is dependent on claim 2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a character image,
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is being displayed,
In the third effect, the character represented by the telop image and the character represented by the character image in the fourth effect are continuous in content so that they together form one sentence. ing,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, image blur effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. In FIGS. 135 to 138, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are also different from those of the drawings. Some of them are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  This image blurring effect can be performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute an image blur effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103. Is read and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable role 14L and the right movable role of the first movable role 14 provided in the game board 2. For example, the position and the light emission mode of 14R are changed.

  Here, the image blur effect A will be described first, and the image blur effect B, the image blur effect C, and the image blur effect D will be described in order.

[Image blur effect A]
First, the image blur effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a diagram for describing the image blur effect A. The image blur effect A is performed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern.

  In the image blur effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), a hold icon 9A displayed at a first hold display position 9Ad described later moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clear and focused. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C becomes the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and suggests the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C to the player from the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes to the second hold display position 9Ad. In the case of moving to, when the holding icon displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad moves to the first holding display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the holding icon 9A changes to another shape, The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and no holding icon is displayed at the first to fourth holding display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock icon that has not been used for the reserved icon.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (A).

  135 (A) is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol (numeral) as shown in FIG. 135 (B). Is displayed). The temporarily decorated left decorative pattern 8L is clear and focused, and is displayed on the display screen 7a immediately before the temporary stop display (or when the display is decelerated for the temporary stop display). Is enlarged in the left half of the area. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “00”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (A).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by a symbol (numeral) (here, temporarily stopped by a numeral "2"). At this time, the right decorative symbol 8R displayed at the temporary stop is clear and focused, and immediately before the temporary stop display (or at the time of deceleration for the temporary stop display). In the center area of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, which has already been temporarily stopped and displayed, is displayed in the same size (and almost the same size). Since the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped is in focus, the left decorative symbol 8L already temporarily stopped is out of focus and out of focus (so-called “out of focus”). It was unclear).

  The clear right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily (in focus) is at least a part of the out-of-focus blurred unclear left decorative pattern 8L (the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the numeral " 3)) is displayed in a state of being superimposed on the near side of the approximately right portion of (3)).

  Numerical values HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21 respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (B). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (B).

  The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the in-focus clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 in real time to blur the image. Have been created. Hereinafter, the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the size of the temporarily decorated left decorative pattern 8L returns to the size at the time of the change, becomes smaller, and becomes clear and focused. The left decorative symbol 8L is started to move into its own variable display area and temporarily stopped again. In addition, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed temporarily is returned to the size at the time of the change and becomes smaller, and the focus (focus) is focused and becomes clear (the size of the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L). And the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are both in focus (clear), and the right decorative symbol 8R is started to move into its own variable display area. The temporary stop is again displayed. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively) “00”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (C). The hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd appear again on the display screen 7a.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged near the upper side of the display screen 7a in parallel with the upper side, and are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the upper left of the display screen 7a is displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as “upper left decorative symbol 8La”; here, the number “3”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 8L on the side, and the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as “upper right decorative symbol 8Ra”; here, the number “2”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the side. Further, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned and arranged near the lower edge of the display screen 7a in parallel with the lower edge, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. In the left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter, simply referred to as "lower left decorative pattern 8Lb"), the same pattern (here, numeral "2") as the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra is temporarily stopped, and the display screen 7a is displayed. The right decorative symbol 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as “lower right decorative symbol 8Rb”) is the same symbol as the upper left decorative symbol 8La (here, the numeral “3”) in the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 8R on the lower right side. ) Is temporarily stopped.

  As a result, the upwardly-sloping symbol alignment line L1 connecting the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb and the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra becomes the same symbol (here, the number “2”), and the first reach is formed. A lower right symbol alignment line L2 connecting the decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb becomes the same symbol (here, the number “3”), and the second reach is formed. That is, a so-called "double reach" is formed by the symbol alignment line rising to the right by the first reach and the symbol alignment line falling to the right by the second reach. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C is still fluctuating at a high speed in a translucent state within its own fluctuating display area. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively) “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (D). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (D).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), in the interior decoration pattern 8C, the fluctuation speed is reduced and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again in its own fluctuation display area, and the fluctuation display is continued. Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number “1”) is displayed at a low speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with the number “9” preceding the number “1” fluctuated at a low speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the number “9” starts from the lower part of the number “9”. While the number disappears toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the number “2” following the number “1” is displayed at a low speed in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The lower part of the variable number "2" appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a. Note that the middle decoration pattern 8C is variably displayed on the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the back side of the hold display position 9Cd. The four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd are not covered with the middle decorative pattern 8C so that visibility is not hindered.

  Numerical values HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (E).

  As shown in FIG. 135 (G), the reel “2” following the number “1” is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the variable display area of the medium decoration pattern 8C as shown in FIG. 135 (G). Is displayed at a low speed in a displayed manner, temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the upper right decorative symbol are arranged on the symbol alignment line rising to the right by the first reach. Symbols having the same 8Ra (here, the number “2”) are arranged side by side. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively) “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 135 (F). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (F).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), the upper left decorative symbol 8La and the lower right decorative symbol 8Rb on the lower right symbol alignment line due to the second reach are out of focus (focus). , "Out of focus"). In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively) “0 0”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (G). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (G).

  The lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the upper right decorative symbol 8Ra have the same symbol (the number "2" in this case) arranged on the symbol alignment line that rises to the right by the first reach, resulting in a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 135 (I), the size of each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8R is increased so that each of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8R has a middle point on the left side of the display screen 7a. The display is stopped and displayed in a straight line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting to the middle point on the right side, the variable display ends, and then the big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

  Numerical values HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 135 (H). Further, the state where the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 135 (H). Further, with the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

  Note that the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIGS. 135 (F) and (G) is the same as the size at the time of change (for example, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135 (D)). Is larger than the upper left decorative design 8La, the lower left decorative design 8Lb, the upper right decorative design 8Ra, and the lower right decorative design 8Rb. Further, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135 (I) are the sizes in the normal state (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135 (D)). 135B), but smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIGS. 135 (B) and 135 (C) and the size of the right decorative symbol in FIG. 135 (C).

  As described above, in the image blur effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image, which is out of focus (out-of-focus unclear image). With a certain left decorative design 8L, it is possible to realize an expression giving a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative design, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the effect (in other words, the order of the image that the player wants to pay attention to by focusing on the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in this order (first of all) ) Can be conveyed to the player.

  In the image blur effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a clear image that is in focus, and an indistinct image, which is out of focus (out-of-focus unclear image). While a left decorative symbol 8L realizes an expression giving a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative symbol, in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (I), the numeral HMG indicates the game of the gaming machine 1. Regardless of the state, it is always clear and focused. Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect B]
Next, the image blur effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram for describing the image blur effect B. The image blur effect B is performed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern.

  In the image blurring effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), a hold icon 9A displayed at a first hold display position 9Ad described later moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clear and focused. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C becomes the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and suggests the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C to the player from the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes to the second hold display position 9Ad. In the case of moving to, when the holding icon displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad moves to the first holding display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the holding icon 9A changes to another shape, The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and no holding icon is displayed at the first to fourth holding display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock icon that has not been used for the reserved icon.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 136 (A), the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

  136 (A) starts the display of the variation of the decorative pattern, and as shown in FIG. 136 (B), an effect button imitating the effect button 63 in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. The image BTN is arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is clear and focused, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the numbers HMG indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively) “00”) is still displayed in FIG. 136 (A).

  As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 is arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and is urged to prompt the player to operate the sword member 64 (pushing operation). (Here, blinking white). At this time, the already displayed effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the sword image KG is clear and focused, and is located in the central area of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN already displayed is out of focus and out of focus (focused) and unclear. I have.

  The clear and focused sword image KG is displayed in a state of overlapping at least a part of the blurred unclear effect button image BTN (the right side of the effect button image BTN).

  Numerical values HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 136 (B). In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (B).

  The out-of-focus blurred effect button image BTN is a still image, and has a predetermined light emission mode (because it flashes in a moving image, the still image has either a lit state or an unlit state). State). When the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left, the size of the effect button image BTN does not change.

  The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the in-focus clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 in real time to blur the image. Have been created. Hereinafter, the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear and focused image. The display 7a is moved to the center again from the left side, and is arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. At this time, the already displayed sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the effect button image BTN is clear and focused, and the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. Is displayed in the area. Since the effect button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed sword image KG is out of focus and out of focus (focused) and unclear. I have.

  The clear effect button image BTN that is in focus (focus) is displayed in a state where it is superimposed on at least a part of the blurred unclear sword image KG (left side of the sword image KG).

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 136 (C). In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (C).

  The out-of-focus blurred sword image KG is a still image and has a predetermined light emission mode (because it flashes in a moving image, the still image has either a lighted state or a light-off state). Has become.) Further, when the sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

  The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (B), or may have a high expectation of a big hit. It may be changed (for example, from white blinking to blue blinking).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the sword image KG displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes) to a clear image that is in focus. Is moved from the right side to the center again, and is arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. At this time, the already displayed effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the sword image KG is clear and focused, and is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in the area. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the effect button image BTN already displayed is out of focus and out of focus (focused) and unclear. I have.

  The clear and focused sword image KG is displayed in a state of overlapping at least a part of the blurred unclear effect button image BTN (left side of the effect button image BTN).

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 136 (D). In addition, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (D).

  The out-of-focus blurred effect button image BTN is a still image, and has a predetermined light emission mode (because it flashes in a moving image, the still image has either a lit state or an unlit state). State). Further, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

  The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (E) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from blue flashing to green flashing).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the effect button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state is changed (or changed) to a clear and focused one on the display screen. 7a is moved from the right side to the left side without changing the size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode. Further, the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right without changing the size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. In FIG. 136 (E), “00” is displayed continuously. In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (E).

  The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (E), or the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. (For example, from green flashing to red flashing). The predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from green blinking to red blinking).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear and focused state moves from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing the size. Displayed, and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction little by little so as to overlap the front upper portion thereof, and overlaps the lower front portion thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. In addition, a message MG “Press!” That prompts an operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed above the effect button image BTN. At this time, the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state has disappeared from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “00”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (F). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (F).

  The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (G) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136 (F), or the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. (For example, from red flashing to gold flashing (yellow flashing)).

  As shown in FIG. 136 (H), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, The variable display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the numeral "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the numeral "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the numeral "3", thereby losing.

  Even if the fluctuation display is finished, the first special figure hold based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated number HMG (here, “00”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (G). When the variable display ends, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd appear again on the display screen 7a, but the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  On the other hand, following FIG. 136 (F), as shown in FIG. 136 (I), the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state is again shifted from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center. It is moved without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (push-in operation) the sword member 64 is moved in a small vertical direction, and overlaps the lower front part. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message MG “Push in !!” urging operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the front upper part. At this time, the effect button image BTN displayed in a clear and focused state is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “00”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (F). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (F).

  The predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136 (I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from red flashing to gold flashing (yellow flashing) or seven-color flashing (change to rainbow flashing (big hit rich)).

  As shown in FIG. 136 (J), when the player operates (presses down) the sword member 64 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L, The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, The variable display ends. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "1", so that the same symbol is displayed. The stop is displayed and a big hit is made, and then a big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

  Even if the fluctuation display is finished, the first special figure hold based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated number HMG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 136 (I). Further, even when the variable display ends, the state where the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 136 (I). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  The effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed from the state where the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are displayed in FIG. 136 (F), and the sword image of FIG. 136 (I). There is a case where KG is selected and displayed, and the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (I) is selected and displayed as compared with the case where the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (G) is selected and displayed. The probability of occurrence of the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is higher.

  As described above, in the image blur effect B, the effect button image BTN or the sword image KG, which is a clear image that is in focus (focus), and the unclear image that is out of focus (focus) The effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are natural images, can realize an expression giving a sense of depth to the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG. It is possible to improve the interest.

  Also, an image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the effect (in other words, first, the effect button image BTN, the sword image KG, the effect button image BTN, and the sword image KG are focused in this order, and the player is watched. This can contribute to telling the player the order of the images to be made (the thoughts of the creator of the effect).

  In the image blur effect B, for example, the effect button image BTN or the sword image KG, which is a clear image that is in focus (focus), and an unclear image that is out of focus (focus) 136 (A) to FIG. 136 (A) to FIG. 136 (A) to FIG. 136 (A) to FIG. 136 (A) to FIG. In 136 (J), the number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect C]
Next, the image blur effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram for describing the image blur effect C. The image blur effect C is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

  In the image blurring effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), a hold icon 9A displayed at a first hold display position 9Ad described later moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clear and focused. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C becomes the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and suggests the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C to the player from the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes to the second hold display position 9Ad. In the case of moving to, when the holding icon displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad moves to the first holding display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the holding icon 9A changes to another shape, The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and no holding icon is displayed at the first to fourth holding display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock icon that has not been used for the reserved icon.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 137 (A).

  When reach is formed in FIG. 137 (A), as shown in FIG. 137 (B), in order to urge the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63. Are arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and are displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is clear and focused, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction little by little so as to overlap the front upper portion thereof, and overlaps the lower front portion thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “00”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (A).

  As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. The upper body of the character CRA holding the sword is arranged and displayed over the entire area. The character CRA is clear and in focus, and is largely displayed substantially over the entire right area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which have been displayed in a clear and focused state, have disappeared from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “00”) is still displayed in FIG. 137 (B). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (B). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), in order to urge the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged again at the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. At this time, the effect button image BTN is arranged in front of the already displayed character CRA, is in focus, and is clearly displayed at the center of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 137 (B)). ) Is displayed in the same position as shown in ())). Since the effect button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and out of focus (focused) and unclear. .

  The clear effect button image BTN in focus (focus) is displayed in a state of overlapping at least a part (right shoulder, right arm and sword part of the character CRA) of the blurred unclear character CRA. I have.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 137 (C). Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

  The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the in-focus clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 in real time to blur the image. Have been created. Hereinafter, the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

  The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction little by little so as to overlap the front upper portion thereof, and overlaps the lower front portion thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The out-of-focus unclear character CRA is a still image. The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137 (B), or the expectation of a big hit is high. (For example, from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. The upper body of the character CRB with the sword is arranged and displayed facing the character CRA. This character CRB is clear and focused, and is largely displayed almost on the entire left area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which have been displayed in a clear and focused state, have disappeared from the display screen 7a. Further, since the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is still unclear and blurred (so-called “out of focus”). I have.

  The clear character CRB that is in focus (focused) is displayed in a state of overlapping at least a part (right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword part of the character CRA) of the blurred unclear character CRA. ing.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 137 (D). In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (D). The character CRB may be a still image or a moving image.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the character CRA displayed in an unclear and out-of-focus state changes to a clear and in-focus character, and is almost entirely over the right area of the display screen 7a. A clear character CRA that is in focus is displayed, and a clear character CRB that is in focus is displayed over substantially the entire left area of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is replaced with the character CRA). Is moved from the approximate center of the display screen 7a to the left side in order to take time.) At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 137) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (E). In addition, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (E).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), a message MG of a vertically written image “start of battle” is displayed in an area extending from the center to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The message MG of this vertically written image is clear and focused (focused), and the two characters CRA and CRB already displayed are out of focus (focused) and blurred (so-called “out of focus”). ") Was unclear.

  The message MG of a vertical image with a clear “start of battle” in focus (focus) is displayed in a state where it overlaps at least a part of the blurred unclear character CRA (the sword part of the character CRA). In addition, it is displayed in a state where it overlaps at least a part of the out-of-focus unclear character CRB (the right shoulder and the sword part of the character CRB).

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 137 (F). In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (F).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (H), the two characters CRA and CRB displayed in an out-of-focus state are changed to clear ones in focus and displayed on the display screen 7a. An action effect (battle effect) by the three characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 137 (G) in FIG. 137 (G). In addition, the state where the holding icon 9C, the four holding display positions 9Ad, and the holding display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (G).

  In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), an enlarged motion blur in which an alphabetic character V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the near side is displayed. The enlarged motion blur for the remaining letter V is also created as an indistinct one whose focus is out of focus and blurred (so-called “out of focus”). The blurred and unclear image is subjected to enlarged motion blur image processing, and is diffused from the center to a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or to a target layer of a plurality of layers. In this case, the blur increases in the direction from the center to the outer periphery as the distance from the center increases. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the in-focus clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 in real time to blur the image. Have been created.

  When the player views the image of the letter V subjected to the enlarged motion blur image processing, it is possible to give the player an impression of proceeding toward the image of the letter V and to the center of the image of the letter V. A sense of speed can be obtained, and it can be suggested that the ally character CRA will soon win the enemy character CRB. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 137 (H) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (H). In addition, the state where the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (H).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started), and at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect for notifying the victory of the friendly character CRA is provided here. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and the message MG of "WIN" is arranged and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. Note that, when an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the message MG “defeat” is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. It is arranged and displayed.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 137 (I). Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (I).

  Thereafter, although not shown, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a together with the same symbol (here, the number "1"). A jackpot game (a jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot is performed. Even if the fluctuation display is finished, the first special figure hold based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated number HMG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 137 (J). Further, even if the variable display ends, the state where the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (J). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  On the other hand, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “1”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “2”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral “1”, and the same symbol (here, the numeral “1”) ) Are not displayed and stop display is performed, and when the variable display is completed, the loss is definitely displayed. When the variable display ends, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd appear again on the display screen 7a, but the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the image blurring effect C, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus (in focus), and the unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus) Image), it is possible to realize an expression giving a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA, CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, thereby visually recognizing the player. It can be entertained and enhance the interest.

  Also, an image that the player wants to pay close attention to in the progress of the rendering (in other words, first, the player wants to focus on the rendering button image BTN, the character CRA, the rendering button image BTN, and the character CRB in order in order to focus the player on the rendering). It can contribute to telling the player the order of the images (the intention of the creator of the production).

  In the image blur effect C, for example, the character CRA or the effect button image BTN which is a clear image that is in focus (focus) and an unclear image that is out of focus (focus) 137 (A) to FIG. 137 (A) to FIG. 137 (A), while realizing an expression giving a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA, CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN. In FIG. 137 (J), the number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Can be made easier.

[Image blur effect D]
Next, the image blur effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a diagram for describing the image blur effect D. The image blur effect D is selected from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern.

  In the image blurring effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad described later moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clear and focused. It has become. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this suspension display area, suspension icons can be displayed at four suspension display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four suspension icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C becomes the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size, and suggests the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C to the player from the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes to the second hold display position 9Ad. In the case of moving to, when the holding icon displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad moves to the first holding display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the holding icon 9A changes to another shape, The size of the hold icon is the same as the size of the hold icon immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and no holding icon is displayed at the first to fourth holding display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock icon that has not been used for the reserved icon.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 138 (A).

  When the reach is formed in FIG. 138 (A), as shown in FIG. 138 (B), the upper body of the character CRA with the sword is arranged and displayed on almost the entire right area of the display screen 7a. The character CRA is clear and in focus, and is largely displayed substantially over the entire right area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) 138) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (A). The character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), the upper body of the character CRB holding the sword is arranged and displayed so as to face the character CRA substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRB is clear and focused, and is largely displayed almost on the entire left area of the display screen 7a. At this time, since the character CRB is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and out of focus (focused) and unclear. I have.

  The clear character CRB that is in focus (focused) is displayed in a state of overlapping at least a part (right shoulder, right chest, right arm and sword part of the character CRA) of the blurred unclear character CRA. ing.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 138 (B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (B).

  Note that the clear character CRB that is in focus may be a still image or a moving image. The blurred unclear character CRA is a still image.

  The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the in-focus clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103 in real time to blur the image. Have been created. Hereinafter, the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the character CRB is moved from the substantially center of the display screen 7a to the left to display the space with the character CRA, and is displayed in an out-of-focus state. The character CRA changes to a clear one in focus, almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed ( Started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. In FIG. 137 (C), “0 0”) is continuously displayed. Further, the state in which the suspension icon 9C, the four suspension display positions 9Ad, and the suspension display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 137 (C).

  In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), a message MG saying “Big win with friendly character victory !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. In FIG. 138 (D), “00” is displayed continuously. Further, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (D).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the initial stage of the action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the early stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA hunts to the right. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 138) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (E). In addition, the state where the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (E).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), in the middle stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. In FIG. 138 (F), “0 0” is continuously displayed. Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (F).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R respectively move toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (to approach each other). In the direction in which the left side movable portion 14L is attached to the front end (front position) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployment position)). The left decorative part and the right decorative part which is a half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable movable part 14R are united, and the left decorative part and the right movable movable part of the left movable movable part 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined part) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. A friendly character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a white light emitting mode. At the same time, an alphabetical character “V” appears from the front of the left movable auditorium 14L and the front of the right movable auditorium 14R, and an effect indicating the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, When the other light emitting mode (for example, red light emitting mode) is different from the white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a red light emitting mode, but the alphabet “V” does not appear. , An effect indicating that the ally character CRA has won is not performed.

  A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, and the letter “V” is formed on the light guide plate. When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed into the letter “V” formed on the light guide plate. And the letter "V" appears. Further, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted forward of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, but the alphabetic character “V” does not appear.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The device 7 is retracted (moved) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the image. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 138 (G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (G).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), here, an effect for notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed at the center and “victory”. Is arranged and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. Note that, when an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the message MG “defeat” is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. It is arranged and displayed.

  Numerals HMG (here, “0”) indicating a first special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure reservation based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21, respectively. 0 ”) is still displayed in FIG. 138 (H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (H).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), the same symbol (here, the number “1”) of the same left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the variable display ends, a big hit game (big hit effect) in which a big win is given to the player and a profit is given is performed. Even if the fluctuation display is finished, the first special figure hold based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure holding based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated number HMG (here, “0 0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 138 (I). Further, even if the variable display ends, the state where the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is continuously maintained in FIG. 138 (I). Note that the suspension icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  On the other hand, when an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “1” on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral. "2" and the right decorative symbol 8R become the numeral "1", and the same symbol (here, the numeral "1") is stopped and displayed without being aligned. When the variable display is completed, the loss is definitely displayed. When the variable display ends, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd appear again on the display screen 7a, but the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the image blur effect D, the character CRB (enemy character CRB), which is a clear image that is in focus (focus), and the unclear image that is out of focus (focus) With the character CRA (ally character CRA), which is an image, it is possible to realize an expression in which the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB has a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually enjoyed. Enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  In addition, an image that the player wants to pay attention to in the progress of the effect (in other words, an image that the player wants to pay attention to by focusing on the character CRA (ally character CRA) and the character CRB (enemy character CRB) in this order. (Order of the creator of the production)) can be conveyed to the player.

  In the image blur effect D, for example, a character CRB (enemy character CRB) that is a clear image that is in focus (focus) and an unclear image that is out of focus (focus) 138 (A) to 138 (J), while realizing an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB by using a character CRA (ally character CRA) as an image). , The number HMG is always clear and focused regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the player grasps the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Can be made easier.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the image blur effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 (C) of the image blur effect A, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided. 135 (B), which is a clear first image, and a first effect displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (B), and FIG. 135 (B), which is the first image clearly displayed by the first effect. FIG. 135 (C) is a second effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in an unclear manner as in the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 135 (C), and FIG. ), A third effect of clearly displaying the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is the second image, at a position different from the left decorative pattern 8L. According to this configuration, the first decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an indistinct first image, are the first. Since the expression in which the arrangement of the second image and the second image have a sense of depth can be realized, the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved.
136 (C) to FIG. 136 (C), the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C) which is a clear second image, and the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 (C) which is an unclear first image With the effect button image BTN of (1), an expression in which the arrangement of the first image and the second image has a sense of depth can be realized, so that the player can be visually entertained and enjoyable. Improvement can be achieved.
In the image blur effect C of FIGS. 137 (C) to 137 (E), for example, the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) which is a clear second image and the character CRB of FIG. With the character CRA of E), it is possible to realize an expression in which the arrangement of the first image and the second image has a sense of depth, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest can be improved. Can be achieved.
138 (B) to 138 (C), the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C), which is a clear second image, and FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image With the character CRA, it is possible to realize an expression having a sense of depth in the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so that the player can be visually enjoyed and the interest is improved. be able to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (C) of the image blur effect A, FIG. 135 (C) which is a clear second image clearly displayed by the third effect. The right decorative symbol 8R overlaps at least a part of the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C) which is the first image displayed indistinctly by the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135 (C), the temporary stop-displayed clear right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped is at least the blurred unclear left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed. A part (approximately the right part of the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number “3”)) is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the near side. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136 (C), the clear sword image KG which is the second image, which is in focus, is at least one of the first image, which is the blurred unclear effect button image BTN. It is displayed in a state of being overlapped on the near side of the part (the right part of the effect button image BTN). According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 (E), the clear character CRB that is in focus, which is the second image, is at least a part (character) of the blurred unclear character CRA that is the first image. The right shoulder, the right chest, the right arm, and the sword of the CRA) are displayed in front of each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 (C), the clear character CRB that is in focus, which is the second image, is at least a part (character) of the blurred unclear character CRA that is the first image. The right shoulder, the right chest, the right arm, and the sword of the CRA) are displayed in front of each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (C) of the image blur effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) can display the hold icon 9C. Then, when the third effect is executed, the hold icon 9C is not displayed in FIG. 135 (C). According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, and the right decorative symbol of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, according to the third effect. 8R is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, and thus the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is an unclear first image, and FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image ) Can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Thus, the effect of the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (C), which is a clear second image, is provided. Can be provided to the player.
136 (A) to FIG. 136 (C), in the image blur effect B, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C) which is an unclear first image and the clear second image by the third effect. Since the visibility of the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is the image, is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is the unclear first image, is clearly displayed. The sword image KG shown in FIG. 136 (C), which is the second image, can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Thereby, the effect is produced by the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the sword image KG of FIG. 136 (C), which is a clear second image. Can be provided.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (E), the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image by the third effect. Since the visibility of the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E) is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image The character CRB shown in FIG. 137 (E) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). This provides the player with a powerful and unclear first image of the character CRA of FIG. 137 (E) and a clear second image of the character CRB of FIG. 137 (E). can do.
138 (A) to FIG. 138 (C), in the image blurring effect D, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C) which is an unclear first image and the clear second image by the third effect. Since the visibility of the character CRB of FIG. 138 (C) is not hindered by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image 138 (C) shown in FIG. 138 (C) can be largely displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). This provides the player with a powerful and unclear first image of the character CRA shown in FIG. 138 (C) and a clear second image of the character CRB shown in FIG. 138 (E). can do.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (I) of the image blur effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) displays a numerical image indicating the number of reserved icons. Is always displayed, and even when the second effect is executed, the numeral HMG (here, “0 0”), which is a numerical image, is clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135 (C) is displayed as clear to unclear by the second effect, whereas the numerical image HMG (here, “0”) is a numerical image. 0 ”) is always displayed as clear, so that the player can easily grasp the number of the hold icons.
136 (A) to 136 (J), image blur effects B, 137 (A) to 137 (J), image blur effects C, and 138 (A) to 138 (J), image blur effects D The same applies to.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (D) of the image blurring effect A, after the third effect, the image is obscured by the second effect. The left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (C) which is the first image is made clear again like the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (D), and further, the left decoration of FIG. 135 (D) which is the first image. A fourth effect of displaying the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D) as the second image so as not to overlap can be executed. According to this configuration, when arranging the left decorative symbol 8L of FIG. 135 (D) as the first image and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135 (D) as the second image, they overlap each other. In addition, since it is displayed as a clear image, the first image is a left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135 (D), and the second image is a right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135 (D). It can be suggested to the player that the effect regarding will be developed from now on.
In the image blur effect B of FIGS. 136 (A) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F) which is the first image and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F) which is the second image When the sword image KG and the sword image KG are arranged, they do not overlap each other and are displayed as clear images. Therefore, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (F), which is the first image, and the second image It is possible to suggest to the player that an effect related to a certain sword image KG in FIG. 136 (F) will be developed.
In the image blurring effect C of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (F), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 137 (F) which is the first image and the character CRB of FIG. 137 (F) which is the second image 137 and 137 (F), which are the first image and the character CRA of FIG. 137 (F) because they are displayed as clear images without overlapping each other. ) Can be suggested to the player that an effect relating to the character CRB will be developed.
In the image blur effect D of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (D), for example, the character CRA of FIG. 138 (D) which is the first image and the character CRB of FIG. 138 (D) which is the second image 138 (D), which is the first image, and FIG. 138 (D), which is the second image. ) Can be suggested to the player that an effect relating to the character CRB will be developed.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135 (B) to 135 (D) of the image blurring effect A, FIGS. 135 (B) and (B) which are the first images displayed clearly. The left decorative pattern 8L of D) and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIGS. 135 (C) and (D), which are the second images, are in-focus images, and the first image is displayed indistinctly. 135L of FIG. 135 (C) is an image out of focus. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
In the image blur effect B of FIGS. 136 (B) to 136 (F), for example, the effect button images BTN and the second image of FIGS. 136 (B) and (F) which are the first images displayed clearly. The sword images KG of FIGS. 136 (C) and (F) are images in focus, and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136 (C) which is the first image displayed indistinctly is , The image is out of focus. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
137 (A) to 137 (F) are, for example, the character CRA and the second image of FIGS. 137 (C) and (F) which are the first images displayed clearly. The character CRB in FIGS. 137 (E) and (F) is an image in focus, and the character CRA in FIG. 137 (E) which is the first image displayed indistinctly is in focus. There is no picture. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.
138 (A) to 138 (D), the first image which is clearly displayed is the character CRA of FIGS. 138 (B) and (D) and FIG. 138 which is the second image. The characters CRB of (C) and (D) are images in focus, and the character CRA of FIG. 138 (C), which is the first image displayed indistinctly, is an image out of focus. It is. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were an image captured with a single-lens reflex camera with a reduced depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135A of the image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are symbol fluctuations based on the hold icon 9C. When the display is started, it can be executed when there is no pending icon. That is, in the image blur effect A, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.
The same applies to the image blur effect B of FIG. 136 (A), the image blur effect C of FIG. 137 (A), and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138 (A).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the image blur effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, so that the hold icon no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. there were. However, as the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position as the second special figure hold moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position are changed. The effect may be performed when the hold icon 9B is no longer present at the hold display position. The first to fourth holding display positions where the holding icon 9B is displayed as the second special figure holding will be briefly described. The left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol that are currently changing as the second special figure holding is used. 8C and the hold icon 9C corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image), a hold display area is provided as the second special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions (on the rectangular images), and up to four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions are referred to as a first reserved display position, a second reserved display position, a third reserved display position, and a fourth reserved display position from the position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The images are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order.

[Modification 2]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, the focus ( Focus) is out of focus and blurred (so-called “out of focus”), and the second image placed on the near side is in focus and clear, It was possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field. The blurred and unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and blurring the image by changing a standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to make the image taken shallower, or the image taken deeper may be taken. In this way, the expression of the production can be expanded.

[Modification 3]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, the focus ( The focus was shifted and blurred (so-called “out of focus”), and the image was unclear, and the second image disposed on the near side was in focus and clear. However, as a completely opposite relationship, the first image arranged on the back side is focused and clear, and the second image arranged on the near side is focused on. The focus may be out of focus and out of focus (so-called “out of focus”). By using a so-called zoom lens, it is possible to provide a player with an effect of focusing on one object from among images that are multiple objects existing in the depth direction, thereby increasing the variation of the effect. it can. The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 performs real-time blurring from the focused clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. And the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

[Modification 4]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138, the focus ( The focus was shifted and blurred (so-called “out of focus”), and the image was unclear, and the second image disposed on the near side was in focus and clear. However, among a plurality of subjects existing in the depth direction, it is assumed that the images of some subjects having different distance dimensions in the depth direction are in focus (focus), and that the images are other subjects. The focus may be out of focus and out of focus (so-called “out of focus”). In this way, an image having a sense of incongruity is provided, so that the player can be provided with a sense of incongruity, and can suggest to the player that there is a chance that the degree of expectation is high. The blurred unclear image is created by a blurred image process (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blurring and using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite constituting the image) or on a target layer of a plurality of layers. That is, the blurred unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, and the image control microcomputer 101 performs real-time blurring from the focused clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. And the blurred unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blurring image processing.

[Modification 5]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, so that the hold icon no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. there were. However, the game state may be a time saving state and the number of times may be limited. For example, the number of times of the change of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is only one time, or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. Is performed by using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed on the target image (or the sprite constituting the image) or out of a plurality of layers. This is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. However, in addition to the clear image (image data) that is in focus, the blurred unclear image (image data) may be stored in the ROM 103 in advance and read from the ROM 103 as needed. In this case, if there is enough free space in the capacity of the ROM 103, an out-of-focus blurred image (image data) can be stored in addition to a clear image (image data) that is in focus. This eliminates the need for the image control microcomputer 101 to perform blurring image processing in real time, which can contribute to reducing the load on the image control microcomputer 101.

[Modification 7]
In the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. Is performed by using a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed on the target image (or the sprite constituting the image) or out of a plurality of layers. This is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 for the target layer. For example, the blur image processing may be an effect of displaying numbers one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and counting down. In this countdown effect, for example, when the numbers are sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a in the order of “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0”, First, the number “5” is displayed as a clear image that is in focus, and then, as an unclear image in which the number “5” is out of focus, the focus is in front of the number “5”. The number "4" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image that matches. Subsequently, the numeral "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the numeral "4" is defocused as an indistinct image, and the numeral "4" is focused as a clear image in front of the numeral "4". 3 "is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the numeral “4” is erased from the display screen 7a, and the numeral “3” is defocused as an unclear image, and the numeral “3” is focused as a clear image in front of the numeral “3”. 2 "is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the numeral "3" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the numeral "2" is defocused as an unclear image, and the numeral "2" is displayed as a clear image focused on the front side of the numeral "2". "1" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the numeral “2” is erased from the display screen 7a, and the numeral “1” is defocused as an unclear image, and the numeral “1” is focused as a clear image in front of the numeral “1”. "0" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Subsequently, the numeral "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, the numeral "0" is erased from the display screen 7a to develop a super reach effect.

[Modification 8]
In the image blur effect B of FIG. 136 and the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 9]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, so that the hold icon no longer exists in the first to fourth hold display positions 9Ad to 9Ad. there were. However, as the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position 9Ad to the When the hold icon is no longer present at the 4 hold display position 9Ad, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R is started, and the image blur effect A of 135 and the image blur effect of FIG. B, the image blurring effect C in FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D in FIG. 138 are not performed, and the left decorative symbol 9L, the middle decorative symbol 9C, and the right decorative symbol 9R are not aligned with the same symbol (for example, the number “7”). May be stopped and displayed. In this case, another reach effect different from the image blur effect A of FIG. 135, the image blur effect B of FIG. 136, the image blur effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blur effect D of FIG. 138 (for example, a hit (big hit, small hit)) May be lost through the so-called "normal reach"), which has the lowest expected degree, or may be lost without any other reach effect.

[Modification 10]
The image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 may not include a part of the described effects, An effect may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect that clearly displays the first image;
A second effect of obscuring the first image clearly displayed by the first effect;
And a third effect of clearly displaying the second image at a position different from the first image displayed indistinctly by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E7-1,
The second image clearly displayed by the third effect overlaps at least a part of the first image unclearly displayed by the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect E7-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E7-1 or Aspect E7-2,
The display means is capable of displaying the hold icon,
The hold icon is hidden when the third effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect E7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3,
The display means always displays a numerical image indicating the number of hold icons,
Even if the second effect is executed, the numerical image is clearly displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Embodiment E7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4,
After the third effect, the first image displayed indistinctly by the second effect is made clear again, and further displayed so that the first image and the second image do not overlap. It is possible to perform a fourth effect of
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect E7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5,
The first image and the second image, which are clearly displayed, are focused images,
The first image, which is displayed obscured, is an image that is out of focus;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Embodiment E7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6,
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are executable when there is no pending icon when a symbol variation display based on the pending icon is started,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the hit notification effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. This omission notification effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the hit notification effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a. In addition, this omission notification effect is performed in a predetermined period over a plurality of fluctuations.

[Achievement report A]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for describing the hit notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final change in the game state in the time reduction state (“time reduction state and high base state”) is a loss. In the losing notification effect, a message image MSG “losing” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), a right-handing promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform a so-called “right-handed”. Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final fluctuation when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player makes a “right strike”, the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), a final battle announcement effect is executed. The final battle announcement effect is executed in the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle announcement effect, a message image MSG indicating “start of final battle” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Until the defeat effect described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and the look-ahead effect includes three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that is an opponent of an ally character appears. Here, the enemy character CRD appears at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character perform a battle. If the ally character wins the battle effect, the hit (big hit or small hit) is determined. Here, the effect is that the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRD.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect when all of the fluctuations and the three reservations are lost. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the character “defeat” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), a holding digestion effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG “Expect next time” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold among the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at “565” and loses.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 139 (H), a holding digestion effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG “Expect next time” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the last suspension is fixedly stopped at “565” and loses. After the defeat effect has been performed, the remaining holds, which are lost, are quickly digested.

[Our news report B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for describing the hit notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 140A, a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final change in the game state in the time reduction state (“time reduction state and high base state”) is a loss. In the losing notification effect, a message image MSG “losing” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), a right-handing promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform a so-called “right-handed”. Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final fluctuation when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player makes a “right strike”, the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), a final battle announcement effect is executed. The final battle announcement effect is executed in the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold described above. In the final battle announcement effect, a message image MSG indicating “start of final battle” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Until the defeat effect described later, the effect is a variation corresponding to the first hold of the second special figure hold, and the look-ahead effect includes three holds corresponding to the hold image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that is an opponent of an ally character appears. Here, the enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character perform a battle. If the ally character wins the battle effect, the hit (big hit or small hit) is determined. Here, the effect is that the ally character CRA fights with the enemy character CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect in a case where there is a hit among the fluctuation and the three holds. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed, and the character of "WIN" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), a holding digestion effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG “congratulations” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the first hold among the remaining three holds is fixedly stopped at “565” and loses. It is assumed that the next hold is a hit AT.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), a holding digestion effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG “congratulations” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the winning reservation AT is “555” and the stop is determined and the winning is achieved. Note that the last hold is not consumed.

[Our news report C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for describing the hit notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final change in the game state in the time reduction state (“time reduction state and high base state”) is a loss. In the losing notification effect, a message image MSG “losing” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), a right-handing promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform a so-called “right-handed”. Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final fluctuation when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player makes a “right strike”, the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), a first battle effect is executed. The first battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the first battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the first reservation of the second special figure reservation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), a second battle effect is executed. The second battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the second battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), a third battle effect is executed. The third battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued on the assumption that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the third battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), a fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the fourth battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect indicating that the player has lost in the fourth battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the character “defeat” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (losing) is an effect for performing a fixed stop of the fluctuation. Here, a message image MSG “sorry” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixedly stopped at “565” and loses.

[Our news report D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for describing the hit notification effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification effect is an effect for notifying that the change is a loss. This loss notification effect is executed when the final change in the game state in the time reduction state (“time reduction state and high base state”) is a loss. In the losing notification effect, a message image MSG “losing” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), a right-handing promotion effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to perform a so-called “right-handed”. Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The right-handed promotion effect is an effect executed following the loss notification effect, and is executed in the final fluctuation when the gaming state is in the time-saving state (“time-saving state and high base state”). When the player makes a “right strike”, the second special figure reservation increases to the upper limit (four), and four reservation images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), a first battle effect is executed. The first battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the first battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the first reservation of the second special figure reservation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), a second battle effect is executed. The second battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the second battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the second hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), a third battle effect is executed. The third battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued on the assumption that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fight and the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the third battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the third hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), a fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the description is continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight and the ally character CRA has won. Note that the fourth battle effect is an effect with a change corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), a winning effect is executed. The winning effect is an effect indicating that the player has won in the fourth battle effect. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed, and the character of "WIN" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect for performing a fixed stop of the fluctuation. Here, a message image MSG “congratulations” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The effect symbol is displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, a state is shown in which the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is fixed at "555" and the end is reached.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of this omission notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined number (four) of reservations exist in the second special figure reservation, a look-ahead to determine in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure reservation is performed. Then, whether or not there is a hit as a prefetch effect is notified (FIGS. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIGS. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of the winning in the plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined number (four) of reservations exist in the second special figure reservation, a look-ahead to determine in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure reservation is performed. As a pre-reading effect, whether or not there is a hit in the change corresponding to the first reservation of the second special figure reservation is notified (FIGS. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the result of the winning in the plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a predetermined number (four) of reservations exist in the second special figure reservation, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second special figure reservation. It is notified whether or not there is a hit in each change corresponding to the suspension (FIGS. 141 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H), FIGS. 142 (C) (D) (E) ( F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes clear in turn whether or not the predetermined number of holds has been hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the gaming state is in the time reduction state (“the time reduction state and the high base state”), the right-handing promotion effect is executed, so that the upper limit of the second special figure reservation (four) 139 (B), FIG. 140 (B), FIG. 141 (B), and FIG. 142 (B). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily create a state in which a predetermined number of holds exist, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the hit is notified in the look-ahead effect, and after notifying the hit, the non-executed hold in the past than the hold in which the hit has been reached is consumed (FIGS. 140 (G) (H)). . According to this configuration, after a series of effects, the interest of the game can be improved without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the loss is notified by the pre-reading effect, and after the loss is notified, the unretained reservation is digested (FIGS. 139 (G) (H)). According to this configuration, after a series of effects, the interest of the game can be improved without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the hit notification effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy character appearing after the final battle announcement effect may be selected according to the expected degree of winning (FIGS. 139 (D) and 140 (D)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, an enemy character appearing in the first battle, the second battle, the third battle, and the fourth battle may be selected according to the degree of expectation of winning (see FIG. 141 ( (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 142 (C) (D) (E) (F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above description, a defeat effect, a victory effect, a fixed stop effect (losing), and a fixed stop effect (hit) are executed for the fourth battle effect (FIGS. 141 (G) (H), 142 (G)). (H)). On the other hand, for the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect, a defeat effect, a victory effect, a fixed stop effect (losing), and a fixed stop effect (hit) may be executed. .

[Modification 4]
In the above description, an example in which the ally character wins in the fourth battle effect is given. However, when the ally character wins in the first battle effect, when the ally character wins in the second battle effect, or when the ally character wins in the third battle effect. May win. When the ally character wins in the first battle effect, it is conceivable that a victory effect and a fixed stop effect (hit) are executed following the first battle effect. Similarly, when the ally character wins in the second battle effect, it is conceivable to execute the victory effect and the fixed stop effect (hit) following the second battle effect, and when the ally character wins in the third battle effect. It is conceivable to execute a victory effect and a definite stop effect (hit) following the third battle effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above description, the effect about the second special figure reservation is described as an example, but the effect about the first special figure reservation may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E8-1]
It is possible to hold a lottery performed at the time of entering the starting opening, to perform a pre-reading to determine in advance whether or not to hit at the time of entering the starting opening, a pre-reading effect based on the result of the pre-reading. A gaming machine that can be executed prior to digestion of the hold,
When there is a predetermined number of holds, whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notification effect to execute and notify as the look-ahead effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E8-1,
The look-ahead notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds in the fluctuation of digesting the first hold when the predetermined number of holds exists,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E8-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E8-1 or Aspect E8-2,
When there is a predetermined number of holds, it is possible to execute a change notification effect of notifying whether or not there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds, in each change corresponding to the predetermined number of holds,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3,
The holding of the predetermined number is caused by a ball entering the starting port in an advantageous game that facilitates the ball entering the starting port,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4,
When there is a hit in the predetermined number of holds, a hit is notified in the look-ahead notification effect, and a digest that has not been digested in the past than the hit that has been hit is digested after the hit notification.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect E8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5,
If there is no hit in the predetermined number of holds, the loss is reported in the look-ahead notification effect, and the unretained hold is digested after the loss is reported.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative symbol display area effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. This decorative symbol display area effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the decorative symbol display area effect is included. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative design display area effect A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ("128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a first display region R11 (first region) surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display region R11 is located at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Further, a specific image TG1 (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number “3” stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decoration pattern 8C that is variably displayed in the first display area R11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number “1”) in the first display area R11, and partially overlaps the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern is displayed. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from above the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “1”) in the first display area R11. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decoration pattern 8C (symbol image of the number “2”) in the first display area R11, a part of the middle decoration pattern overlaps the first display area R11. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C that is changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the figure of the number “2” that is one before the pattern of the number “3” which is the winning pattern, and is the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Hit a specific symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from above the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “2”) in the first display region R11. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (J), the enlarged left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display region R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R11. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed such that a part thereof overlaps the first display region R11. Thereafter, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative design display area effect B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol display area effect B. In the decorative design display area effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are lost. ("128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a first display region R11 (first region) surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display region R11 is located at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number “3” stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

  When the reach state of the decorative symbol is formed, the specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position to the upper central position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decoration pattern 8C that is variably displayed in the first display area R11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number “1”) in the first display area R11, and partially overlaps the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern is displayed. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (G), on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG <b> 1 displays the middle decorative pattern 8 </ b> C (the pattern image of the numeral “1”) in the first display region R <b> 11 from above. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decoration pattern 8C (symbol image of the number “2”) in the first display area R11, a part of the middle decoration pattern overlaps the first display area R11. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C that is changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the figure of the number “2” that is one before the pattern of the number “3” which is the winning pattern, and is the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Hit a specific symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from the top in the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “2”) in the first display region R11. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21. Then, on the display screen 7a, the display of the first display region R11 disappears (the first display region R11 becomes non-display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (J), enlarged left decorative symbols 8L and right decorative symbols 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display region R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R11. Thereafter, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative design display area effect C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol display area effect A. In the decorative symbol display area effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost in the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ("128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a first display region R11 (first region) surrounded by a rectangular frame. The first display region R11 is located at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) larger than the first display area R11. In the present embodiment, the second display area R21 is a display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Further, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number “3” stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed so as to move from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decoration pattern 8C that is variably displayed in the first display area R11. The first display area R11 and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state displayed in the first display region R11 are displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number “1”) in the first display area R11, and partially overlaps the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern is displayed. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from the top in the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “1”) in the first display region R11. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decoration pattern 8C (symbol image of the number “2”) in the first display area R11, a part of the middle decoration pattern overlaps the first display area R11. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C that is changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the figure of the number “2” that is one before the pattern of the number “3” which is the winning pattern, and is the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Hit a specific symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from above the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “2”) in the first display region R11. The specific image TG1 cannot be fluctuated by being pushed downward, but is pushed back from the bottom to the top by the middle decorative pattern 8C in the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display area R11, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner (losing symbol "323").

[Decorative design display area effect D]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol display area effect D. In the decorative design display area effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are lost. ("128"). The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a first display region (first region) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display region R11 is located at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. On the display screen 7a, a second display region (second region) R21 surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed. The second display area R21 is larger than the first display area R11. The second display region R21 is located above the display screen 7a.

  Further, a specific image (specific image) TG is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a and in the second display region R21. The specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R (the symbol image of the numeral “3”) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Is done. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number “3” stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R form a reach state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), in the second display area R21 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 moves from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decoration pattern 8C that is variably displayed in the first display area R11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number “1”) in the first display area R11, and partially overlaps the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern is displayed. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed in the first display area R11 with the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “1”) from above. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1. Specifically, in a state where the specific image TG1 rides on the middle decoration pattern 8C (symbol image of the number “2”) in the first display area R11, a part of the middle decoration pattern overlaps the first display area R11. 8C is pushed from top to bottom to try to fluctuate. Thereby, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R perform a stir effect to determine whether or not they are stopped and displayed in a lost manner. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C that is changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the figure of the number “2” that is one before the pattern of the number “3” which is the winning pattern, and is the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Hit a specific symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed from the top in the middle decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the numeral “2”) in the first display region R11. By pushing down, the middle decorative design 8C is pushed out (outside) the first display region R11. This prevents the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed while being enlarged so as to protrude from the first display region R11 and move from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (J), enlarged left decorative symbols 8L and right decorative symbols 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display region R21, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R in the reach state are displayed larger than when displayed in the first display region R11. Thereafter, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display area effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, decorations that are variably displayed on the first display region R11 (first region) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. The first effect in which the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (a set of decorative symbols) form a reach state, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reach state in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Among them, it is possible to execute the second effect of changing the middle decorative symbol 8C by the specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, a specific symbol (this embodiment) In the embodiment, when the symbol image of the number “2” is changed by the specific image TG1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C in the reach state are displayed on the second display region R21 (second region) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The third effect of displaying 8R can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are shifted from the first display region R11 to the second display region R21. It is displayed to move to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state displayed in the second display area R21 are the first. It is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 143, FIG. 144, and FIG. 146, in the third effect, when the reach state 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed in the second display area R21, the first effect is displayed. The display area R11 is not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, in the first effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form the reach state in the first display area R11, the first display area R11 A set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11 is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display region R21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol display area effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
143 to 146, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the variation is made according to the displayed specific image TG1, all the decorations may be made to vary according to the specific image instead of a part of the set of decorations.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the middle decorative pattern 8 </ b> C is changed by pushing from top to bottom by the specific image TG <b> 1. May be changed as follows. That is, the decorative pattern may be changed in any manner depending on the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed so as to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. The displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily hidden, and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 143 to FIG. 146, a specific symbol of the middle decorative symbol 8 </ b> C is an image of the symbol “2” which is one before the symbol “3” which is the winning symbol. May be used as the specific symbol here. For example, it may be a pattern of another number or a special pattern other than a number.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state displayed in the second display area R21 are displayed larger than those displayed in the first display area. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the reach state displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a mode different from the mode displayed in the first display area. For example, they may be displayed in different colors and shapes, different types of designs, and the like.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns,
A first effect in which the set of decorative symbols variably displayed in the first area of the display means forms a reach state;
Executing a second effect of changing at least one decorative symbol of the set of decorative symbols in the reach state in the first region of the display means by a specific image displayed on the display means. Is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
When a specific symbol among the at least one decorative symbol in the first area of the display means is changed by the specific image, the set of decorative symbols in a reach state in the second area of the display means. It is possible to further execute a third effect of displaying
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state is displayed so as to move from the first area to the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2 or aspect F1-3,
In the third effect, the set of decorative symbols in the reach state displayed in the second area is displayed larger than when displayed in the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4,
In the third effect, when displaying the set of decorative symbols in a reach state in the second area, the first area is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5,
In the first effect, when the set of decorative symbols forms a reach state in the first area, the set of reach states displayed in the first area and the first area are displayed. The decorative pattern is displayed enlarged,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6,
The first area of the display means is included in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the hold-response image effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. This hold-response image effect can be executed during a variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the hold-response image effect is included and includes the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Response image effect A]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for describing the hold-response image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". In addition, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue pending (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), a chance up effect is executed. The chance-up production is a production that informs that the degree of expectation of winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG “Chance Up” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also, a reserved image 9A, a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and a pedestal image 9CT are displayed. It should be noted that the suspended image 9C is not displayed when the effect symbol is fixed.

[Response image effect B]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for describing the hold-response image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7". In addition, the reserved image 9C is changed from white to blue pending (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), a chance up effect is executed. The chance-up production is a production that informs that the degree of expectation of winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG “Chance Up” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. It should be noted that the suspended image 9C is not displayed when the effect symbol is fixed.

[Response image effect C]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for describing the hold-response image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), a chance up effect is executed. The chance-up production is a production that informs that the degree of expectation of winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG “Chance Up” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are red (shown by hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect that notifies that the ally character has won the battle effect. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. In addition, the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed almost at the same time as the effect design and the confirmation stop.

[Response image effect D]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for describing the hold-response image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 150 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. The pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image corresponding to the four reserved images 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (C), a chance up effect is executed. The chance-up production is a production that informs that the degree of expectation of winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG “Chance Up” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are blue (shown by hatching). The display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed based on the degree of expectation of winning. For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that informs the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that informs that the ally character has been defeated in the battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "defeat" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is displayed. The fixed stop effect (losing) is an effect in which the effect symbol is definitely stopped in a lost mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both “7”, and the middle effect symbol 8C is “8”. Also, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. In addition, the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed almost at the same time as the effect design and the confirmation stop.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold-response image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved images (the reserved images 9A and 9C). The display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the degree of expectation of winning (FIG. 147 (D), FIG. 148 (D), FIG. 149 (D), FIG. 150 (D). ). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved images (the reserved images 9A and 9C). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change based on the degree of expectation of winning in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change when the chance up effect is executed (FIGS. 147 (C), 148 (C), 149 (C), FIG. 150 (C)). According to this configuration, expectations for a chance-up effect are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed ( 147 (F) and 149 (F) According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT are conspicuous, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the battle effect, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C is displayed (FIG. 148 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the battle effect, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed ( FIG. 150 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the victory effect or the defeat effect, the reserved image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed. (FIG. 147 (G), FIG. 148 (G), FIG. 149 (G), FIG. 150 (G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player pays attention to the victory and defeat of the ally character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the hold-response image effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, a pedestal change effect in which the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed is performed following the chance-up effect. On the other hand, a pedestal change effect may be executed in response to another effect. Further, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing irrelevant to another effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed as the pedestal change effect. Instead of or in addition to such a change in the display color, the shape of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT may be changed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a reserved image and changing the reserved image to another reserved image based on the degree of expectation of winning,
In correspondence with the display position of the reserved image, it is possible to display a reserved corresponding image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the reserved image,
Based on the degree of expectation to the hit, it is possible to execute a suspension corresponding image change effect of changing the suspension corresponding image to another suspension corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G1-1,
The suspension corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed below the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G1-1 or Aspect G1-2,
The suspension corresponding image change effect is executed based on the degree of expectation to the hit in the current fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3,
The suspension corresponding image change effect is executed upon execution of a specific effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4,
The suspension image includes the suspension image corresponding to the current fluctuation, the suspension, and a suspension storage image indicating the suspension number.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-5,
The suspension corresponding image includes the suspension corresponding image corresponding to the suspension image and the suspension storage corresponding image corresponding to the suspension storage image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the first display effect of hiding the hold storage image and the hold storage corresponding image and displaying the hold image and the hold corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-8]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G1-6 or Aspect G1-7,
In a predetermined effect, the hold storage image, the hold storage corresponding image, and the hold corresponding image are hidden, and a second display effect of displaying the hold image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a third display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage corresponding image, and the hold image, and displaying the hold corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G1-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a fourth display effect of hiding the hold storage image, the hold storage corresponding image, the hold image, and the hold corresponding image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the reserved image effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. This reserved image effect can be executed during a variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the pending image effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the corresponding image data from the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Pending image effect A]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for describing the reserved image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (C), a pseudo notice announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG “NEXT” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R restart high-speed fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A related to the first special figure reservation is not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded. Also here, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed. Here, in particular, both the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also here, both the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Pending image effect B]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for describing the reserved image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 152 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), a pseudo notice announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG “NEXT” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R restart high-speed fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded. Also in this case, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also here, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Pending image effect C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for describing the reserved image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (C), a pseudo notice announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG “NEXT” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R restart high-speed fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded. Also here, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also here, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Pending image effect D]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for describing the reserved image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and a pedestal image 9CT for easily recognizing the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (C), a pseudo notice announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive notification effect is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG “NEXT” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R restart high-speed fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), a ring effect is executed. The ring effect is an effect performed in a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Specifically, the band-shaped ring image RG rotates around the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB as indicated by an arrow YG. Here, the character "hot" is displayed on the ring image RG, and the character "hot" moves with the rotation of the ring image RG. Here, particularly, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. On the other hand, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is hidden on the back side of the ring image RG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". Also here, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special figure reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the reserved image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the variation effect of the effect symbol, the first period (FIGS. 151 (A), (B), (C), and (D)) in which the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed, the reserved image 9A Are not displayed, and a second period (FIG. 151 (E) (F)) in which only the reserved image 9C is displayed. According to this configuration, the reserved image can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the fluctuation effect of the effect symbol includes a third period (FIG. 151 (G) (H)) in which both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are not displayed. According to this configuration, it is not necessary to pay attention to the suspension information during this period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT can be displayed in association with the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT can be displayed in association with the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152, 153, and 154). ). According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A or the reserved image 9C, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, during the first period in which the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed. 152 (A) (B) (C) (D), FIGS. 153 (A) (B) (C) (D), and FIGS. 154 (A) (B) (C) (D). According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A or the reserved image 9C, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed during the second period in which the reserved image 9A is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C is displayed (see FIG. 152 ( E) (F), FIG. 154 (E)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second period in which the reserved image 9A is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. It can be displayed (FIGS. 153 (E) (F) and 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect of displaying a ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. (FIG. 154 (F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the reserved image effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the order is the first period → the second period → the third period. However, each period may appear in any order during the variable effect. Also, it may be included twice or more during the fluctuation effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute a ring effect of displaying a ring image RG displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. In this ring effect, the holding image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the holding image 9A may be displayed. At this time, it is conceivable that the ring image is displayed on the back side of the reserved image 9A and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G2-1]
A game machine capable of displaying a pending image corresponding to the current variation and a pending storage image indicating the number of reservations as a pending image,
During the change of the effect design, it is possible to execute a reserved image change effect including a first period for displaying both the reserved image and the reserved stored image and a second period for displaying only the reserved image. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G2-1,
The reserved image change effect further includes a third period in which both the reserved image and the reserved stored image are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G2-1 or Aspect G2-2,
In correspondence with the display position of the reserved image, it is possible to display a reserved corresponding image that facilitates recognition of the display position of the reserved image,
The suspension corresponding image includes the suspension corresponding image corresponding to the suspension image and the suspension storage corresponding image corresponding to the suspension storage image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
The suspension corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed below the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G2-3 or Aspect G2-4,
In the first period, the reserved image can be displayed in association with the reserved image, and the reserved image can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved image.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5,
In the second period, the suspension corresponding image can be displayed in association with the suspension image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6,
In the second period, only the reserved image can be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect G2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7,
A special image display effect that displays a special image that is displayed on the back side of the reserved image when it overlaps with the reserved image and that is displayed on the front side of the reserved image when it overlaps with the reserved image. Executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the disappearance effects A to D of the reserved icons will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 155 to 158, some decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the front (front) periphery of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 is omitted. Some of the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 are also omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  The disappearance effect of the suspension icon can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the various commands (for example, the fluctuation effect start command and the advance determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the disappearance effect of the suspension icon, The corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2 and the like. For example, the position and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R are changed.

  Here, the disappearance effect A of the reserved icon will be described first, and the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon, the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon, and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon will be described in this order. In addition, in the disappearance effect A of the hold icon to the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, since the hold icon is not displayed (disappears) as described later, the display becomes uncomfortable, so that the player has an uncomfortable effect. This is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the winning degree is high.

[Disappearance effect A of the suspension icon]
First, the disappearance effect A of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram for describing the disappearance effect A of the suspension icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  In the disappearance effect A of the suspension icon, first, as shown in FIG. 155 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and a three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative design is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even if it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the hold icon 9C (here, blue) of a smiling sphere is displayed at the non-display hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. An icon is displayed, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two reserve icons 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “2” on the left side, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 155 (A), the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21.

  When the decorative symbol in FIG. 155 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the numeral “ 3 "), the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner, and a reach is formed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also displayed in FIG. 155 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is not displayed in FIG. 155 (A). Have been. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “20”) is also displayed in FIG. 155 (A).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 155 (C), the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are performed. 155 (A) and (B) are continuously displayed in FIGS. 155 (A) and (B), and the two reserved icons displayed in FIGS. 155 (A) and (B). 9A, the hold icon 9C and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the hold display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. In other words, with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed, and correspond to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R. The suspension display position 9Cd appears because the suspension icon 9C disappears.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (D), a message MG saying “Big hit with ally character victory !!” is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, “2 0 ") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (E), almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs.

  Here, the initial stage of the action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the early stage of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and an effect of chasing the ally character CRA to the right is performed. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed. Are displayed continuously from FIG. 155 (D).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (F), in the middle stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left, and the number continues from FIG. 155 (E). HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (G), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), here, an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and “victory” is displayed. MG is arranged and displayed on the left side of the friend character CRA, and the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. The display position 9Cd is in a non-display (disappearing) state. Note that, when an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the message MG “defeat” is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. It is arranged and displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155 (H), the same symbol (here, the number “3”) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. , A jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot. Regarding the suspension, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously in FIG. 155 (G), and the suspension display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is not displayed).

  Note that, when an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral “3” on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral “2” on the display screen 7a. If the right decorative symbol 8R becomes the number "3" and the same symbol (here, the number "3") is not displayed and stopped and displayed, the loss is definitely displayed. In this case, as for the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 155 (G), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are again displayed. 9Ad and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and a third hold display position 9Ad and a fourth hold display The hold icon is not displayed at the position 9Ad. Further, with the confirmation display of the loss, the reserved display position 9Cd is not displayed (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the consumption of the reserved icon.

  As described above, in the effect A of the disappearance of the hold icon, while the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 155 (A) and (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is displayed. 155 is performed (FIGS. 155 (C) to (G)), the player is provided with a novel effect in which the hold icon 9C is not displayed, that is, display / non-display using the hold icon, which has not existed conventionally. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Disappearance effect B of the suspension icon]
Next, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram for describing the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  In the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon, first, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and a three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the hold icon 9C (here, blue) of a smiling sphere is displayed at the non-display hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. An icon is displayed, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two reserve icons 9A, 9A are in stock without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “2” on the left side, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 156 (A).

  When the decorative symbol in FIG. 156 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 156 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (number) (here, the numeral “ 3 "), the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner, and a reach is formed. The hold icon 9A is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (A), the hold display position 9Ad is also displayed in FIG. 156 (A), and the hold display position 9Cd is not displayed in FIG. 156 (A). In addition, the numbers HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21) “20”) is also displayed in FIG. 156 (A). Note that the reserved icon 9C is displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (A), and is displayed as a mode in which light is also emitted from the periphery of the reserved icon 9C in all directions.

  The holding icon 9C in FIG. 156 (B) may be the same as the holding icon 9C (here, blue) in FIG. 156 (A), or may change to an icon having a higher jackpot expectation (for example, blue From green to green).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (C), the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are performed. The numbers HMG (here, “20”) respectively indicating “pending” in the figure are displayed continuously in FIGS. 156 (A) and (B), and two holding icons displayed in FIGS. 156 (A) and (B). 9A and the four reserved display positions 9Ad disappear, and the reserved icon 9C and the light emitted in all directions from the periphery of the reserved icon 9C are also displayed in the state shown in FIG. 156 (B). In other words, with respect to the hold, a state is displayed in which the number HMG (here, “20”) and the light from the periphery of the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C are displayed in all directions.

  Note that the hold icon 9C in FIG. 156 (C) may be the same as the hold icon 9C (here, blue or green) in FIG. 156 (B), or may be changed to one with a high expectation of a big hit. (For example, change from blue to green or from green to red).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (D), the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are performed. A number HMG (here, “20”) indicating “holding in the figure” is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (C), and the holding icon 9C and the periphery of the holding icon 9C displayed in FIG. 156 (C) are displayed. Light emitted in all directions moves from the reserved display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a and is displayed in a manner of increasing in size (or moves from the reserved display position to the display screen 7a and wraps around in the front-back direction). It is displayed in a mode in which the size increases while rotating). Further, in the center of the inside area of the outline of the hold icon 9C displayed in a large size, the effect button 63 is provided to urge the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C. Is arranged and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. Further, the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63 (for example, in the area inside the outline of the hold icon 9C displayed large and below the effect button image BTN so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C, for example, (3 seconds) is displayed. As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  Further, in FIG. 156 (D), the suspended display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”), the hold icon 9C displayed in a large size, and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C are shown in FIG. ), And the suspended display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. That is, the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R appear.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (E), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the left movable role 14L is The right movable movable object 14R advances (moves) toward (in a direction close to each other) an advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployment position)), a left decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the left movable accessory 14L, and a ring attached to the distal end of the right movable accessory 14R. One decoration member (combined role) in which the right side decoration portion of the left movable portion 14L and the right side decoration portion of the right movable portion 14R are formed into an annular shape by combining the right side decoration portion which is half of the shape decoration portion. Is formed .

  In FIG. 156 (E), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”), the hold display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9C displayed in a large size, and the periphery of the hold icon 9C are shown. The light emitted in all directions is displayed continuously in FIG. 156 (D), and corresponds to the reserved display position 9Cd and the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. And the pending icon 9C that appears.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are combined to form a combined role having a ring shape, as shown in FIG. The region to be formed is a region 14D having a circular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “circular region”). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the hold icon 9C of the smile sphere displayed in a large scale in FIG. 156 (D) is already placed. The icon 9C is an image expressing the feeling of a smile on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with respect to the circular area 14D of the combined character (that is, the holding icon 9C is an image expressing the feeling of the combined character). Disappears), and it is possible to give emotion to the united character. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  In FIG. 156 (F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (E), and the left decoration that is currently changing is displayed. The reserve icon 9C corresponding to the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R has disappeared as an image expressing the emotion of the combined character.

  Further, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other). When the left decorative portion of the movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the reserved display position where the combined accessory is displayed on the display screen 7a. Since a part of 9Cd (the upper part of the hold display position 9Cd) is covered, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the hold display position 9Cd.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The device 7 is retracted (moved) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the image. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  When the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R move respectively, as shown in FIGS. 156 (E) and 156 (F), the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a. It has become.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (G), a message MG saying “Big hit with ally character victory !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the number HMG (here, “20” in this case) is reserved. ) And the hold display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (F).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (H), almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs.

  Here, the initial stage of the action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the early stage of the action effect (battle effect), the enemy character CRB becomes dominant, and an effect of hunting the ally character CRA to the right is performed. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd Are displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (G).

  Subsequently, although not shown, in the middle stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left, and also in the hold, the number HMG (here, " 20 ”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (H).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (I), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), here, an effect to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the “defeat” is displayed. MG is arranged and displayed on the left side of the enemy character CRB. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position follow the middle stage of the action effect (battle effect) not shown. 9Cd is displayed. Note that, when an effect that notifies the victory of the ally character CRA is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, and the message MG “victory” is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. It is arranged and displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156 (J), the same symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a with the left decorative symbol 8L being the numeral “3”, the middle decorative symbol 8C being the numeral “4”, and the right decorative symbol 8R being the numeral “3”. If the stop display is performed without the numbers (here, the number “3”) aligned, the outlier is definitely displayed. At this time, regarding the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are again displayed. 9Ad and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and a third hold display position 9Ad and a fourth hold display The hold icon is not displayed at the position 9Ad. Further, with the confirmation display of the loss, the reserved display position 9Cd is not displayed (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the consumption of the reserved icon.

  In the case where an effect for notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol on the display screen 7a. Here, the numbers “3”) are stopped and displayed together, and a big hit game (big hit effect) in which a big hit is given to the player and a profit is given is performed. In this case, regarding the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is not displayed).

  As described above, in the disappearance effect B of the hold icon, the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to (E)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, but the specific effect is displayed. 156 is performed (FIGS. 156 (F) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect that the hold icon 9C is not displayed, that is, display / non-display using the hold icon, which has not existed conventionally. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Emission effect C of the suspension icon]
Next, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram for describing the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  In the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon, first, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the white spherical holding icons are displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad and the second holding display position 9Ad, respectively. No hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the two reserve icons 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “2” on the left side, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 157 (A).

  When the decorative pattern in FIG. 157 (A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), light is emitted from the center of the white spherical holding icon 9C in all directions and a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). Only flashes, the flash image FH is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 157), the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 157 (A).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral "3"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed. Is variably displayed to form a reach. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 157 is displayed continuously in FIG. 157 (B), the two reserved icons 9A and the four reserved display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 157 (B) are newly hidden, and the reserved icon is displayed. 9C is in a state of being hidden following FIG. 157 (B). In other words, with regard to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are respectively moved toward the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (to approach each other). In the direction in which the left side movable portion 14L is attached to the front end (front position) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployment position)). The left decorative part and the right decorative part which is a half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable movable part 14R are united, and the left decorative part and the right movable movable part of the left movable movable part 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined part) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and thereafter, the image is switched to an image (not shown) in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  In addition, in FIG. 157 (D), with respect to the reservation, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (C), and the left movable movable object 14L and the right movable movable When the movements of the accessory 14R start moving, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (C) is newly hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), the left movable auditory piece 14L and the right movable auditory piece 14R move away from each other, and the left movable auditory piece 14L moves toward the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The vehicle moves backward (moves) from the advanced position at the (front) center to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable movable object 14R is moved to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R respectively start moving in order to release the formed combined role, the hold display which is not displayed in FIG. The position 9Cd reappears. Note that in FIG. 157 (E), regarding the suspension, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously from FIG. 157 (D).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (F), an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged at the center of the display screen 7a in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (E) disappears (disappears) again. In addition, in FIG. 157 (F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously from FIG. 157 (E). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  As shown in FIG. 157 (G), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the left movable object 14L is The right movable movable object 14R advances (moves) toward (in a direction close to each other) an advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployment position)), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are united to form a united auditorium having an annular shape and formed inside the annular shape. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular region 14D. Here, an image of smiling with sunglasses is displayed. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  In addition, in FIG. 157 (G), regarding the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (F), and the hold display position 9Cd is not displayed in FIG. 157 (F). State.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (H), the left movable role 14L moves toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, and the left movable role 14L faces the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The vehicle moves backward (moves) from the advanced position at the (front) center toward the evacuation position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable movable object 14R is moved to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the front (front) center to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R respectively start moving to release the formed combined role, the hold display which is not displayed in FIG. 157 (G) is accordingly caused. The position 9Cd reappears. Note that in FIG. 157 (H), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously from FIG. 157 (G).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (I), an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157 (H) is in a state of disappearing (disappearing) again. In addition, in FIG. 157 (I), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (H). The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157 (I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157 (F), or the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. (For example, from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

  As shown in FIG. 157 (J), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the left decoration is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the symbol 8L is the numeral "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral "4", the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral "3", and the same symbol (here, the numeral "3") is stopped and displayed without being aligned. The outlier is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed following FIG. 157 (I), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the A 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed, a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and a white hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad. , The hold icon is not displayed, and the hold display position 9Cd appears again. With the confirmation display of the loss, the reserved icon 9C is consumed and the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappears).

  In FIG. 157 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a together with the same symbol (here, the numeral “3”). In this way, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player is performed. In this case, regarding the hold, in FIG. 157 (J), the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 157 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears as in FIG. 157 (I) ( Disappear).

  As described above, in the disappearance effect C of the hold icon, while the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 157 (A) to (B)) after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is displayed. 157 is performed (FIGS. 157 (C) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect that the hold icon 9C is not displayed, that is, display / non-display using the hold icon, which has not existed conventionally. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Disappearance effect D of the suspension icon]
Next, the disappearance effect D of the suspension icon will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a diagram for describing the disappearance effect D of the suspension icon. The effect of disappearing the hold icon is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  In the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, first, as shown in FIG. 158 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and a three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  On the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and white spherical holding icons are displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad and the second holding display position 9Ad, respectively. No hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad that are displayed. That is, the two reserve icons 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are two first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “2” on the left side, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 158 (A).

  When the decorative pattern in FIG. 158 (A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 158 (B), a flash image in which light is emitted from the center of the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9C in all directions. FH is displayed and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 158), the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 158 (A).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the numeral “3”), and the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed. Is variably displayed to form a reach. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, HMG) indicating the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. 158), the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 158 (B).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (D), the area of the display screen 7a has a pseudo abnormal display mode. The “pseudo abnormal display mode” includes, for example, a display mode such as a sandstorm, a display mode in which the screen is disturbed by noise, a display mode in which an image is not normally displayed due to a processing delay, and a display mode in which the original screen cannot be returned. A display mode in which a message indicating an effect is displayed can be given.

  In FIG. 158 (D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo abnormal display mode, the first special figure suspension based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 158 (C), the number HMG (here, “20”) respectively indicating the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball was displayed in FIG. 158 (C). The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are newly hidden, and the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158 (C) is also newly hidden. That is, with respect to the suspension, only the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is displayed. In the pseudo abnormal display mode, the position where the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed and the surrounding area may be avoided. In this way, the visibility of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is ensured. be able to.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R respectively move toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (to approach each other). In the direction in which it moves), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative portion and the right decorative portion which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the tip end of the right movable accessory 14R are united, and the left decorative portion and the right movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined part) having an annular shape with the right decorative portion of 14R is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image in which the eyes are wide open and the image is smiling is displayed, and thereafter, the image is switched to an image (not shown) in which the eyes are narrowed and the image is smiling. The emotion can be imparted to the combined role by supplementing the image expressing the emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the circular region 14D of the combined role. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that is rich in variations due to the emotions of the combined role.

  Note that in FIG. 158 (E), with respect to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (D).

  Then, although not shown, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are moved away from each other, and the left movable role 14L is advanced to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. To the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14 </ b> R advances into the front (front) center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. The user retreats (moves) from the position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R start to move to release the formed combined role, respectively, although not shown, the hidden display position 9Cd, which is not shown, is not shown. Appears again. In other words, with regard to the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (F), a message MG saying “Big hit with ally character victory !!” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. ) And the hold display position 9Cd are continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (E).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (G), almost the entire body of the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action effect (battle effect) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. Thereafter, the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big hit occurs.

  Here, the initial stage of the action effect (battle effect) is performed. In the early stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the enemy character CRB becomes dominant and the ally character CRA hunts down to the right side. Are displayed continuously from FIG. 158 (F).

  Subsequently, although not shown, in the middle stage of the action effect (battle effect), an effect is performed in which the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is driven to the left, and also in the hold, the number HMG (here, " 20 ”) and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156 (F).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (H), at the end of the action effect (battle effect), an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 to encourage the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. Are arranged at the center of the display screen 7a and are displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (here, blinking white). The English word “PUSH” is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the operation surface for pressing the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158 (G) is again in a state of disappearing (disappearing). In FIG. 158 (H), with respect to the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously from FIG. 158 (G). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white blinking → blue blinking → green blinking → red blinking → gold blinking (yellow blinking) → seven-color blinking (rainbow) The degree of expectation to be a big hit is set high in the order of blinking (big hit thick).

  As shown in FIG. 158 (I), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the victory of the ally character CRA is achieved as shown in FIG. The effect of informing is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed at the center, the message MG of "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA, and the number HMG (here, "20") is reserved. 158 is displayed continuously in FIG. 158 (H), and the reserved display position 9Cd is not displayed (disappears) continuously in FIG. 158 (H). Note that, when an effect for notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed at the center, and the message MG indicating “defeat” is displayed. Is displayed to the left of.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a together with the same symbol (here, the number “3”). , A jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player as a jackpot. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “20”) is displayed continuously in FIG. 158 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears (is not displayed) continuously in FIG. 158 (I).

  In the case where an effect for notifying the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and an effect for notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral “3” on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is a symbol. If the numeral “2” and the right decorative symbol 8R become the numeral “3” and the same symbol (here, the numeral “3”) is not displayed and stopped and displayed, the loss is definitely displayed. In this case, with regard to the hold, the numeral HMG (here, “20”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 158 (I), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position are again displayed. 9Ad and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and a third hold display position 9Ad and a fourth hold display The hold icon is not displayed at the position 9Ad. Further, with the confirmation display of the loss, the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a by using the reserved icon 9C.

  As described above, in the disappearance effect D of the hold icon, while the hold icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 158 (A) and (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is displayed. 158 is performed (FIGS. 158 (C) to (I)), the player is provided with a novel effect of displaying / hiding the non-conventional holding icon 9C in which the holding icon 9C is not displayed. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the disappearance effect of the suspension icon will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the holding icon, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. ), And when the variable display based on the plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) based on the reserved icon 9C is started, the reserved icon 9C is displayed. When the specific effects in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) are started before the variable display by the decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R) is stopped, the hold icon 9C is displayed. A first effect to be hidden can be executed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9C is displayed during a period (FIGS. 155 (A) and (B)) from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, but the period from FIG. 155 (C) to FIG. In the period in which the specific effect of (1) is performed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / non-displaying the hold icon 9C, which is non-conventional, in which the hold icon 9C is not displayed. Improvement can be achieved.
In the disappearance effect B of the holding icon in FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (J), the holding icon 9C is displayed for a while (FIGS. 156 (A) to 156 (E)) after the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed, but during the period in which the specific effect in FIGS. 156 (F) to 156 (I) is performed, the display / non-display by the non-conventional hold icon that the non-conventional hold icon 9C is not displayed. A novel effect of display can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.
157 (A) to 157 (J), in the disappearance effect C of the holding icon, the holding icon 9C is displayed for a while after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (B)). Is displayed, but during a period in which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I)), the holding icon 9C is not displayed. A novel effect of non-display can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.
158 (A) to 158 (J), in the disappearance effect D of the holding icon, although the holding icon 9C is displayed, a period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I)). )), It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying / non-displaying the reserved icon 9C, which is not displayed in the related art, in which the reserved icon 9C is not displayed, so that interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the holding icon, a holding display position 9Ad indicating a display position of the holding icon 9A can be displayed. In the first effect, when the variable display with a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started, the display is suspended in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (B). The position 9Ad is displayed, and the reserved display position 9Ad is not displayed during a period from the start to the end of the specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G). According to this configuration, the hold display position 9Ad is not displayed during the period in which the specific effect is performed (FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G)), so that the visibility of the specific effect is reduced to the hold display position 9Ad. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feeling of power of a specific effect from being impaired.
156 (F) to FIG. 156 (I), the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon, FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon, FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the effect D of the suspension icon described in ()).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the holding icon, the first effect includes a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, When the variable display by the right decorative symbol 8R is started and stopped and displayed, the winning is notified as a winning in a specific lottery (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol (here, the same symbol). , Number "3") is stopped and displayed together.) In some cases, after the specific effects in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) are completed, the hold display position 9Ad is continuously hidden in FIG. 155 (H). On the other hand, in the specific lottery in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G), the winning is determined as a win and a loss is announced (the left decorative symbol 8L is the numeral “3”, the middle decorative symbol 8C is the numeral “2”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the numeral “3”). number (Here, the number "3") "3" and the same symbols are stopped and displayed without aligned.) Sometimes not shown after finishing the particular effect to display the hold display position 9Ad. According to this configuration, after a specific effect is finished, the winning is reported as a winning in a specific lottery, and when a winning game (a winning effect) is started, a winning game (a winning effect) is displayed by the hold display position 9Ad. Since it is not hindered, it is possible to prevent the feeling of power of the hit game (hit effect) from being impaired. Further, even if the player is discouraged by being notified of a loss in a particular lottery, the hold display position 9Ad is displayed. For example, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad is present. , It is possible to promptly notify the player of the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9A by the mode of the color and shape of the hold icon 9A, which can contribute to the improvement of the willingness to play.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (J), the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157 (J), and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (H) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the first effect includes a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L). During the period from the start of the variable display using the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R) to the stop display, the hold icon 9A is also not displayed during the period in which the hold display position 9Ad is not displayed. According to this configuration, since the specific effects in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G) are performed, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. By not displaying 9A, the visibility of the specific effect is not hindered by the hold icon 9A in addition to the hold display position 9Ad, so that it is possible to further suppress the loss of the powerful feeling of the specific effect. it can.
156 (F) to FIG. 156 (I), the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon, FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon, FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the effect D of the suspension icon described in ()).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (C) to FIG. 155 (G) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C is set. The first effect can be displayed, and in the period from the start of the variable display using a plurality of decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) to the stop display, the reserved icon is displayed. During the period in which 9C is not displayed (the period from FIG. 155 (C) to FIG. 155 (F)), the reserved display position 9Cd can be displayed. According to this configuration, despite the fact that the variable display with a plurality of decorative symbols by the reserved icon 9C has been started, the reserved icon 9C is displayed while the reserved icon 9C is not displayed. Since the hold display position 9Cd is displayed and the display has an uncomfortable feeling, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of incongruity and to suggest to the player that there is a chance that the winning degree is high. .
156 (F) to FIG. 156 (I), the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon, FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon, FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the effect D of the suspension icon described in ()).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (G) of the disappearance effect A of the hold icon, a specific effect in FIGS. 155 (C) to 155 (G). Can be executed after a variable display with a plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started and reach is formed. According to this configuration, the player has an uncomfortable effect in which the hold icon 9C is not displayed by the first effect, triggered by the fact that the reach is formed due to the longer time of playing the game. Since it can be found by itself, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a sense of incongruity every time a reach occurs, and it is possible to suppress the pain even if the time for playing the game becomes long.
156 (F) to FIG. 156 (I), the disappearance effect B of the suspension icon, FIGS. 157 (C) to 157 (I), the disappearance effect C of the suspension icon, FIGS. 158 (C) to 158 (I). The same applies to the effect D of the suspension icon described in ()).

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the disappearance effect of the hold icon will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. The image was not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (it disappeared). When the display icon 7C is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, a dedicated sound for notifying the player that the hold icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a may be played from the speaker 67. . This can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking that the hold icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the hold icon 9C is not displayed (disappeared) and the display has an uncomfortable feeling.

[Modification 2]
In the disappearance effect A of the hold icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. The image was not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (it disappeared). When the display screen 7a is turned off (disappears), a countdown effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. As the countdown effect, for example, the number “5”, the number “4”, the number “3”, the number “2”, the number “1”, and the number “0” are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, a sound for reading out a number (an announcement) may be made to flow from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can know the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and can prevent inadvertent overlooking. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the time when the display with a sense of incongruity is caused by the timing when the hold icon 9C is not displayed (disappears).

[Modification 3]
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156 (D) and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158 (H), in order to prompt the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63, the effect button 63 is pressed. The imitation effect button image BTN is arranged on the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. However, instead of the BTN followed by the effect button, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode in order to encourage the player to operate (press in) the sword member 64. The effect button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. This makes it possible to add a variation to the effect by changing the type of operation method, so that even if the time for playing the game becomes longer, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate.

[Modification 4]
In the disappearance effect B of the hold icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the hold icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the hold icon in FIG. 158, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the image display device 7. It was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the disappearing effect A of the reserved icon in FIG. 155, the disappearing effect C of the reserved icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D of the reserved icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change When the reach is formed by being displayed, the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the image display device. 7 disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, after the reach is formed, only the hold display position 9Cd may be always displayed on the display screen 7a.
[Modification 6]
In the disappearance effect A of the reserved icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in FIG. 158, the left decorative symbol 8L, When the middle decoration symbol 8C and the right decoration symbol 8R are variably displayed, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, one or both of the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A and the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Good.

[Modification 7]
The effect A of disappearance of the reserved icon in FIG. 155, the effect B of disappearance of the reserved icon in FIG. 156, the effect C of disappearance of the reserved icon in FIG. 157, and the effect D of disappearance of the reserved icon in FIG. The unit may not be provided, and other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the variable display based on the plurality of decorative symbols based on the hold icon is started, the hold icon is displayed. After that, when the specific effect is started until the variable display based on the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped, the hold is performed. It is possible to execute a first effect of hiding the icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G3-1,
A hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon can be displayed,
The first effect displays the on-hold display position when the variable display with the plurality of decorative symbols is started, and hides the on-hold display position during a period from the start of the specific effect to the end of the specific effect. Do
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G3-1 or Aspect G3-2,
In the first effect, when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started and stopped and displayed, when notifying a winning as a winning in a specific lottery, the suspension display position is continuously maintained after the specific effect is completed. On the other hand, when notifying the loss in a specific lottery and displaying the loss, the suspension display position is displayed after finishing the specific effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect G3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G3-2 or Aspect G3-3,
The first effect also hides the hold icon in a period in which the hold display position is hidden during a period from the start of the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols to the stop display,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect G3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4,
The hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon can be displayed,
The first effect is capable of displaying the suspension display position during a period in which the suspension icon is not displayed in a period from a time when the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols is started until a stop display is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect G3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5,
The specific effect can be executed after the reach is formed by starting the variable display by the plurality of decorative symbols,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the holding icon image display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162. This hold icon image display effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative design or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the hold icon image display effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Hold icon image display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image display effect A. In the hold icon image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped holding icons 9A are displayed in a first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (B), the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner without being erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smile face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (E), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move within the display screen 7a. More specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a makes a right turn around the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after the display during the hold icon image display effect, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further rightward and is displayed so as to jump out of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped to the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 159 (I) and (J), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if it moves from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump right into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further rightward and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image display effect B. In the reserved icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped holding icons 9A are displayed in a first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 160B, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost at the stop display position (losing symbol “128”). )). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area moves to the hold display position and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, like the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (E), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move within the display screen 7a. More specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a makes a right turn around the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after the display during the hold icon image display effect, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (F) to 160 (H), on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from the inside of the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7 a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (F), the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (G), the hold icon image HAG moves further rightward and is displayed so as to jump out of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160 (H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped to the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 160 (I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the outside of the display screen 7a to the inside of the display screen 7a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160 (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump right into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (J), the hold icon image HAG moves further rightward and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image display effect C. In the hold icon image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped holding icons 9A are displayed in a first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner without being erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smile face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D) and (E), a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, like the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to protrude upward from the back (rear side) of the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (F), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move within the display screen 7a. More specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a makes a right turn around the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after the display during the hold icon image display effect, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 161 (G) to (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if it were moving from inside the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (H), the hold icon image HAG is further moved rightward and displayed so as to jump out of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped to the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, an emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped reserve icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump right into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward.

[Hold icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image display effect D. In the hold icon image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. A diamond-shaped suspension icon 9C is displayed at the suspension display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped holding icons 9A are displayed in a first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner without being erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smile face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (D) and (E), the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right of the first hold display area on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is modeled. The suspended icon image HAG is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image like the hold icon 9A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the hold icon image HAG moves diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right of the first hold display area. Will be displayed. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to protrude obliquely upward to the right from behind (back side) the hold icon 9A. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (F), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move within the display screen 7a. More specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a makes a right turn around the display screen 7a so as to draw an ellipse. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that the specific image TG2 may be displayed as it is without disappearing after the display during the hold icon image display effect, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 162 (G) to (I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if it moves from inside the display screen 7 to outside the display screen 7a. Is done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162 (G), the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (H), the hold icon image HAG is further moved rightward and displayed so as to jump out of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a as if the hold icon image HAG jumped to the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from outside the display screen 7a to the inside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, an emblem image EG imitating a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped reserve icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump right into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon image display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the first display icon 7 </ b> A (the relevant holding icon 9 </ b> C) is displayed on the display screen 7 a at the holding display position (the relevant holding display position). After the effect and the first effect, a second holding icon image HAG that imitates the holding icon 9A (the holding icon 9C) displayed at the holding display position (the holding display position) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The production of and is executable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the second effect, the holding icon image HAG is displayed at the holding display position (the holding display position), and the holding icon 9A (the holding icon) is displayed. 9C) is displayed so as to move from the position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the second effect, the third effect in which the hold icon image HAG is displayed to move in the display screen 7a is further executed. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the third effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. The fourth effect can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the fourth effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it moves from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. The fifth effect can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the reserved display position is the reserved display position, and the reserved icon is the reserved icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159 to FIG. 162, the second effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, display of the specific image TG2, start of the next change of the decorative symbol, etc.) is performed. Is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the hold icon image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
159 to 162, the holding icon 9A (the holding icon 9C) is a diamond, but the holding icon 9A (the holding icon 9C) may have other various shapes, patterns, colors, or the like. The same applies to the hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, when a specific effect (for example, display of the specific image TG2, start of the next change of the decorative pattern, etc.) is performed, the hold icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect may be other various effects. For example, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R form a reach state, when a specific image is displayed, when a movable member or the like operates, or the like.
[Modification 3]
159 to 162, one hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, but the number of the hold images HAG to be displayed may be plural. . Also, a hold icon image HAG having the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but is larger, smaller, or different in size than the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). May be done.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a has moved around the display screen 7a so as to make an ellipse in a clockwise circle. However, the mode of movement within the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and may move in various modes. For example, the hold icon image HAG may move while rotating.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which the display unit displays the hold icon at a predetermined hold display position;
After the first effect, the display means can execute a second effect in which a hold icon image imitating the hold icon displayed at the hold display position is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G4-1,
In the second effect, the hold icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the hold icon displayed at the hold display position,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect G4-1 or Aspect G4-2,
After the second effect, it is possible to further execute a third effect in which the hold icon image is displayed so as to move in the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-3,
After the third effect, it is possible to further execute a fourth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if it moves from the inside of the display means to the outside of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-4,
After the fourth effect, it is possible to further execute a fifth effect in which the hold icon image is displayed as if moving from outside the display means into the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5,
The hold display position is the hold display position,
The hold icon is the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect G4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6,
The second effect is performed when a specific effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the operation state suggesting effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 166. This operation state suggestion display effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the operation state suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Operation state suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for describing the operation unit state suggestion effect A. In the operation part state suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (on the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical holding icons 9A are displayed in the first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost at the stop display position (losing symbol “835”). )). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the numeral “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "6" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 163 (F) and (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at high speed from top to bottom, and as shown in FIG. The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 163 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in the present embodiment, the right decorative symbol 8R) of the lost decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R).

  In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image indicating the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 has entered the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (No. Embodiment 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image indicating that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed from a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from a state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the normal state (second mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the effect button 63 is not in the capsule, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective (third state). Embodiment). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in a valid state.

  In the present embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. The operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of “press !!!!”) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and the like. You may.

[Operation state suggestion display effect B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for describing the operation unit state suggestion effect B. In the operation part state suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (on the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical holding icons 9A are displayed in the first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost at the stop display position (losing symbol “835”). )). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decoration symbol 8C (the symbol image of the numeral “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "6" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 164 (F) and (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode that moves at high speed from top to bottom, and as shown in FIG. The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in the present embodiment, the right decorative symbol 8R) of the lost decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R).

  In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a sword image KG (operation section image) representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (operation section), and is an image indicating the operation state of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state where the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). In the operation state suggestion image SSG, the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen), that is, the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. Implies that At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed, the operation is not effective.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image showing that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 is melted and the sword member 64 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted so that the sword member 64 cannot be pushed from a state where the sword member 64 cannot be pushed, that is, from a state where the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective to a sword member. This indicates that the operation of the operation No. 64 is switched to a valid state (second mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice, so that the sword member 64 can be pushed in, that is, the operation of the sword member 64 is effective (No. Embodiment 3). At this time, when the sword member 64 is actually pushed, the operation is in an effective state.

  In the present embodiment, a sword image KG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the validity period of the operation reception of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB overlaps the lower part of the sword image KG and is displayed on the front of the sword image KG. The operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of “push in !!”) that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64 and the like. You may.

[Operation state indication display effect C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for describing the operation unit state suggestion effect C. In the operation part state suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (on the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical holding icons 9A are displayed in the first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost at the stop display position (losing symbol “835”). )). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the numeral “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "6" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 165 (F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the symbol image of the number that is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves at high speed from top to bottom, and as shown in FIG. The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in the present embodiment, the right decorative symbol 8R) of the lost decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R).

  In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image indicating the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 has entered the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (No. Embodiment 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (H), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG represents a smile face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but includes an abstract object such as a character, a figure, or a symbol, and a conceptual object whose content is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (I), after the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the operation state suggestion image SSG which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image indicating that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed from a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from a state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the normal state (second mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the effect button 63 is not in the capsule, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective (third state). Embodiment). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in a valid state.

  In the present embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. The operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of “press !!!!”) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and the like. You may.

[Operation state suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for describing the operation unit state suggestion effect D. In the operation part state suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols. The white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position (on the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical holding icons 9A are displayed in the first holding display area on the left side of the holding display position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lost at the stop display position (losing symbol “835”). )). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves in the vertical direction at high speed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L (the symbol image of the numeral “3” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8L, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "3" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative symbol 8C (the symbol image of the numeral “6” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the symbol image of the number, which is the left decorative symbol 8C, is displayed in a variation mode in which the symbol image moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and the symbol image of the number "6" stops at the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 166 (F) and (G), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the symbol image of the number which is the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variation mode in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves at a high speed from top to bottom, and as shown in FIG. The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing the moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative symbol 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. Thus, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in the present embodiment, the right decorative symbol 8R) of the lost decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R).

  In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image indicating the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the effect button 63 has entered the capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is in the capsule, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is not valid (No. Embodiment 1). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not effective.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A of the first reserved display area is moved to the reserved display position. It moves and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. The remaining holding icons 9A also shift rightward one by one. As a result, the change of the decorative symbol ends, and the next change starts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are displayed in a changing manner in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C move at high speed in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed continuously from the previous change. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image indicating that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken and the effect button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the capsule covering the effect button 63 is broken, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed from a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective from a state in which the operation of the effect button 63 is not effective. It is suggested that the state is switched to the normal state (second mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variably displayed, and the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R. You. The operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the effect button 63 is not in the capsule, so that the effect button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the effect button 63 is effective (third state). Embodiment). At this time, when the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is in a valid state.

  In the present embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. The operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image of “press !!!!”) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and the like. You may.

[Effect example]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the operation state suggestion display effect will be described.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163 to FIG. 166, an operation unit image (button image BG, sword image KG) representing the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is included, and the operation unit The first effect in which the operation state suggestion image SSG indicating the operation state of the (operation button 63, the sword member 64) is displayed in the first mode, and after the first effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in the first state. And the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode after the second performance displayed in a second mode different from the first mode. And the third effect performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first mode of the operation state suggestion image SSG is such that the operation of the operation unit (the operation button 63 and the sword member 64) is not valid. In the second mode of the operation state suggestion image SSG, the operation of the operation unit (the operation button 63 and the sword member 64) is changed from a state where the operation of the operation unit (the operation button 63 and the sword member 64) is not valid. Is switched to a valid state, and the third mode of the operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the operation of the operation unit (the operation button 63 and the sword member 64) is in a valid state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first effect is such that the operation state suggestion image SSG is in the first mode as at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the lost state. Is displayed with. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, and FIG. 166, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are based on the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is performed across fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, and the second effect and the third effect are performed. The effect is executed at the time of the next change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation state suggestion display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation unit images are the button images BG and the sword images KG representing the operation buttons 63 and the sword member 64, but are images representing other operation units (lever, handle, touch panel, etc.). You may.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the lost state, but may be displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L, or may be a medium decorative pattern. 8C may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R in the lost state, but a plurality of decorative patterns such as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. May be displayed, or may be displayed as all decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, three modes of the operation state suggestion image SSG indicate the validity of the operation of the operation unit (a state where the operation is not valid, the state is switched from a state where the operation is not valid to a state where the operation is valid, and the state where the operation is valid. This is a mode that suggests how to operate the operation unit, the direction of the operation, and the like.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect H1-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
An operating unit operable by a player, comprising:
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit, is an operation state suggestion image indicating the operation state of the operation unit,
A first effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a first mode;
A second effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode after the first effect;
After the second effect, a third effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect H1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
The first aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is not valid,
The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is switched from a state where the operation of the operation unit is not valid to a state where the operation of the operation unit is valid,
The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image indicates that the operation of the operation unit is in a valid state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect H1-1 or Aspect H1-2,
In the first effect, the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first mode as at least a part of the decorative pattern in a lost state.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3,
The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are executed over the next variation from the variation of the decorative symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-4,
The first effect is executed at the time of the change of the decorative pattern,
The second effect and the third effect are executed at the time of the next change of the decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect H1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect H1-5,
The second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbol is started,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the operation image stock effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 167 to 170, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the drawings of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also viewed. Some of them are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  The operation image stock effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute an operation image stock effect, the corresponding image is read from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable role 14L and the right movable role of the first movable role 14 provided in the game board 2. For example, the position and the light emission mode of 14R are changed.

  Here, the operation image stock effect A will be described first, and the operation image stock effect B, the operation image stock effect C, and the operation image stock effect D will be described in this order.

[Operation image stock effect A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 is a diagram for describing the operation image stock effect A. The operation image stock effect A is performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the operation image stock effect A, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), a button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and one of the button images BG is provided with a character image “long press”. Above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63), a button image BG with a character image of “long press” as the second from the bottom is arranged. In this state, two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the displayed sword image KG are action effected. (Battle production) reward. The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image “sword” is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image “long press” is attached have no character image “button” attached at all. Here, above the button image BG, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is provided with the character image "Long press" placed second from the bottom, is a normal button image as the third from the bottom. A BG is arranged, and above the normal button image BG, a sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom.

  Thus, on the right side of the display screen 7a, three button images BG (two normal button images BG and one button image BG with a character image of “long press”) and one sword The image KG is arranged. The number of various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) that have been stocked (that is, the total number of stocked various images (the number of stocks)) indicates the degree of expectation of winning (big hits or small hits). In other words, the greater the number of stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (the number of stocks)), the higher the expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). It is becoming.

  The button image BG to which the character image “Long press” is attached has a higher degree of expectation for a hit (a big hit or a small hit) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). It is set high. Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) as compared with the button image BG to which the character image “long press” is attached. In other words, the degree of expectation for the hits (big hits and small hits) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and is higher than that set in the normal button image BG. The button image BG is higher than the button image BG to which the character image “long press” set higher is attached. Further, three button images BG (two normal button images BG and one button image BG with a character image of “Long press”) and one sword image arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a KG indicates a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (E) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) ) May be changed.

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 167 (F), the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed. When the button image BG with the character image “Long press” stocked on the right side of “” is digested and the button image BG with the character image “Long press” disappears from the display screen 7a, the “ The button image BG to which the character image "Long press" is attached is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emission mode. The button image BG is displayed on the upper left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image for urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is displayed in such a manner as to move up and down in small increments, and to overlap the lower front part thereof. , A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “long press” for urging a long press operation of the effect button 63 (continuation of the press operation) is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (F) has a character image of "Long press" when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. May be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the pressed button image BG, or may change to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting ( (Flashing green) or lighting red (changing to flashing red).

  When the player performs a long press operation (continuation of the press operation) of the effect button 63 during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is generated as the long press operation sound. It flows continuously from the speaker 67.

  When the player performs a long press operation (continuation of the pressing operation) of the effect button 63 during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), or when the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, FIG. As shown in FIG. 167 (G), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is subsequently digested, and when the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image An image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (G) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) )).

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed as shown in FIG. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side (disposed at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is accordingly displayed as a large sword image KG at the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. This sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image for urging the player to operate (push-in) the sword member 64 is displayed in a manner that the arrow image moves little by little in the vertical direction, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message MG “Push in !!” urging operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the front upper part. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167 (H) is different from the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or it changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing)) Change).

  When the player operates (presses in) the sword member 64 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is generated. A specific sound that is different from the speaker 67 and informs the player of the hit is played from the speaker 67. Further, as shown in FIG. In addition to the fact that the ally character CRA is displayed on the central portion of the display screen 7a, a winning effect is displayed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image BKH is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each in their own variable display area, at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “7”, the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the number “7”, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number “7”, so that the same symbol is displayed. The stop is displayed and a win (a big hit or a small hit) is made, and then an effect (a big hit effect or a small hit effect) by a hit game (a big hit game or a small hit game) is started.

  Note that, in FIG. 167 (H), when the player has operated (pushed in) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, FIG. When the rainbow member BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image and the ally character CRA is not largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, the player operates the sword member 64 (press operation). Accordingly, a second normal operation sound (press operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and following FIG. 167 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively displayed in a variable manner. The display screen 7a is stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the middle point on the left side and the middle point on the right side of the display screen 7a without being aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). So that the outside is determined display. The second normal operation sound (press operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). .

  As described above, in the operation image stock effect A, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG, the button image BG with the character image of “long press”) on the right side of the display screen 7a. When these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63 or the player can operate the sword member 64, and further, a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs. The result (whether the winning effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, so that interest can be improved. it can.

[Operation image stock effect B]
Next, the operation image stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a diagram for describing the operation image stock effect B. The operation image stock effect B is performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the operation image stock effect B, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and the normal button image as the second from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the images BG (that is, the button images BG simply imitating the effect buttons 63) are arranged.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (D), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168 (C). In the button get effect, two button images BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are displayed. Reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. One button image BG among the two button images BG obtained is provided with a character image of “continuous hit”. In addition, a character image “sword” is attached to the handle portion of the obtained sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image of “continuous hit” is added have no character image of “button” at all. Here, the normal button image BG is arranged as the third from the bottom above the normal button image BG arranged second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Above the image BG, a button image BG with a character image “continuously” is arranged, and above the button image BG with a character image “continuously”, a sword image KG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom. Is done.

  Thus, on the right side of the display screen 7a, four button images BG (three normal button images BG, and one button image BG with a character image of “continuous hit”) and one sword image And KG are arranged. The number of various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) that have been stocked (that is, the total number of stocked various images (the number of stocks)) indicates the degree of expectation of winning (big hits or small hits). In other words, the greater the number of stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (the number of stocks)), the higher the expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). It is becoming.

  The button image BG to which the character image of “repeated hit” is attached has a higher expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). 167 is set, and the same degree of expectation as the degree of expectation to the hit (big hit or small hit) set on the button image BG to which the character image of “continuous hit” shown in FIG. The degree of expectation (the degree of expectation is slightly lower or slightly higher than the degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) set on the button image BG to which the character image “continuous hit” is attached). Further, the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) as compared with the button image BG to which the character image of "continuous hit" is attached. In other words, the degree of expectation for the hits (big hits and small hits) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in the normal button image BG, and is higher than that set in the normal button image BG. The button image BG is higher than the button image BG to which the character image “continuous hit” which is set higher is attached. Furthermore, four button images BG (three normal button images BG, one button image BG with a character image of “continuous hit”) and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a Indicates a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168 (E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (E) is the same as the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of becoming a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). May be.

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 168 (F), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. In D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right (the second button from the bottom) is digested, and when the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (ie, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (F) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). May be.

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 168 (G), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. In D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) is digested, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (ie, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (G) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). May be.

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed as shown in FIG. When the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" stocked on the right side of "" is digested and the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, the "continuous hit" Is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emission mode at the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “continuous hit” that prompts a continuous hit operation (continuous pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. In the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (H), a character image of “continuous hit” when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is added. May be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG, or may change to the one having a high expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue (Flashing) or green lighting (green flashing).

  When the player performs a continuous hit operation (continuous pressing operation) on the production button 63 during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), every time the production button 63 is operated (press operation) as a continuous hit operation sound, The first normal operation sound (press operation sound) flows from the speaker 67.

  As shown in FIG. 168 (I), when the player performs a continuous tapping operation of the effect button 63 (continuous operation of pressing operation), or when an operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (arranged at the top) is digested and the sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG becomes larger at the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. This sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image for urging the player to operate (push-in) the sword member 64 is displayed in a manner that the arrow image moves little by little in the vertical direction, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message MG “Push in !!” urging operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the front upper part. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168 (I) is different from the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing) Change).

  When the player operates the sword member 64 (push operation), a second normal operation sound (push operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 accordingly. The second normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound), or may be a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound notifying the hit determination). ).

  As shown in FIG. 168 (J), when the player operates (presses) the sword member 64 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L, The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas. . Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “8”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. (Here, the numeral "7") is displayed without being aligned, and the deviation is definitely displayed.

  In addition, in FIG. 168 (I), when the player operates the sword member 64 (press operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, A specific sound that is different from the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) and notifies the player of the hit is played from the speaker 67, and an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed. In addition to the fact that the ally character CRA is displayed on the central portion of the display screen 7a while being displayed on the display screen 7a, there is a case where a definite effect is performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image is a background image for notifying a hit determination. When the rainbow image and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, subsequently, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in their own variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a. Are lined up in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the right symbol and the middle point on the right side, and are stopped and displayed together with the same symbol (here, the number “7”), and the hit (big hit or small hit) is definitely displayed. After that, the effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by the hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  As described above, in the operation image stock effect B, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG, the button image BG with the character image of "continuous hit"). When these are digested one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63 and the player can operate the sword member 64, and further, a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs. Since the result (whether the winning effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when the hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. .

[Operation image stock effect C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a diagram for describing the operation image stock effect C. The operation image stock effect C is performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the operation image stock effect C, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), a button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63), the normal button is set as the second from the bottom. The image BG (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63) is arranged, and the normal button image BG (that is, the effect button 63 is simply placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom as the third from the bottom). The three button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the simulated button images BG) are arranged.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In some cases, an effect in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (D), the button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and the displayed sword image KG are action effected. (Battle production) reward. The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked. A character image “sword” is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG has no character image of “button”. Here, the normal button image BG is arranged above the third normal button image BG, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, as the fourth normal button image from the bottom. A sword image KG is arranged above the image BG as the fifth from the bottom. In FIG. 169 (C), when a button loss effect described later is developed (started) due to the retreat of the ally character CRA due to an attack from the enemy character CRB, the effect button 63 already obtained (acquired) is reproduced. The button image BG and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost, and various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a are displayed from the bottom to the top. Only one or a plurality of them disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thus, on the right side of the display screen 7a, four button images BG (four normal button images BG and one sword image KG are arranged. Various images (stock images) The number of the button images BG and the sword images KG (that is, the total number of stocked images (the number of stocks)) indicates the degree of expectation of winning (big hits and small hits). The greater the number of button images BG and sword images KG (ie, the total number of stocked images (the number of stocks)), the higher the degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits).

  The sword image KG has a higher degree of expectation of winning (big hits or small hits) than the normal button image BG. Further, the four button images BG (four normal button images BG) and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (E), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (F), a button loss effect is developed (started) due to the retreat of the ally character CRA due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169 (E). In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 obtained (acquired) by the button get effect and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Only one or a plurality of images (button images BG and sword images KG) disappear from the display screen 7a from the bottom to the top and are forcibly digested. Here, the button image BG arranged at the bottom in FIG. 169 (D) and the button image BG arranged second from the bottom disappear.

  In FIG. 169 (E), the action effect (battle effect) may not be developed again. In this case, the press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the two button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. As described above, the timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. In addition, a message “press” is displayed above the button image BG, prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. And change to something with high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, change from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing)) Good. When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the above-described press promotion effect is developed (started) again, and the player 169 operates (presses down) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (G).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (G), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. In some cases, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), a button loss effect is developed (started) in FIG. 169 (G) when the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. Here, the button image BG arranged third from the bottom and the button image BG arranged fourth from the bottom in FIG. 169 (D) disappear and are forcibly digested. Thereafter, the sword image KG arranged at the top in FIG. 169 (D) changes from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing). Note that, in FIG. 169 (G), if an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed, a button get effect is developed (started) accordingly.

  In addition, in FIG. 169 (H), the sword image KG does not change from the predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing), and the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). is there. In this case, the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (disposed at the top) is digested, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is accordingly displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large sword image KG. This sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (push-in operation) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to move up and down in small increments, and overlaps the lower front part. In addition, a timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, a message “Push!” Prompting the operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so that the sword image KG overlaps the upper front part. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, It may be changed (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing) to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). When the player operates (presses in) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (I).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169 (I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (a so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. A winning effect that is displayed in a large size is performed. At this time, a specific sound notifying the hit determination is played from the speaker 67. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image BKH is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each in their own variable display area, at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  Note that when the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167 (I) and the ally character CRA is not largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, that is, in FIG. 169 (H). The sword image KG does not change from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing), and a sword image KG stocked (disposed at the top) on the right side of the display screen 7a is displayed. When the screen disappears from the screen 7a, a specific sound for notifying the hit determination does not flow at all from the speaker 67, and the sword image KG is displayed as a large sword image KG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. You. This sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (push-in operation) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to move up and down in small increments, and overlaps the lower front part. In addition, a timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, a message “Push!” Prompting the operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 is displayed so that the sword image KG overlaps the upper front part. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, It may be changed to one having a high expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing)). When the player operates the sword member 64 (push operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, the player operates the sword member 64 (press operation). Accordingly, a second normal operation sound (push operation sound) flows from the speaker 67, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in their own variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a. Are displayed in a line (center line in the left and right direction) connecting the right symbol and the middle point of the right side, and are stopped and displayed without being aligned with the same symbol (the numeral “7” in this case). is there. The second normal operation sound (press operation sound) is the same as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) in operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 and operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168. It may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound).

  As described above, in the operation image stock effect C, the sword image KG (the light emission mode of the sword image KG changes from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing) in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Changes) are stocked, and when these are digested one by one, the player can operate the staging button 63, the player can operate the sword member 64, and further, the hit (big hit or small hit). Since the result of whether or not a hit occurs (a hit effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a hit occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby improving the interest. Can be achieved.

  In the operation image stock effect C, various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) are obtained by the button get effect and the number of the various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) (that is, the total number of the various images stocked) The number of stocks) can be increased, and the button image BG and the sword image KG can be lost due to the button loss effect. That is, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of stocked various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (the number of stocks)) can be increased or decreased. ing. As a result, the number of various images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (that is, the total number of the various images stocked (the number of stocks)) is reduced to a hit (big hit or small hit). By changing the degree of expectation, monotony can be eliminated.

[Operation image production D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram for describing the operation image stock effect D. The operation image stock effect D is performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative design.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the operation image stock effect D, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (B), a button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 170 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and the normal button image as the second from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the images BG (that is, the button images BG simply imitating the effect buttons 63) are arranged.

  Thus, two button images BG (two normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked two-button image BG indicates a degree of expectation for winning (big hit or small hit). That is, as the number of stored button images BG (that is, the total number of button images BG stocked (the number of stocks)) increases, the degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits) increases.

  The two button images BG (the normal button image BG has a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting) arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Based on the degree of expectation (fluctuation effect start command) that will be a small hit, for example, in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven-color lighting (rainbow lighting (hit rich)) In addition to the high expectation of hitting (big hits and small hits), it is also called white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit rich)) The degree of expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) in order is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (C), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the two button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170C is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) )).

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. In B), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) is digested, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (ie, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (D) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing), or red lighting (red flashing) )).

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Then, an action effect (battle effect) is developed, and a button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are displayed. Reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and stocked as shown in FIG. 170 (F). A character image “sword” is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG has no character image of “button”. Here, since the two button images BG already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been digested, the sword image KG as the second from the bottom is above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom. Be placed.

  In FIG. 170 (E), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the action effect (battle effect) is performed. Without being expanded, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, respectively, and as shown in FIG. 7a may be stacked and displayed on the right side and stocked.

  In this manner, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Each of the stocked images (the button image BG and the sword image KG) indicates the degree of expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). In other words, the greater the number of stocked images (button images BG and sword images KG) (that is, the total number of stocked images (the number of stocks)), the higher the expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). It is becoming.

  The sword image KG has a higher degree of expectation of winning (big hits or small hits) than the normal button image BG. Further, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (white lighting here). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170 (G), the press promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the press promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (G) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing), or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) )).

  When the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is caused to flow from the speaker 67 accordingly.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, the display screen 7a is subsequently displayed as shown in FIG. When the sword image KG stocked on the right side (disposed at the top) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is accordingly displayed as a large sword image KG at the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode. This sword image KG is displayed on the front left side in such a manner that a downward arrow image for urging the player to operate (push-in) the sword member 64 is displayed in a manner that the arrow image moves little by little in the vertical direction, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface. , A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed. In addition, the sword image KG is displayed with a message MG “Push in !!” urging operation (push operation) of the sword member 64 so as to overlap the front upper part. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (H) is different from the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing) or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing) Change).

  When the player operates (presses in) the sword member 64 or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 elapses, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is generated. A specific sound that is different from the speaker 67 and informs the player of the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and a hit determination effect is performed as shown in FIG. 170 (I). Here, as a winning determination effect, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance toward the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other). (Moving), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, a left-side decorative portion which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left-side movable auditorium 14L. And a right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the right-side movable role 14R, are united to form a left-side decorative portion of the left-side movable portion 14L and a right-side decorative portion of the right-side movable portion 14R. One decorative member (combined part) having an annular shape is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. A friendly character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a white light emitting mode. At the same time, an alphabetical character “V” appears from the front of the left movable auditorium 14L and the front of the right movable auditorium 14R, and an effect indicating the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, When the other light emitting mode (for example, red light emitting mode) is different from the white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a red light emitting mode, but the alphabet “V” does not appear. , An effect indicating that the ally character CRA has won is not performed.

  A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, and the letter “V” is formed on the light guide plate. When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed into the letter “V” formed on the light guide plate. And the letter "V" appears. In other words, the front side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R is a display screen on which a letter “V” appears on the light guide plate. Further, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted forward of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, but the alphabetic character “V” does not appear.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The device 7 is retracted (moved) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the image. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in the variable display area of the display screen 7a at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  Note that, in FIG. 170 (H), when the player operates the sword member 64 (push operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, FIG. In the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R do not form a single decorative member (combined role). When the ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (push operation), a second normal operation sound (push operation sound) flows from the speaker 67 in accordance with this operation. Following 170 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are each connected to the line (left Arranged in the direction of the center line) shape are stopped and displayed without aligned with the same symbol (digit "7" in this case), it may become the out is determined displayed. The second normal operation sound (press operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). .

  As described above, in the operation image stock effect D, the sword image KG is stocked in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 can be operated, the player can operate the sword member 64, and the result of determining whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (the hit is determined only when the hit occurs) As an effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D formed by combining the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R. Is displayed on the display screen 7a, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

  In addition, in the operation image stock effect D, even if various images (button images BG and sword images KG) obtained (acquired) by the button get effect are digested by the press promotion effect, various images (button images) are again obtained by the button get effect. Since the number of the button images BG and the sword images KG can be increased, the players are delighted with the various stock images again, and the expectation that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) is generated is given. Can contribute to

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the operation image stock effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 (first operation means) which can be operated by the player, A sword member 64 (second operating means) operable by a player, and a button image BG (first operating means image) imitating the effect button 63 (first operating means) is displayed on the image display device 7. The first effect stored on the display screen 7a and the sword image KG (second operation means image) imitating the sword member 64 (second operation means) are stored on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A second effect, a third effect in which the button image BG (first operation means image) stocked in the first effect is digested by operating the effect button 63 (first operation means), and a second effect. Image KG (second operator) Image) is digested by the operation of the sword member 64 (second operation means), and a result of a specific lottery in the middle of the third effect or the fourth effect (hit (big hit or small hit) ) Can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7). According to this configuration, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when these are digested, the player operates the effect button 63 or the player operates the sword member 64. Can be operated, and furthermore, a winning result (a result of whether or not a win (big hit or small hit) occurs) in a specific lottery can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, interest can be improved.
168 (A) to 168 (J), the operation image stock effect B, FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J), the operation image stock effect C, and the operation images of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J). The same applies to the stock effect D.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously executed. . According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operation means image), the sword image KG (second operation means image) is stocked on the display screen, so that the player can operate. Since the number of targets that can be made can be increased (in other words, the number of targets that reflect the intention of the player can be increased), it is possible to contribute to an improvement in willingness to operate. Note that the expected degree of transition to the gaming state advantageous to the player (expected degree to hit (big hit or small hit)) set in the sword image KG (second operating means image) is the button image BG (second hit). It is preferable that the value is higher than that set in the first operation means image). According to this configuration, in a state where the button images BG are stocked, the player cannot be expected to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (expectation to hit (big hit or small hit)) and the player is discouraged. Even if the sword image KG is stocked, it is possible to expect the degree of expectation of the transition to the gaming state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation to hit (big hit or small hit)) set in the sword image KG. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's willingness to play.
168 (A) to 168 (J), the operation image stock effect B, FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J), the operation image stock effect C, and the operation images of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J). The same applies to the stock effect D.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a hit-determination effect for notifying the hit determination, and a rainbow image as a background image. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a BKH (first hit fixed image) and a friend character CRA (second hit fixed image) different from the rainbow image BKH (first hit fixed image) as the background image. To be displayed. According to this configuration, the player is suddenly switched to the hit determination effect of the rainbow image BKH (first hit determination image) and the ally character CRA (second hit determination image), thereby giving an impact to the player and notifying the hit determination. can do. As a result, the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image) can be impressed to the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (second operation means) because the player has seen the finalized effect with the impact. The winning determination effect of the rainbow image BKH (first determining image) and the ally character CRA (second determining image) can contribute to the improvement of the player's willingness to play.
The same applies to the operation image stock effects B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J) and the operation image stock effects C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J).
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (A) to 170 (J), the front side of the left movable role 14 </ b> L and the right movable role 14 </ b> R is an alphabetical character “V” (first hit confirmation image) that appears on the light guide plate. By suddenly switching to a hit-determination effect by the ally character CRA (second hit-determined image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an impact can be given to the player to notify the hit determination. . Thereby, the combination of the alphabet “V” (first fixed image) and the ally character CRA (second fixed image) in which the front sides of the left movable character 14L and the right movable character 14R appear on the light guide plate are played. It is possible to impress the player as a production that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player positively operates the effect button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (second operation means) because the player has seen the finalized effect with the impact. The game is performed by a hit-determination effect by the alphabet “V” (first hit-determined image) and the ally character CRA (second hit-determined image) in which the front sides of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R appear on the light guide plate. It can contribute to the improvement of the player's willingness to play.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the rainbow image BKH (first fixed image) and the ally character CRA (second fixed image) The rainbow image BKH (first hit confirmed image), which is one of the images, is arranged behind because it is a background image, and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image), which is the other, is arranged forward. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. According to this configuration, the player is suddenly switched to the hit determination effect of the rainbow image BKH (first hit determination image) and the ally character CRA (second hit determination image), thereby giving an impact to the player and notifying the hit determination. can do.
The same applies to the operation image stock effects B of FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J) and the operation image stock effects C of FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (J).
170 (A) to 170 (J), in the operation image stock effect D, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R appear on the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are united. The front side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R is one of an alphabetical character “V” (first fixed image) and a friend character CRA (second fixed image) that appear on the light guide plate. The character CRA (second hit confirmed image) is arranged rearward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the other alphabet "V" (first hit confirmed image) is arranged forward. The front sides of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R appear by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the front side of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R is formed by the alphabet “V” (first hit determined image) and the ally character CRA (second hit determined image) that appear on the light guide plate. By suddenly switching to the winning determination effect, it is possible to give an impact to the player and notify the winning determination.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 is provided on the button image BG (first operation means image). In some cases, a character image (operation instruction image) of “long press” instructing (long press operation (specific operation)) to (first operation means) is included. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), and therefore, it is necessary for the player to make the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means) monotonous. By making it difficult to feel, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the willingness to operate the effect button 63 (first operation means).
In the operation image stock effect B shown in FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (J), the button image BG (first operation means image) includes a “continuous hit operation (specification) on the effect button 63 (first operation means). Some operations include a character image (operation instruction image) of “continuous hit” indicating “operation”). According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation in the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), and therefore, it is necessary for the player to make the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means) monotonous. By making it difficult to feel, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the willingness to operate the effect button 63 (first operation means).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167 (H) to 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a winning result (a hit (big hit or a big hit) in a specific lottery. When the result (whether or not a small hit) occurs is a winning (a hit (a big hit or a small hit)), a specific sound for notifying the hit determination is output. According to this configuration, the specific sound for notifying the winning determination is played from the speaker 67, so that the surroundings of the player can also be notified that the winning (win (big hit or small hit)) has occurred. Can immerse themselves in superiority.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the operation image stock effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. The sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the image BG (simultaneously with the button image BG). However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked, or a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked. May be performed. Since the sword image KG is set to have a higher degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG, the player can display the sword image KG alone on the display screen 7a. It is possible to expect the degree of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation to hit (big hit or small hit)).

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. The confirmation notification sound may be continuously output from the speaker 67. In this way, the winning confirmation notification sound continues to flow from the speaker 67, so that it is possible to inform the surroundings of the player that the winning-determining effect is being performed, so that the player is immersed in a sense of superiority. it can. The hit confirmation notification sound may be the same as the specific sound for notifying the hit determination, or may be different from each other (of course, both the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (press operation sound)). (Different sounds).

[Modification 3]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, the degree of expectation of transition to the gaming state advantageous to the player ( It was intended to report the degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). However, for example, when notifying the winning result in the lottery of the number of rounds in the big hit effect (big hit game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds as the hit result, or the big hit effect When the winning result in the lottery after the transition to the high accuracy state after the (big hit game) is notified, an operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the presence or absence of the transition to the high accuracy state as the winning result.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. One sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (and simultaneously with one button image BG). However, a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (simultaneously with one button image BG), or may be displayed together with a plurality of button images BG (a plurality of button images BG). One sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (simultaneously with the BG). By doing so, a plurality of button images BG and sword images KG are displayed at once on the display screen 7a, and by increasing the number of stocks, the degree of expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) as a result of a specific lottery is determined. Can be higher.

[Modification 5]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 (E) are images. The button images BG and the sword images KG are sequentially digested one by one from the bottom row to the top row, which are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, the button images BG and the sword images KG may be sequentially digested one by one from the top row to the bottom row stored on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. The button image BG and the sword image KG arranged at any position from the uppermost stage to the lowermost stage may be arbitrarily digested, or may be combined to digest the button image BG or the sword image KG. It may be.

[Modification 6]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170, a button image is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. BG and sword image KG were stocked. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked on any of the upper, left, and lower sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Good. In this case, on the upper and lower sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stored in a band-shaped region extending in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Then, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in a band-shaped area extending in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked in a band-like region extending in the vertical direction at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, the belt-shaped area in which the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For example, each time the operation image stock effect starts, the display position is determined by lottery. As a result of the determination, the player himself discovers the relationship between the stocked display position and the degree of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation to hit (big hit or small hit)) ( Because it can contribute to finding), the freshness of the operation image stock effect can be hardly lost.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock effect D of FIGS. 170 (B) to 170 (G), a plurality of normal button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, among a plurality of normal button images BG, a button image BG to which one or more “long press” character images are attached may be obtained and stocked by a button get effect, or one or more “continuous hits” The button image BG to which the character image is attached may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (B), two button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get effect, and one of the button images BG is provided with a character image of “long press”. Was. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or more normal button images BG may be obtained and stocked, or only the button image BG to which the character image “long press” is attached, One or more may be obtained and stocked. In the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (B), two normal button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get effect. However, in place of this, in the button get effect, one or a plurality of button images BG to which the character image “continuous hit” is attached may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 9]
The operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170 are stored on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The button image BG is digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63, and the sword image KG is digested by the operation (push-in operation) of the sword member 64, so that the button image BG and the sword image KG are imaged one by one. It disappeared from the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, the remaining number of the stocked button images BG and sword images KG, that is, the message “X remaining (X is the number of stocks)” is displayed as a large number on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. You may make it. At this time, an announcement “X remaining (X is the number of stocks)” may be made to flow from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. The “predetermined display mode” includes, for example, a specific sound and a specific image in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven-color lighting (rainbow lighting (hit)). , The appearance expectation of the special sound and the special image are set high.

[Modification 10]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167 (D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168 (D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169 (D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. The button image BG imitating the button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 11]
The operation image stock effects A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effects B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effects C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effects D in FIG. 170 do not have to include a part of the effects described above. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine including a first operation unit and a second operation unit operable by a player,
A first effect in which a first operation means image imitating the first operation means is stocked on a display screen;
A second effect in which a second operation means image imitating the second operation means is stocked on a display screen;
A third effect in which the first operation means image stocked by the first effect is digested by operation of the first operation means;
A fourth effect in which the second operation means image stocked by the second effect is digested by operating the second operation means;
And a fifth effect capable of displaying a winning result in a specific lottery on a display screen during the third effect or the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect H2-1,
The first effect and the second effect can be simultaneously executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect H2-1 or Aspect H2-2,
The fifth effect is a hit-determination effect for notifying hit determination, and displays a first hit-determined image and a second hit-determined image different from the first hit-determined image on a display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3,
One of the first hit confirmed image and the second hit confirmed image is arranged rearward and the other is arranged forward and displayed on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4,
Some of the first operation unit images include an operation instruction image for instructing a specific operation on the first operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5,
The fifth effect is to output a specific sound when a winning result in the specific lottery is a winning.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the following, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the drawings of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also viewed. Some of them are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  This omission-notifiable effect can be executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). In other words, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute an effect that can be notified of an omission, the corresponding image is read from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable role 14L and the right movable role of the first movable role 14 provided in the game board 2. For example, the position and the light emission mode of 14R are changed.

  Here, first, the omission-notifying effect A will be described, and then the omission-notifying effect B, the omission-notifying effect C, and the omission-notifying effect D will be described in order.

[Direction A that can be announced]
First, the effect A that can be announced will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the effect A that can be notified of an omission. The presentable announcement effect A is performed during a variation effect of the decorative design.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the present effect A, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 171 (A) after the change display of the decorative symbol is started. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (B), a button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 171 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, four button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63), the normal button is set as the second from the bottom. An image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is arranged, and a normal button image BG (that is, the effect button 63 is simply placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom as the third from the bottom). A button image BG that is simulated is arranged, and a normal button image BG that is the fourth from the bottom (that is, a button image BG that simply simulates the effect button 63) is arranged above the third normal button image BG from the bottom. In this state, four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

  Thus, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG indicates a degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

  The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (C), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (C) is the same as the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and subsequently, the background image has seven colors as shown in FIG. 171 (D). When the image BKH (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, a certain effect is performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 171 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (second from the bottom) in FIG. 171 (B) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may change to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and notifies the display of the premier image flows from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. The premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front of the rainbow image BKH, displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is performed. The premier image PMG1 is a special image, which can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image appearing in a rare effect). )one of. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premier image PMG1, and the ally character CRA is largely displayed at the center of the premier image PMG1 having a rectangular shape. Have been. The ally character CRA which is largely displayed at the center of the rectangular premier image PMG1 may be a still image or a moving image.

  As a condition under which the premier image PMG1 appears, the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 (press operation). ) Is satisfied, and subsequently, the player produces the effect within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 again with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. The condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed) must be satisfied.

  Thereafter, the premier image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (F), a normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) in FIG. 171 (B) is displayed. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (F) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing) or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and notifies the display of the premier image flows from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (G), A premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front of the rainbow image BKH, displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is performed. The premier image PMG2 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a and the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the premier image PMG1 in FIG. 171 (E) are different as the background images of the premier image PMG2. An image is displayed, and a character image of “Victory” is displayed in a form in which the character image “Victory” is successively arranged from the right side to the left side of the rectangular premier image PMG2. The character image “Victory” is displayed in a plurality of stages (here, two stages each) on the upper side and the lower side of the premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape. The size of the outer shape of the rectangular premier image PMG2 is the same as the outer shape of the premier image PMG1 in FIG. 171 (E).

  As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG2, the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as a first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation) within the operation reception effective period of the effect button 63. ) Is satisfied, and subsequently, the player produces the effect within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63 again with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. The condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed) is satisfied, and subsequently, as a third condition, the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the player again operates the effect button 63. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) within the operation acceptance valid period.

  Note that the premier image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171 (E) may be replaced with the premier image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171 (G). In this case, the condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG2 in FIG. 171 (E) is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 171 (C) is started as the first condition, and the player is in the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation) is satisfied, and the player again operates the effect button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the second condition. The condition for operating (pressing) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of 63 needs to be satisfied. The condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG1 in FIG. 171 (G) is the first condition shown in FIG. The press promotion effect shown in C) is started, and the condition that the player operates (press operation) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63 is satisfied. Then, as a second condition, the player operates (presses) the production button 63 again within the validity period of the operation reception of the production button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) is displayed on the display screen 7a. 171) is satisfied, and the third condition is that the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The condition that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) needs to be satisfied.

  After that, the premier image PMG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (H), is stocked on the right side in FIG. 171 (B) (the fourth stock from the bottom, ie, the top stock). When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63) is emitted as a large button image BG at the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a manner. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (H) is the same as the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing) or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (I), the rainbow image BKH subsequently disappears from the display screen 7a as a hit finalizing effect. The movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction approaching each other), and the display screen 7a At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)), a left-side decorative portion that is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end of the left-side movable accessory 14L, and a distal-end side of the right movable accessory 14R. And the right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to, are combined, and the left-side decorative portion of the left-hand movable member 14L and the right-side decorative portion of the right-side movable member 14R have a ring shape. One of the decorative member (coalescence won game) is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. A friendly character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a white light emitting mode. At the same time, an alphabetic character “V” appears from the front of the left movable role 14L and the front of the right movable role 14R.

  A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, and the letter “V” is formed on the light guide plate. When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed into the letter “V” formed on the light guide plate. And the letter "V" appears. Further, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted forward of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, but the alphabetic character “V” does not appear.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The device 7 is retracted (moved) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the image. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in the variable display area of their own at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  As described above, in FIG. 171 (D), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur (that is, the hit determination effect is If the operation number of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit operation number and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so something that is beneficial to the player is performed. Can be further given to the player, and the interest can be improved.

  In the present effect A, the player can operate (press) the production button 63 at a predetermined timing after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. Operation), the premier images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in rare effects) having an extremely low appearance rate, can appear, which contributes to an increase in the willingness to operate the effect button 63. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the effect A that can be announced, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. Then, the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping. ing. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the staging button 63 at all and merely looks at the progress of the staging. However, in the present effect A, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in accordance with the operation (press operation). It is possible to make it difficult to lose freshness in the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is determined that (big hits or small hits) will occur.

[Direction B that can be notified of this omission]
Next, this omission noticeable effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram for describing the present-notification-presentable effect B. The presentable announcement effect B is performed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative design.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the presentable announcement effect B, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 172 (A) after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and the normal button image as the second from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). Four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the images BG (that is, the button images BG which simply imitate the effect buttons 63) are arranged.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), a button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. In this case, two more button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and which is arranged second from the bottom, is usually set as the third from the bottom. Is arranged above the normal button image BG, and the normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG.

  Thus, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG indicates a degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

  The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172 (E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (E) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing) or green lighting (green flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and subsequently, the background image has seven colors as shown in FIG. 172 (F). When the image BKH (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, a certain effect is performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 172 (F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (second from the bottom) in FIG. 172 (D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may change to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing) )).

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and notifies the display of the premier image flows from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (G), The premier image PMG having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front of the rainbow image BKH, displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premier image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is performed. The premier image PMG is a special image, which can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (an image appearing in a rare effect). )one of. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premier image PMG, and the ally character CRA is largely displayed at the center of the premier image PMG having a rectangular shape. Have been. In addition, the friend character CRA which is largely displayed at the center of the rectangular-shaped premier image PMG may be a still image or a moving image.

  As a condition for the appearance of the premier image PMG, the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 172 (E) is started as the first condition, and the player operates the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance period of the effect button 63 (press operation). ) Is fulfilled, and subsequently, as a second condition, the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 172 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the player again makes an effect within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 63. The condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed) must be satisfied.

  Thereafter, the premium image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) in FIG. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (H) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing) or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) )).

  In FIG. 172 (H), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, subsequently, FIG. 172 (I) is shown. 172 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fourth from the bottom, that is, the uppermost row) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (I) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or changes to the one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing) or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing) )).

  Note that when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (H), the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (I) described above.

  In FIG. 172 (I), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation), subsequently, FIG. 172 (J) is shown. As described above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each have a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. ) Is stopped and displayed. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  Note that when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172 (I), a premium image, which is one of rare images (images appearing in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Here, a premier image different from the premier image already displayed in FIG. 172 (G) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 172 (J) described above.

  As described above, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. If the operation number of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit operation number and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player is performed. Can be further given to the player, and the interest can be improved.

  172 (F), and after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning determination effect is performed, the player B in FIG. 172 (H) and FIG. 172 (I). When the user does not operate (press down) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, no other premier image of the premier image PMG that has appeared in FIG. 172 (G) appears. In other words, in this omission-notifying effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. An opportunity for the appearance of the premier image (image) can be given by the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, thereby contributing to an increase in the will to operate the effect button 63. Can be.

  172 (F), and after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning determination effect is performed, in FIG. 172 (H) and FIG. If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, the overlap is not duplicated, and for example, the premiere in the hit-notifiable effect A shown in FIG. 171 (G). Premium images such as the image PMG2 and other premium images (premium images different from the premium image PMG2 in the hit-notifiable effect A in FIG. 171 (G) and the premium image in the hit-notifiable effect B in FIG. 172 (G)) are different. The images are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  172 (F), the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (F), and after the winning determination effect is performed, the effect B in FIG. 172 (H) or FIG. 172 (I) is performed. If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, a rare image (an image appearing in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate without overlapping ) Are successively displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the player does not need to operate (press down) the effect button 63 at all and merely looks at the progress of the effect. However, in this omission-notifying effect B, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that It is possible to make it difficult to lose freshness in the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is determined that (big hits or small hits) will occur.

[Direction C that can be announced]
Next, this omission notification possible effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram for describing the present effect C that can be reported. The presentable announcement effect C is performed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative design.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In the presentable announcement effect C, the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 173 (A) after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and the normal button image as the second from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the images BG (that is, the button images BG simply imitating the effect buttons 63) are arranged.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, three more button images BG are obtained, and the third button image BG is set above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is arranged second from the bottom. Is arranged above the normal button image BG, a normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom, and a normal button image is arranged above the normal button image BG as the fifth from the bottom. An image BG is arranged.

  Thus, the five button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG indicates a degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

  The five button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the five button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (E) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of becoming a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). May be.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and subsequently, the background image has seven colors as shown in FIG. 173 (F). When the image BKH (so-called “rainbow image BKH”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, a certain effect is performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 173 (F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (disposed second from the bottom) in FIG. 173 (D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (ie, the effect A button image BG simply imitating the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting).

  In FIG. 173 (F), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 173 (G). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) is digested and the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG follows. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (G) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing)). May be.

  Note that when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F), a premium image, which is one of rare images (images appearing in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (G) described above.

  In FIG. 173 (G), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 173 (H). As shown in FIG. 173 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right (fourth from the bottom) is digested, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG follows. The button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (H) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of hitting (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing)) May be.

  When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (G), a premium image, which is one of rare images (images appearing in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Here, in FIG. 173 (F), when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premier image different from the already displayed premier image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (H) described above.

  In FIG. 173 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 173 (I). 173 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fifth from the bottom, that is, arranged at the top) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (I) corresponds to the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. It may be the same as the mode, or may be changed to one having a high expectation of becoming a hit (big hit or small hit) (for example, changing from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing)). May be.

  Note that when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (H), the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Here, in the case where the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F) or FIG. 173 (G) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the premier image already displayed is displayed. Will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (I) described above.

  When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (I), subsequently, FIG. 173 (J) is shown. As described above, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R each have a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. ) Is stopped and displayed. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  Note that when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (I), the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, is subsequently displayed on the display screen 7a. Will be displayed. Here, in the case where the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173 (F), FIG. 173 (G), or FIG. 173 (H) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, A premium image different from the already displayed premium image will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to FIG. 173 (J) described above.

  In this way, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in FIG. 173 (F) and the player is notified that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs (that is, the hit determination effect is If the operation number of the effect button 63 does not reach the upper limit operation number and remains, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63, so that something that is beneficial to the player is performed. Can be further given to the player, and the interest can be improved.

  173 (F) to FIG. 173 (I) after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the winning determination effect is performed. When the user does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, a premier image which is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate appears at all. There is no. In other words, in the presentable announcement effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate (appears in the rare effect). An opportunity for the appearance of the premier image (image) can be given by the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, thereby contributing to an increase in the will to operate the effect button 63. Can be.

  173 (F) to FIG. 172 (I) after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F) and the winning determination effect is performed. If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, the omission notification shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and (G) can be made without duplication. Premium images such as the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the effect A and other premium images (premium images different from the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the effect A that can be notified of the omission in FIGS. 171 (E) and (G)) are successively displayed on the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

  173 (F), the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (F), and after the winning determination effect is performed, in FIG. 173 (G) to FIG. 172 (I). If the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation reception validity period of the effect button 63, a rare image having an extremely low appearance rate without overlapping (an image appearing in the rare effect) ) Are successively displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the staging button 63 at all and merely looks at the progress of the staging. However, in the presentable announcement effect C, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in accordance with the operation. It is possible to make it difficult to lose freshness in the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is determined that (big hits or small hits) will occur.

[Direction D that can be announced]
Next, this omission noticeable effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram for describing the present-notification effect D. The presentable announcement effect D is performed during a fluctuation effect of the decorative design.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in a display mode. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  In this omission-notifiable effect D, after the decorative symbol change display is started, an action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 174 (A). In the action effect (battle effect), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed. In the action effect (battle effect), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is advanced, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, a win (big hit or small hit) is made.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), a button-get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174 (A). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. Here, two button images BG are obtained, and the normal button image as the second from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom (that is, the button image BG which simply imitates the effect button 63). Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in a state where the images BG (that is, the button images BG simply imitating the effect buttons 63) are arranged.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), the action effect (battle effect) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (D), a button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174 (C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG serves as a reward for an action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are stacked and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. In this case, two more button images BG are obtained, and above the normal button image BG, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and which is arranged second from the bottom, is usually set as the third from the bottom. Is arranged above the normal button image BG, and the normal button image BG is arranged as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG.

  Thus, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG indicates a degree of expectation for a hit (big hit or small hit).

  The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (here, white lighting). As the “predetermined light emission mode”, for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big hits and small hits) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high hits)), in addition to white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) ) → Seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (hit thick)), the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (E), a press-promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom first disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal (That is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (E) is the predetermined light emission of the normal button image BG when stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. This is the same as the mode (here, white lighting).

  In FIG. 174 (E), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, subsequently, FIG. 174 (F) is shown. As shown in FIG. 174 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (the second button from the bottom) is digested, and when the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accordingly The button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (F) is changed from the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG (white light) to blue light in FIG. 174 (E). To the player, indicating that the degree of expectation to change to a hit (big hit or small hit) is high.

  As for the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from white lighting to blue lighting, the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an image having seven colors (so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a and a winning effect is established. Could not be performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 174 (F), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 174 (G). As shown in FIG. 174 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) is digested, and when the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is accordingly The button image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. The predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (G) is changed from blue lighting to green lighting which is the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (F). To the player, indicating that the degree of expectation to change to a hit (big hit or small hit) is high.

  Regarding the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from blue lighting to green lighting, in FIG. 174 (F), the player does not operate the effect button 63 (press operation), and When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an image having seven colors (so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a and a winning effect is established. Could not be performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 174 (G), when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 174 (H). 174 (D), the normal button image BG stocked on the right (fourth from the bottom, that is, the uppermost row) is digested, and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG at a central portion of the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emission mode. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image urging the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 is moved in the vertical direction in small increments so as to overlap the upper front part thereof, and overlaps the lower front part thereof. Thus, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Above the button image BG, a message MG “press” prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed at the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174 (H) is changed from green lighting to red light which is the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174 (G). To the player, indicating that the degree of expectation to change to a hit (big hit or small hit) is high.

  Regarding the reason why the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG has changed from green lighting to red lighting, the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in FIG. When the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an image having seven colors (so-called “rainbow image”) appears as a background image, that is, the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a and a winning effect is established. Could not be performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In FIG. 174 (H), when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the process subsequently proceeds to FIG. 174 (I). As described above, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) toward the forward (front) center advance position (in the direction approaching each other) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, a left decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the left movable accessory 14L, and a right movable accessory The right-side decorative portion, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative portion attached to the distal end side of the 14R, is united, and the left-side decorative portion of the left movable member 14L and the right-side decorative portion of the right movable member 14R have a ring shape. One decorative member Union won game) is formed.

  When the left decorative portion of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable role 14R are united to form a combined role having a ring shape, the region formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “circular region”.) 14D. A friendly character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R have a white light emitting mode. At the same time, an alphabetic character “V” appears from the front of the left movable role 14L and the front of the right movable role 14R.

  A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, and the letter “V” is formed on the light guide plate. When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged so as to emit light (for example, white), light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is formed into the letter “V” formed on the light guide plate. And the letter "V" appears. Further, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor light) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back surface of the light guide plate. ) Emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted forward of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R, but the alphabetic character “V” does not appear.

  Subsequently, toward the direction in which the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are separated from each other, the left movable role 14L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from an advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The device 7 is retracted (moved) toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7a, and the right movable accessory 14R is moved from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the image. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  As described above, in the present effect D, when the player does not operate (press operation) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing, the center of the display screen 7a is displayed in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H). By changing the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed on the section, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) is high, and an operation (pressing operation) on the effect button 63 is performed. By prompting, the player can have an opportunity to appear a rainbow image which is a background image for which a hit (big hit or small hit) is determined, and the interest can be improved.

  In FIG. 174 (E) to FIG. 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the staging button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and the background image is displayed. An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a definite effect is performed. In this winning determination effect, the player is notified of the occurrence of a hit (big hit or small hit). The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination. Also, for example, in FIG. 174 (E), if the player operates (presses) the staging button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a background image. In FIG. 174 (F), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (F), the sound is different from the specific sound. A special sound notifying the display of an image is played from the speaker 67, and a premier image having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap the front of the rainbow image, and is displayed on the display screen 7a and is displayed on the display screen 7a. Rainbow production is performed. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is performed. This premier image is a special image, which can be displayed after the rainbow image, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image (image appearing in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. One. Here, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premier image, and the ally character is largely displayed at the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape. I have. In addition, the ally character displayed largely in the center of the premier image having a rectangular shape may be a still image or a moving image. Also, if the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 after the winning determination effect has been performed, the effect is not duplicated, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (E) and (G). In addition to the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images appearing in rare effects) whose appearance rate in the effect A is extremely low, other premium images (FIGS. 171 (E) and (G)) Premium images such as the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the effect A) are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  As described above, in FIGS. 174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the hit determination flows from the speaker 67, After an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the finalized effect is performed, the player temporarily operates the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing (press operation). Then, since a premium image which is a rare image (an image appearing in a rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate can be displayed, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the will to operate the effect button 63.

  174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 174 (E) to FIG. 174 (H), a specific sound for notifying the hit determination is made accordingly. After an image having seven colors as background images (a so-called “rainbow image”) flowing from the speaker 67 is displayed on the display screen 7 a and a finalized effect has been performed, the player temporarily sets the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. (Pressing operation), the premier images, which are rare images (images appearing in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate, are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping. It has become so. For this reason, conventionally, in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the player does not need to operate (press operation) the staging button 63 at all and merely looks at the progress of the staging. However, in the presentable effect D, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are successively displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in succession. It is possible to make it difficult to lose freshness in the effect during the fluctuation in the state where it is determined that (big hits or small hits) will occur.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the image blur effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the presentable effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the effect A that can be notified of an omission, the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided. In the winning determination effect of notifying the winning result (win (big hit or small hit)) by the operation of the effect button 63 (operating means) by the lottery, the winning result by operating the effect button 63 (operating means) in 171 (C) ( A first effect in which the rainbow image BKH (specific image) of FIG. 171 (D) for notifying the hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an effect following the first effect. When the operation number of the button 63 (operation means) does not reach the upper limit operation number and remains, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (D) or FIG. And the second effect to encourage, it is possible to run. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the effect button 63 (operation When the number of operations of the (means) does not reach the upper limit number of operations and remains, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 (operation means), so that something that is beneficial to the player is further notified. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game may be performed, thereby improving the interest.
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the effect A that can be notified of an omission, before the first effect is executed, the game shown in FIG. A third effect is executed in which a button image BG (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and image display is performed as shown in FIG. 171 (B). By storing four button images BG (normal button images BG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the device 7, the upper limit operation count is the number of button images BG (operation means images). According to this configuration, since the number of stocks, ie, four, is the number of times the effect button 63 (operation means) can be operated, the winning result (hit (big hit or small hit)) is reached within this number. ) That can be rainbow image BKH (specific image) is suggested to the player that might be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (D) to 171 (G) of the effect A that can be notified of an omission, when the second effect is being executed, the effect button 63 (operation means) ) Is operated, a fourth effect of displaying the premium image PMG1 (special image) of FIG. 171 (E) and the premier image PMG2 (special image) of FIG. 171 (G) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Can be performed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the effect button If the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated while the number of operations of the operation means 63 (operation means) does not reach the upper limit operation number and remains, the premier image PMG1 (special image) or the premier image PMG2 (special image) Is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Thereby, the player actively operates the effect button 63 (operation means) when he / she sees the special images such as the premier image PMG1 and the premier image PMG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, conventionally, in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs, the player does not need to operate the effect button 63 (operation means) at all, and merely looks at the progress of the effect. However, in the presentable effect A, an effect that the player wants to further operate the effect button 63 (operation means) is included even in a state where it is determined that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs.
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the effect A that can be announced, the special image is the premium image PMG1 or the premium image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premier image PMG1 or the premier image PMG2 is one of the rare images (images appearing in the rare effect) whose appearance rate is extremely low, and the player actively plays the effect button by watching the premier image. Since the 63 (operation means) is operated, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the player's willingness to operate the effect button 63 (operation means).
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (E) and FIG. 171 (G) of the effect A that can be notified of a hit, the third effect is a rare image (in the rare effect) having an extremely low appearance rate. A special sound notifying the display of the premier image corresponding to the special image such as the premier image PMG1 or the premier image PMG2, which is one of the appearing images, is output. In the case where the special sound is not played, even if the special image such as the premier image PMG1 or the premier image PMG2 is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player simply automatically proceeds (in sequence). ) Although it may be recognized as a normally appearing image that is only displayed, the special image is recognized as a rare image (image appearing in a rare effect) due to the flow of the special sound, and the user is inadvertently unaware of it. Oversight can be suppressed.
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171 (D) of the presentable effect A, the first effect is a specific sound for notifying a hit determination corresponding to the specific image of the rainbow image BKH. Is output. In the case where the specific sound does not flow, even if the specific image called the rainbow image BKH is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is automatically (sequencely) displayed simply by the progress of the effect. Although there is a risk of being recognized as an image that only appears normally, it is possible to prevent a specific image from being recognized as an image that informs the player of a hit by notifying a specific image by flowing a specific sound, thereby preventing the user from inadvertently overlooking the specific image. .
The same applies to the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the presentable effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hit-notifying effect A in FIG. 171, the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of FIG. 7, and when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, a specific sound for notifying the hit determination is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image on the image display device 7. Or a special sound notifying the display of the premier image as a specific image flows from the speaker 67, and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be appropriately used. In this case, the degree of expectation as a winning result by a specific lottery set in the sword image (that is, the degree of expectation to a hit (big hit or small hit) set in the sword image) is set in the button image BG. It is preferably higher than that of Since the button image BG is set with a low degree of expectation to hit (big hit or small hit), the player can expect a hit (big hit or small hit) by displaying the button image BG on the display screen 7a. Even if the player is discouraged, the sword image is set to have a higher degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits) than the button image BG, so that the player can display the sword image on the display screen 7a. You can expect hits (big hits and small hits).

[Modification 2]
In the hit-notifying effect A of FIG. 171, the hit-notifying effect B of FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C of FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D of FIG. Is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the staging button 63, a specific sound notifying the hit determination is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as the specific image notifying the hit determination. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the specific sound notifying the winning determination by the lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is made to flow from the speaker 67, and the rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the specific image. You may make it. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63.

[Modification 3]
In the hit-notifying effect A of FIG. 171, the hit-notifying effect B of FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C of FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D of FIG. Is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound notifying the display of the premium image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premium image is displayed as the special image. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the special sound for notifying the display of the premier image as the special image is made to flow from the speaker 67 by the lottery in the effect control microcomputer 91 (the image control microcomputer 101), and the premier image is displayed as the special image on the image display device 7. You may make it display on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63.

[Modification 4]
A premier image PMG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the hit-notifying effect A in FIG. 171 (E), and a premium image PMG2 is displayed as a special image in the hit-notifying effect A in FIG. 171 (G). It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, every time a different premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the same premier image may be displayed in each of the presentable effect A to the presentable effect D. For example, one of the premier images PMG1 and PMG2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a as a common premier image. This can contribute to reducing the number of images (image data) stored in the ROM 103, and can also contribute to reducing the cost of the ROM 13 by reducing the capacity of the ROM 103.

[Modification 5]
171 in FIG. 171, B in FIG. 172, C in FIG. 173, and D in FIG. 174 are stored on the right side of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. The button images BG disappeared from the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 one by one by being digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. However, the remaining number of the stored button images BG, that is, a message of “the remaining X number (X is the number of stocks)” as the number of stocks is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. Is also good. At this time, an announcement “X remaining (X is the number of stocks)” may be made to flow from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. The “predetermined display mode” includes, for example, a specific sound and a specific image in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven-color lighting (rainbow lighting (hit)). , The appearance expectation of the special sound and the special image are set high.

[Modification 6]
In the hit-notifying effect A in FIG. 171, the hit-notifying effect B in FIG. 172, the hit-notifying effect C in FIG. 173, and the hit-notifying effect D in FIG. 7 was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the effect button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
In the hit notification possible effect A of FIG. 171, the hit notification enabled effect B of FIG. 172, the hit notification enabled effect C of FIG. 173, and the hit notification enabled effect D of FIG. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine having operation means operable by a player,
In the effect of notifying the winning result by a specific lottery by operating the operation means,
A first effect of displaying a specific image notifying the winning result on a display screen;
A second effect that prompts the operation of the operation means when the number of operations of the operation means has not reached the upper limit operation number and remains after the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect H3-1,
Before the first effect is executed, a third effect of stocking an operation means image imitating the operation means on a display screen is executed,
The upper limit operation count is the number of stocks of the operation unit image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect H3-1 or Aspect H3-2,
When the operation means is operated while the second effect is being executed, a fourth effect of displaying a special image on a display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3,
The special image is a premium image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3 or aspect H3-4,
The third effect outputs a special sound corresponding to the special image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect H3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5,
The first effect outputs a specific sound corresponding to the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the specific target display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. This specific target display effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the specific target display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect is included, drives the second movable role 15 and the like.

[Specific target display effect A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for describing the specific target display effect A. In the specific target display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH that indicates a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display part TH indicates the character “OARO”. The specific target display part TH is configured so that each character of “OARO” emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of “OARO” in the specific target display portion TH emits blue light. The color of light emission of the specific target display portion TH may be any color.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a manner of moving in a vertical direction at a high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (the hit symbol “777”). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display portion TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), the second movable role object 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable role item 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “OARO” of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of “OARO” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a at the same time that the second movable auditorium 15 was tilted. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable role 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed from the position of the tilted second movable role 15 in a diagonally lower left direction from behind (back side) the second movable role 15. Is displayed as jumping out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), in a state where the second movable role object 15 is inclined at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves diagonally downward left. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed at a lower left position on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and similarly to the second movable role 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the display unit image HG is inclined at the same angle as that of the second movable role object 15. In other words, the character “OARO” of the specific target display part TH and the character image “OARO” of the display part image HG in the second movable auditory piece 15 are arranged in parallel at a similar angle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (G), in a state where the second movable role object 15 is inclined at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves obliquely rightward and upward, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the position of the second movable role 15 in an inclined state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (H), the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if it moves from the display screen 7a to the second movable role 15. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to jump behind (backside) the second movable role object 15 in a tilted state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it moves from the display screen 7a to the second movable role 15. Then, the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable role 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to the original position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (J), the second movable role object 15 further rotates counterclockwise to return to the retreat position (home position) which is the original position. That is, the second movable role 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state inclined at the predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect B]
FIG. 176 is a diagram for describing the specific target display effect B. In the specific target display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position) on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH that indicates a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display part TH indicates the character “OARO”. The specific target display part TH is configured so that each character of “OARO” emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of “OARO” in the specific target display portion TH emits blue light. The color of light emission of the specific target display portion TH may be any color.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a manner of moving in a vertical direction at a high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (hit symbol "777"). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), of the characters of “OARO” on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15, the last two characters “RO” that are emitting light disappear and the previous character “ROO” disappears. Only the two characters “OA” emit light. The display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display portion TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), the second movable role object 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable role object 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “OA” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of “OA” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a at the same time that the second movable auditorium 15 was tilted. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable role 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed from the position of the tilted second movable role 15 in a diagonally lower left direction from behind (back side) the second movable role 15. Is displayed as jumping out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves obliquely downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position on the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and similarly to the second movable role 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the display unit image HG is inclined at the same angle as that of the second movable role object 15. In other words, the illuminated "OA" character of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15 and the "OA" character image of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel at a similar angle. You.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), the display of the character image “OA” of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable object 15 rotates left to return to the original position, and returns to the original position, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable role 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state inclined at the predetermined angle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), of the characters of “OARO” in the identification target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15, the two characters “OA” before the light emission disappear and disappear. The next two characters “RO” emit light. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display portion TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), the second movable role 15 is further rotated clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “RO” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image “RO” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a at the same time that the second movable auditorium 15 was tilted. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable role 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed from the position of the tilted second movable role 15 in a diagonally lower left direction from behind (back side) the second movable role 15. Is displayed as jumping out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (I), in a state where the second movable role object 15 is inclined at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves diagonally to the left and downward. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position on the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and similarly to the second movable role 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the display unit image HG is inclined at the same angle as that of the second movable role object 15. That is, the illuminated “RO” character of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15 and the “RO” character image of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being inclined at the same angle. You.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (J), the display of the character image of “RO” of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable object 15 rotates left to return to the original position, and returns to the original position, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable role 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state inclined at the predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for describing the specific target display effect C. In the specific target display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 177 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role (movable member) 15 is positioned at the retracted position (home position). doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH that indicates a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display part TH indicates the character “OARO”. The specific target display part TH is configured so that each character of “OARO” emits light. In the present embodiment, each character of “OARO” in the specific target display portion TH emits blue light. The color of light emission of the specific target display portion TH may be any color.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a manner of moving in a vertical direction at a high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (B), a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (the hit symbol “777”) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display portion TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (D), at the same time as the second movable role 15 is further clockwise rotated and tilted at a predetermined angle, the “OARO” of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable role 15 is displayed. Of the characters, the two characters “OA” before the light emission disappear. Then, on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, a display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “OA” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of “OA” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a at the same time that the second movable auditorium 15 was tilted. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable role 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed from the position of the tilted second movable role 15 in a diagonally lower left direction from behind (back side) the second movable role 15. Is displayed as jumping out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), in a state where the second movable role object 15 is inclined at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves diagonally to the left and downward. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position on the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and similarly to the second movable role 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the display unit image HG is inclined at the same angle as that of the second movable role object 15. In other words, the illuminated "OA" character of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15 and the "OA" character image of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel at a similar angle. You.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (F), the display of the character image “OA” of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable object 15 rotates left to return to the original position, and returns to the original position, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable role 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state inclined at the predetermined angle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (operation). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display portion TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (H), the second movable role 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the “OARO” of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable role 15 is displayed. Of the characters, the last two characters “RO” that are emitting light disappear. Then, on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, a display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “RO” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image “RO” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a at the same time that the second movable auditorium 15 was tilted. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable role 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is displayed from the position of the tilted second movable role 15 in a diagonally lower left direction from behind (back side) the second movable role 15. Is displayed as jumping out.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (I), in a state where the second movable role object 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG moves diagonally downward left. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position on the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and similarly to the second movable role 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state where the display unit image HG is inclined at the same angle as that of the second movable role object 15. That is, the illuminated “RO” character of the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15 and the “RO” character image of the display portion image HG are arranged in parallel in a state of being inclined at the same angle. You.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (J), the display of the character image of “RO” of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. Specifically, the second movable object 15 rotates left to return to the original position, and returns to the original position, the retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable role 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state inclined at the predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for describing the specific target display effect D. In the specific target display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 178 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). doing. The second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display portion TH that indicates a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display part TH indicates the character “OARO”. The specific target display part TH is configured so that each character of “OARO” emits light. In this embodiment, each character of “OARO” in the specific target display portion TH emits blue light, but at this stage, each character does not emit light. The color of light emission of the specific target display portion TH may be any color.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a manner of moving in a vertical direction at a high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), the changing display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, of the characters “OARO” of the identification target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15, only the second character “A” from the front emits blue light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), among the characters “OARO” of the identification target display portion TH of the second movable role object 15, the light emission of the light emitting character “A” disappears. Then, on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, a display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “A” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of “A” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditory product 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (a character image imitating the character of “A”) from the position of the character “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditorium 15 is located behind the second movable auditorium 15. It is displayed so as to protrude downward from (back side). The display unit image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the character “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory product 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while expanding. The display unit image HG is displayed in a size similar to the size of the character “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory product 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character “A” in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory product 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role object 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, of the characters “OARO” in the specific target display portion TH of the second movable auditorium 15, only the third character “R” from the front emits blue light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), among the characters of “OARO” on the identification target display portion TH of the second movable role object 15, the light emission of the light emitting character “R” disappears. Then, on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, a display unit image HG imitating the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the character “R” that is a part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of “R” is blue, but may be any color. Further, the color may be the same as that of the specific target display portion TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

  In the present embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable auditory product 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (a character image imitating the character “R”) from the position of the character “R” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory 15 is located behind the second movable auditory character 15. It is displayed so as to protrude downward from (back side).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while expanding. The display unit image HG is displayed in a size similar to the size of the character “R” of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory product 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the character “R” in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditory product 15.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the display of the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the specific target display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, a first effect in which the specific target display unit TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined effect, and a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH , A second effect in which a display unit image HG imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display unit) of the image display device 7 is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable role 15 (movable member) including the specific target display portion TH and configured to be movable performs a predetermined operation, In the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on a predetermined operation of the second movable role object 15. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable role object 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first effect, the second movable role item 15 is A tilting operation is performed at a predetermined angle, and in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable auditorium 15 to the display screen 7a based on the operation of the second movable auditorium 15. Is done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 175 and FIG. 176, after the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed in the second movable state while the second movable role object 15 is inclined at a predetermined angle. A third effect, which is displayed in a tilted state like the character 15, is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it moves from the display screen 7a to the second movable role 15. At the same time, a fourth effect of performing the operation of returning the second movable role 15 inclined at a predetermined angle to the original position is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the first effect, the specific target display portion TH emits light, and in the second effect, based on the light emission of the specific target display portion TH. , The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a from the specific target display unit TH based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH. The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if moving to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the specific target display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the display unit image HG is displayed based on a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditorium 15 (here, an effect in which the specific target display unit TH operates or a light-emitting effect). Although displayed on the screen 7a, the predetermined effect of the specific target display portion TH is not limited to operation and light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the effect may be an effect in which the specific target display portion TH is deformed, an effect in which the display is moved in a predetermined direction, or an effect in which light emission is turned off.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display portion TH is provided on the movable member (the second movable role 15), but may be provided on a fixed member, for example, or may be displayed on the display screen 7a. May be done. That is, any mode may be used as long as it displays a specific target.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 blinks. May be displayed on the display screen 7a on the basis of. Also, the display unit image HG may be displayed so that display and non-display are repeated so as to blink.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 178, a blue display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable auditorium 15. For example, the display unit image displayed on the display screen 7a The mode of the HG may indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation degree of the jackpot may be suggested by the color, the size, the number of times of display, the number of times of blinking, and the like of the display unit image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I1-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
And a specific target display unit representing a specific target,
A first effect in which the specific target display unit performs a predetermined effect;
A second effect in which a display unit image simulating at least a part of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display unit, based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect I1-1,
Including the specific target display unit, further comprising a movable member configured to be movable,
In the first effect, the movable member performs a predetermined operation,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined operation of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2,
The movable member is disposed adjacent to the display means,
In the first effect, the movable member performs an operation of inclining at a predetermined angle,
In the second effect, based on the operation of the movable member, the display unit image is displayed as if moving from the movable member to the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-3,
After the second effect, in a state where the movable member is inclined at a predetermined angle, a third effect in which the display unit image is displayed in a state of being inclined similarly to the movable member can be further executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect I1-3 or Aspect I1-4,
After the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if moving from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member inclined at a predetermined angle returns to the original position. It is possible to further execute the fourth production,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect I1-1,
In the first effect, the specific target display unit emits light,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display unit based on light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect I1-6,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display unit as if the display unit image moves from the specific target display unit to the display unit based on the light emission of the specific target display unit. Done,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the plural-combined-combination effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 182. The multiple-effects union effect can be executed during a change effect of a decorative symbol or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the multiple-effects combined effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the fluctuation timing change effect, the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 etc. are driven.

[Multi-Combined Production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for describing the multiple-effects combined effect A. In the multiple-combination effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 179 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left fixed combination 14L (fixed member) of the first movable combination 14 Is fixed to a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire screen is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 179 (A), the right movable role 14R (the second movable member) of the first movable role 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Position (home position). At the retreat position, the right movable movable object 14R is completely hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable object 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). The second movable role 15 is in a state where a lower part 151 (first part) is visible and an upper part 152 (second part) to be described later is hidden behind an upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. It is. In other words, the second movable role object 15 is disposed so that a part thereof is visible (partially difficult to visually recognize) at the retreat position.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right side position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols 8R move up and down at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (B), a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (hit symbol “777”). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in the displayed state without displaying the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R without hiding them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable movable object 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable auditorium 14R moves leftward from a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable role 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves downward from the retreat position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable role 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thus, the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable role object 15 become visible. And the 2nd movable role 15 will be in the state which covers the upper part of the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R. That is, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are partially overlapped and combined. Note that the term “coalescing” as used herein includes direct merging, indirect merging, disposition at a non-contact but close position, and merging.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening portion of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed auditorium 14L and the right movable auditorium 14R is formed. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, the second movable role 15, and the face image 14G are combined, so that a specific object including a human face is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the right movable movable object 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a to a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2. The second movable role 15 moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R and the second movable role 15 return to the retracted position. More specifically, the right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right portion of the game board 2 at the retreat position, and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the movable movable object 14R. In the second movable role 15, the lower part 151 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

[Multi-Combined Production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for describing the multiple-effects combined effect B. In the multiple-combination effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 180A, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left fixed combination 14L (fixed member) of the first movable combination 14 Is fixed to a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire screen is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 180A, the right movable role 14R (the second movable member) of the first movable role 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Position (home position). At the retreat position (home position), the entire right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable object 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). At the evacuation position (home position), the second movable role 15 is disposed so as to be entirely visible without being hidden by the upper part of the game board 2.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right side position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols 8R move up and down at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (hit symbol “777”). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in the displayed state without displaying the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R without hiding them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable auditorium 14R moves leftward from a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable role 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves downward from the retreat position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable role 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thus, the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. And the 2nd movable role 15 will be in the state which covers the upper part of the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R. That is, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are partially overlapped and combined. Note that the term “coalescing” as used herein includes direct merging, indirect merging, disposition at a non-contact but close position, and merging.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed role object 14L and the right movable role material 14R is formed. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, the second movable role 15, and the face image 14G are combined, so that a specific object including a human face is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the right movable movable object 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a to a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2. The second movable role 15 moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable movable object 14R and the second movable auditorium 15 return to the retracted position. More specifically, the right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right portion of the game board 2 at the retreat position, and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the movable movable object 14R. In addition, the second movable role 15 does not hide in the upper part of the game board 2 at the evacuation position, and stands still in a state where the entirety can be visually recognized.

[Combination of multiple roles C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for describing the multiple-effects united effect C. In the multiple-combination effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 181 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the left fixed combination 14 </ b> L (fixed member) of the first movable combination 14. Is fixed to a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire screen is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 181 (A), the right movable role 14R (second movable member) of the first movable role 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Position (home position). At the retreat position (home position), the entire right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable object 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). In the second movable role 15, the lower part 151 (first part) is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, and the upper part 152 (second part) described later is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. It is. In other words, the second movable role 15 is arranged such that a part thereof is visible (partially difficult to see) at the retreat position (home position).

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right side position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols 8R move up and down at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position (the hit symbol “777”). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in the displayed state without displaying the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R without hiding them. Then, a suggestion image SG indicating that an effect in which the left fixed auditorium 14L, the right movable auditorium 14R, and the second movable auditorium 15 are combined is displayed. Specifically, a suggestion image SG which is an image like lightning connecting the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable auditorium 14R moves leftward from a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable role 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves downward from the retreat position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (E), the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable role 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thus, the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R are united to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable role object 15 become visible. And the 2nd movable role 15 will be in the state which covers the upper part of the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R. That is, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are partially overlapped and combined. Note that the term “coalescing” as used herein includes direct merging, indirect merging, disposition at a non-contact but close position, and merging.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening portion of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed auditorium 14L and the right movable auditorium 14R is formed. , The face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, the second movable role 15, and the face image 14G are combined, so that a specific object including a human face is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the right movable movable object 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a to a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2. The second movable role 15 moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (H), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R and the second movable role 15 return to the retracted position. More specifically, the right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right portion of the game board 2 at the retreat position, and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the movable movable object 14R. In the second movable role 15, the lower part 151 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

[Plural Character Combined Direction D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for describing the multiple-effects combination effect D. In the multiple-combination effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left fixed combination 14L (fixed member) of the first movable combination 14 Is fixed to a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entire screen is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 182 (A), the right movable role 14R (second movable member) of the first movable role 14 is retracted on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Position (home position). At the retreat position (home position), the entire right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right side portion of the game board 2 and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  In addition, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable object 15 (first movable member) is located at the retracted position (home position). In the second movable role 15, the lower part 151 (first part) is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, and the upper part 152 (second part) described later is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. It is. In other words, the second movable role 15 is arranged such that a part thereof is visible (partially difficult to see) at the retreat position (home position).

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, at the right side position of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a variation mode in which the decorative symbols 8R move up and down at high speed. The decorative symbol includes a symbol image of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols capable of notifying whether or not a winning is achieved by a combination of these stop symbols.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R hit the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (hit symbol “777”). ) Is stopped. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed along the horizontal direction. Here, "arranged along the horizontal direction" includes not only those arranged strictly in the horizontal direction but also those arranged substantially horizontally. That is, what can be recognized by those skilled in the art as being arranged in the left-right direction on the display screen 7a is included in those arranged in the horizontal direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), the display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent effects may be performed in the displayed state without displaying the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R without hiding them.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (D), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right movable auditorium 14R moves leftward from a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2 toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable role 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves downward from the retreat position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable role 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. The right movable role 14R is arranged at a predetermined distance from the left fixed role 14L. Further, the second movable role 15 moves to the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable role object 15 become visible. And the 2nd movable role 15 will be in the state which covers the upper part of the left fixed role 14L and the right movable role 14R. That is, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the second movable role 15 are partially overlapped and combined. Note that the term “coalescing” as used herein includes direct merging, indirect merging, disposition at a non-contact but close position, and merging.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pair of movable members 14LP hidden behind the upper end and the lower end of the left fixed accessory 14L. Moves rightward toward the right movable role 14R. Here, the illustration of the movable member 14LP hidden behind the upper end of the left fixed accessory 14L is omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pair of movable members 14LP protrude, and a left fixed role 14L, a right movable role 14R, and a pair of movable members 14LP. Thus, an annular decorative member is formed. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G is displayed at the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed auditorium 14L and the right movable auditorium 14R. As a result, the left fixed role 14L, the right movable role 14R, the second movable role 15, the movable member 14LP, and the face image 14G are combined, and a state representing a specific target including a human face is obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move to the left so as to return to positions behind the upper end and the lower end of the left fixed accessory 14L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to positions behind the upper end and the lower end of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (J), on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the right movable movable object 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a to a position (retreat position) behind the right portion of the game board 2. The second movable role 15 moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the second movable role 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position.

  Then, on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable role 14R and the second movable role 15 return to the retracted position. More specifically, the right movable movable object 14R is hidden behind the right portion of the game board 2 at the retreat position, and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the movable movable object 14R. In the second movable role 15, the lower part 151 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible at the retracted position, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the combined effect of multiple characters.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed role object 14 </ b> L (fixed member) arranged so as to be entirely visible, and the second movable part partially arranged so as to be visible. There is provided a role item 15 (first movable member) and a right movable portion 14R (second movable member) which is arranged so as to be hardly visible as a whole. Then, the left fixed role 14L, the second movable role 15 having moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 With the right movable movable object 14R that has moved to a predetermined position (advance) in front of the target object, and a combined effect representing a specific object can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 179, FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, the second movable auditory piece 15 is arranged with the lower part 151 (first part) that is arranged so as to be visible, The upper portion 152 (second portion). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, in the combined effect, the second movable role 15 is moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. ), The lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable role 15 are arranged so as to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, it is suggested that an effect in which the left fixed role object 14L, the second movable role object 15, and the right movable role object 14R are united is performed before the united effect. (In this embodiment, an effect in which a suggestion SG is displayed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 182, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment further includes a movable member 14LP (third movable member) arranged so as to be hardly visually recognized by the left fixed role object 14L. The movable member 14LP, which has moved to a visible position in front of the display screen 7a, is united with the left fixed role object 14L, the second movable role object 15, and the right movable role object 14R, and represents a part of a specific target. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, in the combined effect, a face image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to the configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the multiple-effects united production effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
179 to 182, the left fixed auditorium 14L, the second movable auditorium 15, and the right movable auditorium 14R are combined to represent a human face as a specific target. It is not limited to living things and objects, but also includes abstract things such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual things whose contents are unknown. That is, the specific target here includes any aspect in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the second movable role 15 and the right movable role 14R are combined with the left fixed role 14L at an advanced position (deployment position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, They may be combined at a position other than the advance position.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 181, the suggestion image SG is displayed as a coalescence suggestion effect indicating that an effect in which the left fixed role object 14L, the second movable role object 15, and the right movable role object 14R are combined is performed. May be other than the display of an image. For example, an effect may be performed in which the character objects operate or emit light.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I2-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A fixing member arranged so that the whole is visible,
A first movable member at least partially arranged to be visible;
A second movable member that is arranged so as to be difficult to visually recognize,
At least the fixed member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are combined. , It is possible to execute a combined effect representing a specific object,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect I2-1,
The first movable member includes a first portion arranged so as to be visually recognizable, and a second portion arranged so as to be hardly visible.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect I2-2,
In the combined effect, the first movable member is moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, so that the first portion and the second portion of the first movable member are visibly arranged. Done,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3,
Prior to the coalescing effect, it is possible to further execute a uniting suggestion effect indicating that an effect in which the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are united is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4,
A third movable member that is arranged so as to be hardly visible by the fixed member,
In the union effect, the third movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display unit is united with the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member, and the specific object Represents a part of
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5,
In the union effect, an image representing a part of the specific target is displayed on the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  In the following, with reference to FIG. 183 to FIG. 183 to 186, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings, and the drawings of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also viewed. Some are omitted for simplicity, and the first movable auditors 14 and the second movable auditors 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for clarity of the drawing. There are things that are.

  This omission announcement tilting effect can be performed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). In other words, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a hit notification effect effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out from, and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2 and the like. For example, the position and the light emission mode of the right movable role 14R are changed.

  Here, first, the notification A and direction effect A will be described, and then the notification A and direction effect B, the notification A and direction effect C, and the notification A and direction effect D will be described in order.

[Announcement Aori Direction A]
First, a description of the Achievement of Achievement A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a diagram for describing the abandoned announcement swing production A. The Achievement Notification Aori production A is performed during the fluctuating production of the decorative design.

  183A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right side of the stereoscopic image, as shown in FIG. 183 (A). In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  At the upper center of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative design is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even if it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the white holding icon 9C is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad. Indicates a white spherical holding icon 9A. That is, the four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “4” on the left, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 183 (A).

  On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the omission announcement and effect effect A is performed is the B mode to be described later, the theme image of this B mode (here, the image imitating “cloud”) is not shown, but It is in a state of being largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  Note that, during the period in which the selection mode can be selected, the “mode change with effect button” that indicates that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 along with the start of the change of the decorative symbol. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), but the omission announcement tilting effect A is performed. In such a state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the hit-notification effect A is performed, the effect mode selected before the hit-notification effect A is performed is also continued in the hit-notification effect A.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “sun” is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  In addition, this omission announcement Aori production A is, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode constituting the production mode, excluding A mode, three production modes of B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Mode). On the other hand, in the after-notice announcement swing effect B described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) including only the A mode.

  If the decorative pattern in FIG. 183 (A) starts to fluctuate and there are four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A that are hits (big hits or small hits), there are hits (big hits or small hits). Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined by the big hit pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command, Jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

  First, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a such that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and then the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG correspond to the upper side of the hit suggestion image ASG. And a straight line passing through the midpoint of each of the lower sides as a central axis, and repeatedly swings in the front-rear direction and fluctuates (hereinafter, may be referred to as “swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, a display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a while emitting a flash and jumps out is repeated. A winning decision will be made. The winning determination effect is an effect for notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the change. For this reason, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a winning determination effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). Can be raised.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in the variable display area of their own at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that it loses. . In addition, even in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, a winning determination effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is possible to excite the player with the expectation that an effect in which the decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and a winning (big hit or small hit) may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 changes to three blue numbers “3”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes “3”. The red number “0” continues with zero.

  The holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG even in a state where the display of the decorative design is started to change. Is continued, and a winning-determined effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be expected to generate a winning (big hit or small hit).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in the variable display area of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “2”, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number “3”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number “4”, so that it loses. . In addition, even in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, a winning determination effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is possible to excite the player with the expectation that an effect in which the decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and a winning (big hit or small hit) may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad and the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 changes to two and changes to a blue numeral “2”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes The red number “0” continues with zero.

  The holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG even in a state where the display of the decorative design is started to change. Is continued, and a winning-determined effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be expected to generate a winning (big hit or small hit).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in their own variable display areas, respectively, at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the numeral "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the numeral "4", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the numeral "5", thereby causing a loss. . In addition, even in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, a winning determination effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is possible to excite the player with the expectation that an effect in which the decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and a winning (big hit or small hit) may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183 (G), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the second hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 becomes one and changes to a blue numeral “1”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes The red number “0” continues with zero.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 183 (H), During this fluctuation, a display mode in which a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the winning suggestion image ASG moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while jumping out while flashing, is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) provided at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. The first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers HMG (here Then, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is one blue numeral “1”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is performed. Are zero and the red numeral “0” does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 183 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed in the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Are displayed side by side in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  In FIG. 183 (I), a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers. HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is one blue numeral “1”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 183 (H). In FIG. 183 (I), the state where all of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared is shown in FIG. FIG. 183 (H) shows a state in which the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared while being continuously maintained to (H). Has been maintained. In FIG. 183 (I), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode has disappeared is continued from FIG. 183 (H).

  As described above, the hit suggestion image ASG indicating the presence of the hit in the hit icon 9A is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a win (a large hit or a small hit) will occur when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad have white spherical hold icons with the lowest degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). Is displayed, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs after the end of the fluctuation. Can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be expected to have a hit (big hit or small hit).

  In addition, the omission announcement Aori production A includes three production modes (a plurality of production modes, that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode). Mode), the display mode of the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes). On the other hand, since the later-described omission announcement direction production B is an effect performed only in one production mode (single production mode) of only the A mode, it is performed in one production mode (single production mode). A display mode called an inflating motion of the hit suggestion image ASG described later is a special display mode different from the common display mode.

[Announcement Aori Direction B]
Next, the omission announcement swing production B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 184 is a diagram for describing the omission announcement tilting effect B. The abandoned announcement production B is performed during the fluctuating production of the decorative design.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (A), first, in the omission announcement Aori effect B, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and the right of the three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  At the upper center of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative design is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even if it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The holding icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure holding is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the white holding icon 9C is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad. Indicates a white spherical holding icon 9A. That is, the four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, the first special figure holding based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20 The second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG, which is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, there are four first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, the blue numeral “4” on the left, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral “0” is separated from each other on the right side.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A).

  On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. Here, since the effect mode selected before the Achievement Notification A / Direction Effect A is performed is the A mode to be described later, the theme image of the A mode (here, simulating the “sun”) is not shown, but is not illustrated. It is in a state of being largely displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

  During the period in which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) and displayed, but the omission announcement tilting effect B is performed. In such a state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the hit-notification effect B is performed, the effect mode selected before the hit-notification effect B is performed is also continued in the hit-notification effect B.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “sun” is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  In addition, this omission announcement direction production B is a production performed only in one production mode (single production mode) of only A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode which constitute the production mode. . On the other hand, the above-mentioned omission announcement Aori effect A is an effect commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) except the A mode, that is, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode.

  If the decorative symbol in FIG. 184 (A) starts to fluctuate and there are four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A that are hits (big hits or small hits), there are hits (big hits or small hits). Is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined by the big hit pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command, Jackpot type pre-judgment result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

  The hit suggestion image ASG is firstly displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a such that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and thereafter, during the fluctuation, the hit suggestion image ASG expands to its original size. The returning operation is repeatedly performed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the expanding motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG repeats a display mode in which the flashing light moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front and jumps out. A fixed performance will be performed. The winning determination effect is an effect for notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the change. For this reason, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, and the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). It can be raised.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in their own variable display areas, respectively, at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that it loses. . Since the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. Is started, and after that, a winning confirmation effect is performed, so that an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and become a hit (big hit or small hit) may be developed. It can excite the player of the expectation that there is not.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 changes to three blue numbers “3”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes “3”. The red number “0” continues with zero.

  The holding suggestion image ASG continues to be displayed even when the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the decorative symbol change display is started. Is done.

  During the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 184 (D), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started. As a result, during the fluctuation, a winning determination effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur. I have.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 184 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located in the variable display area of their own in the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “2”, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number “3”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number “4”, so that it loses. . The expansion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the hit suggestion image ASG returns to its original size. Thus, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed. Therefore, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and thereafter, the hit determination effect is performed. Arousing the player with the expectation that an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may become the same pattern (big hit or small hit) by being played together. Can be.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (F), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at the hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 changes to two and changes to a blue numeral “2”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes The red number “0” continues with zero.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad in FIG. 184 (F) is moved to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, FIG. ) To FIG. 184 (H), the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, during the fluctuation, a winning determination effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be given a sense of expectation that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur. I have.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 184 (I), during the fluctuation, a hit determination effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a while flashing, and jumps out. The incoming display mode is repeated. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. . In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) provided at the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. The first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers HMG (here Then, two first special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 are two blue numbers “2”, and second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. Are zero and the red numeral “0” does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 184 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed in the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Are displayed side by side in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  In FIG. 184 (J), a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21 are numbers. HMG (here, two first special figure reservations based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 are blue numerals "2", and a second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21) The special figure reservation is zero and the red numeral “0” is continuously displayed in FIG. 184 (I). In FIG. 184 (J), the state where all of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared is shown in FIG. (I) is maintained, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Cd are displayed. The state in which the hold icon 9C has disappeared is also maintained in FIG. 184 (I). In FIG. 184 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode has disappeared is continued from FIG. 184 (I).

  Note that, in the A mode, even if the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, A hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern is fluctuating, and an announcement “Please operate the effect button” also flows from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, even though no effect prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is performed at all, when the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation) and reaches a predetermined number of times, as a background image, An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a “winning effect using the effect button” in which the character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is performed. In other words, the “hit determination effect by the effect button” means that when the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) is not performed at all, the number of operations (pressing operations) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number. A so-called "hidden command" can be generated and executed. In the “winning effect using the effect button”, the player is notified that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  The “predetermined number of times” includes once, three, five, seven, nine, eleven, thirteen, fifteen, seventeen, nineteen, twenty-one, and twenty-three. It is set by lottery in the (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, even if the number of times the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, it is lost if the “hit effect effect using the effect button” is not performed. For example, when the hold icon 9A is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad (the hit information is out of order) ) Becomes the hold icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "hit effect effect with the effect button" is not performed, and the player loses. If the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (the hit information is a hit (a big hit or a small hit)) becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer It is set to 17 times by lottery at 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the number of times the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 has reached 17 times And that, "confirmed production hit by the performance button" is carried out, the hit (big hit or small hit).

  The "winning effect by effect button" is a special effect performed only when the A mode is selected. In FIG. 184 (A), the decorative pattern starts to change, and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are displayed. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit), a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is completely displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition to the case where the game is not performed, the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are digested as the holding icons 9C, and the game may be performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. is there.

  In other words, in the A mode, even if the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184 (A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A. If the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, the player operates the staging button 63 (pressing operation). , The decorative design in FIG. 184 (A) starts to change, and the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are hit (big hit or small hit). In the case where there is an object, a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed. If the display is large in the center of 7a, no matter how long the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "hit effect effect by the effect button" is prevented, and the omission notification tilt effect effect B proceeds. It is supposed to.

  In the C mode, the decorative symbol starts to change in FIG. 184 (A), and if there is one of the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A that becomes a hit (big hit or small hit), the hit (big hit) (Not shown) even when the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the existence of a small hit is displayed on the display screen 7a or not at all. Then, an effect that prompts an operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 such that an effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed. This is different from the A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the character is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a "winning effect by the effect button" is performed. In the “winning effect using the effect button”, the player is notified that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  In this manner, the hit suggestion image ASG indicating the presence of the hit in the hit icon 9A is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, the player can be given an expectation that a win (a big hit or a small hit) will occur when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad have white spherical hold icons with the lowest degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). Is displayed, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that informs the player that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) occurs after the end of the fluctuation is generated. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to excite the player of the expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

  As described above, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode shown in FIG. Mode, which is a common effect in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes), the display mode of the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) is a common display mode. ing. On the other hand, since the omission announcement direction production B is a production performed only in one production mode (single production mode) of only the A mode, it is suggested in one production mode (single production mode). The display mode of the expansion movement of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Announcement Aori Direction C]
Next, the omission announcement swing effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is a diagram for describing the omission announcement swing production C.

  As shown in FIG. 185 (A), first, in the present omission effect orientation C, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 performs the effect of each round game in the jackpot effect (big hit game) and finishes. At the end of the game effect period, and at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG “continue right-handed” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in large size in order to continue right-handed. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are each represented by a numeral HMG as an image display device. 7 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The four special figure reservations are arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the display in FIG. 185 (A) is started.

  In FIG. 185 (A), when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” is displayed and the start of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball is transferred to the first starting port 20. Since the first special figure reservation based on entering a ball is zero and the number is “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on entering a game ball into the second starting port 21 is four, the second starting port In the case where there is one that is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball to 21, the display is performed as shown in FIG. 185 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (C), a three-dimensional image indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit). Display screen with a typical W-shaped hit suggestion image ASG It is largely displayed at the center portion of a. The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a such that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1. It should be noted that a preliminary determination command is used to determine whether or not there is any information (holding a large hit or a small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Are determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

  In the case where there is no holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (a big hit or a small hit) in the specific period, The flash image FH shown in FIG. 185 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 185 (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in the specific period, there is no hold information (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In this case), the announcement C is not performed, and the variation of the decorative design is started.

  Thereafter, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and the right side of the three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started in FIG. 185 (D), the display is enlarged in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 185 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a. The size of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG extend in the front-rear direction with the straight line passing through the middle point of each of the upper side and the lower side of the hit suggestion image ASG as the central axis. An oscillating motion with repeated swinging (hereinafter, may be referred to as “swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a win-determining effect is performed in which the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while flashing and jumps out is repeated. The winning determination effect is an effect for notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the change. For this reason, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a winning determination effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). Can be raised.

  At the upper center of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative design is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even if it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The reserved icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the second special map reservation is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed on the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd. It is arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Bd.

  When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is changed to the hold icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd changes to the second hold display position. When moving to the position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before moving.

  Here, a white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and a white spherical holding icon is displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd, the second holding display position 9Bd, and the third holding display position 9Bd. 9B are displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three reserve icons 9B, 9B, 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. As described above, in addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21, the second icon based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20, as described above. The first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is still zero and becomes a blue numeral “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is performed. Becomes three and changes to a red numeral “3”.

  Here, the holding icon 9B and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In FIG. 185 (D), when the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started, the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection section SEL that can perform the selection is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. Here, the B-mode theme image is used because the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative pattern before the hit notification effect effect C is performed, that is, before the big hit effect (big hit game) is performed, is described later. Although it is not shown, a large image of a “cloud” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 here.

  During the period in which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), and is displayed. In such a state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the hit notification Aori effect C is performed, the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative pattern before the hit notification Aori effect C is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the hit notification Aori effect C Is also continued.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “sun” is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  In addition, this omission announcement direction production C has three production modes (a plurality of production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode). Mode). On the other hand, in the after-notch announcement swing effect D described later, the effect is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) including only the A mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. Are stopped and displayed side by side in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that it loses. . In addition, even in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, a winning determination effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is possible to excite the player with the expectation that an effect in which the decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and a winning (big hit or small hit) may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd and moves to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number “0” is continuously obtained. The second special figure reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21 is “2”. It changes to red number “2”.

  The holding icon 9B displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG even in a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Is continued, and a winning-determining effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be expected to generate a winning (big hit or small hit).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in their own variable display areas, respectively, at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “2”, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number “3”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number “4”, so that it loses. . In addition, even in the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. As a result, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, a winning determination effect is performed by the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is possible to excite the player with the expectation that an effect in which the decorative pattern 8R is the same pattern and a winning (big hit or small hit) may be developed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the number continues to be a blue numeral “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1 And changes to a red numeral “1”.

  The holding icon 9B displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG even in a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Is continued, and a winning-determining effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be expected to generate a winning (big hit or small hit).

  As shown in FIG. 185 (I), when the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. During the fluctuation, a winning determination effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while flashing and jumps out is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left corner of the display screen 7a The first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers HMG (here Then, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number “0” is set, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is performed. And the red numeral “1” does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 185 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed in the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas. Are displayed side by side in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  In FIG. 185 (J), a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by numbers. HMG (here, zero first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue numeral “0”, and second second based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second number. The special figure reservation is one and the red numeral “1”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 185 (I). In addition, in FIG. 185 (J), the state where all of the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared is shown in FIG. (I) is maintained, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a. 185 (I). In FIG. 185 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode has disappeared is continued from FIG. 185 (I).

  As described above, the hit suggestion image ASG indicating the presence of the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center portion of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed small in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a. The swing motion of the ASG is repeatedly performed. As a result, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) will occur when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a, Enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  Further, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd have white spherical holding icons with the lowest degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). Is displayed, when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that notifies the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs after the end of the fluctuation. Can be generated suddenly, so that the player can be expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit).

  In addition, the omission announcement Aori production C has three production modes (a plurality of production modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode, among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode). Mode), the display mode of the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes). On the other hand, since the later-described omission announcement direction production D is an effect performed only in one production mode (single production mode) of only the A mode, it is performed in one production mode (single production mode). A display mode called an inflating motion of the hit suggestion image ASG described later is a special display mode different from the common display mode.

[Our announcement Aori Direction D]
Next, a description will be given of the awarded announcement swing effect D with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a diagram for describing the unsuccessful announcement effect production D.

  In the present omission announcement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 186 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect of each round game in the big hit effect (big hit game) is performed, and the game is ended. At the end of the game effect period, and accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG indicating “continue right-handed” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in large size to continue right-handed. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are each represented by a numeral HMG as an image display device. 7 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, the blue numeral “0” is on the left side, and the second based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second. The four special figure reservations are arranged and displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a in a state where the red numeral "4" is separated from each other on the right side.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that no game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the display is started in FIG. 186 (A).

  In FIG. 186 (A), when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” is displayed and the start of the specific period is reached, here, as described above, the game ball is transferred to the first starting port 20. Since the first special figure reservation based on entering a ball is zero and the number is “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on entering a game ball into the second starting port 21 is four, the second starting port In the case where there is one that is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entering of the game ball to 21, the display is performed as shown in FIG. 186 (B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186 (C), a solid indicating the presence of a hit (big hit or small hit). Display screen with a typical W-shaped hit suggestion image ASG It is largely displayed at the center portion of a. The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a such that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1. It should be noted that a preliminary determination command is used to determine whether or not there is any information (holding a large hit or a small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Are determined based on the jackpot pre-judgment result, the jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result.

  In addition, in the specific period, when there is no holding information (big hit or small hit) corresponding to the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, FIG. The flash image FH shown in FIG. 186 (B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 186 (C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, in the specific period, if there is no hit information (big hit or small hit) in the holding information corresponding to the four second special figure holdings based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, ), The change of the decorative design is started without performing the omission announcement and direction effect D.

  Thereafter, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 186 (D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and the right side of the three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started in FIG. 186 (D), it is enlarged in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 186 (C). The hit suggestion image ASG is displayed small in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a. The size of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative It is smaller than the size of each of the symbols 8R. At this time, the hit suggestion image ASG is first displayed in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a such that the front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and thereafter, the hit suggestion image ASG expands during the fluctuation. Then, the operation of returning to the original size is repeatedly performed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG”). When the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a win-determining effect is performed in which the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while flashing and jumps out is repeated. The winning determination effect is an effect for notifying the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur after the end of the change. For this reason, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a winning confirmation effect can be suddenly generated, and the player is expected to generate a hit (big hit or small hit). It can be raised.

  At the upper center of the display screen 7a, although not shown, a sub-variable area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed is provided. The small decorative design is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even if it starts to fluctuate, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are started to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the sub-variable region. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and all the corresponding small decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same symbol to reach). Is formed), the corresponding small decorative symbols (for example, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small decorative symbols and the right decorative symbol 8R corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L are temporarily stopped and displayed). However, the small decorative symbols (corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R) are all displayed in a variably displayed state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and are not aligned with the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern. Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be completely different. Good. Also, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and a large hit is made in the same symbol, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C. , The small decorative symbol corresponding to the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

  The reserved icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R which are currently changing as the second special map reservation is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed on the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, the hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd. It is arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Bd.

  When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is changed to the hold icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9B, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd changes to the second hold display position. When moving to the position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each hold icon 9B is the same as the size of the hold icon 9B immediately before moving.

  Here, a white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and a white spherical holding icon is displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd, the second holding display position 9Bd, and the third holding display position 9Bd. 9B are displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. That is, the three reserve icons 9B, 9B, 9B are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  In addition, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation display of the decorative symbol. As described above, in addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21, the second icon based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20, as described above. The first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 20 and the second special figure hold based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 21 are represented by the numbers HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is still zero and becomes a blue numeral “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is performed. Becomes three and changes to a red numeral “3”.

  Here, the holding icon 9B and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  In FIG. 186 (D), when the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral “1” to numeral “9”) is started, the effect mode is selected on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The selection section SEL that can perform the selection is arranged and displayed. In the selection unit SEL, the effect mode including the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the reel is rotated. By doing so, the effect mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in this specific area is the effect mode to be selected. Here, the effect mode selected during the change of the decorative pattern before the winning announcement effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the A mode described later. Although it is not shown in the figure, a large image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 (here, the image imitating the “sun”).

  During the period in which the selection mode can be selected, "change mode with effect button" tells that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) effect button 63 with the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) and displayed, In such a state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the hit notification Aori effect D is performed, the effect mode selected during the variation of the decorative pattern before the hit notification Aori effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (big hit game) is performed, is the hit notification Aori effect D Is also continued.

  Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode constituting the effect mode will be briefly described.

  In the A mode, an effect with the theme of “sun” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “sun” is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL moves downward, and the A mode Is displayed in a mode in which the reels rotate from below to above, and a B mode disposed above A mode is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the B mode, an effect with the theme of “cloud” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “cloud” is displayed large on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state in which the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes downward, and A mode arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and a C mode arranged above B mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the C mode, an effect with the theme of “rain” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “rain” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a large size. When the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, and the C mode Is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the D mode disposed above C mode displays in a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. Is displayed.

  In the D mode, an effect with the theme of “snow” proceeds, and a theme image imitating “snow” is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL, when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection unit SEL goes down, so that the D mode The mode C arranged below is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from below to above, and the mode A arranged above D mode is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from above to a specific area. The mode is displayed, and the A mode is again in the display mode located in the specific area.

  In addition, in this omission announcement direction production D, it is the production performed only in one production mode (single production mode) of only A mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode which constitute the production mode. . On the other hand, the above-mentioned omission notification swing effect C is an effect commonly performed in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) except for the A mode, that is, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed with the number "3", so that it loses. . In addition, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is continued. Thus, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed. Therefore, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and thereafter, the hit determination effect is performed. Arousing the player with the expectation that an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may become the same pattern (big hit or small hit) by being played together. Can be.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd and moves to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears at the hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number “0” is continuously obtained. The second special figure reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21 is “2”. It changes to red number “2”.

  When the holding icon 9B displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expanding motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. . As a result, a winning-determined effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be given an expectation that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively located at the middle point of the left side and the middle point of the right side of the display screen 7a in its own variable display area. Are stopped and displayed in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “2”, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number “3”, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number “4”, so that it loses. . The expansion of the hit suggestion image ASG is completed before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the hit suggestion image ASG returns to its original size. Thus, even if the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed and the loss is determined, the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed. Therefore, the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and thereafter, the hit determination effect is performed. Arousing the player with the expectation that an effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may become the same pattern (big hit or small hit) by being played together. Can be.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 186 (H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B disappears at the second hold display position 9Bd. Further, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are represented by the first and second figures HMG, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the starting port 20 is zero, and the number continues to be a blue numeral “0”, and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1 And changes to a red numeral “1”.

  When the holding icon 9B displayed at the first holding display position 9Bd moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expanding motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. . As a result, a winning-determined effect can be suddenly generated, so that the player can be given an expectation that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 186 (I), During the fluctuation, a winning determination effect suddenly occurs, and the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a while flashing and jumps out is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-variable region in which a small decorative symbol (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative symbol does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the upper left corner of the display screen 7a The first special figure reservation based on the entering of a game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special figure retaining based on the entering of a game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers HMG (here Then, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero, and the blue number “0” is set, and the second special figure reservation based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is performed. And the red numeral “1” does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

  Thereafter, the hit suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 186 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed in the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Are displayed side by side in a line (center line in the horizontal direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the same symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L with the numeral “7”, stopping and displaying the middle decorative symbol 8C with the numeral “7”, and displaying the right decorative symbol 8R with the numeral “7”. , A win (big hit or small hit) is made, and thereafter, an effect (big hit effect or small hit effect) by a hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is started.

  In FIG. 186 (J), a first special figure hold based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20 and a second special figure hold based on a game ball entering the second starting port 21 are respectively represented by numbers. HMG (here, zero first special figure reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is a blue numeral “0”, and second second based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 is the second number. The special figure reservation is one and the red numeral “1”) is continuously displayed in FIG. 186 (I). In FIG. 186 (J), FIG. 186 shows a state where the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared. (I) is maintained, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a. 186 (I). In FIG. 186 (J), the state in which the selection unit SEL capable of selecting the effect mode has disappeared is continued from FIG. 186 (I).

  In the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the start of the specific period is reached, game balls enter the second starting port 21. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the sphere, the hit (big hit) And a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the existence of a small hit may not be displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In this case, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern is fluctuating, and an announcement “Please operate the effect button” also flows from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, even though no effect prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is performed at all, when the player operates the effect button 63 (press operation) and reaches a predetermined number of times, as a background image, An image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a “winning effect using the effect button” in which the character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is performed. In other words, the “hit determination effect by the effect button” means that when the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) is not performed at all, the number of operations (pressing operations) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number. A so-called "hidden command" can be generated and executed. In the “winning effect using the effect button”, the player is notified that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  The “predetermined number of times” includes once, three, five, seven, nine, eleven, thirteen, fifteen, seventeen, nineteen, twenty-one, and twenty-three. It is set by lottery in the (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, even if the number of times the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 reaches 23 times, it is lost if the “hit effect effect using the effect button” is not performed. For example, when the hold icon 9B is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd (the hit information is out of order) ) Becomes the hold icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the “hit effect effect with the effect button” is not performed, and the player loses. If the hold icon 9B (the hit information is a hit (big hit or small hit)) displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer It is set to 17 times by lottery in 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and the number of times the player has operated (pressed) the effect button 63 has reached 17 times And that, "confirmed production hit by the performance button" is carried out, the hit (big hit or small hit).

  The “determination of hit by effect button” is an exclusive effect performed only when the A mode is selected, and is the end of the notification period in which the message MG “continue right-hand” is displayed in FIG. 186 (A). At the beginning of the specific period, the hit information (four holding icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to four second special figure holdings based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 (big hit) Even if there is an image which may be a small hit or a small hit, a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of a hit (a big hit or a small hit) is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In addition, the holding information (four holding icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holdings is digested as the holding icon 9C, and the first starting port 20 and the second starting icon are used. Sometimes game ball into the mouth 21 is performed when ball entrance.

  In other words, in the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “continue right-handed” MG is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the beginning of the specific period is reached, the game ball to the second starting port 21 is moved. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special map holds based on the incoming ball, the hit ( When the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the existence of a big hit or a small hit is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates the staging button 63 (pressing operation), the "staging" 186, the message MG of “continue right-handed” is displayed at the end of the notification period in FIG. 186 (A). At the end of the period, the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to four second special figure reservations based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21 (big hit or small hit) In the case where a hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the existence of a hit (big hit or small hit) is displayed largely in the center of the display screen 7a, Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at any time, the "hit effect effect by the effect button" is blocked, and the hit-notification and effect effect D is advanced.

  In the C mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) and the start of the specific period is reached, game balls enter the second starting port 21. If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special map holds based on the sphere, the hit (big hit or small hit) ) Is not shown, even if the hit suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape indicating the presence of) is displayed on the display screen 7a or not at all, but the effect button is displayed while the decorative design is changing. An effect that prompts an operation (press operation) of the effect button 63 such that an effect button image imitating the 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a is performed. This is different from the A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors (a so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the character is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a "winning effect by the effect button" is performed. In the “winning effect using the effect button”, the player is notified that a winning (big hit or small hit) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image for notifying a hit determination.

  As described above, the hit suggestion image ASG indicating the presence of the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center portion of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed small in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a. The expansion movement of the ASG is performed repeatedly. Thus, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) will occur due to the start of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a. Can be improved.

  Further, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd have white spherical holding icons with the lowest degree of expectation of hits (big hits and small hits). Is displayed, when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, a hit confirmation effect that informs the player that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) occurs after the end of the fluctuation is generated. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to excite the player of the expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur.

  As described above, among the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode which constitute the effect mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode shown in FIG. Mode, which is a common effect in three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes), the display mode of the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the three effect modes (a plurality of effect modes) is a common display mode. ing. On the other hand, since the present omission announcement effect D is an effect performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) of only the A mode, it is suggested in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion movement of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the announcement of the omission announcement.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 183 (A) to 183 (I) of the hit-and-miss notification swing effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided. The image display device 7 includes a hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) having a three-dimensional W-shape that indicates the presence (hit is included) of hit in the hit information (prior judgment command) of the hold icon 9A. A first effect to be displayed at the center of the display screen 7a (a predetermined position of the display means), and after the first effect, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is repeatedly changed (the hit suggestion image ASG A second effect of starting a rocking motion). According to this configuration, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit hit image) indicating the presence of the hit on the hit icon 9A is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hit suggestion image ASG (hit hit image) is displayed. Is repeatedly changed. Accordingly, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a win (a big hit or a small hit) will occur due to the start of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , Can improve the interest.
In the hit notification Aori effect B of FIG. 184, a hit suggestion image ASG (hit hit image) indicating the presence of the hit information of the hold icon 9A is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the hit suggestion image ASG is displayed. The display mode of the (hit image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a win (big hit or small hit) will occur when the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is started, and the interest can be improved.
In the hit notification swing effect C of FIG. 185, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and the hit information (prior determination command) of the hold icon 9B includes a hit (hit). ), A hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) having a three-dimensional W-shape is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed. And a display mode of a hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is repeatedly changed after the first effect, which is displayed small (at a predetermined position on the display means) within the rectangular area of (1). A second effect of starting a rocking motion). According to this configuration, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed after the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) indicating the presence of the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of 7a, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is repeatedly changed. Accordingly, the player is provided with an expectation that a win (a big hit or a small hit) will occur due to the start of the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to lift up and to improve the interest.
186, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) indicating the presence of hit in the hit information of the hold icon 9B is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device is displayed. 7 is displayed in a small rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is repeatedly changed. This excites the player with the expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur due to the start of the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG within the lower left rectangular area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the hit notification swing effect A in FIG. 183 and the hit notification swing effect B in FIG. 184, the game button 1 (operation means) operable by the player is provided. One of the plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by the operation (pressing operation) of the operation means), and the plurality of effect modes (A mode, The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) among the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode (in the hit notification Aio effect B in FIG. 184). The second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, and D mode) except the specific effect mode (A mode) and the expansion effect of the hit suggestion image ASG. More and display mode of the variable is the per suggestion image ASG (Toraku image) (swing motion per suggestion images ASG in Toraku announcement tilt effect A in FIG. 183), it is different. According to this configuration, among a plurality of types of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode), it is changed by the second effect in another effect mode (B mode, C mode, and D mode). The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is a common display mode commonly used, whereas the hit suggestion image that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is used. The display mode of the ASG (hit image) is a dedicated display mode different from the common display mode. With this, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) can be set to the exclusive display mode only in the specific effect mode among the plurality of effect modes, and is provided to the player as a rare appearance that is rare. be able to.
The same is true of the hit notification effect production C of FIG. 185 and the hit notification effect production D of FIG. 186.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the hit notification swing effect A in FIG. 183 and the hit notification swing effect B in FIG. 184, the hit suggestion image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (hit image) repeats an operation of expanding in a predetermined direction as a specific operation and returning to the original state (expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the hit notification flick effect B in FIG. 184). The display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) that is changed by the second effect in the effect mode (B mode, C mode, or D mode) is reciprocating in a predetermined direction as an operation different from a specific operation (in a predetermined direction). This operation is repeated (swinging in small increments) (swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG in the hit notification flickering effect A in FIG. 183). According to this configuration, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a display mode in which the expansion motion (specific operation) of the hit suggestion image ASG is repeated. It is possible to repeatedly give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the expansion motion (specific operation) of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) in another effect mode is the hit suggestion image. The display mode in which the swinging motion of the ASG (an operation different from the specific operation) is repeated provides an opportunity for the player to visually recognize the swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG (an operation different from the specific operation). It can be repeatedly applied. Thereby, the player can easily check the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) in each selection mode.
The same is true of the hit notification effect production C of FIG. 185 and the hit notification effect production D of FIG. 186.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific effect mode (A mode) in the hit notification effect effect B of FIG. 184, when the number of operations of the effect button 63 (operation means) reaches a predetermined number, the hit is determined. Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) to display a rainbow image (specific image) that informs the user of the effect (the third effect), and a hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) Is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) after the first effect, the "hit effect effect with the effect button" (third effect) is blocked, and the expansion motion (second effect) of the hit suggestion image ASG is reduced. Be executed. According to this configuration, in the specific effect mode (A mode), in the state where the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image) is displayed on the image display device 7, how much the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 (operation means). Operation), the “winning effect by the effect button” is not performed at all, so that the inflating motion (second effect) of the hit suggestion image ASG is executed while making the player uneasy. The expectation that a hit (a big hit or a small hit) will occur to the player can be increased.
The same is true for the winning announcement flick effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the hit notification swing effect A of FIG. Selection of one of a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by operation of 63 (operation means) is prevented. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the effect mode in the second effect that is performed after the first effect and that repeatedly changes the display mode of the hit image.
The same applies to the hit announcement / draft effect B in FIG. 184, the hit notification / origin effect C in FIG. 185, and the hit notification / origin effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the hit notification Aori effect A in FIG. 183 and the hit notification Aori effect B in FIG. 184, the second in a specific effect mode (A mode) in the hit notification Aori effect B in FIG. 183, or the hit image that is changed by the second effect in the other effect modes (B mode, C mode, and D mode) in the hit notification swing effect A in FIG. 183. It is possible to execute a fourth effect of moving from a predetermined position of the (display means) to another position and changing to a hit notification display mode for notifying a hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183 (H) of the Achievement Notification Aori Production A, the hit suggestion image that is changed by the second production in another production mode (B mode (C mode and D mode is also the same)) The ASG (hit image) is a hit notification display mode in which the flashing light moves from the center (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the near side (another position) and jumps out. The embodiment is repeated. As shown in FIG. 184 (I) of the hit notification swing effect B, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is flashing as a hit notification display mode. Is repeated from the central portion (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the near side (another position) and jumps out. According to this configuration, it is possible to set a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs suddenly, so that the sudden display mode of notifying the hit (big hit or small hit) can make the player feel a shock. it can.
In the hit announcement and tilt effect C of FIG. 185 and the hit announcement and tilt effect D of FIG. 186, as shown in FIG. 185 (H) and FIG. 185 (I) of the hit notification and tilt effect C, another effect mode (B mode (C Mode, D mode)), the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) that is changed by the second effect is a rectangular region (first first image) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a hit notification display mode. From the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (second predetermined position) while flashing and moving toward the front (another position). The display mode of moving and popping out is repeatedly performed. As shown in FIG. 186 (H) and FIG. 186 (I) of the hit-notification tilting effect D, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode (A mode) is a hit. As the notification display mode, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 jumps out of the lower left rectangular area (first predetermined position), moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and emits a flash while displaying a flash screen. The display mode of moving from the central portion (second predetermined position) of 7a toward the near side (other position) and popping out is repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to set a display mode in which a hit (big hit or small hit) occurs suddenly, so that the sudden display mode of notifying the hit (big hit or small hit) can make the player feel a shock. it can.

[Modification]
The following is a modified example of the production of the omission announcement.
[Modification 1]
In the hit notification Aori effect A in FIG. 183, the hit notification Aori effect B in FIG. 184, the hit notification Aori effect C in FIG. 185, and the hit notification Aori effect D in FIG. 186, the hit suggestion image ASG (the hit image) ) Was repeatedly changed. At this time, a timing may be provided in which the display mode is repeatedly changed while the hit suggestion image ASG (flash image) emits a flash. Keeping the player aware of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) may cause the player to become tired. On the other hand, when the timing (time) for turning the line of sight to the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) arrives, the display mode of the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is repeatedly changed while emitting flash light. Can be suggested to the player, so that it is not necessary to always make the player aware of the hit suggestion image ASG (winning image), and fatigue to the player can be suppressed.

[Modification 2]
In the hit notification Aori effect A in FIG. 183, the hit notification Aori effect B in FIG. 184, the hit notification Aori effect C in FIG. 185, and the hit notification Aori effect D in FIG. 186, the hit suggestion image ASG (variable by the second effect) As a hit notification display mode, a display mode in which the flash image flashes from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front and jumps out is repeated. However, even when the hit (big hit or small hit) is not announced, the display mode that moves forward from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while flashing and jumps out is one or more times. If the operation is performed only three times (for example, three to five times), the display may return to the original display mode. For example, in the hit notification swinging effect A of FIG. 183, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit hit image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 183 (H) to FIG. 183 (B), and the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. 184, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 184 (I) to FIG. 184 (B), and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is resumed. 185, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 185 (I) to FIG. 185 (D), and the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is resumed. In the hit notification swing effect D, the hit suggestion image ASG (hit hit image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 186 (I) to FIG. 186 (D), and the expansion motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the player think for a moment as a notification of a hit (big hit or small hit).

[Modification 3]
In the hit notification tilt effect C of FIG. 185 and the hit notification tilt effect D of FIG. 186, when the variable display of the decorative symbols (designs: numbers “1” to “9”) is started, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. On the upper right side of 7a, a selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode is arranged and displayed. However, in FIG. 185 (A) and FIG. 186 (A), when the end of the notification period in which the message MG “Right-handed continuation” is displayed and the start of the specific period is reached, the game ball is transferred to the second starting port 21. In the case where there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special map holds based on the incoming ball, the selection unit SEL is set. The effect mode may not be selectable as non-display. This is because there is no problem in selecting the presentation mode at all in the case of performing the hit announcement / draft effect C in FIG. 185 and the hit notification / originating effect D in FIG. In this case, only the currently selected effect mode may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the hit notification Aori effect A in FIG. 183, the hit notification Aori effect B in FIG. 184, the hit notification Aori effect C in FIG. 185, and the hit notification Aori effect D in FIG. One effect mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode) can be selected. However, instead of the effect button 63, a sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
It is not necessary to provide a part of the described effects in the hit announcement / draft effect A in FIG. 183, the hit notification / origin effect B in FIG. 184, the hit notification / origin effect C in FIG. 185, and the hit notification / origin effect D in FIG. 186. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect of displaying a hit image that indicates the presence of hit information on the hold icon;
And a second effect of repeatedly changing the display mode of the hit image after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-1,
Comprising operating means operable by the player,
It is possible to select one of a plurality of effect modes by operating the operation means,
The display mode of the hit image that is changed by the second effect in a specific effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes, and is changed by the second effect in another effect mode other than the specific effect mode. Is different from the display mode of the hit image
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2,
The display mode of the hit image that is changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode repeats a specific operation,
The display mode of the hit image that is changed by the second effect in the other effect mode repeats an operation different from the specific operation.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2 or aspect J1-3,
In the specific effect mode, when the number of operations of the operation means reaches a predetermined number of times, a third effect of displaying a specific image notifying a hit determination can be executed,
After the first effect, the third effect is blocked and the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect J1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-4,
After the first effect, selection of one of the plurality of effect modes by the operation of the operation means to one effect mode is prevented.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect J1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5,
Moving the hit image changed by the second effect in the specific effect mode or the hit image changed by the second effect in the other effect mode from a predetermined position to another position to win It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes to a hit notification display mode to notify.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The character selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This character selection effect can be executed during a change effect of the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the character selection effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and reads the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Character selection effect A]
FIG. 187 is a diagram for describing the character selection effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (C), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle effect described later. Here, a state in which three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. An enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed in an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

Each of the information images IB, IC, and ID includes a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by its display color. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is white. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching). For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical strength information image IH. The longer the bar, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

  In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is switched at a high speed. In the figure, the order of the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID is shown. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. When the order is changed, the top information image moves backward by so-called animation, and the second and third information images move to the front. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle effect. Here, the description is continued assuming that the information image IC has stopped at the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and an effect is produced in which the bar of the physical fitness information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect B]
FIG. 188 is a diagram for describing the character selection effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 188 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (C), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle effect described later. Here, a state in which three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed in an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

Each of the information images IB, IC, and ID includes a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by the character. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is “B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is “C”. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is “D”. Here, an example of one letter of the alphabet has been described, but if the enemy character has a name, the name may be displayed.
A bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed on the physical strength information image IH. The longer the bar, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

  In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is switched at a high speed. In the figure, the order of the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID is shown. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. When the order is changed, the top information image moves backward by so-called animation, and the second and third information images move to the front. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle effect. Here, the description is continued assuming that the information image IC has stopped at the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and an effect is produced in which the bar of the physical fitness information image IH is reduced by the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is determined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (G), a winning effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has won. Here, the friend character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "WIN" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped at the zoro eyes. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect C]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for describing the character selection effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle effect described later. Here, a state in which three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed in an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

Each of the information images IB, IC, and ID includes a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by the character. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is “B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is “C”. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is “D”. Here, an example of one letter of the alphabet has been described, but if the enemy character has a name, the name may be displayed.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the greater the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

  In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is switched at a high speed. In the figure, the order of the information image IC, the information image IB, and the information image ID is shown. The order is the information image IC and the information image IB, and this is repeated. When the order is changed, the top information image moves backward by so-called animation, and the second and third information images move to the front. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than other information images. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent of the battle effect. Here, the description is continued assuming that the information image IC has stopped at the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (losing) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped in a lost manner. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both “7”, and the middle effect symbol 8C is “8”.

[Character selection effect D]
FIG. 190 is a diagram for describing the character selection effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 190 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, a state in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have started to fluctuate is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (C), an extended effect is executed. The development production is a production that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG of "development" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle effect described later. Here, a state in which three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD have appeared is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection effect is an effect for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information on the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed in an image in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, an information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. The information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and the information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

Each of the information images IB, IC, and ID includes a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by the character. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is “B”. Further, for example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is “C”. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is “D”. Here, an example of one letter of the alphabet has been described, but if the enemy character has a name, the name may be displayed.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the greater the number of black stars, the greater the physical strength of the enemy character and the more difficult it is to win.

  In the enemy character selection effect, the information images IB, IC, and ID are sequentially displayed at high speed. In the figure, although the information image IC is displayed, the information image IB is displayed as the time elapses, and the information image ID is displayed as the time elapses. This is repeated. After a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes an opponent in the battle effect. Here, the description is continued assuming that the information image IC is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (F), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC is unfolded. An information image IC is displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect for notifying that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the character "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (losing) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixed and stopped in a lost manner. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both “7”, and the middle effect symbol 8C is “8”.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the character selection effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy characters appear, and the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD as the opponents in the battle effect are displayed (FIGS. 187 (D), 188 (D), and 189 (D)). 190 (D)). Then, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are displayed by the enemy character selection effect, and by selecting the information images IB, IC, and ID, the enemy character serving as the opponent is displayed. Is selected (FIG. 187 (E), FIG. 188 (E), FIG. 189 (E), FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the enemy character becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. (FIG. 187 (F), FIG. 188 (F), FIG. 189 (F), FIG. 190 (F)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is switched at a high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes an opponent of the battle effect ( 187 (E), 188 (E), and 189 (E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are sequentially displayed at high speed, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, an enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes an opponent in the battle effect (FIG. 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187 (E) and 188 (E)). 189 (E) and 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the type information image IK that can specify the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187 (E) and 188 (E)). 189 (E) and 190 (E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the character selection effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the information images IB, IC, and ID include two types of information, the type information image IK and the physical strength information image IH. On the other hand, three or more pieces of information may be included.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, an example is shown in which the opponent enemy character is selected from the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the selection target can be selected by selecting the information of the selection target. For example, an example in which one of a plurality of types of mini-games is selected may be used.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the information images IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected. However, for example, the information images IB, IC, and ID may be selected by pressing the effect button 63 by the player. Good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect J2-1]
A gaming machine,
An effect of selecting one of a plurality of selection targets, and displays the selection target, and displays target information that is information about the selection target in a region different from the display region of the selection target, It is possible to execute a selection effect in which the selection target is selected by selecting the target information,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect J2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect J2-1,
The target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of pieces of information,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect J2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect J2-2,
After sequentially displaying the information images as the target information, the selection target is selected by selecting one information image,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect J2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J2-1 to J2-3,
The selection target is an opponent character,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect J2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect J2-4,
The information image includes a graph image indicating the capture difficulty of the character,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect J2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4 or aspect J2-5,
The information image includes an image capable of specifying the character,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the light emitting effects A to D for the starting openings will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. In FIGS. 191 to 194, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and the front (front) periphery of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 is omitted. Are also omitted from the drawing for ease of viewing.

  This start-up opening light emission effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during a period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a start-up light emission effect, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out from, and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command, a pre-judgment command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20. In addition, the voice control board 106 analyzes various commands (for example, a fluctuation effect start command and a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and executes a sound effect of outputting various sounds from the speaker 67.

  The first starting port 20 has a decorative board for the first starting port on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted, and the light emission is controlled by a lamp control board 107. When the full-color LED mounted on the first startup port decorative board emits light, the first startup port 20 emits light. When the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to turn on white, so that the light-emitting mode of the first start-up opening 20 is turned on white. Also, in the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first opening is controlled to be turned on in white, so that the light emission mode of the first opening 20 is turned on in white. Become.

  The inside of the front surface of the first opening 20 is provided with a special plating, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first opening emits light, so that the front surface of the first opening 20 is illuminated. Some are designed to be transparent. A type having this specification will be referred to as a special plating specification, and a normal type not having this special plating specification will be described below as a normal specification. The first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is formed of a colored or colorless and transparent resin, and is formed with a molding not shown. Although the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification is formed of a colored or colorless and transparent resin, the surface thereof may be formed as a smooth surface (a flat surface or a curved surface).

  On the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification, a decorative member (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “decorative member molding (smile molding)”) formed by printing a smile on the surface is referred to as a first start. In the state where the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first opening is disposed in front of the decorative board for the mouth and emits light, the decorative member disposed inside the first opening 20 through the front surface of the first opening 20. Is made visible while the full-color LED mounted on the first startup port decorative board is turned off, and is placed inside the first startup port 20 through the front surface of the first startup port 20. The shaping (smile shaping) of the decorated member is made difficult to visually recognize, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is made visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20.

  In the special plating specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first opening is turned off. In addition, in the jackpot production and the demonstration production for customer waiting, In this state, the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is turned off, and it is difficult to visually recognize the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first start-up opening 20 through the front surface of the first start-up opening 20. It is said. In addition, in the jackpot effect, the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20 with the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port emitting light (smile). (Modeling) may be made visible.

  Here, first, as the light emission effect of the first start port 20 in the normal specification, the start light emission effect A, the start light emission effect B, and the start light emission effect C will be described in order, and then the first start light in the special plating specification. A start-up light emission effect D will be described as the 20 light emission effects.

[Start-up light emission effect A]
First, the start-up light emission effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram for describing the start-up light emission effect A. The start-up light emission effect A is performed during the change from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the end of the change.

  In the start-up opening light emission effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the three-dimensional image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image, and a right side of the three-dimensional image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  The reserved icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R which are currently changing as the first special map reservation is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed on the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, and the third holding display position 9Ad. 9A are displayed, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  When the decorative pattern in FIG. 191 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the decorative board for the first starting port is used. When the mounted full-color LED is controlled to emit white light, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 becomes white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "spo", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). .

  When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the start of the change (that is, after the start of the change), as shown in FIG. 191 (C), a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad. The four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are displayed without being digested, and are in a stock full state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port has already been controlled to emit white light and the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 has turned on white, a game ball has entered the first start-up port 20. As shown in FIG. 191 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in order to notify that the number of retained balls has increased due to the ball. The lights are turned off and then turned on again. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port has a light-emitting mode in which the white light flashes only once, so that the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in the white once. At this time, to notify that the number of retained balls has increased due to the game balls having entered the first starting port 20, a retained sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the retained sound is turned on). ).

  After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (E), a hold display position for displaying a hold icon is present because the hold start is already full. Instead, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at each of the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 191 (C). It does not change from the state that was done. In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the game is in a full state of holding, and there is no holding display position for displaying a holding icon, and the number of holding balls does not increase. As shown in (F), by maintaining and controlling the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port to emit white light, the state where the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is lit white is maintained. Become. At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying a hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the number of held balls has increased. On the other hand, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spo”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number “5”, the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number “1”, and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number “3”. When the display is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. At the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed. At the end of such a change, since the reserved full state has already been reached, as shown in FIG. 191 (H), the full-color LED mounted on the first startup port decorative board is maintained at white light. As a result, the state in which the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white is maintained, and since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and it is referred to as "spot". The hold sound as the sound effect does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 191 (I), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth The holding icon 9A displayed at the holding display position 9Ad moves to the third holding display position 9Ad and the holding icon disappears at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, and the decorative symbol starts to change, and the first start at the start of the change. When the game ball does not enter the mouth 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is controlled to emit white light. A state in which light emitting mode of the first start hole 20 has white lights by. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "spo", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). .

  As described above, in the start-up opening light emission effect A, when the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to emit white light, the first start-up opening 20 emits light in white. When the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of game balls into the starting port 20, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and becomes white again. It is controlled to be turned on, and the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up port decorative board has a light-emitting mode in which the white light flashes only once, so that the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in white only once. On the other hand, by controlling the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board to turn on white, the light-emitting mode of the first start-up opening 20 is turned on white and is in the full state of holding. Sometimes, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no holding display position for displaying a holding icon, and the number of holding balls does not increase. Therefore, the full color mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port. The LED is not controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), but is maintained to be turned on in white, and the light emission mode of the first start port 20 does not blink once in white and remains in the state of white lighting. Is done.

  Thereby, when the game balls enter the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from white lighting. Then, the light emission mode of the first start port 20 can be maintained in white light when it is controlled to be turned on again and changed to a light emission mode in which white light blinks only once, and when the number of holding balls does not increase. Because it is possible, it is possible to visually appeal whether there is an increase in the number of reserved balls, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Also, in the start-up opening light emission effect A, it appeals to the visual appeal that the light-emitting mode of the first start-up opening 20 is blinking white and the auditory sense that the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “spot,” flows from the speaker 67. By using both the effect and the effect, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that an increase in the number of reserved balls can be transmitted to the player.

[Start-up light emission effect B]
Next, the start-up opening light emission effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a diagram for describing the start-up opening light emission effect B. The start-up opening light emission effect B is performed during the change from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the end of the change.

  In the start-up light emission effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already has the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7R of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers “1” to “9”) is started and stopped. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. The stop-displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

  After that, the vehicle decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again to be temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3". The same symbols are not displayed and stop display is performed. You. Along with this, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

  The pending icons corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the change as the first special figure reservation is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 192 (A), the change has ended and the hold icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a in the hold display position 9Cd, and the first hold display position 9Ad has A yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad and the third holding display position 9Ad, and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad. , The hold icon is not displayed. That is, the three reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  When the change in FIG. 192 (A) is completed and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, FIG. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first startup port is controlled to emit white light, so that the light emission mode of the first startup port 20 becomes white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "spo", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). . When the change in FIG. 192 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, The light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 in the start-up port light-up effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) flashes white only once, and the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game balls entering the first start-up port 20. In order to notify this, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second icon is accordingly displayed. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon disappears at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the decorative symbol starts to change, regardless of whether the game ball enters or does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the change. As shown in 192 (D), the color is the same as the color assigned to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9C, that is, the color assigned to the holding icon 9C. The full-color LED mounted on the first startup port decorative board is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in conjunction with the above, so that the light emission mode of the first startup port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting ( (Illuminated in gold). When the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the number of the retained balls does not increase, and the retained sound, which is the sound effect of “spo”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the retained sound is turned off). .

  After the start of the fluctuation (that is, after the start of the fluctuation), when game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one (that is, two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one). 192), a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad, and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 192 (E). The four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested, and are in a state of full reserve. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is already controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighting in gold) and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is turned on in yellow (lit in gold), As shown in FIG. 192 (F), no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The full-color LED is controlled to be maintained in the yellow state (gold state), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the state of yellow state (gold state), and further, a sound effect of “spot” is provided. Does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  The control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 includes, as described in the starting port light-emitting effect A of FIG. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once (in FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white color flashes in a full color LED mounted on the first starting port 20). In FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white flashing state is displayed, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In B, unlike the start-up light emission effect A, as shown in FIG. 192 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board does not blink yellow (gold blinks) but turns on yellow ( In this case, the state in which the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is illuminated in yellow (illuminated in gold) is maintained, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot,” is output from the speaker 67. (The hold sound is turned off).

  After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 192 (G), the hold full position has already been reached, so there is a hold display position for displaying the hold icon. Instead, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at each of the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 192 (E). It does not change from the state that was done. Even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the game is in a full state of holding, and there is no holding display position for displaying a holding icon, and the number of holding balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is maintained and controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighted in gold), so that the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is turned on in yellow (gold color). (Illuminated) state is maintained. At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying a hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the number of held balls has increased. On the other hand, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spo”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 192 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same pattern is not obtained. When the display is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. At the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 192 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the first startup port decoration board is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, whereby the first lighting is performed. The light emission mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, since the game is already in the full state of holding, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of the holding balls does not increase, and the holding sound which is the sound effect of "spo". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

  As described above, in the start-up opening light emission effect B, the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to turn on yellow (golden turn-on), so that the light emission mode of the first start-up opening 20 turns on yellow ( In the state where the game balls are lit in the gold state), even if the number of the reserved balls increases due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the number of the reserved balls increases due to the ball entering the first starting port 20. Is not performed at all, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up opening is maintained and controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighting in gold). While the state of “colored lighting” is maintained, the holding sound, which is a sound effect of “sposh”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

  Accordingly, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) to change to the light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first starting port 20 is turned on. Even if a game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold-colored lighting). The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is the mode, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and the interest can be improved.

  In the start-up opening light emission effect B, when a yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, a game ball enters the first start-up opening 20. No control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to this (in other words, control to report that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is blocked. Accordingly, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in the state of yellow lighting (gold lighting). For this reason, the light emission mode of the first start-up opening 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect developed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “sposh”, does not flow from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effect or music flowing in relation to the effect that is unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect C]
Next, the start-up opening light emission effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the start-up light emission effect C. The start-up light emission effect C is performed during the change from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the end of the change.

  In the starting-port light-emitting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 193 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right side of the stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numeral "1" to numeral "9") is started. When the decorative symbol change display is started, the stop-displayed decorative symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed. Thus, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol that is changing at a high speed. The decorative design decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  The reserved icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R which are currently changing as the first special map reservation is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed on the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, and the white spherical holding icon 9C is displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, and the third holding display position 9Ad. 9A are displayed, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  When the decorative pattern in FIG. 193 (A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193 (B), the decorative board for the first starting port is used. When the mounted full-color LED is controlled to emit white light, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 becomes white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting port 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "spo", does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). . In addition, when the decoration symbol in FIG. 193 (A) starts to change and a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the start of the change, the first symbol in the starting port light emission effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D). The light emission mode of the starting port 20 flashes white only once, and it is notified that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. Flows from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned on).

  After the start of the change (that is, after the start of the change), as shown in FIG. 193 (C), the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd has a yellow (gold) star shape. When the icon changes to the hold icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193 (D), the color becomes the same as the color of the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C, that is, the color added to the hold icon 9C. The full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in conjunction with the performed color, so that the light emission mode of the first starting opening 20 changes from white lighting. It will be in the state of yellow lighting (gold lighting). When the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 after the start of the change, the number of the retained balls does not increase, and the retained sound, which is the sound effect of “spo”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the retained sound is turned off). . Before the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd in FIG. 193 (C) changes to the star-shaped holding icon 9C, a game ball enters the first starting port 20. In this case, the light emission mode of the first start port 20 in the start port light emission effect A shown in FIG. 191 (D) flashes white only once, and a game ball enters the first start port 20. In order to notify that the number of the reserved balls has increased, a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned on).

  After the hold icon 9C changes to the hold state (that is, after the change to the hold state), when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 193 (E), a white ball is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Icon 9A is displayed, and the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stock state without being digested and are in a full state of holding. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is already controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighting in gold) and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is turned on in yellow (lit in gold), As shown in FIG. 193 (F), no control is performed to notify that the number of pending balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The full-color LED is controlled to be maintained in the yellow state (gold state), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in the state of yellow state (gold state), and further, a sound effect of “spot” is provided. Does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  The control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 includes, as described in the starting port light-emitting effect A of FIG. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once (in FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white color flashes in a full color LED mounted on the first starting port 20). In FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white flashing state is displayed, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In C, unlike the start-up opening light emission effect A, as shown in FIG. 193 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board does not blink yellow (gold blinks) but turns on yellow ( In this case, the state in which the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is illuminated in yellow (illuminated in gold) is maintained, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot,” is output from the speaker 67. (The hold sound is turned off).

  After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 193 (G), the holding display position for displaying the holding icon exists because the holding ball is already full. However, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at each of the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 193 (E). It does not change from the state that was done. Further, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the game is in a full state of holding, and there is no holding display position for displaying a holding icon, and the number of holding balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is maintained and controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighted in gold), so that the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is turned on in yellow (gold color). (Illuminated) state is maintained. At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying a hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so that it is not necessary to notify that the number of held balls has increased. On the other hand, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spo”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 193 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number “3”, the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number “4”, and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number “3”, and the same pattern is not obtained. When the display is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. At the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 193 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, thereby causing the first lighting. The light emission mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, since the game is already in the full state of holding, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of the holding balls does not increase, and the holding sound which is the sound effect of "spo". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

  In this way, in the start-up opening light emission effect C, the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to turn on yellow (golden turn-on), so that the light emission mode of the first start-up opening 20 turns on yellow ( In the state where the game balls are lit in the gold state), even if the number of the reserved balls increases due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the number of the reserved balls increases due to the ball entering the first starting port 20. Is not performed at all, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up opening is maintained and controlled to be turned on in yellow (lighting in gold). While the state of “colored lighting” is maintained, the holding sound, which is a sound effect of “sposh”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

  Accordingly, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) to change to the light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first starting port 20 is turned on. Even if a game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold-colored lighting). The yellow lighting (gold lighting), which is the mode, can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and the interest can be improved.

  Also, in the starting opening light emission effect C, when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star holding icon with the highest expectation of winning, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20. As a result, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20 is prevented). In addition, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in the state of yellow lighting (gold lighting). For this reason, the light emission mode of the first start-up opening 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) can contribute as an additional light emission effect to the effect developed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “sposh”, does not flow from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effect or music flowing in relation to the effect that is unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Starting port light emission effect D]
Next, the starting port light emission effect D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a diagram for describing the start-up light emission effect D. The start-up opening light emission effect D is performed during the change from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the end of the change.

  In the start-up opening light emission effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 194 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has already displayed the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7R of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (symbol: numbers “1” to “9”) is started and stopped. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. The stop-displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed to a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuation.

  After that, the vehicle decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again to be temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed). In the state where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern slowly and vertically moves slowly.

  Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is a numeral "5", the middle decorative symbol 8C is a numeral "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is a numeral "3". The same symbols are not displayed and stop display is performed. You. Along with this, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

  The holding icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during the change as the first special figure holding are displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed on the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and up to four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are, from a position close to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a, a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad. They are arranged and arranged linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

  When the holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the size of the holding icon 9C is changed to the holding icon immediately before the movement. It becomes about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests the degree of expectation of hitting to the reserved icon 9C from the shape and the color of the reserved icon 9C to the player. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to the position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Thus, the size of each holding icon 9A is the same as the size of the holding icon 9A immediately before the movement.

  Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 194 (A), the change has ended and the hold icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the first hold display position 9Ad has A holding icon 9A of a smiling sphere having a green color is displayed, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad, and only one game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of the change. Accordingly, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad, and no holding icon is displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad. That is, the three reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

  Here, the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “holding icon”) will be briefly described. Expectation degree at the time of lottery corresponding to the holding icon depends on the shape and color. Represents the difference. For example, among the four hold icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most popular. The hit expectation is high, the black spherical hold icon has the second highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the third highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest hit expectation. It has become something. In the hold icon of the smiling sphere, the expectation of the big hit is set higher in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)).

  When the change in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such a change, FIG. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is maintained and controlled to be turned off, which is a light emission mode in a normal state, and is specially plated on the inside of the front surface of the first start-up port 20 by special plating. The light does not pass through the front surface of the first start-up port 20 and the light-emission mode of the first start-up port 20 becomes a state of a special plating color (for example, silver) which is a light-emission mode in a normal state. As a result, the front surface of the first opening 20 is not transmitted through the front surface of the first opening 20 due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first opening 20, and is arranged inside the first opening 20 as a light emitting mode of the first opening 20. The shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the smiling shaping is not displayed. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is maintained in the normal light emission mode, the smile modeling is maintained in the non-display state.

  At this time (that is, when the change in FIG. 194 (A) ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such change, As shown in FIG. 194 (B), in order to notify that the number of the reserved balls has increased due to the entering of the game balls into the first starting port 20, the reserved sound which is the sound effect of "spo" is generated. The sound is output from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned on).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the holding icon 9A of a green smiling sphere displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may be the same color as the green color of the reserved icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, or another color having a high degree of expectation (for example, red or seven colors ( Rainbow)). When the holding icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, the holding displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad is accordingly performed. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position. At 9Ad, the hold icon disappears, and as shown in FIG. 194 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to turn on the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere. As a result, light is transmitted through the front surface of the first starting port 20 by special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 so that the first starting port 20 emits light as the first starting mode. Shaping the inside arranged decorative member 20 (smile shaped) is a state that appears to emit light to the held icon 9C color and same color. As a result, light is transmitted through the front surface of the first starting port 20 by the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the first starting port 20 is arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode. The shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member is easily recognized, and the smiling shaping is displayed. That is, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to turn on the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere, the smile modeling is maintained in the display state.

  At this time (that is, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the holding icon 9A of the smiling sphere displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd and becomes the holding icon 9C, and FIG. If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the change) as shown in D), the number of the retained balls does not increase, and the retained sound, which is the sound effect of “spo,” does not flow from the speaker 67. (The holding sound is turned off).

  After the start of the fluctuation (that is, after the start of the fluctuation), when game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one (that is, two game balls continuously enter the first starting port 20 one by one). 194), a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad, and a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 194 (E). The four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested, and are in a state of full reserve. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is controlled to be turned on to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and the first start-up port 20 is formed by special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first start-up port 20. Of the decorative member (smile shaping) arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the light emitting device emits the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C. Although it is in the appearance state (that is, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, the smiling shaping is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. 194 (F), the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game balls into the first starting port 20 is not performed at all, and as shown in FIG. Mounted on decorative board for starting port As the color LED is maintained and controlled to be the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the shape (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first opening 20 as the light emission mode of the first opening 20 is changed. The state in which the emission icon is emitted in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is maintained (that is, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile modeling is performed). The display is in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C), and further, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot,” does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  The control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 includes, as described in the starting port light-emitting effect A of FIG. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 flashes in a predetermined color only once (in FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white color flashes in a full color LED mounted on the first starting port 20). In FIGS. 191 (C) and (D), the white flashing state is displayed, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). In D, unlike the start-up light emission effect A, as shown in FIG. 194 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is maintained and controlled to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. Is As a result, as a light emission mode of the first startup port 20, a state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first startup port 20 emits in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C is maintained. (That is, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling shaping is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C). At the same time, the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “sposh,” does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

  After that, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 194 (G), the hold full position has already been reached, so there is a hold display position for displaying the hold icon. However, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at each of the first holding display position 9Ad, the second holding display position 9Ad, the third holding display position 9Ad, and the fourth holding display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194 (E). It does not change from the state that was done. In addition, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the game is in a full state of holding, and there is no holding display position for displaying a holding icon, and the number of holding balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first opening is maintained and controlled to the same color as the color of the holding icon 9C, and special plating is applied to the inside of the front surface of the first opening 20. As a result, light is transmitted through the front surface of the first start-up port 20, and the shape (smile-shaped) of the decorative member arranged inside the first start-up port 20 as the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. (That is, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first start-up port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling modeling corresponds to the holding icon 9C). Displayed in the same color as the color Yl).

  At this time (in other words, in FIG. 194 (G), the hold full position has already been reached), even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is a hold display position for displaying a hold icon. Since the number of the reserved balls does not increase without being notified, it is not necessary to notify that the number of the reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of “spot”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

  When the color of the hold icon 9C changes to another color having a high degree of expectation after the start of the change, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board also changes accordingly. Of the decorative member arranged inside the first start-up port 20 as the light emission mode of the first start-up port 20 (smile-shaped). Changes to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C and appears as light. That is, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling shaping is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 194 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same pattern is not obtained. When the display is stopped and the loss is confirmed and displayed, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. At the fourth hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is still displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 194 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first start-up port is controlled to turn off in the normal light emission mode, and the first start-up port 20 is turned off. A state in which light is not transmitted through the front surface of the first startup port 20 due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface, and the light emission mode of the first startup port 20 is a color of the special plating (for example, silver) which is a light emission mode in a normal state. , And the smile model is hidden. At the end of the fluctuation, since the game is already in the full state of holding, even if the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of the holding balls does not increase, and the holding sound which is the sound effect of "spo". Does not flow from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

  As described above, in the start-up opening light emission effect D, the full-color LED mounted on the first start-up opening decorative board is controlled to have the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and thus is arranged inside the first start-up opening 20. In the case where the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorated member is easily visible and the smiling shaping is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, a game ball enters the first starting port 20. Even if the number of retained balls increases due to the ball, no control is performed to notify that the number of retained balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and mounting on the decorative board for the first starting port is performed. By maintaining and controlling the full-color LED that has been set to the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to recognize, and the smiling modeling is performed. The pending icon 9C while being maintained in a state of the display color and the same color, further, holding tone is effective sound "Shupo'" does not flow from the speaker 67 (holding tone is OFF).

  As a result, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 appears by emitting the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state in which the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is not displayed. When the light emitting mode is changed to the light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed to the first starting port even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases. The light emitting mode of the first start-up opening 20 is maintained because the smile model arranged inside 20 is maintained in a light emitting mode in which the smile modeling appears in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. A state in which the smile model arranged inside the one start port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C and appears can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, thereby improving interest. Can be planned.

  Further, in the start-up opening light emission effect D, the formation (smile formation) of the decorative member arranged inside the first start-up opening 20 becomes easily visible, and the smile formation is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. In this state, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (in other words, the game balls entered the first starting port 20). Since the control for notifying that the number of retained balls has increased due to the ball being blocked is prevented), the molding (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easily visible, and the smile molding is performed. The display state can be maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. For this reason, the light emission mode of the first start-up opening 20 in which the smile modeling is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C contributes as an additional light emission effect to the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a. can do. Further, since the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “sposh”, does not flow from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effect or music flowing in relation to the effect that is unfolded on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the start-up light emission effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start-up light emission effect A, the game machine 1 has a first start-up opening 20 (reception entrance) capable of receiving a game ball. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (accepting entrance), the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (accepting entrance) is varied (FIG. 191 (A)). 191 (E) to FIG. 191 (D) are controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from white lighting, are again controlled to white lighting, and blink white once only. In 191 (F), the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the second effect capable of maintaining the light emission mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) can be executed. According to this configuration, when a game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to a predetermined period (for example, 0). .5 seconds), the lighting mode is controlled to be turned off and then turned on again, and can be changed to a light emission mode in which white light is blinked only once. Can be maintained in white light, so that the presence or absence of an increase in the number of reserved balls can be visually appealed, and the interest can be improved.
192 (A) to FIG. 192 (J) have a first opening 20 (receiving opening) capable of receiving a game ball in the starting opening light emitting effect B, and the first starting opening 20 (receiving opening) has a game ball. 192 changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (from white lighting to yellow lighting in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (D)). 192 (E) to 192 (H), the first effect is controlled by the first start-up port 20 (receiving). And a second effect capable of maintaining the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the (entrance). According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first lighting mode is changed to the first lighting mode. Even if a game ball enters the starting port 20 (is accepted) and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow lighting (gold-colored lighting), which is the light emission mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute to the effect as an additional light emission effect, and the interest can be improved.
193 (A) to FIG. 193 (J) have a first starting port 20 (receiving port) capable of receiving a game ball, and the first starting port 20 (receiving port) has a game ball. 193 is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (from white lighting to yellow lighting in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D)). 193 (E) to 193 (H), the first effect is controlled by the first start-up port 20 (receiving). And a second effect capable of maintaining the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the (entrance). According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first lighting mode is changed to the first lighting mode. Even if a game ball enters the starting port 20 (is accepted) and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow lighting (gold-colored lighting), which is the light emission mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute to the effect as an additional light emission effect, and the interest can be improved.
194 (A) to FIG. 194 (J) have a first opening 20 (accepting entrance) capable of accepting a game ball, and the first starting opening 20 (accepting entrance) has a game ball. The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted) (see the inside of the first starting port 20 in FIGS. 194 (A) to 194 (D)). The shaping (smile shaping) of the decoration member arranged in the image becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the shaping of the decoration member (smile shaping) appears in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C from the state in which the smiling shaping is not displayed. 194 (E) to 194 (H), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) (the first starting port 20). The shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the box is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. Second effect and, capable of maintaining the emission state) that appears to emit color can be performed. According to this configuration, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 emits the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C from the state in which the smile modeling of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is not displayed. When the state has changed to the light emitting mode in which the first starting port 20 appears, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (and is accepted) and the number of reserved balls increases, the first starting port 20 does not Since the light emission mode is maintained in the light emission mode in which the smile model arranged inside the first start port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the first start mode is maintained. The state in which the smile model arranged inside the first start-up port 20 which is the light emission mode of the mouth 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C appears and contributes as an additional light emission effect to the effect. Can improve the interest .

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start-up light emission effect A, in the second effect, the number of the hold icons 9A is a predetermined number (4 The first effect is allowed to be executed until the number reaches the predetermined number (four), while the execution of the first effect is blocked after the number of the reserved icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four). Specifically, in FIG. 191 (A) to FIG. 191 (D), the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is variable (white) until the number of the holding icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four). 191 (E) to FIG. 191 are allowed to allow a change in the light emission mode in which the light is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 second) from lighting and then controlled to white lighting again to blink white only once. In (H), after the number of the holding icons 9A reaches the predetermined number (four), it is possible to maintain the light emission mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port). According to this configuration, the state that the number of the holding icons 9A has reached the predetermined number (four) is added to the holding icons 9A that have reached the predetermined number, and further, the light emission of the first starting port 20 is performed. It can be communicated to the player using the mode.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (J) of the start-up light emission effect B, the second effect is more hit than the white spherical holding icon 9A. The yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9A (specific holding icon) set with a high degree of expectation becomes the holding icon 9C and allows the execution of the first effect, and the first effect is the first starting port. After changing the light emission mode of 20 (receiving port) to a specific light emission mode (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the first starting port 20 ( The light-emitting mode of the (receiving port) is maintained at yellow lighting ((gold-colored lighting) (specific light-emitting mode)). Specifically, in FIG. 192 (A) to FIG. 192 (D), a yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9A having a higher expected degree of hit than the white spherical holding icon 9A is set as the holding icon 9A. The icon 9C is displayed, and after changing the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first effect is executed in FIGS. 192 (E) to 192 (H). And the light emission mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player the state in which the expected degree of winning is high by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port).
In the start-up light emission effect D of FIG. 194, the second effect is that the hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) of the smiling sphere, which is set to have a higher expectation as a hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, is set to the hold. After the icon 9C becomes the icon 9C and permits the execution of the first effect, the first effect changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) to a specific light emitting mode (disposed inside the first starting port 20). The shape of the decorative member (smile molding) becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the shape of the decorative member (smile molding) changes from a state in which the smile modeling is not displayed to a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smile modeling) emits the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. After that, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed to the holding mode by the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20. Appears by emitting light in the same color as the color of icon 9C Maintaining the light emitting state (a specific emission mode)) say. Specifically, in FIG. 194 (A) to FIG. 194 (D), the hold icon 9A of the smiling sphere, which is set to have a higher expected degree of hit than the white spherical hold icon 9A, becomes the hold icon 9C. The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed from the state in which the decoration (the smile modeling) of the decoration member arranged inside the first startup port 20 becomes difficult to be visually recognized and the smile modeling is not displayed. After changing to a state in which (smile modeling) appears and emits the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the execution of the first effect is prevented in FIGS. Light emission mode of starting port 20 (receiving port) (light emitting state in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member arranged inside first starting port 20 appears in the same color as that of the reserved icon 9C) To maintain. According to this configuration, the state in which the expected degree of winning is high is suggested to the player by the light emission mode in which the modeling (smile modeling) of the decorative member emits in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (J) of the start-up light emission effect C, the second effect is changed from the white spherical holding icon 9C to yellow (gold). ) Changes to the holding icon 9 </ b> C (specific holding icon) of the star shape, the execution of the first effect is permitted, and the first effect specifies the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving entrance). (After changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)), the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving entrance) is turned yellow ( (Lighting in gold) (specific light emission mode). Specifically, in FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (D), the symbol change (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) by the white spherical holding icon 9C is started, and the white spherical symbol is changed. When the holding icon 9C changes to the star-shaped holding icon 9C having a higher expected degree of hit than the white spherical holding icon 9A, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving entrance) is lit in white. 193 (E) to FIG. 193 (H), the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode (yellow lighting) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed. (Gold color lighting)) is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player the state in which the expected degree of winning is high by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191 (A) to 191 (J) of the start-up light emission effect A, the first effect further includes the first start-up opening 20 (receiving port). Can output a hold sound (allowable sound) based on that the game ball has entered (accepted) the second effect, and the second effect further includes a hold sound when the first effect is allowed. While the output of the (allowable sound) is permitted, the output of the hold sound (the allowable sound) is prevented when the first effect is prevented. Specifically, in FIG. 191 (C) to FIG. 191 (D), in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game balls into the first starting port 20, a sound effect of “spot” is provided. A certain holding sound is played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIG. 191 (E) to FIG. 191 (H), even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying a hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase. It is no longer necessary to notify that the number of the reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of “spot”, does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, based on the fact that a game ball has entered (accepted) the first starting port 20 (acceptance port), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is visually changed to a state of blinking white. By using the effect of appealing and the effect of appealing to the auditory sense that the holding sound, which is the sound effect of “sposh”, flows from the speaker 67, it is possible to notify the player of an increase in the number of holding balls.
192 (A) to 192 (J), for example, in FIG. 192 (A) to FIG. 192 (B), in FIG. 192 (A) to FIG. 192 (B), for example, the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such a change, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "spo", flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIG. 192 (C) to FIG. 192 (H), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, the first starting port 20 is set. No control is performed to notify that the number of retained balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of “sposh,” does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and As a light emission effect added to the effect, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) without performing any control for notifying that the number of retained balls has increased. In addition to making a contribution, it is possible to prevent the holding sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, from flowing from the speaker 67 so as not to hinder the sound effect and music flowing in connection with the effect.
193 (A) to 193 (J), for example, in FIG. 193 (A) to FIG. 193 (D), for example, a decorative symbol starts to change, and when the change starts, the first symbol 20 When the game ball enters, before the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9C, the first starting port 20 is set. When a game ball enters, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “sposh,” flows from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H), when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation, the first starting port 20 is changed. No control is performed to notify that the number of retained balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the, and the reserved sound, which is a sound effect of “sposh,” does not flow from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the white spherical holding icon 9 </ b> C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. As a light emission effect added to the effect, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting) without performing any control for notifying that the number of retained balls has increased. In addition to making a contribution, it is possible to prevent the holding sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, from flowing from the speaker 67 so as not to hinder the sound effect and music flowing in connection with the effect.
194 (A) to FIG. 194 (J), in the start-up light emission effect D, in FIG. 194 (A) to FIG. 194 (B), when the change ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, At the end of such a change, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of “spo,” flows from the speaker 67 to notify that the number of the hold balls has increased. (Hold sound is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H), the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling shaping is the same as the color of the hold icon 9C. When displayed in the same color, no control is performed to notify that the number of pending balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the sound effect is "spoppy". The hold sound does not flow from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smiling shaping is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. In this case, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is not performed at all (the molding of the decorative member disposed inside the first starting port 20). (Smile modeling) is easily visible, and the smile modeling is maintained in a state of being displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that it can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect, and By not playing the hold sound, which is the sound effect of “spot”, from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the sound effect and the music flowing in connection with the performance from being disturbed.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the start-up light emission effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
192 (C) to 192 (H) start opening light emitting effect B, FIGS. 193 (C) to 193 (H) start opening light emitting effect C, and FIGS. 194 (C) to 194 (H) start opening. In the light-emitting effect D, the holding sound, which is the sound effect of “spot,” was not played from the speaker 67 even when the game ball entered the first starting port 20. However, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of “spot”, may be played from the speaker 67. In this case, the volume of the hold sound is adjusted to a level that is 50% to 90% of the volume of the effect sound or music flowing in relation to the performance, for example, so as not to disturb the effect sound or music flowing in relation to the performance. Is preferably performed.

[Modification 2]
192 (A) to 192 (H), the color of the hold icon 9A that can be displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad in FIG. When shifting each time the icon 9A is digested, there is no change in the color of the hold icon 9A, but the color changes to a color with a higher expectation degree (eg, changes from white to blue, white to green). You may do so. In this case, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the color of the first startup port 20 is accordingly changed to the hold icon 9C. The color is the same as the color given to.

[Modification 3]
In the start-up light emission effect C of FIGS. 193 (A) to 193 (H), the holding icon 9C having a white spherical shape in FIGS. , The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), and further changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) ) May be changed. In this case, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (big hit)), and the color of the first starting port 20 is the same as the color given to the hold icon 9C. Color.

[Modification 4]
In the start-up light emission effect A in FIG. 191, the start-up light emission effect B in FIG. 192, the start-up light emission effect C in FIG. 193, and the start-up light emission effect D in FIG. 194, when a game ball enters the first start-up opening 20, Although the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is variable, the present invention can be applied to a first gate (through chucker) 28 and a second gate (through chucker) 29. In this case, a decoration board on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multi-color light are mounted inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, respectively, and a lamp control board 107 is provided. The light emission is controlled by. When the full-color LED mounted on these decorative substrates emits light, the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29 emit light. In the case where the first starting port 20 has the normal specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be lit in white, so that the first gate (through chucker). The light emission mode of the second gate (through chucker) 29 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are turned on in white, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to turn on in white also in the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers. As a result, the light emission mode of the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29 becomes white.

  On the other hand, when the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29 are of a special plating specification, the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) are further added. A decorative member is arranged inside the front surface of the decorative substrate 29 in front of the decorative substrate, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light, the decorative member passes through the front surfaces of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. While the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member disposed inside the first gate (through-chucker) 28 or the second gate (through-chucker) 29 is made visible, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off. In the state, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 pass through the front surface of the first gate. The shape (smile shape) of the decorative member disposed inside the gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is difficult to see, and the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) ) The color of the special plating (for example, silver) is made visible through the front surface of 29. If the first gate (through-chucker) 28 or the second gate (through-chucker) 29 has a special plating specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off. Further, in the jackpot effect and the demonstration effect for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through gate) are controlled. The shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member disposed inside the (chucker) 29 is difficult to visually recognize. When the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29 are of a special plating specification, in the big hit effect, the first gate is set as a state in which the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate emits light. Through the front surfaces of the (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29, the shaping (smile-shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first gate (through-chucker) 28 and the second gate (through-chucker) 29 is visually recognized. You may make it possible.

[Modification 5]
192 (E) to 192 (D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9A displayed at the first holding display position 9Ad moves to the holding display position 9Cd. When the hold icon 9C is reached, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 has changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A was set to have a higher degree of expectation of winning than the white spherical hold icon 9A. When the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), it is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from yellow lighting (gold lighting), and yellow lighting again ( The control to return to (golden lighting) may be repeated only five times so that yellow blinking (gold blinking) is performed. Regarding this reason (the reason for the change in the light emission mode of yellow blinking (gold blinking) only five times), when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (receiving port), the first starting port 20 ( This is because, as a light emission mode of the (receiving port), for example, the light emission mode is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from white lighting, then controlled to white lighting again, and flashing white only once. In other words, it is possible to indicate to the player a state in which the expectation of hitting is high due to the change in the light emission mode of blinking yellow (gold blinking) only five times, and to indicate the yellow (gold) star shape. The fact that the hold icon 9A has moved to the hold display position 9Cd is notified to the player by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (that is, by the change in the light emission mode of blinking yellow (gold blinking) repeatedly five times). Can be.

[Modification 6]
In the start-up light emission effect A in FIG. 191, the start-up light emission effect B in FIG. 192, the start-up light emission effect C in FIG. 193, and the start-up light emission effect D in FIG. 194, when a game ball enters the first start-up opening 20, Although the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is variable, the present invention can be applied to the second starting port 21. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted inside the second starting port 21, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board emits light, the second starting port 21 emits light. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on when the first starting port 20 has the normal specification, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to emit white light to emit light from the second starting port 21. In a state in which the mode is lit in white, and also in a jackpot effect or a demonstration for customer waiting, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be lit in white, so that the light emission mode of the second starting port 21 is white. It turns on.

  On the other hand, when the second starting port 21 is of a special plating specification, a decorative member is further arranged inside the front surface of the second starting port 21 in front of the decorative board, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is mounted. In the state in which light is emitted, the modeling (smile molding) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 is made visible through the front surface of the second starting port 21, while the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is visible. In the light-off state, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting port 21 is made difficult to see through the front of the second starting port 21, and the color of the special plating is passed through the front of the second starting port 21. (For example, silver) is made visible. Further, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off. Also in the waiting demonstration effect, the full color LED mounted on the decoration board is controlled to be turned off, and the modeling (smile modeling) of the decoration member arranged inside the second starting port 21 is made difficult to recognize. When the second starting port 21 is of a special plating specification, the inside of the second starting port 21 is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21 in a state of a big hit effect in a state where the full color LED mounted on the decorative board emits light. The shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged in the area may be made visible.

[Modification 7]
In the start-up opening light emission effect D of FIG. 194, special plating is applied to the inside of the front surface of the first start-up opening 20 and the decorative member is disposed in front of the first start-up opening decorative board, and the first start-up opening decorative board is provided. In the state where the full-color LED mounted on the light emitting device emits light, the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is made visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20, while the first starting is performed. In a state where the full-color LED mounted on the mouth decoration board is turned off, it is difficult to visually recognize the shaping (smile shaping) of the decorative member disposed inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. The color of the special plating (for example, silver) has been made visible through the front surface of the starting opening 20. However, a decorative portion may be provided around the first opening 20 (for example, above, right side, lower side, left side, etc. of the first opening 20). The first starting port 20 and the decorative part may be unitized, and it is preferable that the decorative part is arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting port 20 if it is an independent part. Inside the decoration part, a decoration substrate on which a full-color LED is mounted, and a decoration member arranged in front of the decoration substrate and formed by printing a character, for example (hereinafter, “modeling of decoration member (character modeling)”) May be included). Special plating is applied to the back surface of the decorative portion, that is, the surface facing the decorative portion, and light is transmitted through the front surface of the decorative portion by emitting light from the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate. . The decorative portion may be molded with a colorless and transparent resin and may be shaped, or may have a smooth surface (a flat surface or a curved surface). When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board emits light, the modeling (character modeling) of the decorative member disposed inside the decorative section is visible through the front surface of the decorative section disposed around the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off, the decoration (character modeling) of the decorative member disposed inside the decorative part through the front surface of the decorative part disposed around the first starting port 20. Is difficult to visually recognize, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) can be visually recognized through the front surface of the decorative portion.

[Modification 8]
The start-up light emission effect A of FIG. 191, the start-up light emission effect B of FIG. 192, the start-up light emission effect C of FIG. 193, and the start-up light emission effect D of FIG. 194 may not include some of the effects described above. Then, other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect K1-1]
A gaming machine having a receiving port capable of receiving a game ball,
A first effect of changing a light emission mode of the reception port based on that a game ball is received in the reception port;
After allowing the light emission mode of the reception entrance to be varied by the execution of the first effect, a second effect of preventing the execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emission mode of the reception entrance can be executed. Is,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect K1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the second effect, the execution of the first effect can be permitted until the number of reserved icons reaches a predetermined number, while the first effect is performed after the number of reserved icons reaches the predetermined number. Prevent the execution of
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect K1-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the second effect, a specific holding icon set with a higher expected degree of winning as compared with the holding icon becomes the holding icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed to allow the first effect to be received. After changing the light emitting mode of the entrance to the specific light emitting mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emitting mode of the reception port is maintained in the specific light emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect K1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The second effect allows the execution of the first effect when the design change by the hold icon is started and the change from the hold icon to the specific hold icon is performed, and the first effect is performed by the reception entrance. After changing the light emission mode to a specific light emission mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the reception port is maintained at the specific light emission mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

◇ [Aspect K1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The first effect can further output an allowable sound based on a game ball being received at the reception port,
The second effect allows the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is allowed, and inhibits the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is prevented.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Other Modifications]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than those described above may be included.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine, the gaming machine 1 may have another configuration. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine, instead of a pachinko gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but the display effect may be executed using the image representing the select button 68 instead. The display effect may be executed, or a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment executes various effects using the image display device 7. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more of the effect examples and / or modifications among the plurality of effect examples and / or modifications described above may be combined. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). Then, at least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

  Although the present embodiment has been described based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the above-described embodiment is for facilitating understanding of the present embodiment, and does not limit the present embodiment. This embodiment can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and its equivalents are included in this embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (Hold icon)
9C: the reserved image (the reserved icon)
14: first movable role 15: second movable role 20: first starting port (first ball entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance)
66 ... frame lamp 81 ... microcomputer for game control 91 ... microcomputer for effect control 101 ... microcomputer for image control

Claims (5)

A gaming machine having a receiving port capable of receiving a game ball,
A first effect of changing a light emission mode of the reception port based on that a game ball is received in the reception port;
A second effect capable of preventing the execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emission mode of the reception port.
A gaming machine characterized by that: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second effect allows the execution of the first effect until the number of reserved icons reaches a predetermined number, while executing the first effect after the number of reserved icons reaches the predetermined number. Prevent
A gaming machine characterized by that: A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the second effect, a specific holding icon set with a higher expected degree of winning as compared with the holding icon becomes the holding icon, and the execution of the first effect is allowed to allow the first effect to be received. After changing the light emission mode of the entrance to a specific light emission mode, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the reception port is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The second effect allows the execution of the first effect when the on-hold icon is changed to the specific on-hold icon, and the first effect causes the light-emitting mode of the reception port to change to a specific light-emitting mode. After the change, the execution of the first effect is prevented, and the light emission mode of the reception port is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that: The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The first effect can further output an allowable sound based on a game ball being received at the reception port,
The second effect further allows the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is allowed, and blocks the output of the allowable sound when the first effect is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by that: